Professional Documents
Culture Documents
I
.
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
I
. . ...
.—
b. -.,
,,.
..
STANDARDS
NATIONAL
BUILDING
2005
OF INDIAN
BUREAU
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
--
SP 7:2005
PRICE Rs.7550.(J4
(iv)
FOREWORD
Construction prograrnmes are interwoven in a large measure in all sectors of development, be it housing, transport,
industry, irrigation, power, agriculture, education or health. Construction, both public and private, accounts for
about fifty percent of the total outlay in any Five Year Plan. Half of the total money spent on construction
activities is spent on buildings for residential, industrial, commercial, administrative, education, medical, municipal
and entertainment uses. It is estimated that about half of the total outlay on buildings would be on housing. It is
imperative that for such a large national investment, optimum returns are assured and wastage in construction is
avoided.
Soon after the Third Plan, the Planning Commission decided that the whole gamut of operations involved in
construction, such as, administrative, organizational, financial and technical aspects, be studied in depth. For this
study, a Panel of Experts was appointed in 1965 by the Planning Commission and its recommendations are found
in the ‘Report on Economies in Construction Costs’ published in 1968.
One of the facets of building construction, namely, controlling and regulating buildings through municipal byelaws
and departmental handbooks received the attention of the Panel and a study of these regulatory practices revealed
These studies resulted in a recommendation that a National Building Code be prepared to unify the building
regulations throughout the country for use by government departments, municipal bodies and other construction
agencies. The then Indian Standards Institution (now Bureau of Indian Standards) was entrusted by the Planning
Commission with the preparation of the National Building Code. For fulfilling this task a Guiding Committee for
the preparation of the Code was setup by the Civil Engineering Division Council of the Indian Standards Institution
in 1967. This Committee, in turn, set up 18 specialist panels to prepare the various parts of the Code. The
Guiding Committee and its panels were constituted with architects, planners, materials experts, structural,
construction, electrical illumination, air conditioning, acoustics and public health engineers and town planners.
These experts were drawn from the Central and State Governments, local bodies, professional institutions and
private agencies. The first version of the Code was published in 1970.
After the National Building Code of India was published in 1970, a vigorous implementation drive was launched
by the Indian Standards Institution to propagate the contents and use of the Code among all concerned in the field
of planning, designing and construction activities. For this, State-wise Implementation Conferences were organized
with the participation of the leading engineers, architects, town planners, administrators, building material
manufacturers, building and plumbing services installation agencies, contractors, etc.
These Conferences were useful in getting across the contents of the Code to the interests concerned. These
Conferences had also helped in the establishment of Action Committees to look into tie actual implementation
work carried out by the construction departments, local bodies and other agencies in different States. The main
actions taken by the Action Committees were to revise and modernize their existing regulato~ media, such as,
specifications, handbooks, manuals, etc, as well as building byelaws of local bodies like municipalities at city
and town levels, zilla parishads, panchayats and development authorities, so as to bring them in line with the
provisions contained in the National Building Code of India. In this process, the Indian Standards Institution
rendered considerable support in redrafting process.
Since the publication in 1970 version of the National Building Code of India, a large number of comments and
useful suggestions for modifications and additions to different parts and sections of the Code were received as a
result of use of the Code by all concerned, and revision work of building byelaws of some States. Based on the
comments and suggestion received the National Building Code of India 1970 was revised in 1983.
(v)
Some of the important changes in 1983 version included : addition of development control rules, requirements
for greenbelts and landscaping including norms for plantation of shrubs and trees, special requirements for low
income housing; fire safety regulations for high rise buildings; revision of structural design section based on new
and revised codes, such as Concrete Codes (plain and reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete), Earthquake
Code, Masonry Code; addition of outside design conditions for important cities in the country, requirements
relating to noise and vibration, air filter, automatic control, energy conservation for air conditioning; and guidance
on the design of water supply system for multi-storeyed buildings.
The National Building Code of India is a single document in which, like a network, the information contained in
various Indian Standards is woven into a pattern of continuity and cogency with the interdependent requirements
of Sections carefully analyzed and fitted in to make the whole document a cogent continuous volume. A continuous
thread of ‘preplanning’ is woven which, in itself, contributes considerably to the economies in construction
particularly in building and plumbing services.
The Code contains regulations which can be immediately adopted or enacted for use by various departments,
municipal administrations and public bodies. It lays down a set of minimum provisions designed to protect the
safety of the public with regard to structural sufficiency, fire hazards and health aspects of buildings; so long as
these basic requirements are met, the choice of materials and methods of design and construction is left to the
ingenuity of the building professionals. The Code also covers aspects of administrative regulations, development
control rules and general building requirements; fire protection requirements; stipulations regarding materials
Some other important points covered by the Code include ‘industrialized systems of building’ and ‘architectural
control’. The increase in population in the years to come will have a serious impact on the housing problem. It
has been estimated that the urban population of India will continue to increase with such pace as to maintain the
pressure on demand of accommodation for them. Speed of construction is thus of an utmost importance and
special consideration has to be given to industrialized systems of building. With increased building activity, it is
also essential that there should be some architectural control in the development of our cities and towns if
creation of ugliness and slum-like conditions in our urban areas is to be avoided.
Since the publication of 1983 version of National Building Code of India, the construction industry has gone
through major technological advancement. In the last two decades, substantial expertise has been gained in the
areas of building planning, designing and construction. Also, lot of developments have taken places in the techno-
legal regime and techno-financial regime, apart from the enormous experience gained in dealing with natural
calamities like super cyclones and earthquakes faced by the country. Further, since the last revision in 1983
based on the changes effected in the Steel Code, Masonry Code and Loading Code as also in order to update the
fire protection requirements, three amendments were brought out to the 1983 version of the Code. Considering
these, it was decided to take up a comprehensive revision of the National Building Code of India.
The changes incorporated in the present Code, which is second revision of the Code, have been specified in the
Foreword to each Part/Section of the Code. Some of the important changes are:
a) A new Part O ‘Integrated Approach — Prerequisite for Applying the Provisions of the Code’ emphasizing
on multi-disciplinary team approach for successfully accomplishing build$g/development project, has
been incorporated.
b) New chapters on significant areas like structural design using bamboo, mixed/composite construction
and landscaping have been added.
c) Number of provisions relating to reform in administration of the Code as tdso assigning duties and
responsibilities to all concerned professionals, have been incoprated/modified. Also detailed provisions/
performance to ensure structural sufficiency of buildings, have been prescribed so as to facilitate
implementation of the related requirements to help safely face the challenges during natural disasters
like earthquake.
d) Planning norms and requirements for hilly areas and rural habitat planning, apart from detailed planning
norms for large number of amenities have been incorporated.
e) Fire safety aspects have been distinctly categorized into fire prevention, life safety and fire protection
(vi)
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
National Building Code Sectional Committee, CED 46
Chairman
Dr H. C. VISVESVARAYA
‘Chandrika’, at 15th Cross, 63-64 East Park Road
Malleswaram, Bangalore 560003
Vice-Chairman
SHRI V. SURESH
P-233/3, Officers Enclave,
Air Force Station, Rajokari, New Delhi 110038
Organization Representative(s)
Housing and Urban Development Corporation Ltd, New Delhi CHAIRMAN& MANAGINGDIRECTOR
SHRI R. K. SAFAYA(Alternate)
Indian Geotechnical Society, New Delhi SHRI D. B. MAHAJAN
DR M. D. DESAI (Alternate)
( viii)
F-
Organization Representative(s)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh SHRI SHtBAN RAtNA
DR ANIL KUMAR(Alternate)
National Design and Research Forum, The Institution of Engineers PROtI R. NARAYANAIY~NGAR
(India), Bangalore SHRI B. SURESH(Alternate)
Suri and Suri Consulting Acoustical Engineers, New Delhi SHRI GAUTAMSURI
BIS Directorate General SHRI S. K. JAIN, Director & Head (Civil Engineering)
[Representing Director General (Ex-of/icio Mernberj
Member Secretary
SHRI SANJAYPANT
Joint Director (Civil Engineering)
(ix)
Special Panel for Guiding and Co-ordinating the
Revision of National Building Code of India, CED 46:SP
Organization Representative(s)
In personal capacity (P-233/3, Oflcers Enclave, Air Force Station, SHRI V. SI.JF.ESH(Convener)
Rajokari, New Delhi 110 038)
Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi SHRS T. N. GUPTA
Central Building Research Institute (CSIR), Roorkee SHSUV. K. MATHUR
In personal capacity ( ‘Chandrika’, at 15th Cross, 63-64, East Park Road, DR H. C. VLSVESVAKAYA
(Convener)
A4alleswaram, Bangalore 560 003)
In personal capacity (P-233/3, Ofticers Enclave, Air Force Station, SHRI V. SUKESH
Rajokari, New Delhi 110 038)
In personal capacity (A-39B, DDA Flats, Munirka, New Delhi 110 067) SHRI P. B. VUAY
In personal capacity (EA-345, Maya Enclave, New Delhi 110 064) SHRI J. N. BHAVANtPRASAD
Organization Representative(s)
In personal capacity (P-233/3, Oficers Enclave, Air Force Station, SHRI V. SURESH(Converser)
Rajokari, New Delhi 110 038)
Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi SHRI T. N. GWTA
SHRI RAJESHMALIK (Alternate)
Housing and Urban Development Corporation Ltd, New Delhi SHRI K. C. BATRA
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh DR ANIL KUMAR
(x)
-T-
Orgarrizcrtion Representative(s)
National Real Estate Development Council, New Delhi BRIG R. R. SINGH (RETD)
Organization Representative(s)
In personal capacity (29/25, Old Rajendra Nagar, New Delhi 110 060) SHRI S. K. DHERI (Convener)
Directorate of Town and Country Planning, Government Gf Tamil Nadu, SHRI S. DHANASEKARAN
Chennai SHRI R. RA.JAGOPALAN
(Alternate)
Delhi Fire Service, Government of National Capital Territory of Delhi, SHIU R. C. SHARMA
Delhi SHRI G. C. MISRA (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgrrrh DR ANIL KUMAR
In personal capacity (P-233/3, Ofjlcers Enclave, Air Force Station, SHRI V. SURESH
Rajokari, New Delhi 110 038)
Organization Representative(s)
Building Materials and Technology Promotion Councils, New Delhi SHRI T. N. GUmA (Convener)
(xi)
Organization Representative(s)
Housing and Urban Development Corporation Ltd, New Delhi CHAIRMANAND MANAGINGDIRECTOR
SHRI S. K. TANEIA(Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh SHRI SHIBANRAtNA
DR K. MOHAN (Alremate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh DRANtLKUMAR (Converter)
_
Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi SHRI T. N. GUPTA
SW I. S. StDHG (Alternate)
( xii)
Organization Representative(s)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh DR AN[L KUMAR
SHRXH. K. JULKA(Alternate)
Organization Representative(s)
Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi SHRI T. N. GUPTA
SHRI RAJESHMALIK (Altemare)
Forest Research Institute (Indian Council for Forestry Research SHtU B. K. BHATIA
and Education), Debra Dun
Housing and Urban Development Corporation Ltd, New Delhi CHAIRMANAND MANAGINGDIRECTOR
SHRI S. K. TANEIA(Alternate)
In personal capacity [No. 179 (710), 24th B-Cross, 3rd Block, DR H. N. JAGADEESH
Jayanagar, Bangalore 560 011]
In personal capacity (103/11, Vasant Vihar, P. O. New Forest, SHRI S. S. RAJPUT
Debra Dun 248 006)
Organization Representative(s)
Delhi Tourism and Transportation Development Corporation, SHRI JOSE KUWAN (Convener)
New Delhi
Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi SHRt T. N. GUmA
SHRI PANKAJGUPTA <Alternate)
( xiii)
Organization Representative(s)
Organization Representative(s)
Larsen and Toubro Ltd, ECC Construction Group, Chennai SHRI K. P. RAOHAVAN
SHRI S. KANAPPAN(Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh DK ANIL KUMAR
SHRI H. K. JULKA(Alternate)
( xiv)
Organization Representative(s)
Organization Representative(s)
National Counci I for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh SHRI H. K. JULKA
SHRI SATISHSHARNtA(Alternate)
Shirish Patel and Associates Consultants Pvt Ltd, Mumbai SHR[ SHIRISHB. PATEL
SHRJ P. H. SRINWASACHAR
(Alternate)
Organization Representative(s)
Director General of Factory Advice Service and Labour Institute SHRI S. K. DUITA
(Ministry of Labour), Mumbai SHRI I. ROYCHOWDHURI(Alternate)
(xv)
Organization Representative(s)
Indian Plywood Industries Research and Training Institute, SHRI H. GURUVA REDOY
Bangalore SHRt M. PAVAN KOMAR (Alternate)
Organization Representative(s)
All India Institute of Hygiene and Public Health, Kolkata DR GAUTAM BANERJEE
Organization Representative(s)
In personal capacity (EA 345, Maya Enclave, New Delhi 110 064) SHRI J. N. BHAVANtPRASAD(Convener)
(xvi)
Organization Representative(s)
Organization Representative(s)
Spectral Services Consultants Pvt Ltd, New Delhi DR PREM C. JMN (Convener)
SHR1ASHISH RAKHEIA (Alternate)
In personal capacity (K-43, Kailash Colony, New Delhi 110 048) SHRI M. M. PANDE
Panel for Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control, CED 46:P15
Organization Representative(s)
Suri and Suri Consulting Acoustical Engineers, New Delhi SHRI GAUTAM Suru (Converrer)
( xvii)
Organization Representative(s)
School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi PROF (DR) SHOVAN K. SAHA
Organization Representative(s)
K. L.
Organization Representative(s)
( xviii)
Organization Representative(s)
SHRI J. D’ CRUZ
Panel for Landscaping, Signs and Outdoor Display Structures, CED 46:P18
Organization Representative(s)
In personal capacity (D-198, Defence Colony, New Delhi 110024) SHRI RAWNDRABHAN
Member Secretaq
SHRI SANIAY PANT
Joint Director (Civil Engineering)
Joint Member Secretary
SHRI S. K. VERMA
Deputy Director (Civil Engineering)
(xix)
6$ (J
-,
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
Important Explanatory Note for Users of Code
( xxi)
INFORMATION FOR THE USERS
For the convenience of the users, this publication is also available in the following five groups of the National
Building Code of India 2005 each incorporating the related Parts/Sections dealing with particular area of building
activity:
Group 1 For Development, Building Part o: Integrated Approach — Prerequisite for Applying
Planning and Related Provisions of the Code
Aspects Part 2: Administration Part 3: Development Control Rules
Part 4: Fue and Life Safety and General Building Requirements
Part 5: Building Materials
Part 10: Landscaping, Signs and Outdoor Display Structures
Section 1 Landscape Planning and Design
Section 2 Signs and Outdoor Display Structures
Group 2 For Structural Design and Part o: Integrated Approach — Prerequisite for Applying
Related Aspects Provisions of the Code
Part 6: Structural Design
Section 1 Lo~ds, Forces and Effects
Section 2 Soils and Foundations
Group 3 For Construction Related Part o: Integrated Approach — Prerequisite for Applying
Aspects including Safety Provisions of ‘tie Code
Part 7: Constructional Practices and Safety
Group 4 For Aspects Relating to Part o: Integrated Approach — Prerequisite for Applying
Building Services Provisions of the Code
Part 8: Building Services
Section-l Lighting and Ventilation
Section 2 El~tric~l and Allied Installations
Section 3 Air conditioning, Heating and Mechanical
Ventilation
Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise
Control
Section 5 Installation of Lifts and Escalators
Group 5 For Aspects Relating to Part o: Integrated Approach — Prerequisite for Applying
Plumbing Services Provisions of ‘~e Code
including Solid Waste Part 9: Plumbing Services
Management
Section 1 Water Supply, Drainage and Sanitation
(including Solid Waste Management)
Section 2 Gas Supply
The information contained in different groups will essentially serve the concerned professionals dealing in the
respective areas.
( xxii)
CONTENTS
Total Pages
PART 6 STRUCTURALDESIGN
Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects . . . 104
Section 2 Soils and Foundations ... 48
Section 3 Timber and Bamboo
3A Timber . .. 50
PART 7 CONSTRUCTIONAL
PRACTICESANDSAFETY ... 70
PART 8 BUILDINGSERVICES
Section 1 Lighting and Ventilation . .. 48
Section 2 Electrical and Allied Installations . . . 68
Section 3 Air Conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation . . . 48
Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control ... 44
Section 5 Installation of Lifts and Escalators ... 42
PART 9 PLUMBING
SERVICES
Section 1 Water Supply, Drainage and Sanitation (including Solid ... 90
Waste Management)
Section 2 Gas Supply ... 14
( xxiii)
6$ (J
-,
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART O INTEGRATED APPROACH — PREREQUISITE FOR
APPLYING PROVISIONS OF THE CODE
FOREWORD
In order to provide safe and healthy habitat, careful consideration needs to be paid to the building construction
activity. Building planning, designing and construction activities have developed over the centuries. Large number
of ancient monuments and historical buildings all over the world bear testimony to the growth of civilization
from the prehistoric era with the extensive use of manual labour and simple systems as appropriate to those ages
to the present day mechanized and electronically controlled operations for designing and constructing buildings
and for operating and maintaining systems and services. In those days those buildings were conceptualized and
built by master builders with high levels of artisan skills. Technological and socio-economic developments in
recent times have led to remarkable increase in demand for more and more sophistication in buildings resulting
in ever increasing complexities. These perforce demand high levels of inputs from professionals of different
disciplines such as architecture, civil engineering, structural engineering, functional and life safety services
This Code, besides prescribing the various provisions, also allows freedom of action to adopt appropriate practices
and provides for building planning, designing and construction for absorbing traditional practices as well as
latest developments in knowledge in the various disciplines as relevant to a building including computer aided
andlor other modern sensors aided activities in the various stages of conceptualization, planning, designing,
constructing, maintaining and repairing the buildings. India being a large country with substantial variations
from region to region, this Code has endeavored to meet the requirements of different regions of the country,
both urban and rural, by taking into consideration factors, such as, climatic and environmental conditions,
geographical terrain, proneness to natural disasters, ecologically appropriate practices, use of eco-friendly materials,
reduction of pollution, protection and improvement of local environment and also socio-economic considerations,
towards the creation of sustainable human settlements.
This Part of the Code dealing with ‘integrated approach’ is being included for the first time. It gives an overall
direction for practical applications of the provisions of different specialized aspects of spatial planning, designing
and construction of buildings, creation of services, and proposes an integrated approach for utilizing appropriate
knowledge and experience of qualified professionals right from the conceptualization through construction and
completion stages of a building project and indeed during the entire life cycle. The ‘integrated approach’ should
not only take care of functional, aesthetic and safety aspects, but alSOthe operational and maintenance requirements.
Also, cost optimization has to be achieved through proper selection of materials, techniques, equipment
installations, etc. Further, value engineering and appropriate management techniques should be applied to achieve
the aim set forth for the purpose of construction of a building fully meeting the specified and implied needs of
spatial functions, safety and durability aspects, life and health safety, comfort, services, etc in the building.
The aim of the ‘integrated approach’ is to get the maximum benefit from the building apd its services in terms of
quality, timely completion and cost-effectiveness. In the team approach which is an essential pre-requisite for
integrated approach, the aim clearly is to maximize the efficiency of the total system through appropriate
optimization of each of its sub-systems. In other words, in the team, the inputs from each of the professional
disciplines have to be so optimized that the total system’s efficiency becomes the maximum. It may be re-
emphasized that maximizing the efficiencies of each sub-system may not necessarily assure the maximization of
the efficiency of the total system. It need hardly to be stated that specified or implied safety will always get
precedence over functional efficiency and economy. Further, progressive approach such as that relating to the
concept of intelligent buildings would be best taken care of by the ‘integrated approach’ as laid down in this Part.
Quality systems approach and certification thereunder covering the various dimensions brought out above may
go a long way in achieving the above goal of real integrated approach.
2.0 For the purpose of this Part, the following 3.2 The scope of various Parts/Sections of the Code
definitions and those given in Part 1 ‘Definitions’ shall which cover detailed provisions on different aspects
apply. of development of land/building construction activity,
are given in Annex A, with a view to providing an
2.1 Authority Having Jurisdiction — The Authority overview for the users of the Code.
which has been created by a statute and which, for the
purpose of administering the Code/Part, may authorize 4 TEAM APPROACH
It lists the terms appearing in all the Parts/Sections of It covers structural design (principles) of all building
the Code. However, some common definitions are foundations, such as, raft, pile and other foundation
reproduced in this Part also. systems to ensure safety and serviceability without
exceeding the permissible stresses of the materials of
A-2 PART 2 ADMINISTRATION foundations and the bearing capacity of the supporting
It covers the administrative aspects of the Code, such soil.
as applicability of the Code, organization of building
A-6.3 Section 3 Timber and Bamboo
department for enforcement of the Code, procedure
for obtaining development and building permits, and A-6.3.1 Section 3A Timber
responsibility of the owner and all professionals
It covers the use of structural timber in structures or
involved in the planning, design and constructiori of
It covers the development control rules and general It covers the use of bamboo for constructional purposes
building requirements for proper planning and design in structures or elements of the structure, ensuring
at the layout and building level to ensure health safety, quality and effectiveness of design and construction
public safety and desired quality of life. using bamboo. It covers minimum strength data,
dimensional and grading requirements, seasoning,
A-4 PART 4 FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY preservative treatment, design and jointing techniques
with bamboo which would facilitate scientific
It covers the requirements for fire prevention, life
application and long-term performance of structures.
safety in relation to fire, and fire protection of
It also covers guidelines so as to ensure proper
buildings. The Code specifies planning and
procurement, storage, precautions and design
construction features and fire protection features for
limitations on bamboo.
all occupancies that are necessary to minimize danger
to life and property. A-6.4 Section 4 Masonry
A-5 PART 5 BUILDING MATERIALS It covers die structural design aspects of unreinforced
load bearing and non-load bearing walls, constructed
It covers the requirements of building materials and
using various bricks, stones and blocks permitted in
components, and criteria for accepting new or
accordance with this Section. This, however, also
alternative building materials and components.
covers provisions for design of reinforced brick and
A-6 PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN reinforced brick concrete floors and roofs. It also
covers guidelines regarding earthquake resistance of
This Part through its seven sections provides for low strength masonry buildings.
structural adequacy of buildings to deal with both
internal and external environment, and provide A-6.5 Section 5 Concrete
guidance to engineerslstructural engineers for varied
A-6.5.1 Section 5A Plain and Reinforced Concrete
usage of material/technology types for building
design. It covers the general structural use of plain and
reinforced concrete.
A-6.1 Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects
It covers basic design loads to be assumed in the design A-6.5.2 Section 5B Prestressed Concrete
of buildings. The live loads, wind loads, seismic loads, It covers the general structural use of prestressed
snow loads and other loads, which are specified therein, concrete. It covers both work carried out on site and
are minimum working loads which should be taken the manufacture of precast prestressed concrete
into consideration for purposes of design. units.
It covers recommendations regarding modular A-8.4 Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and
Noise Control
planning, component sizes, prefabrication systems,
design considerations, joints and manufacture, storage, It covers requirements and guidelines regarding
transport and erection of prefabricated concrete planning against noise, acceptable noise levels and the
elements for use in buildings and such related requirements for sound insulation in buildings with
requirements for prefabricated concrete. different occupancies. ~
A-6.7.2 Section 7B Systems Building and Mixed/ A-8.5 Section 5 Installation of Lifts and
Composite Construction Escalators
A-10.1 Section 1 Landscape Planning and Design It covers the requirements with regard to public safety,
It covers requirements of landscape planning and structural safety and fire safety of all signs and outdoor
design with the view to promoting quality of outdoor display structures including the overall aesthetical
built environment and protection of land and its aspects of imposition of signs and outdoor display
resources. structures in the outdoor built environment.
STANDARDS
PART 1 DEFINITIONS
OF INDIAN
BUREAU
.
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
I
National Building Code Sectional Committee, CED 46
FOREWORD
Each Part or Section of the National Building Code gives the definitions of the special terms used in it. These
definitions may be found in the clause ‘Terminology’ normally placed immediately after the ‘Scope’ in each
Part/Section. However, users may find this part very convenient for reference as it gives the alphabetically
arranged list of terms defined in all the parts along with the location of the deilnition.
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 3
.
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
I
r
,’>-
,*.
Any use of the premises subordinate to the principal A-Weighted Sound Pressure, pA — Part 8/Section 4
use and customarily incidental to the principal use. Axial Flow Fan — Part 8/Section 1
&...
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 5
Beam — Part 6/Section 3B SHAMIANAHS, tarpaulin shelters, etc, erected for
Beam, Built-Up-Laminated — Part 6/Section 3 temporary and ceremonial occasions with the
Beam, Glued-Laminated — Part 61Section 3 permission of the Authority shall not be considered as
building.
Bearing Capacity, Safe — Part 6/Section 2
Bearing Capacity, Ultimate — Part 61Section 2 Building, Height of — Part 2, Part 3, Part 4
Bearing Pile — Part 61Section 2 The vertical distance measured, in the case of flat roofs
Bearing Pressure, Allowable (Gross or Net) — Part 61 from the average level of the ground around and
Section 2 contiguous to the building or as decided by the
Bearing Pressure, Allowable — Part 61Section 2 Authority to the terrace of last livable floor of the
building adjacent to the external walls; and in the case
Bearing Pressure, Safe — Part 61Section 2
of pitched roofs, up to the point where the external
Bed Block — Part 61Section 4
surface of the outer wall intersects the finished surface
Bedding — Part 91Section 1 of the sloping roof, and in the case of gables facing the
Benching — Part 91Section 1 road, the mid-point between the eaves level and the
Bond — Part 6/Section 4 ridge. Architectural features serving no other function
Bored Cast in-situ Pile — Part 61Section 2 except that of decoration shall be excluded for the
purpose of measuring heights.
Bored Compaction Pile — Part 61Section 2
Branch Soil Waste Pipe (BSWP) — Part 91Section 1 Bunched — Part 8/Section 2
Ceiling Rose — Part 8/Section 2 The material which either burns itself or adds heat to a
Cell — Part 6/Section 3B fire, when tested for non-combustibility in accordance
Cellular Concrete — Part 6/Section 7B, Part 6/ with accepted standard [4(1)].
Section 7A Common Rafier — Part 61Section 3B
Cellulose — Part 6/Section 3B Communication Pipe — Part 91Section 1
Central Field — Part 81Section 1 Components — Part 61Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B
Centre Internode — Part 6/Section 3B Composite Members — Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/
Centr@gal Fan — Part 81Section 1 Section 7B
Cesspool — Part 9/Section 1 Compression Wood — Part 61Section 3
Chair — Part 91Section 1 Conductor of a Cable or Core — Part 8/Section 2
Channel — Part 9/Section 1 Conductor, Aerial — Part 8/Section 2
Characteristic Load — Part 61Section 3B Conductor, Bare — Part 8/Section 2
Characteristic Strength — Part 6/Section 3B Conductor, Earthed — Part 81Section 2
Check — Part 6/Section 3 Conductor, Insulated — Part 8/Section 2
CHHAJJA — Part 3 Connection — Part 9/Section 1
Chimney — Part 3 Connector — Part 8/Section 2
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 7
ramp areas covered by CHHAJJA and the like; Dewpoint Temperature — Part 8/Section 3
and Diameter — Part 9/Section 1
d) watchman’s booth, pumphouse, garbage The nominal internal diameter of pipes and fittings.
shaft, electric cabin or sub-stations, and such Diameter of Knot — Part 61Section 3
other utility structures meant for the services
Diaphragm, Structural — Part 6/Section 3B
of the building under consideration.
Dilution Ventilation — Part 81Section 1
NOTE — For the purpose of this part, covered area
equals the plot area minus the area due for open spaces Direct Earthing System — Part 8/Section 2
in the plot. Direct Solar Illuminance — Part 8/Section 1
Crookedness — Part 61Section 3B Direct Tap — Part 9/Section 1
Cross Wall — Part 6/Section 3B Direction Sign — Part 10/Section 2
Cross-Connection — Part 9/Section 1 Discoloration — Part 6/Section 3, Part 61Section 3B
Cross-Sectional Area of Masonry Unit — Part 61 Discrimination (Over-Current Discrimination) —
Section 4 Part 81Section 2
Cross-Talk — Part 8/Section 4 Distance Area of Resistance Area (for Earth Electrode
Crown of Trap — Part 9/Section 1 only) — Part 81Section 2
‘Cul-de-sac’ Cluster — Part 3 Distribution Board — Part 81Section 2
PART 1 DEFINITIONS
The lower surface in a storey on which one normally Ground Sign — Part 10/Section 2
walks in a building. The general term ‘floor’ unless Groundcover — Part 10/Section 1
specifically mentioned otherwise shall not refer to a Group Automatic Operation — Part 81Section 5
‘mezzanine floor’.
Group Housing — Part 3
Floor Area Ratio (FAR,) — Part 3, Part 4 Group Open Space — Part 3
The quotient obtained by dividing the total covered Grout — Part 61Section 4
area (plinth area) on all floors by the area of the plot: Guide Rails — Part 8/Section 5
Guide Rails Fixing — Part 8/Section 5
Total covered area of all floors
FAR = Guide Rails Shoe — Part 81Section 5,
Plot area
Gully Chamber — Part 91Section 1
Floor Levelling Switch — Part 8/Section 5
Gully Trap — Part 91Section 1
Floor Selector — Part S/Section 5
Floor Stopping Switch — Part 8/Section 5 H
Flushing Cistern — Part 9/Section 1 Habitable Room — Part 3
Foliage — Part 10/Section 1 Hard Lundscape — Part 10/Section 1
Footing — Part 61Section 2 Hardy Plant — Part 10/Section 1
Formation — Part 9/Section 1 Harmonics — Part 8/Section 2
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 11
Masonry Unit — Part 6/Section 4 *Offset — Part 6/Section 2, Part 9/Section 1
Matchet — Part 6/Section 3B Oil Iih@er — Part 8/Section 5
Mats — Part 6Nection 3B Oil Bufier Stroke — Part 8/Section 5
Means of Egress — Part 4 Open Clusters — Part 3
Mechanical Ventilation — Part 8/Section 1 Open Sign — Part 10/Section 2
Meridian — Part 8/Section 1 Open Space — Part 3
Mezzanine Floor — Part 3 Open Space, Front — Part 3
Miniature Circuit Breaker — Part 8/Section 2 Open Space, Rear — Part 3
Modular Co-ordination — Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/ Open Space, Side — Part 3
Section 7B Operating Device — Part 8/Section 5
Modular Grid — Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B Operation — Part 8/Section 5
Module — Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6L3ection 7B Operational Constructiotilnstalt!ation — Part 2
Mortise and Tenon — Part 6/Section 3B Orientatwn of Buildings — Part 8/Section 1
Mould — Part 61Section 3 Outdoor Furniture — Part 10/Section 1
Mound — Part 10/Section 1 Outer Diameter — Part 6/Section 3B
Mtdtimodule — Part 61Section 7A, Part 6fSection 7B Outside Location — Part 61Section 3A, Part 6/
Noise Rating (NR) — Part 8/Section 4 Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) — Part 81Section 3
Noise Reduction Co-efficient (NRC) — Part 8/
P
Section 4
Non-Selective Collective Automatic Operation — Panel Wall — Part 61Section 4
Part 8L3ection 5 Parapet — Part 3, Pall 10ISection 2
Non-Service Laterine — Part 9/Section 1 Parking Space — Part 3
Normalized Impact Sound Pressure Level, L. — Part 8/ Partition — Part 3
Section 4 Partition Wall — Part 61Section 4
North and South Points — Pm 8/Section I Passenger Lift — Part 8LSection 5
0 Peat — Part 61Section 2
Percentile Level, L~~ ~ — Pm 81Section 4
Occupancy or Use Group — Part 2, Part 3, Part 4
Period of Supply — Part 91Section 1
The principal occupancy for which a building or a Peripheral Field — Part 81Section 1
part of a building is used or intended to be used; for
Permanent Load — Part 6/Section 2
the purposes of classification of a building according
Permissible Stress — Part 61Section 3, Part 6/
to occupancy, an occupancy shall be deemed to
Section 3B
include the subsidiary occupancies which are
contingent upon it. Permit — Part 2
Pile Foundation — Part 6/Section 2
Occupier — Part 2
Octave Band — Part 8/Section 4 * Definitions are different.
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 13
Sediment — Part 10/Section 1 Slenderness Ratio — Past 61Section 4
Selective Collective Automatic Operation -Part81 Sliver — Part 6/Section 3B
Section 5 Slop Hopper (Slop Sink) — Part 9/Section 1
Self Compacting Concrete — Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/ Slope of Grain — Part 61Section 3
Section 7B Smoke Damper — Part 81Section 3
Semi-Detached Building — Part 3 Soakaway — Part 9/Section 1
Service — Part 8/Section 2 Socket-Outlet — Part 81Section 2
Service Laterine — Part 91Section 1
Soffit (Crown) — Part 91Section 1
Service L@ (Dumb-Waiter) — Part 81Section 5
Soft Lundscape — Part 10ISection 1
* Service Pipe — Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2
Soft Rock — Part 61Section 2
Service Road — Part 2, Part 3
Soil Appliances — Part 91Section 1
Service Shut-Off Valve (Isolation Valve) — Part 91
Soil Pipe — Part 91Section 1
Section 2
Soil Waste — Part 91Section 1
Set-back Line — Part 2, Part 3
Soil, Black Cotton — Part 61Section 2
A line usually parallel to the plot boundaries and laid Soil, Coarse Grained — Part 61Section 2
down in each case by the Authority, beyond which
The portion of a building included between the surface Switch Disconnectors — Part 81Section 2
of any floor and the surface of the floor next above it, Switchboard — Part 81Section 2
or if there be no floor above it, then the space between Switchgear — Part 8/Section 2
any floor and the ceiling next above it. System — Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B,
Storey, Topmost — Part 3 Systems of Drainage — Part 9/Section 1
Street — Part 2, Part 3 T
Any means of access, namely, highway, street, lane, Taper — Part 6/Section 3B
pathway, alley, stairway, passageway, carriageway, Temporary Sign — Part 10/Section 2
footway, square, place or bridge, whether a
Terminal Slow Down Switch — Part 8/Section 5
thoroughfare or not, over which the public have a right
Terminal Stopping Device Final — Part 8/Section 5
of passage or access or have passed and had access
unintemuptedly for a specified period, whether existing Terminal Stopping Switch Normal — Part 81Section 5
or proposed in any scheme and includes all bunds, Termites — Part 61Section 3
channels, ditches, storm-water drains, culverts,
Supply Pipe — Part 91Section 1 Two-Speed Alternating Current Control — Part 8/~
Section 5
Supports — Part 9/Section 1
Types of Walls — Part 6/Section 4
Su#ace Cracking — Part 61Section 3B
Su~ace Water — Part 9/Section 1 u
Su~ace Water Drain — Part 9/Section 1 Ultimate Load Capacity — Part 61Section 2
Suspension Ropes — Part 81Section 5 Under-Reamed Pile — Part 61Section 2
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 15
Unit — Part 6/Section 7A, Part 61Section 7B Warp — Part 6/Section 3
Unloaded End Distance — Part 61Section 3B Wash-Out Valve — Part 91Section 1
Unsafe Building — Part 2 Waste Appliance — Part 91Section 1
Usable Wall Space — Part 81Section 2 Waste Pipe — Part 9/Section 1
Utilization Factor (Coefficient of Utilizaiton) (p) — Waste- Water (Sullage) — Part 9/Section 1
Part 8/Section 1 Water Conditioning — Part 8/Section 3
Water Hardness — Part 81Section 3
v
Water Main (Street Main) — Part 9/Section 1
Variable Voltage Motor Control (Generator Field
Water Outlet — Part 91Section 1
Control) — Part 81Section 5
Water Seal — Part 91Section 1
Veloci@, Capture — Part 81Section 1
Water Supply System — Part 9/Section 1
Vent Pipe — Part 91Section 2
Water-Closet (WC) — Part 3
Vent StacWVent Pipe — Part 91Section 1
Waterworks — Part 9/Section 1
Vent System — Part 91Section 1
Wavelength — Part 81Section 4
Ventilation — Part 4, Part 8/Section 1
WeatheWroof — Part 8/Section 2
Venting Fire — Part 4
Weighted Level Difference, DW — Part 81Section 4
STANDARDS
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION
OF INDIAN
BUREAU
CONTENTS
FOREWORD ... 3
SECTION1 GENERAL
1 SCOPE ... 5
2 TERMINOLOGY ... 5
3 APPLICABILITY OF THE CODE ... 6
4 INTERPRETATION ... 7
5 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS, METHODS OF DESIGN AND ... 7
CONSTRUCTION, AND TESTS
FOREWORD
A need for codifying and unifying administrative provisions in different development control rules and building
byelaws had been felt, particularly in regard to the applicability of the Code, desirable qualifications for the enforcing
Authority and the representative of the owner and responsibilities and duties of the Authority and the owner.
It is expected that the town and country planning department will co-ordinate the administrative provisions of
this Part and the same given in the State Town and Country Planning Acts.
This Part recommends the setting up of a ‘Board of Appeal’. The ‘Board of Appeal’ gives the owner/architect/
engineer an opportunity to defend the schemes which are based on conventional or new methods of design and
construction or using new materials, which have been otherwise rejected by the Authority.
In this second revision, number of modifications have been incorporated based on the experience gained over the
years specially in view of different techno-administrative and techno-legal regime encountered in various situations
faced. Specially the provisions of this Part have been thoroughly reviewed in the context of the natural calamities
faced by the country, such as the devastating eafihquake in Gujarat in the year 2001, and provisions have been
accordingly modified to further ensure structural adequacy of the buildings. In this context, structural design of
buildings in accordance with the provisions of the Code and construction and supervision thereof by competent
professionals to ensure structural safety have been given due importance in this revision. Other significant
modifications incorporated include:
a) Modifications in the definitions of certain terms;
b) Inclusion of the concept of team of building officials;
c) Inclusion of provision of single window approach for permit for all services;
d) Inclusion of provisions regarding computerization of approval processes for building permits;
e) Inclusion of provision to certify safety of buildings against natural disaster by engineer/structural engineer
and owner;
0 Inclusion of provision of two stage permit for high rise residential buildings and special buildings;
g) Provisions regarding inspection of completed and occupied building by the Authority from safety point
of view have been made comprehensive;
h) Inclusion of provision empowering engineers/architects for sanctioning plans of residential buildings
up to 500 mz;
j) Provisions for architectural control to effectively take care of the urban aesthetics, have been modified;
and
k) Inclusion of landscape architect and urban designer among the registered professionals for the concerned
applicable works.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 3
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION
2.4 Authority Having Jurisdiction — The Authority 2.11 Drainage — The removal of any liquid by a
which has been created by a statute and which, for the system constructed for the purpose.
purpose of administering the Code/Part, may authorize
2.12 Occupancy or Use Group — The principal
a committee or an official or an agency to act on its
occupancy for which a building or a part of a building
behalfi hereinafter called the ‘Authority’.
is used or intended to be used; for the purposes of
2.5 Building — Any structure for whatsoever purpose classification of a building according to occupancy,
and of whatsoever materials constructed and every part an occupancy shall be deemed to include the subsidiary
thereof whether used as human habitation or not and occupancies which are contingent upon it.
includes foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs,
2.13 Occupier — Occupi&r includes arty person for
chimneys, plumbing and building services, fixed
the time being, paying or liable to pay rent or any
platforms, verandah, balcony, cornice or projection, part
portion of rent of the building in respect of which the
of a buildlng or anything affixed thereto or any wall
ward is used, or compensation or premium on account
enclosing or intended to enclose any land or space
of the occupation of such building and also a rent-free
and signs and outdoor display structures. Tents/
tenant, but does not include a lodger, and the words
SHAMIANAHS, tarpaulin shelters, etc, erected for
‘occupy’ and ‘occupation’ do not refer to the lodger.
temporary and ceremonial occasions with the permission
of the Authority shall not be considered as building. An owner living in or otherwise using his own building
shall be deemed to be the occupier thereof.
2.6 Building, Height of — The vertical distance
measured, in the case of flat roofs from the average 2.14 Operational Construction/Installation — A
level of the ground around and contiguous to the construction/installation put up by Government
building or as decided by the Authority to the terrace Departments for operational purposes (see 12.1.1.1).
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 5
r
2.15 Owner — Person or body having a legal interest carriageway, footway, square, place or bridge, whether
in land and/or building thereon. This includes free a thoroughfare or not, over which the public have a
holders, leaseholders or those holding a sub-lease right of passage or access or have passed and had access
which both bestows a legal right to occupation and uninterruptedly for a specified period, whether existing
gives rise to liabilities in respect of safety or building or proposed in any scheme and includes all bunds,
condition. channels, ditches, storm-water drains, culverts,
sidewalks, traffic islands, roadside trees and hedges,
In case of lease or sub-leaseholders, as far as ownership
retaining walls, fences, barriers and railings within the
with respect to the structure is concerned, the structure
street lines.
of a flat or structure on a plot belongs to the allottee/
lessee till the allotment/lease subsists. 2.26 Street Level or Grade — The officially
established elevation or grade of the centre line of the
2.16 Permit — A permission or authorization in
street upon which a plot fronts and if there is no
writing by the Authority to carry out work regulated
officially established grade, the existing grade of the y,k
by the Code. }
street at its mid-point.
2.17 Registered Architect, Engineer, Structural
2.27 Street Line — The line defining the side limits
Engineer, Supervisor, Town Planner, Landscape
of a street.
Architect, Urban Designer — A qualified architect,
:
engineer, structural engineer, supervisor, town 2.28 To Erect — To erect a building means:
2.20 Room Height — The vertical distance measured 3 APPLICABILITY OF THE CODE
from the finished floor surface to the finished ceiling 3.1 All Parts of the Code and their sections shall apply
surface. Where a finished ceiling is not provided, the to all buildings described in 3.2 to 3.8, as may be
underside of the joists or beams or tie beams shall applicable.
determine the upper point of measurement for
determining the head room. 3.2 Where a building is erected, the Code applies to
the design and construction of the building.
2.21 Sanctioned Plan — The set of plans and
3.3 Where the whole or any part of the building is
specifications submitted in connection with a building
removed, the Code applies to all parts of the building
or development and duly approved and sanctioned by
the Authority. whether removed or not.
3.4 Where the whole or any part of the building is
2.22 Service Road — A road/lane provided at the rear
demolished, the Code applies to any remaining part i
or side of a plot for service purposes.
and to the work involved in demolition.
2.23 Set-back Line — A line usually parallel to the
3.5 Where a building is altered (see 12.4 and 12.4.1),
plot boundaries and laid down in each case by the
the Code applies to the whole building whether existing
Authority, beyond which nothing can be constructed
or new except that the Code applies only to part if that
towards the site boundaries.
part is completely self-contained with respect to
2.24 Site (Plot) — A parcel (piece) of land enclosed facilities and safety measures required by the Code.
by definite boundaries.
3.6 Where the occupancy of a building is changed,
2.25 Street — Any means of access, namely, highway, the Code applies to all parts of the building affected
street,’ lane, pathway, alley, stairway, passageway, by the change.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 7
qualifications, two or three such bodies contiguously 7.3 Right of Entry
located could join together and share the services of
Upon presentation of proper credentials and with
one team of building officials.
advance notice, the team of building officials or its
6.6 Qualifications of Assistant duly authorized representative may enter at any
reasonable time any building or premises to perform
No person shall be appointed as Assistant unless he
any duty imposed upon him by the Code.
has got the qualifications prescribed in Annex A for a
registered Supervisor. 7.4 Inspection
6.7 Restriction on Employees The team of building officials shall make all the
required inspections or it may accept reports of
No official or employee connected with the department
inspections of authoritative and recognized services
of buildings except one whose only connection is that
or individuals; and all reports of inspections shall be
of a member of the Board of Appeals, established
in writing and certified by a responsible officer of such
under 8 shall be engaged directly or indirectly in a work
authoritative service or by the responsible individual
connected with the furnishing of labour, materials
or engage any such expert opinion as he may deem
or appliances for the construction, alteration or
necessmy to report upon unusual technical issues that
maintenance of a building, or the preparation of plans
may arise, subject to the approval of the Authority.
or of specifications thereof unless he is the owner of
building; nor shall such official or employee engage 7.5 Construction Not According to Plan
9.1.1 Any person who contravenes any of the SECTION 3 PERMIT AND INSPECTION
provisions of the Code or any requirements of
obligations imposed on him by virtue of the Code, or 11 DEVELOPMENT/BUILDING PERMIT
who interferes with or obstructs any person in the
11.1 Permit Required
discharge of his duties, shall be guilty of an offence
and the Authority shall levy suitable penalty or take No person shall carry out any development, erect, re-
other actions as per the Code (see also 7.5 and 15). erect or make alterations or demolish any building or
cause the same to be done without first obtaining a
NOTE — The penalty may be in the form of collection of
arrears of tax, separate permit for each such development/building
from the Authority. No permits shall, however, be
9.1.2 The buildings/developments violating any
required for works referred to in 12.1.1.1 and 12.4.1.
applicable statutory rules shall be demolished/brought
within the limits as prescribed in such rules at the 11.1.1 The development/building permit shall take
expense of the owner. The buildings coming up in the into cognizance the provisions under the relevant Town
vicinity of an aerodrome in violation of the height Planning Act/Development ActlMunicipal Actlany
restriction laid down by the Directorate General of Civil other applicable statutes for layout, building plans,
Aviation shall be accordingly demolished/brought water supply, sewerage, drainage, electrification, etc,
within the limits prescribed by DGCA rules, as provided in the said Act/statute. Also, if so directed
PART 2 ADMINISTIL4TION 9
by the Authority, the permit shall take care of the need 12 APPLICATION FOR DEVELOPMENT/
for landscape development plan incorporating rain- BUILDING PERMIT
water harvesting proposals in the”layout and building
plans. 12.1 Notice
11.1.2 Specific approvals shall be obtained from Every owner who intends to develop, erect, re-erect or
Civil Aviation Authorities, Fire Services Department make alterations in any place in a building shall give
(in case the building proposed is 15 m and above), notice in writing to the Authority of his said intention
Pollution Control Board, designated authorities under in the prescribed form (see Annex B) and such notice
Factories Act/Cinema Regulation Act, Urban Arts shall be accompanied by plans and statements in
Commission, designated Coastal Regulation Zone triplicate as required under 12.2 and 12.3 except for
Authority, Archeological Survey of India, Heritage special buildings (high rise, non-residential) ,where
Committee and any such other authority as may be additional copies may be submitted as desired by the
applicable. Authority. The Authority shall permit submission of I
plarts/documents in electronic form in addition to hard
11.1.3 In order to facilitate clearance from above copy. The Authority should also progressively
bodies with the concept of single window clearance computerize the approval process.
approach and thereby final approval by the Authority
12.1.1 Regarding submission of plans by Government
within the stipulated time frame, the Authority may
Departments, the procedure shall be as given
Whhe Plan Blue Print Ammonia Print White Plan Blue Print Ammonia Print
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Plot lines Thick black Thick black Thick black Thick black TMck black Thick black
ii) Existing street Green Green Green — — —
iii) Future street, if any Green dotted Green dotted Green dotted — — —
iv) Permissible building Thick dotted Thick dotted Thick dotted — — —
lines black black black
v) Open spa&a No !Monr No colour No CO1OIX No Colour No CO1OW No CO1OUX
vi) Existing wurk Birtclr@ntline) WMe Blue Black White Blue
vii) Work proposed to be %AkXvhatched Yellow hatched Yellow hatched Yellow hatched Yellow hatched Yellow hatched
demolished
viii) Proposed work Red filled in Red Red Red Red Red
(see Note 1)
ix) Drainage and smvcrage Red dotted Red dottrd Red dotted Red dotted Red dotted Red dotted
work
x) Water supply work Black dotted Black dotted Black dotted Black dotted Black dotted Black dotted
thin thin thin thin thin thin
NOTES
1 For entirely new construction this need not be done; for extension of an existing work this shrdl apply.
2 For land development, subdivision, layout, suitable colouring notations shall be used which shall be indexed.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 11
1) the boundaries of the site and in case area of the site proposed to be subdivided;
where the site has been partitioned, the and
boundaries of the portion owned by the In case of plots which are subdivided in built-
applicant and also of the portions owned up areas in addition to the above, the means
by others; of access to the sub-division from existing
2) all adjacent street, buildings (with streets.
number of storeys and height) and
12.2.5 Building Plan and Details
premises within a distance of 12 m of the
site and of the contiguous land (if any) The plan of the buildings and elevations and sections
referred to in (a); and accompanying the notice shall be drawn to a scale of
3) if there is no street within a distance of 1:100. The plans and details shall:
12 m of the site, the nearest existing a) include floor plans of all floors together with
street; the covered area clearly indicating the size
f) the means of access from the street to the and spacings of all framing members and sizes
building, and to all other buildings (if any) of rooms and the position of staircases, ramps
which the applicant intends to erect upon his and liftwells;
contiguous land referred to in (a); b) show the use or occupancy of all parts of the
d space to be left about the building to secure a buildings;
f) A statement indicating the total area of the For all multi-storeyed buiklings which are 15 m or more
site, area utilized under roads, open spaces in height and for special buildings like educational,
for parks, playgrounds, recreation spaces for assembly, institutional, industrial, storage and
parks, playgrounds, recreation spaces and hazardous and mixed occupancies with any of the
development plan reservations, schools, aforesaid occupancies having covered area more than
shopping and other public places alongwith 500 m2, the building sanction shall be done in two
their percentage with reference to the total stages.
The following additional information shall be The services plans shall include all details of building
furnished/indicated in the building plan in addition to and plumbing services, and also plans, elevations and
the items given in 12.2.5 as applicable: sections of private water supply, sewage disposal system
and rainwater harvesting system, if any (see Part 8
a) Access to fire appliances/vehicles with details ‘Building Services’ and Part 9 ‘Plumbing Services’).
of vehicular turning circle and clear motorable
accessway around the building; 12.2.7 Specifications
b) Size (width) of main and alternative staircases Specifications, both general and detailed, giving type
along with balcony approach, corridor, and grade of materials to be used, duly signed by the
ventilated lobby approach; registered architect, engineer, structural engineer or
c) Location and details of lift enclosures; supervisor shall accompany the notice (see Annex B).
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 13
building requirements, structural stability and fire and 12.9 Qualifications of Architects/Engineers/
health safety requirements of the Code: Structural Engineers/Landscape ArchitectNrban
Designer/Supervisors/Town Planners/Services
a) Opening and closing of a window or door or
Personnel
ventilator;
b) Providing intercommunication doors; Architects, engineers, structural engineers, landscape
c) Providing partitions; architect, urban designer, supervisors and town
planners wherever referred in the Code, shall be
d) Providing false ceiling;
registered by the Authority or the body governing such
e) Gardening; profession constituted under a statute, as competent to
o White washing; do the work for which they are employed. A guide for
g) Painting; the equivalent technical qualifications and professional
h) Re-tiling and reproofing; experience required for such registration with the
Plastering and patch work; Authority is given in Annex A. In case of building and
j)
plumbing services, qualifications for engineers for
k) Re-flooring; and
utility services shall be as given in A-2.8.
m) Construction of sunshades on one’s own land.
12.9.1 In case the registered professional associated
12.5 Fees with the preparation and signing of plans or for
g) give written notice to the Authority in case of 14.2.1 The owner/concerned registered architect/
termination of services of a professional engineer/structural eng@eer/town planner will serve
engaged by him; and a notice/completion certificate to the Authority that
h) obtain an occupancy permit (see Annex J) the building has been completed in all respects as per
from the Authority prior to any: the approved plans. The deviations shall also be
brought to the notice of the Authority (with relevant
1) occupancy of the building or part thereof
documents). The team of building officials or its duly
after construction or alteration of that
authorized representative shall then visit the site and
building or part, or
occupancy certificate shall be given in one instance.
2) change in the class of occupancy of any
building or part thereof. . 14.2.2 The occupancy certificate should clearly state
the use/type of occupancy of the building. However,
13.2.1 Temporary Occupancy
the applicant can apply for change of useioccupancy
Upon the request of the holder of the permit, the permitted within the purview of the Master Plan/Zonal
Authority may issue a temporary certificate of Plan/Building Byelaws, where so required.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 15
14.3 When inspection of any construction operation 15.3.1 The Authority may direct in writing that the
reveals than any lack of safety precautions exist, the building which in his opinion is dangerous, or has
Authority shall have right to direct the owner to stop no provision for exit if caught fire, shall be vacated
the work immediately until the necessary remedial immediately or within the period specified for the
measures to remove the violation of safety precautions purpose; provided that the Authority concerned shall
are taken. keep a record of the reasons for such action with
\
him.
14.4 Periodic Occupancy Renewal Certificate
If any person does not comply with the orders of
14.4.1 For buildings covered in 12.2.5.1 after vacating a building, the Authority may direct the police
completion of the building and obtaining the occupancy to remove the person from the building and the police
certificate, periodic inspections of buildings shall be shall comply with the orders.
made by the Fire Authority to ensure the fiie safety of
the building and compliance with the provisions of fire 15.4 Disregard of Notice
and life safety requirements (see Part 4 ‘Fire and Life
In case the owner or occupier fails, neglects, or refuses
Safey’). Periodic occupancy renewal certificate shall
to comply with the notice to repair or to demolish the
be made available by the Authority/Fire Authority which
said building or portion thereof, the Authority shall
shall also include safekeep of f~e fighting installations
cause the danger to be removed whether by demolition
and equipments for such buildings.
or repair of the building or portion thereof or otherwise.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 17
ANNEX A
The registered town planner shall be competent to A-2.8 Engineers for Utility Services
carry out the work related to the development permit
For buildings identified in 12.2.5.1, the work of
as given below:
building and plumbing services shall be executed under
a) Preparation of plans for land sub-division/ the planning, design and supervision of competent
layout and related information connected with personnel. The qualification for registered mechanical
development permit for all areas. engineer (including HVAC), electrical engineer and
b) Issuing of certificate of supervision for plumbing engineers for carrying out the work of Air-
development of land of all areas. conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation,
NOTE — However,for land layouts for development Electrical Installations, Lifts and Escalators and Water
permit above 5 hectare in area, landscape architect Supply, Drainage, Sanitation and Gas Supply
shall also be associated, and for land development installations respectively shall be as given in Part 8
infrastructural services for roads, water supplies, ‘Building Services’ and Part 9 ‘Plumbing Services’ or
sewerage/drainage,electrification, etc. the registered
engineersfor utility services shall be associated. as decided by the Authority taking into account
practices of the National professional bodies dealing
A-2.6 Landscape Architect with the specialist engineering services.
The minimum qualification for a landscape architect
A-3 BUILDEWCONSTRUCTOR ENTITY
shall be the bachelor or master’s degree in landscape
architecture or equivalent from recognized Indian or The minimum qualification and competence for the
foreign university. builder/constructor entity for various categories of
building and infrastructural development shall be as
A-2.6.1 Competence
decided by the Authority to ensure compliance of
The registered landscape architect shall be competent quality, safety and construction practices as required
to carrvout the work related to landscape design for under the Code.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 19
ANNEX B
(Clause 12.1)
FORM FOR FIRST APPLICATION TO DEVELOP, ERECT, RE-ERECT OR TO MAKE
ALTERATION IN ANY PLACE IN A BUILDING
To
........................................
........................................
........................................
Sir,
I hereby give notice that I intend to develop, erect, re-erect or to make alteration in the building No .............................
or to .........................................................otiin Plot No ......................................................................... in Colony/
Street .............................................MOHALUfBA~RRoad .............................................City ...........................and
in accordance with the building code of ...............................................Pti II, Clauses .....................................and
1. Key plan
2. Site plans
3. Sub-divisionllayout plan
4. Building plans
5. Services plans
6. Specifications, general and detailedz)
7. Thle of ownership of landhttildlng
8. Certificates for structural sufficiency and supervision
I request that the developmenticonstrttction may be approved and permission accorded to me to execute the
work.
Date: ..........................
(Clause 12.2.8)
With respect to the building work of erection, re-erection or for making alteration in the building
No ................................orto ......................................................otiin Plot No. ...................................................Colony/
Street .....................................MOHALLA/BAZ4R/Road ... ....................................................City ..................................
we certify that the structural plans and details of the building submitted for approval satisfy the structural safety
requirements for all situations including natural disasters, as applicable, as stipulated under Part 6 Structural
Design of the National Building Code of India and other relevant Codes; and the information given therein is
factually correct to the best of our knowledge and understanding.
ANNEX D h’....
–,
(Clause 12.2.9)
FORM FOR SUPERVISION
I hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection or material alteration in/of building No ..............................
or the ...................................................................otiin Plot No .................................................................in Colony/
Street .......................................MOHALM/BA~R~oad . .... ............................................. City ..................................
shall be carried out under my supervision and I certify that all the materials (type and grade) and the workmanship
of the work shall be generally in accordance with the general and detailed specifications’ submitted along with,
and that the work shall be carried out according to the sanctioned plans.
Date: ........................
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 21
ANNEX E
(Clause 12.10)
FORM FOR SANCTION OR REFUSAL OF DEVELOPMENT/BUILDING PERMIT
To
...............................................
Sir,
I have to inform you that the sanction has been granted/refused by the Authority on the following grounds:
ANNEX F
I hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection or material alteration in/of building No. ...........................
or the ..............................ort/in Plot No ....................................in Colony/SUeet .....................................MOHAU/
BAZARIRoad ....................................City ....................................will be commenced on as per your permission,
vide No .....................................dated ..............................under the supervision of ....................................Registered
Architect/Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner/Landscape Architect/Urban DesignerlJ,
Registration No ...............................................................and in accordance with the plans sanctioned, vide
No . . ...................................&ted ............................
[Clause 13.2(f)]
With respect to the building work of erection, re-erection or for making alteration in the building No ..........................
or to ................................on/in Plot No .......................................Colonylstreet ...................................MOHALGV
BAZARIRoad ................................City ................................. we certify:
a) that the building has been constructed according to the sanctioned plan and structural design (one set of
drawings as executed enclosed), which incorporates the provisions of structural safety as specified in
Part 6 ‘Structural Design’ of the National Building Code of India and other relevant Codes; and
b) that the construction has been done under our supervision and guidance and adheres to the drawings and
specifications submitted and records of supervision have been maintained.
Any subsequent changes from the completion drawings shall be the responsibility of the owner.
ANNEX H
I hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection or material alteration in/of building No ...........................
or the ........................... on/in Plot No ............................ in ColonylStreet ........................... MOHALLAIBAZARI
Road ...........................City ...........................hasbeen supemised bymeand has been completed on ...........................
........................... according to the plans sanctioned, vide No. ........................... dated ...................... The work
has been completed to my best satisfaction, the workmanship and all the materials (type and grade) have been
used strictly in accordance with general and detailed specifications. No provisions of the Code, no requisitions
made, conditions prescribed or orders issued thereunder have been transgressed in the course of the work. The
land is fit for construction for which it has been developed or re-developed or the building is fit for use for which
it has been erected, re-erected or altered, constructed and enlarged.
I hereby also enclose the plan of the building completed in all aspects.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 23
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
CONTENTS
FOREWORD .. . 3
1 SCOPE ... 7
2 TERMINOLOGY ... 7
3 LAND USE CLASSIFICATION AND USES PERMITTED ... 12
4 MEANS OF ACCESS ... 13
5 COMMUNITY OPEN SPACES AND AMENITIES . .. 15
6 REQUIREMENTS OF PLOTS ... 21
7 CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS ... 22
8 OPEN SPACES (WITHIN A PLOT) ... 23
9 AREA AND HEIGHT LIMITATIONS ... 26
10 OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES ... 28
FOREWORD
This Part covers development control rules, including such aspects as sub-division and layout rules, land use
classifications, open spaces, area and height limitations, means of access, and parking spaces; this part also
covers the general building requirements, such as the requirements of parts of buildings, provision of lifts, etc.
It is expected that for proper coordination and enforcement of the development control rules and general building
requirements, the departments concerned, namely, the town planning department and the building department,
will coordinate the total development and building activity at both organizational and technical levels.
Particular attention is invited to Table 3 on floor area ratio (FAR) limitations. It is emphasized that the floor area
of a single storey building is limited in absolute terms by the type of construction and occupancy class. Also, the
absolute floor areas for different types of construction and different occupancies have a definite ratio among
Limitation of areas and heights of buildings is achieved in this country by specifying it in terms of floor area ratio
(FAR) or floor space index (FSI). The significance of the contribution of different types of construction giving
different fire resistances has not been taken cognizance of in specifying FAR for different occupancies, in the
present development control rules and municipal byelaws of the country. Table 3, therefore, gives the comparative
ratios of FAR between types of buildings and occupancy classes and these have been specified mainly from the
fire protection aspect of buildings. To arrive at the actual FAR for different buildings coming up in different
areas, the Authority should further modify them, by taking into consideration other aspects like density of any
area, parking facilities required, the traffic load (road width) and the services available. The heights of buildings
shall also be regulated, keeping in view the local fire fighting facilities.
In some state byelaws, the FAR (or FSI) has been expressed in the form of percentage. However, the Committee
responsible for preparation of this Code is of the opinion that, it being a ratio should be expressed only in the
form of a ratio, as done in this Part.
It is particularly to be borne in mind by the Authority that the ratios are definitive and it can assess the particular
FAR for a type of construction and for an occupancy and establish a new table, but retaining the comparative
ratios as given in Table 3.
Keeping in view the enormous problems faced by the country with regard to the ever increasing squatter settlements/
pavement dwellers in urban areas (cities of all sizes), it is imperative that all the urban local bodies sooner or later
evolve schemes for their rehabilitation. The resources are meagre and the problems are enormous. There has
been a tendency on the part of a number of development agenciesflocal bodies to link space norms with
affordability. Affordability is an important criterion but at the same time a public agency cannot ignore the basic
minimum needs of the family to be housed (including the mental, physical and social health of the marginalized
groups, which is linked with shelter). The local bodies shall have to evolve appropria~ policies for their integration
with the broad urban society and generate/allocate resources and more importantly adopt a planning process,
which are people friendly. The Government of India has also formulated the National Slum Policy to this effect.
Therefore, keeping in view the needs of low income housing, to cater to Economically Weaker Sections of
Society (EWS) and Low Income Group (LIG), the requirements on planning, design of layouthhelter have
been rationalized and the same are provided in this Part. This will contribute significantly in the massive
housing programmed undertaken for the low income sector. This information is based on the provisions
of IS 8888 (Part 1) : 1993 ‘Guide for requirements of low income housing: Part 1 Urban areas (jirst revision)’.
Further, city development process would need a dynamic approach to take care of urban renewal and also
development needs in dense core areas of the cities. Innovative approaches in planning and design with participating
models of public private-people’s partnership become necessary to solve the emerging development needs. With
Urbanization in India is taking place at a rapid pace. With 5 million population in cities at the time of independence,
it has already crossed 28 million (2001 census). It is likely to be 50 million by 2021. The number of cities and
towns have been expanding and there are 5161 cities and towns of various sizes. In the Indian practice cities
over 50 lakhs population have been identified as mega-cities (6 in number) and cities over 10 lakhs (29 in
number) population as metro-cities. These 35 cities above 10 lakhs population is likely to be above 70 by 2021.
The other cities are either small or medium towns or cities with different population limits. Urbanization in each
of above cities and towns (mega-cities, metro-cities, small and medium towns and cities) will be different in
nature and the development challenges are also different keeping in view the extent of urbanization,
industrialization, commercialization and the nature of transportation needs. Therefore, the Code provisions should
be appropriately utilized depending upon the need of hierarchy of cities for which the administrative and technical
The first version of this Part was prepared in 1970. As a result of incorporation of this Part in the revised
development control rules and building byelaws of some municipal corporations and municipalities, some useful
suggestions had emerged. First revision of this part was brought out in. 1983, where these suggestions were
incorporated to the extent possible. The major modifications incorporated in the first revision included:
a) Addition of development control rules giving guidance on means of access, community spaces and
other aspects required for planning layouts.
b) Addition of provisions regarding plot sizes and frontage for different types of buildings, such as detached,
semi-detached, row type and special housing schemes.
c) Requirements of open spaces for other occupancies, such as educational, institutional, assembly, industrial
buildings, etc, were included.
d) Provisions relating to interior open space were elaborated, including requirements for ventilation shaft.
e) Requirements of open spaces for group housing development were covered.
f) Requirements of off-street parking spaces were covered.
g) Requirements for greenbelts and landscaping including norms for plantations of shrubs and trees were
covered.
h) Requirements of certain parts of buildings, such as loft, store room, garage, basement, chimney, parapet,
cabin, boundary wall, wells, septic tanks, office-cum-letter box room, meter room were included.
j) Special requirements of low income housing were covered.
The term Development Control Rules used in this Part encompasses the related aspects comprehensively with a
view to promoting orderly development of an area.
This second revision is being brought out to incorporate the modifications found necessary in light of the experience
gained with the use of this Part. Significant modifications incorporated in thk revi’sion include:
a) Terminology given in this Part has been made exhaustive by incorporating definitions of additional
terms used, such as, access, chimney, to erect, etc, and number of terms pertaining to cluster planning
for housing.
b) Detailed planning norms/open spaces for various amenities such as educational facilities, health care
facilities, socio-cultural facilities, distribution services, police, civil defence and home guards, and fire
services have been included.
c) Off-street parking requirements have now been also included for cities with population (i) between’
1000000 and 5000000, and (ii) above 5000000 (see Annex B).
d) Special requirements for low income housing given in the earlier version have been modified and
updated (see Annex C) based on IS 8888 (Part 1) : 1993 ‘Guide for requirements of low income housing:
ONECOMMON
ENTRY
FIG. 2 CLOSEDCLUSTER
GROUP OPEN
SPACE INA CLUSTER
6 ,.
10 9 s 7
;~l
11
12
13 4
14 3
A
2
15 +7 18
16 1
FIG. 3 CLUSTER
FIG. 6 INTERLOCKING
CLUSTER
10 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
FIG. 7 OPEN CLUSTER
2.60 Owuer-Person or bodyhaving a legal interest 2.70 Row Housing/Row Type Building — A row of
in land and/or building thereon. This includes free buildings, with only front, rear and interior open spaces
holders, leaseholders or those holding a sub-lease where applicable.
2.63 Partition — An interior non-load bearing barrier, 2.76 Site, Depth of — The mean horizontal distance
one storey or part-storey in height. between the front and rear site boundaries.
2.64 Plinth — The portion of a structure between the 2.77 Site, Double Frontage — A site, having a
surface of the surrounding ground and surface of the frontage on two streets, other than a comer plot.
floor, immediately above the ground. 2.78 Site, Interior or Tandem — A site access to
2.65 Plinth Area — The built up covered area which is by a passage from a street whether such
measured at the floor level of the basement or of any passage forms part of the site or not.
‘f
storey. 2.79 Staircover (or MUMTY) — A structure with a
2.66 Porch — A covered structure supported on roof over a staircase and its landing built to “enclose
pillars or otherwise for the purpose of pedestrian or only the stairs for the purpose of providing protection
vehicular approach to a building. from weather and not used for human habitation.
2.67 Road — See 2.82. 2.80 Storey — The portion of a building included
between the surface of any floor and the surface of the
2.68 Road Line — See 2.84. floor next above it, or if there be no floor above it,
then the space between any floor and the ceiling next
2.69 Room Height — The vertical distance measured
above it.
from the finished floor surface to the finished ceiling
surface. Where a finished ceiling is not provided, the 2.81 Storey, Topmost — The uppermost storey in a
underside of the joists or beams or tie beams shall building whether constructed wholly or partly on the
determine the upper point of measurement. roof.
NOTES
1 Areas of informal activities may be identified in the above land use categories at Level 2.
2 Mixed use zone may be identified at the development plan level, having more than one use zone with mixed activities of
such use zones.
3 In all, there could be 35 use zones at the development plan level within eight land use categories at the perspective plan
level as given in the above table.
4 Use premises for different activities could be provided at the project/action plan level or with the approval of the Authority
as the case may be.
5 Use zone regulations for the use permissibility could be decided by the town planner depending upon the requirement/
feasibility.
3.2 The various building uses and occupancies (see 7) 3.6 Fire Safety
permitted on the various zones shall be as given in the Buildings shall be so plapned, designed and constructed
Master Plan. as to ensure fire safety and this shall be done as per
3.3 Uses to be in Conformity with the Zone Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’.
Table 1 Width and Length of Means of Access 4.3.4 In the interest of general development of an area,
(Clause 4.3) the Authority may require the means of access to be of
larger width than that required under 4.3 and 4.3.1.
SI Width of Means Length of Means
No. of Access of Access 4.3.5 In existing built-up areas in the case of plots
m m facing streetimeans of access less than 4.5 m in width,
(1) (2) (3) the plot boundary shall be shifted to be away by 2.25 m
0 6.0 75 from the central line of the street/means of accessway
ii) 7.5 150 to give rise to a new streetimeans of accessway of 4.5 m
iii) 9.0 250
iv) 12.0 400 width.
v) 18.0 1000
vi) 24.0 above 1000 4.4 The means of access shall be levelled, metalled,
flagged, paved, sewered, drained, chanelled, lighted,
N~ — If the developmentis only on one side of the meansof laid with water supply line and provided with trees for
access,the prcacrihedwidthsmaybe mfuced by 1m in eachcase.
shade to the satisfaction of the Authority free of
In no case, development on plots shall be permitted encroachment by any structure or fixture so as not to i
unless it is accessible by a public street of width not reduce its width below the minimum required under 4.3
less than 6 m. and shall be maintained in a condition to the satisfaction
of the Authority.
of the pathway; the length of the pathway shall be not development on highways/other roads referred to
more than 50 m. above, the operation of this clause shall be exempted.
These provisions shall, however, be subject to the
4.3.3 The length of the main means of access shall provisions of the relevant State Highway Act, and
be determined by the distance from the farthest plot National Highway Act.
(building) to the public street. The length of the
subsidiary accessway shall be measured from the 4.6 For high rise buildings and buildings other than
point of its origin to the next wider road on which it residential, the following additional provisions of
meets. means of access shall be ensured:
For intersection junctions of roads meeting at right In the case of sub-division of land in industrial zones
angles as well as other than right angles, the rounding of area 0.8 hectare or more, 5 percent of the total area
off or cut off or splay or similar treatment shall be shall be reserved as amenity open space which shall
done, to the approval of the Authority, depending upon also serve as a general parking space; when such
the width of roads, the traffic generated, the sighting amenity open space exceeds 1500 m2, the excess area
angle, etc, to provide clear sight distance. could be utilized for the construction of buildings for
banks, canteens, welfare centres and such other
4.9 The building line shall be set back at least 3 m common purposes considered necessary for the
from internal means of access in a layout of buildings industrial user, as approved by the Authority.
in a plot subject to provisions of 8.2.1.
5.4.1 In all industrial plots measuring 1000 m2 or more
5 COMMUNITY OPEN SPACES AND AMENITIES in area, 10 percent of the total area shall be provided as
an amenity open spacetoamaximumof2500 m2. Such
5.1 Residential and Commercial Zones an amenity open space shall have a means of access and
In any layout or sub-division of land measuring 0.3 shall be so located that it could be conveniently utilized
hectare of more in residential and commercial zones, as such by the persons working in the industry.
the community open spaces shall be reserved for 5.5 Other Amenities
recreational purposes which shall as far as possible be
In addition to community open spaces, the layouts shall
provided in one place or planned out for the use of the
provide for the amenities as given in 5.5.1 to 5.5.6.
community in clusters or pockets.
These provisions may be modified based on specific
5.1.1 The community open spaces shall be provided requirements, as decided by the Authority.
5.5.6 Fire
c) Banking
1) Extension counters with ATM facility (1 for every 15000 population)
i) Floor area for counters 75 m2
ii) Floor area for ATM 6 m2
2) Bank with locker, ATM and other banking facilities (1 for 100000 population)
Area 2500 m2
5.5.9 Shopping
The site shall be identified in locations, which are not proximous to residential areas
5.6 Every layout or sub-division shall take into account 6 REQUIREMENTS OF PLOTS
the provisions of development plan and if the land is 6.1 No building shall be constructed on any site, on
affected by any reservation for public purposes, the any part of which there is deposited refuse, excreta or
Authority may agree to adjust the location of such other offensive matter objectionable to the Authority,
reservations to suit the development. until such refuse has been removed therefrom and the
site has been prepared or left in a manner suitable for corresponding to the type of development as given
building purposes to the satisfaction to the Authority. below:
Any land passage or other area within the curtilage of NOTE — For low incomehousingsee 12.20.
a building shall be effectively drained by surface water
drains or other means. 6.6.1.1 The minimum size of the site for group housing
6.3.1 The written approval of the Authority shall be development shall be as given in the Master Plan and
obtained for connecting any sub-soil or surface water local development control rules.
drain to a sewer. 6.6.2 Industrial
6.4 Distance from Electric Lines
8 OPEN SPACES (WITHIN A PLOT) beat least 5 m from the centre line of the street
(see 4.3.5).
8.1 General
NOTE — This limiting distance has to be determined
Every room intended for hum’an habitation shall abut by the Authorityfor individualroad/streetwidthstaking
on an interior or exterior open space or an open into accountthe traffic flow.
VERANDAH open to such interior or exterior open
8.2.1.2 Rear open space
space.
a) Every residential building shall have a rear
8.1.1 The open spaces inside and around a building
open space, forming an integral part of the
have essentially to cater for the lighting and ventilation
site, of an average width of 3 m and at no
requirements of the rooms abutting such open spaces,
place measuring less than 1.8 m, except that
and in the case of buildings abutting on streets in the
in the case of a back-to-back sites, the width
front, rear or sides, the open spaces provided shall be
of the rear open space shall be 3 m throughout.
sufficient for the future widening of such streets.
Subject to the condition of free ventilation,
8.1.2 Open Spaces Separate for each Building or Wing the open space left up to half the width of the
plot shall also be taken into account for
The open spaces shall be separate or distinct for each
calculating the average width of the rear open
building and where a building has two or more wings,
space. For plots of depths less than 9 m, for
each wing shall have separate or distinct open spaces
a) Every building fronting a street shall have a a) Every semi-detached and detached building
front space, forming an integral part of the shall have a permanently open air space,
site as below: forming an integral part of the site as below:
1) For detached buildings there shall be a
sl Front Open Space, Width of Street minimum side open space of 3 m on both
No. A4in Fronting the Plot the sides.
NOTE — For detached residential buildlngs up
(1) (:) (:) in heighton plots with a frontageless than
to 7 m
12m (see 6.61), one of the side open spaces may
i) 1.51) up to 7.5’) be reduced to J.5 m.
ii) 3.0 7.5 to 18 2) For semi-detached buildings, there shall
iii) 4.5 18t030
be a minimum side open space of 3 m on
iv) 6.0 Above 30
one side.
I) For buildl~gs Up to a maximumheight 7 m. NOTE— For semi-detachedbuildingsup to 7 m
in height on plots with a frontage less than 9 m
NOTE — In case a building abuts two or more streets, the (see 6.6.1), the side open spaces may be reduced
value of open paces is to be based on the average width of to 1.5 m.
streets, subject to a minimum of 1.8 m for cases (ii), (iii) and
(iv) above.
3) For row-type buildings, no side open is
required.
b) For streets less than 7.5 m in width, the b) In the case of semi-detached buildings, the
distance of the building (building line) shall open spaces provided on one side shall be as
Every such interior or exterior open air space, unless f) Hazardous occupancies — The open spaces
the latter is a street, shall be maintained for the benefit around the building shall be as specified for
of such building exclusively and shall be entirely within industrial buildings [see 8.3.1 (e)].
the owner’s own premises.
8.4 Exemption to Open Spaces
8.2.6.1 If such interior or exterior open air space is
8.4.1 Projections into Open Spaces
intended to be used for the benefit of more than one
8.4.2.1 In existing built-up or congested areas, no Additions or extensions to a building shall be allowed,
projection of any sort whatsoever, except sunshades provided the open spaces for the additionslextensions
(see 8.4.2.3) extending more than 23 crn below a height satisfy 8.2 after such additions/extensions are made.
of4.3 m, shall project over theroad orover any drain
or over any portion outside the boundaries of the site, 9 AREA AND HEIGHT LIMITATIONS
provided the projection arising out of the vertical part 9.1 General
of the rain-water spouts projecting at the road level or
the water pipe may be permitted in accordance with The limitation of area and height of buildings of
the drainage plan. different occupancy classes and types of construction
shall be achieved by specifying it in terms of FAR,
8.4.2.2 Porticos in existing developed area which shall take into account the various aspects that
Porticos in bazaar areas of existing developed areas govern in specifying FAR as given below:
may be permitted to project on road land subject to the a) Occupancy class;
following limitations:
b) Types of construction;
a) Porticos may be allowed on such roads c) Width of street fronting the building and the
leaving a minimum clear space of 18 m traffic load;
8.5.1 Safeguard Against Reduction of Open Space a) The maximum height of building shall not
No construction work on a building shall be allowed exceed 1.5 times the width of road abutting
if such work operates to reduce an open air space of plus the front open space;
any other adjoining building, belonging to the same b) If a building abuts on two or more streets of
owner to an extent less than what is prescribed at the different widths, the building shall be deemed
time of the proposed work or to reduce further such to face upon the street that has the greater
open space if it is already less than that prescribed. width and the height of the building shall be
9.5.3 Butcheries, tanneries and solid waste disposal 10 OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES
sites shall not be permitted within 10 km from the
aerodrome reference point. 10.1 The off-street parking (on-site parking) spaces
in a plot to be provided shall be in accordance with
9.6 Group Housing Annex B. The spaces given in Annex B shall be
considered by the Authority in conjunction with the
9.6.1 Group housing development may be in low rise
Development Rules, in force, if any.
house clusters or multi-storeyed apartments for high
density development. 10.2 The spaces to be left out for off-street parking as
given in 10.3 to 10.6 shall be in addition to the open
9.6.2 No limit to floors and height shall be applicable,
spaces left out for lighting and ventilation purposes as
but the coverage and floor area ratio for various
given in 15.
densities may be as given in Table 4 unless otherwise
provided in the Master Plan and local development 10.2.1 Further 50 percent of the open spaces required
control rules. around buildings under 8 maybe allowed to be utilized
for parking or loading or unloading spaces, provided a
Table 4 Floor Area Ratio and Coverage for
Greenbelts and landscaping including plantation of 11.6.3 The rain water run-off shall be suitably directed
shrubs and trees help to certain extent in enhancing to Recharging Wells in plots belonging to the locrd
the environmental quality. authority and of appropriate design.
11.1.1 Planting of trees in streets and in open spaces 11.6.4 The local authority should encourage for
should be done carefully to take advantage of both collection of rain water from roofs and terraces and direct
shades and sunshine without obstructing the flow of the same either to a storage tank or to a recharging well.
wind circulation and sight. Their advantage for abating
11.6.5 Buildings having central air-conditioning plants
glare and for providing cool andlor warm pockets in
requiring water for cooling purposes may not be
developed areas should also be taken.
allowed to use fresh water for the purpose.
11.2 Norms for Planting of Shrubs and Trees 11.6.6 Commercial or residential muhi-storey complexes
11.2.1 Suitable provisions may be made for greeneries may use recycled water for flushing of toilets. Separate
including plantation of shrubs and trees as a part of storage tanks and separate &ribution pipes shall be
environmental protection in general. This aspect shall provided for the purpose.
be taken care of from the initial stage of town and
12 REQUIREMENTS OF PARTS OR BUILDINGS
country planning, zoning and planning of development
of particular area and group housing. Finally, this 12.1 Plinth
aspect shall also be taken into account in planning
12.1.1 Main Buildings
individual building of different occupancies.
The plinth or any part of a building or outhouse shall
11.2.2 The types of plants, the distance between trees/
be so located with respect to the surrounding ground
plants from the building and the distance between plants
level that adequate drainage of the site is assured. The .
shall be carefully worked out keeping in view the
height of the plinth shall be not less than 450 mm from
structural safety and aesthetic requirements of buildings.
the surrounding ground level.
11.3 Trees shall be numbered area-wise, plot-wise and
12.1.2 Interior Courtyards and Covered Parking
road-wise by the concerned authority and they shall
be checked periodically. Every interior courtyard shall be raised at least 150 mm
The area of habitable room shall not be less than 9.5 m2, a) be so situated that at least one of its walls shall
where there is only one room with a minimum width open to external aiq
of 2.4 m. Where there are two rooms, one of these b) not be directly over or under any room other
shall not be less than 9.5 m2 and the other not less than than another water-closet, washing place, bath
7.5 m2, with a minimum width of 2.1 m. or terrace, unless it has a water-tight flooq
12.3 Kitchen c) have the platform or seat made of water-tight
non-absorbent material;
12.3.1 Height
d) be enclosed by walls or partitions and the
The height of a kitchen measured from the surface of surface of every such wall or partition shrdl
the floor to the lowest point in the ceiling (bottom slab) be finished with a smooth impervious material
shall not be less than 2.75 m, except for the portion to to a height of oot less than 1 m above the floor
accommodate floor trap of the upper floor. of such a roqrn;
12.3.2 Size e) be provided. with an impervious floor
covering, slop,img towards the drain with a
The area of a kitchen where separate dining area is
suitable grade and not towards VERANDAH
provided, shall be not less than 5.0 m2 with a minimum
or any other room, and
width of 1.8 m. Where there is a separate store, the
area of the kitchen maybe reduced to 4.5 m2. A kitchen, f) have a window or ventilator, opening to a
which is intended for use as a dining area also, shall shaft or open space, of area not less than
have a floor area of not less than 7.5 m2 with a 0.3 mz with side not less than 0.3 m.
minimum width of 2.1 m. 12.4.4 No room containing water-closets shall be used
12.3.3 Other Requirements for any purpose except as a lavatoxy and no such room
shall open directly into any kitchen or cooking space
Every room to be used as kitchen shall have:
by a door, window or other opening. Every room
a) unless separately provided in a pantry, means containing water-closet shall have a door completely
for the washing of kitchen utensils which closing the entrance to it.
The minimum head-room of ledge or TND/loft shall a) Private Garage — 3.0 m x 6.0 m, minimum;
be 2.2 m. The maximum height of loft shall be 1.5 m. and
b) Public Garage — Based on the number of
12.5.2 Size
vehicles parked, etc (see 10).
A ledge or TAND/loft in a habitable room shall not
cover more than 25 percent of the area of the floor on 12.9 Basement
which it is constructed and shall not interfere with the 12.9.1 The basement shall not be used for residential
ventilation of the room under any circumstances. purposes.
providing access and exit from higher floors. applicable to boundary walls of jails. In
Where the staircase is continuous in the case industrial buildings, electric sub-stations,
of buildings served by more than one transformer stations, institutional buildings
staircase, the same shall be of enclosed type like sanitoria, hospitals, industrial buildings
serving as a fire separation from the basement like workshops, factories and educational
floor and higher floors. Open ramps shall be buildings like schools, colleges, including
permitted if they are constructed within the hostels, and other uses of public utility
building line subject to the provision of (d). undertakings and strategically sensitive
buildings, a height up to 2.4 m may be
The exist requirements in basements shall comply with
permitted by the Authority.
the provisions of Part 4 ‘Fire and Life Safety’.
12.14 Wells
12.10 Chimneys
Wells, intended to supply water for human consumption
The chimneys shall be built at least 0.9 m above flat
or domestic purposes, where provided, shall comply with
roofs, provided the top of the chimneys is not below
the requirements of 12.14.1 and 12.14.2.
the top of the adjacent parapet wall. In the case of
sloping roofs, the chimney top shall not be less than 12.14.1 Location
0.6 m above the ridge of the mof in which the chimney
penetrates. The well shall be located:
For requirements regarding electrical installations in For requirements regarding water supply, drainage and
buildings including lightning protection of buildings, sanitation (including solid waste management) and gas
reference shall be made to Part 8 ‘Building Services, supply, reference shall be made to Part 9 ‘Plumbing
Section 2 Electrical and Allied Installations’. Services’.
36 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
I
I
I
A 1“
PART 3 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
37
erected, or no tree which is likely to grow or ordinarily Table 6 Height Restriction with Respect to
grows higher than the height specified in the Tables 5 Transitional Area
and 6, shall be planted, on any land within a radius of (Clauses A-2.1 and A-2.1.2)
20 km from ARP of the aerodromes listed in A-3,
excluding the land covered by A-1.2. S1 D~tance from the Inner Maximum Permissible
No. Boundary of the Transitiorrat Height Above the
Area Specified Above Elevation of the ARP
Table 5 Height Restriction with Respect to
(1) (2) (3)
Approach Funnels
i) Up to a distance of 21 m .
(Clauses A-2.1 am! A-2.1.1)
ii) More than 21 m but not 3
exceedhg 42 m
sl Area Maximum Permissible
No. Height Ahove the iii) Mote than 42 m but not 6
Elevation of the Nearest exceeding 63 m
Runway End iv) More than 63 m but not 9
(1) (2) (3) exceeding 84 m
v) More than 84 m but not 12
i) More than 360 m but not 6 exceeding 105 m
exceeding 510 m
vi) More than 105 m but not 15
ii) More than 510 m but not 9 exceeding 126 m
exceeding 660 m
vii) More than 126 m but not 18
iii) More than 660 m but not 12 exceeding 147 m
to transitional area and shall be applicable for the land ii) The area lying in a belt of 457.2 m 6
enclosed in the transitional area of all runways at an width between the Fastem Bank of
the Chakai canat and a tine running
aerodrome listed in A-3 where distances are measured
parallel to this canal for the entire
from the associated runway strip and the edge of the length
associated approach funnels, forming the inner 15.2
iii) A paratlel belt of 762 m width
boundary of the transitional area and along a line at running East of area (ii) above
right angles to the centre line of the runway.
iv) A parattel belt of 609.6 m width 24.3
running East of area (iii) above
A-2.2 For the Aerodrome at Thiruvananthapuram
v) Rest of the area extending up to 20 30.4 t
No building or structure higher than the height km fromARP
specified in Table 7 shall be constructed or erected, or
no tree which is likely to grow or ordinarily grows
A-3 AERODROMES
higher than the height specified in Table 7, shall be
planted, on any level within a radius of 20 km from A-3.1 A list of aerodromes indicating runway
ARP of the aerodrome at Thiruvananthapuram, directions, runway elevations and ARP elevations is
excluding the land covered by A-1.3. given in Table 8.
vi) Mercantile 300 mz area 200 mz area 100 mz area 50 mz area 25 m2 area
(see Note 2) or fraction or fraction or fraction or fraction or fraction
thereof thereof thereof thereof thereof
vii) Industrial 400 m2 area 300 mz area 200 m2 area 100 m2 area 50 m2 area
or fraction or fraction or fraction or fraction or fraction
thereof thereof thereof thereof thereof
viii) Storage — — 500 m2 floor 250 m2 area 125 m2 area
area or part or fraction or fraction
thereof , thereof thereof
NOTES
1 In the case of auditoria for educational buildings, parking space shall be provided as per S1 No. (iv)
2 For plots up to 50 mz, as in the case of shops, parking spaces need not be insisted upon.
3 For other institutions, transpoticommunication centre, parking space requirement shafl be assessed based on the proposed building.
C-1.l These guidelines cover the planning and C-2.2.1 In the land to be developed, at least 75 percent
general building requirements of low income housing of the plots maybe of the size less than or up to 60 m2
for houses having a maximum plinth area of 40 m2 per dwelling unit in metropolitan towns and 100 m2 in
including future expansion. The requirement other towns and hill areas. Remaining 25 percent of
regarding layout planning of low income housing the plots may be more than 60 m2, however, no plot
colonies are applicable to public and private agencies/ shall be more than 200 m2. In case of group housing or
government bodies. The requirements on design and flatted development at least 75 percent units should
construction of buildings for low income housing in have a plinth area (excluding external circulation such
approved layouts are applicable to all private and as stairs, lifts, lobbies, etc) up to or not exceeding 40 m2
public agencies. including future expansion.
C-2.2.2 The mix of plot of different sizes should have
C-1.2 In these planning standards, the general master
a wide range to accommodate the need of lower income
plan requirement for community open spaces estimated
group. The project may include more than one site
at 0.3 ha for thousand persons is provided; road areas
provided they are in the same neighbourhood.
are worked out between 10 and 20 percent of the site
area; one nursery school of 0.1 ha is provided for a C-2.2.3 The layout should generally conform to the
population of 1500 and shopping centres at 4 shops following land use:
per thousand population are also covered. -. .—. -.
Lund Under Each Use
C-1.3 It is emphasized that this type of development
should apply to clusters of 400 dwelling units, so General Hill Area’
Saleable
distributed in the development under consideration as
i) Residential 50 percent, 35 percent
to maintain the overall densities of the master plan for
Min
the area.
ii) Work places, schools, 20 percent, 15 percent
institutions, shops, Max
C-2 PLANNING community places, etc
C-2.1 Type of Development Non-Saleable
Roads, pedestrian paths, 30 percent, 50 percent
The type of development for low income housing shall drains, public and semi- Max
be plotted developments as row housing/flatted public open spaces
development as row housing or group housing on NOTES
cluster pattern. 1 Any neighborhood development should have provision for
42 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
basic civic and community facilities, however, where such C-2.5 Height of Building
facilities are available in proximity the same could be considered
and, in that case, the area under residential use could be increased The height of building shall not exceed 15 m.
correspondingly.
NOTES
2 If land required under statutory provisions of master planl
development plan is proportionately higher but serves larger 1 For buildlngs up to the height of 15 m, there is no need to
city needs, re-adjustment of the recommended land use pattern provide lifts.
can be considered. Such provisions should, however, be 2 Housing for the low-income group shall preferably be up to
carefully reviewed by the planning authorities to keep them to a maximum of two storeys.
the barest minimum levels. 3 Buildings for housing beyond 15 m in height should be
resorted to in exceptional circumstances and it should be
governed by provisions laid down in this Code.
C-2.3 Plot Area
The minimum plot size with ground coverage not For size of open cluster and open space, set backs,
exceeding 75 percent, shall not be less than 40 mz in vehicular access and pedestrian paths in cluster
small and medium town and not less than 30 mz in planning, the provisions given in Annex E shall apply.
metropolitan cities. Plot sizes below 30 m2 but not less
C-3 GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
than 15 m2 may be permitted in case of cluster planning,
however, in such cases the ground coverage and FSI C-3.1 General
ii) Cities 100-125 dwelling units C-3.3.1.1 To facilitate incremental housing in case of
per hectare flatted development or otherwise, habitable space at
iii) Metropolitan Cities 125-150 dwelling units mezzanine level may be permitted. The minimum size
per hectare of such a mezzanine floor should not be lesser than
6.5 m2 and such a floor should occupy not more than
C-2.4.2 In case of developments with per dwelling 50 percent of the room area of which it is a part. Such
unit covered area of 15 m2 maximum densities of 500 a mezzanine floor should have appropriate openings
dwelling units per hectare shall be permissible. to facilitate light and ventilation as per C-3.6. Minimum
The minimum width of individual balcony, where The circulation area on any floor inclu&g staircase,
provided, shall be 0.9 m and shall not be more than shall not exceed 8 m2/dwelling unit.
1.2 m and it shall not project beyond the plot line and C-3.9 Water Seal Latrine
on roads or pathway.
No building plan shall be approved and no building
C-3.4 Basement shall be deemed to have been completed and fit for
human occupation unless provision is made for water
No basement floor shall be allowed.
seal latrine. No dry latrine shall be allowed. Water seal
C-3.5 Minimum Height latrines can also be provide on the basis of community
toilets or shared toilets as per the recommendation
The minimum height of rooms/spaces shall be as given in good practice [3(3)].
follows:
Where leaching pits are used, it should be constructed
a) Habitable room 2.6 m within the premises of the households as it would be
b) Kitchen 2.6 m economical as well as facilitate their cleaning. However,
c) Bath/water-closet 2.1 m where, due to space constraint, construction of pits
d) Corridor 2.1 m within the premises may not be possible, pits may be
constructed in places like lanes, streets and roads.
C-3.5.1 In the case of sloping roofs, the average height
of roof for habitable rooms shall be 2.6 m and the In case the pit is located under the road, street or foot
minimum height at eaves shall be 2.0 m. path, the inverted level of the pipe connecting the
latrine pan with the pit shall be at least 1.1 m below
C-3.6 Lighting and Ventilation ground level or below the bottom of the water main
The openings through windows, ventilators and other existing within a distance of 3 m from the pits
openings for lighting and ventilation shall be in whichever is more. Construction of such pits may be
accordance with 15.1.2. in accordance with good practice [3(4)].
44 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
The water seal latrine should be properly maintained be provided. In the absence of piped water supply, hand
and kept in sanitary condition by the owner or the pumps may be used for provision of water supply.
occupier. The contents of the septic tanks, soak pits,
C-5.3 Recognizing the need for informal use of space
leach pits, etc should be periodically emptied.
for shopping and informal occupation like road side
The leach pits should be cleaned only after 2 years of repairs, pan shops, etc, it is suggested that about % of
their being put out of service after they were full. the total shopping area in a layout should be reserved
for such informal uses to cater to the needs of low
C-4 ROADS AND PATHWAYS income families.
The area under roads and pathways in such housing C-5.4 The infrastmctural services shall be provided
projects should normally not exceed 20 percent of the before the plots are handed over to individual owners.
total land area of the project.
C-6 SITE AND SERVICES SCHEMES
Access to the dwelling units, particularly where
motorized vehicles are not normally expected should C-6.1 The developed plot sizes shall be as per C-2.3.1.
be by means of paved footpaths with a right of way Services would have to be laid by the Agency
of 6 m and a pathway of 2 m only. The right of way concerned as per the provisions of the Code. In so far
should be adequate to allow for the plying of as roads and pathways are concerned, they could also
emergency vehicles and also for road side drains and be in line with C-4.
ANNEX D
(Clause 12.21)
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLANNING OF PUBLIC BUILDINGS
MEANT FOR USE OF PHYSICALLY CHALLENGED
D-1 GENERAL the public accessible to, and functional for the physically
challenged through and withiq~eir doors, without loss
D-1.l These requirements apply to all buildings and
of function, space or facility where the general public is
facilities used by the public, These apply to temporary
concerned. It supplements the general requirements of
or emergency conditions as well as permanent
the Code, and reflects _ concern for safety of life
conditions. It does not apply to private residences.
and limb. In cases of practical difllculty, unnecessary
These requirements are concerned with non- hardship, or extreme differences, the Authority may grant
ambulato~ disabilities, semi-ambulatory disabilities, exceptions from the literal requirements of this Amex or
sight disabilities, hearing disabilities, disabilities of permit the use of other methods or materials, but only
into-ordination, aging, allergies, heart and lung when it is clearly evident that equivalent facilities and
diseases, epilepsy, hemophilia, incontinence and protection are thereby secured.
enterostomy.
D-1.2 For the purpose of this Annex, the following
It is intended to make all buildings and facilities used by definitions shall apply.
D-1.2.3.3 Sight disabilities Because the term ‘ramp’ has a multitude of meanings
and uses, its use in this text is clearly defined as ramps
Total blindness or impairments affecting sight to the
with gradients (gradual slope joining two level
extent that the individual functioning in public areas surfaces) that deviate from what would otherwise be
is insecure or exposed to danger.
considered the normal level. An exterior ramp, as
D-1.2.3.4 Hearing disabilities distinguished from a ‘walk’, would be considered an
appendage to a building leading to a level above or
Deafness or hearing handicaps that might make an
below the existing ground level.
individual insecure in public areas because he is unable
to communicate or hear warning ,signals. D-1.2.8 Walk Walks
D-1.2.3.5 Disabilities of into-ordination Because the terms ‘walk’ and ‘walks’ have a multitude
of meanings and uses, their use in this standard is
Faulty co-ordination or palsy from brain spinal, or
clearly defined as a predetermined prepared surface,
peripheral nerve injury.
exterior pathway leading to or from a building or
D-1.2.3.6 People with allergies facility, or from one exterior area to another, placed
on the existing ground level and not deviating from
People with allergies may be sensitive to dust, mildew,
the level of the existing ground immediately adjacent.
pollen, animal hair, formalin, turpentine, etc. Some are
sensitive to contact with substances and materials, such D-2 SITE DEVELOPMENT
as, nickel, chromium and rubber.
D-2.1 Almost any building can be made accessible to
D-1.2.3.7 People with heart and lung diseases physically challenged persons by so planning the site
People with heart and lung diseases may only be able that the terraces, retaining walls and winding walks
to walk short distances and may be unable to climb are used effectively.
stairs. The requirements of these people are similar to D-2.1.1 Site development is the most effective means
those with impaired mobility. to resolve the problems created by topography,
D-1.2.3.8 People with epilepsy, hemophilia, etc definitive architectural designs or concepts, water table,
existing streets, and typical problems, singularly or
The requirements of those with epilepsy, hearnophilia, collectively, so that aggress, ingress and egress to
etc, are related primarily to the design of buildings and buildings by physically challenged maybe facilitated
the need to minimize the risk of injury caused by falling while preserving the desired design and effect of the
or encountering obstacles. architecture.
D-2.2.2 Such walks shall be of a continuing common D-2.3.2 A parking space open on one side, allowing
surface not interrupted by steps or abrupt changes in level. room for individuals in wheelchairs or individuals on
braces and crutches to get in and out of an automobile
D-2.2.3 Wherever walks cross other walks, driveways,
onto a level surface, is adequate. It should have a
or parking lots they should blend to a common level.
minimum width of 2700 mm preferably 2 800 mm
D-2.2.3.1 This requirement, does not require the for ambulant disabled and minimum 3 000 mm
MAX. GRADIENT 1 IN 10
50 mm KERB
1 r EXTENDED HANDRAIL AT
HEAD OF RAMP
50 mm KERB TO EXPOSED
SIDE OF RAMP
ALTERNATIVE STEPPED
APPROACH WHERE RAMP
GRADIENT EXCEEDS 1 IN 12
TREAD MIN. 300 mm
RISERS MAX. 150 mm
L
/
OR MAXIMUM OF 1:12 \
FOR SHORT DISTANCE
EXTENDED HANDRAIL 1
AT FOOT OF RAMP
RAMP ‘Inl *
UP OR UP OR 1800
DOWN 300 min
I 3 ‘
1800 J
t“5ii-380 min
FIG. 12 ENTRANCES
D-3.2.2 At least one entrance usable by individuals D-3.3.1.1 Two-leaf doors are not usable by those with
in wheelchairs shall be on a level that would make the disabilities defined in D-1.2.1, D-1.2.2 and D-1.2.5
elevators accessible. unless they operate by a sipgle effort, or unless one of
the two leaves meets the requirements of D-3.3.1.
D-3.3 Doors and Doorways
D-3.3.1.2 Side-hung doors
D-3.3.1 Doorwidth
To facilitate wheelchair manoeuvre, doors should be
To enable wheelchair users to pass through doors, the hung with the hinges in room corners. Doors opening
minimum clear width should be 900 mm and shall be out into corridors or circulation spaces should be
operable by a single effort. In certain cases the clem avoided as far as possible.
width should be 900 mm to 1000 m, for example, if
the wheelchair has to be turned in the doorway, where D-3.3.1.3 It is recommended that all doors have kick
there is a door-closer or at entrance doors to public plates extending from the bottom of the door to at least
buildings and in other situations where there is 400 mm from the floor, or be made of a material and
considerable traffic. finish that would safely withstand the abuse they might
“’Ll r--l
r I*
175 APPROX,
[ ‘,
x 1 1 r TOILET PAPER
.
? HOLDER
760 min. c
SUGGESTED I
POSITION FOR
B
FLUSH HANDLE 1~~$
..1 3jo
\
\ WASH HAND BASIN WITH
TOWEL DISPENSER OVER
RIM AT 810 mm ABOVE
255 APPROX. L FLOOR
ALTERNATIVE
7 \ VERTICAL
RAIL
FOR DOOR
L
s
9
RISING BUTQ/’ 1370 mm min. (3R 1520 mm WHERE
HINGES ~ DEPTH IS LESS THAN 1750 mm OR ————
DOOR IN ALTERNATIVE POSITION
..
Sa II
II II
II II
11 1{
II
PAPER II
II TOWEL II
II DISPENSER II
RA1l-AT 280 mm
ABOVE WC SEAT
II 7II}1
\
II
II
II TOILET
II rPAPER
4u VERTICAL ‘A ‘r
I Q*KmmTrn 4
II
\
II
tl
II
Ir
&
--!
Wc SEAT AT
BASIN RIM AT
780 mm
ABOVE FLOOR
500mm
ABOVE FLOOR
w II I I
r II
II
I I II
II
TOILET PAPER
II II
II
HOLDER
H II f
[
T280 mm
“ (j ‘-
b -J
330’mm
a -i
II Ih
II II \’ HORIZ~AL RAIL AT
II II 260 mmASOVE WC
I--’8”””71? \
\
SEAT L-
/’
“
VERTICAL RAIL
*900mm+
1295 mm HIGH
\
\ RECOMMENDED
EXTENSION TO
HORIZONTAL RAIL
-
T- HORIZONTAL
PULL RAIL
FIG. 19 SUGGESTED
PLANWC COMPARTMENT
FORTHEAMBULANT
r
RAIL AT 280 mm
ABOVE WC SEAT
!
“J
TOILET PAPER VERTIC/iL R&L c
HOLDER 835mm TO 1295 mm
ABOVE FLOOR
l--
280 mm
I
D-3.8.2 Drinking water fountains or water coolers be securely fitted to the wall to withstand heavy pressure.
shall be hand-operated, or hand and foot-operated. Handrails should turn in towards the wall at either end.
D-3.8.2.1 Conventional floormounted water coolers D-3.1O.1 Handrails should be approximately 900 mm
may be convenient to individuals in wheelchairs if a from the floor. The rail should be easy to grip, having
small fountain is mounted on the side of the cooler a circular section with a diameter of approximately
800 mm above the floor. 40 mm and fixed as shown in Fig. 21.
D-3.1O Handrails
Handrails are used as a locational and mobility aid by
All dmensions in milfimetres.
blind and visually impaired people, and as a support for
people with mobility impairments. The handrail should FIG. 21 FIXINGOF HAND RAIL
54 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
D-3.1O.2 To aid identification, the colour of the rail wall, to left of the door, preferably at a height of
should contrast with the wall behind. 1500 mm from the floor.
D-3.11 Elevators D-3.13.3 Doors that are not intended for normal use,
and that might prove dangerous if a blind person were
In a multi-storey building, elevators are essential to to exit or enter by them, should be made quickly
the successful functioning of physically disabled identifiable to the touch by knurling the door handle
individuals. They shall conform to the requirements or knob (see Fig. 22).
given in D-3.11.1 and D-3.11.2.
D-3.12 Controls
D-3.12.5 To facilitate operation for people with D-3.14.5 Information baspd on colour codes only
limited strength in arms and hands, handles should be should be avoided; colorblind people may find them
easy to grip and turn. difficult to understand.
Appropriate identification of specific facilities within This should be at least 800 mm wide, 600 mm deep
a building used by the public is particularly essential and 650 mm to 700 mm high. For wheelchair users,
to the blind. the convenient height of work tops is between
750 mm and 850 mm; flexible provision is preferred.
D-3.13.1 Raised letters or numbers shall be used to
Further, for wheelchair access to a work bench, wash
identify rooms or offices.
basin or table, a clear space for knees and footrests is
D-3.13.2 Such identification should be placed on the needed.
Pedestrian paths and vehicular access roads to clusters Cluster planning methodologies result in higher
separating two adjacent clusters may be bridged to densities with low rise structures. With per dwelling
provide additional dwelling units. While bridging the unit covered area of 15 mz densities of 500 dwelling
pedestrian path way minimum clearance should be one units per hectare (net) shall be permissible. Densities
storey height; length of such bridging should be not more higher than this should not allowed.
than two dwelling units. While bridging the vehicular
E-2.12 Group Toilet
access roads minimum clearance should be 6 m.
Cluster housing for economically weaker section
E-2.8 Vehicular Access families can have group toilets at the rate of one water-
A right of way of at least 6 m width should be provided closet, one bath and a washing place for three families.
up to the entrance to the cluster to facilitate emergency These shall not be community toilets, as keys to these
vehicle movement up to cluster. toilets shall be only with these three families, making
them solely responsible for the maintenance and
E-2.9 Pedestrian Paths upkeep of these toilets.
Built area of dwelling unit within cluster shall have no With the exception of clauses mentioned above,
setbacks from the path or road, space. Hence, the height requirements of building will be governed by the
of the building along the pathway or roads shall be not provision of this Code and good practice [3(1)].
less 60 percent of the height of the adjacent
than E-3.2 Requirements of fwe safety, structural design,
building subject to minimum of 3 m in case of pathway building services and plumbing services shall be as
and 6 m in case of vehicular access. specified in this Code.
ANNEX F
(Clause 12.23)
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOW INCOME HABITAT PLANNING
IN RURAL AREAS
58 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
r-”
b
a) Habitable room 2.75 m latrine pan with the pit shall be at least 1.1 m below
b) Kitchen 2.6 m ground level or below the bottom of the water main
2.2 m existing within a distance of 3 m from the pits
c) Bath/water-closet
whichever is more. Construction of such pits may be
d) Corridor 2.1 m
in accordance with [3(4)].
F-3.4.1 In the case of sloping roofs, the average height The water seal latrine should be properly maintained
of roof for habitable rooms shall be 2.75 m and the and kept in sanitary condition by the owner or the
minimum height at eaves shall be 2.10 m. occupier. The contents of the septic tanks, soak pits,
F-3.5 Lighting and Ventilation leach pits, etc, should be periodically emptied.
The openings through windows, ventilators and other The leach pits should be cleaned only after 2 years of
openings for lighting and ventilation shall be as per in their being put out of service after they were full.
accordance with 15.1.2. Location of sanitary facility either as part of the house
NOTE — The windows and other openings shall abut onto or separately shall be decided on the basis of felt
open spaces either through areas left open within the plot or perceptions.
the front, side and rear spaces provided in the layouts which
shall be deemed to be sufficient for light and ventilation F-3.8 The house site shall provide space for storage of
purposes. Wherever ventilatiotiighting is provided by means food grains and keeping cattle. A manure pit having a
ANNEX G
(Clause 12.24)
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEVELOPMENT PLANNING IN HILLY AREAS
G-3.1 The following standards shall be adopted in Development Planning in Hilly areas.
G-4 ROADS AND PATHS buildings on one side do not shade those on the other
side.
G-4.1 Street orientation shall preferably be East-West
to allow for maximum South sun to enter the buildings. G-4.2 The following road widths shall be adopted for
The street shall be wide enough to ensure that the urban roads in Hilly areas.
G-4,3 Hill Road Manual (IRC:SP:48-1998), a G-5 COMMUNITY FACILITIES AND SERVICES
publication of the Indian Roads Congress shall be
G-5.1 The following standards shall be adopted for
referred to for detailed guidelines for planning roads
community facilities and Services in Hilly areas.
in Hilly areas.
A. Educational
Primary school 4000 1-2 0.20 to 0.30
Secondary school (10+2) 15000 5-7 0.30 to 0.50
Industrial training centre — 8-12 0.30 to 0.60
College 30000 8-12 2.00 to 3.00
B. Health
Health sub-centre 3000 2-4 0.025 to 0.067
Primary health centre 20000 16-20 0.105 to 0.210
(25-50 beds) 80000 16-20 0.840 to 2.100
Hospital (200-250 beds) 1000 16-20 0.050 to 0.100
Vetenmuy centre
c. Other facilities
Community welfare centre 16000 5-7 0.10 to 0.15
D. Services
Fire station 50000 . 0.30 to 0.80
General post office 50000 10-15 0.20 to 0.40
G-6 GENERAL BUILDING REQUIREMENTS G-6.3 Passive Systems for Climatic Control
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ Code of practice for sanitation
(4) 12314:1987
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The for leaching pits for rural
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time community
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may
(5) 4878:1986 Byelaws for construction of
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance
cinema buildings (first
revision)
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the Code.
(6) 4838:1990 Anthropometric dimensions for
IS No. Title
school children age group 5-17
(1) 8888 Guide for requirements of low years (second revision)
(Part 1): 1993 income housing: Part 1 Urban (7) 4963:1987 Recommendations for buildings
area (first revision) and facilities for the physically
(2) 3792:1978 Guide for heat insulation of non- challenged (jirst revision)
industrial buildings (first revision)
(8) 14458 Guidelines for retaining walls
11907:1986 Recommendations for calculation for hill area:
of solar radiation on buildings
(Part 1): 1998 Selection of type of wall
FOREWORD ... 3
1 SCOPE ... 7
2 TERMINOLOGY ... 7
3 FIRE PREVENTION ... 9
4 LIFE SAFETY ... 26
5 FIRE PROTECTION ... 32
6 ADDITIONAL OCCUPANCY-WISE REQUIREMENTS ... 49
NATIONALBUILDJNGCODE OF INDIA
. ..
y
FOREWORD
This Part of the Code deals with safety from fire. It specifies the demarcation of fwe zones, restrictions on
construction of buildings in each fire zone, classification of buildings based on occupancy, types of building
construction according to fire resistance of the structural and non-structural components and other restrictions
and requirements necessary to minimize danger to life from free, smoke, fumes or panic before the buildings can
be evacuated. The Code recognizes that safety of life is more than a matter of means of exits and accordingly
deals with various matters which are considered essential to the safety of life.
Fire protection techniques have to be based on the fire behaviour characteristics of different materials and structural
elements of buildings. The activities pursued by the occupants of buildings must also be taken into consideration
for assessing the extent of hazards, and method should then be devised by which the hazards could be minimized.
Absolute safety from fire is not attainable in practice. The objective of this Part is to specify measures that will
provide that degree of safety from fire which can be reasonably achieved. The Code endeavors to avoid
requirements that might involve unreasonable hardships or unnecessary inconvenience or interference with normal
use and occupancy of buildings, but insists upon compliance with minimum standards for fue safety necessary in
public interest. For ensuring compliance of fire protection equipments/installations to the laid down quality
requirements, it is desirable to use such equipments/installation duly certified under the BIS Certification Marks
Scheme.
While providing guidelines for minimizing chances of occurrence of fire through passive fire protection measures,
this Part does not intend to cover all aspects of general fire prevention including sources of ignition. Nor does it
cover the prevention of accidental personal injuries during the course of normal occupancy of buildings.
This Part while recognizing that panic in a building on fire maybe uncontrollable, deals with the potential panic
hazard through measures designed to prevent the development of panic. Experience indicates that panic seldom
develops even in the presence of potential danger, so long as occupants of buildings are moving towards exits
which they can see within a reasonable distance and with no obstruction or undue congestion in the path of
travel. However, any uncertainty as to the location or adequacy of means of egress, the presence of smoke or
fumes and the stoppage of travel towards the exit, such as may occur when one P&son stumbles and falls on
stairs, may be conducive to panic. Danger from panic is greater when a large number of people are trapped in a
confined area.
“
Experience has shown that concealed spaces within a building, such as, space betwe6n ceiling and false ceiling,
horizontal and vertical ducts, etc, tend to act as flues/tunnels during a f~e. Provision should, therefore, be made
to provide fire stopping within such spaces.
Nothing in this Part of the Code shall be construed to prohibit better types of building construction, more exits or
otherwise safer conditions than the minimum requirements specified in this Part.
Compliance with this Part shall not be construed as eliminating or reducing the necessity for other provisions for
safety of persons using a building or structure under normal occupancy conditions. Nor shall any provision of
thk Code be construed as requiring or permitting any addition that maybe hazardous under normal occupancy
conditions.
One of the major points brought out in this Part is the limitation of heights and areas of buildings based on fwe
safety of the occupants. Individual municipal corporations are free to alter Table 19 based on local conditions,
but the ratios of areas as maintained in the table for different occupancies and types of construction shall be
adhered to.
Advantage has been taken of the developments, particularly in fire resistance rating of materials, designating
types of construction in a rational manner and relating the area limitations of different occupancies to different
types of construction.
Halons (halogenated hydrocarbons) which exhibit exceptional fire fighting and explosion prevention/suppression
characteristics have been found to possess high ozone depleting potential. They come under Group II of Annex
A of the Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer, the international environmental agreement
for phasing out ozone depleting substances. Due to increasing evidence that the ozone layer is getting depleted at
a faster rate than thought earlier, the developed countries accelerated their phase-out schedule with a view to
achieving 100 percent phase-out of halons by 1 January 1994, instead of the earlier target date of 1 January 2000
after which only essential use of halon was allowed. For developing countries like India, the total phase-out of
halons is to be achieved by 1 January 2010, as per Montreal Protocol, unless a decision is taken in between to
hasten up the phase-out of ozone depleting substances. India, having become a signatory to the Protocol in June
1992, is committed to abide by the Montreal Protocol decisions. In accordance with Ministry of Environment
and Forests, Government of India, Ozone Depleting Substances (Regulations), Rules, 2000, the manufacture of
halon based fire extinguishers and extinguishing systems has been phased out by 1 January 2001. Meanwhile,
As a result of implementation of this Part, some useful suggestions have emerged. This revision has, therefore,
been prepared to take care of the same. The significant modifications incorporated include:
a) The text has now been divided into the following broad clauses:
1) Fire Prevention — Covering aspects of fire prevention pertaining to design and construction of
buildings on passive fire protection measures, also describing the various types of building materials
and their fire rating.
2) Lije Safety — Covering life safety provisions in the event of fwe and similar emergencies, also
addressing construction and occupancy features that are necessary to minimize danger to life from
fire, smoke, fumes or panic.
All standards cross-referred to in the main text of this section, are subject to the revision. The parties to agreement
based on this Part are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the
standards.
8 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
2.36 Ventilation — Supply of outside air into, or the Sub-division A-2 One or two-family private
removal of inside air from an enclosed space. dwellings
Sub-division A-3 Dormitories
2.37 Venting Fire — The process of inducing heat
and smoke to leave a building as quickly as possible Sub-division A-4 Apartment houses (flats)
by such paths that lateral spread of fire and heat is Sub-division A-5 Hotels
checked, fire fighting operations are facilitated and Sub-division A-6 Hotels (Starred)
minimum fire damage is caused.
a) Sub-division A-1 Lodging or rooming houses
2.38 Volume to Plot Area Ratio (VPR) — The ratio — These shall include any building or group
of volume of building measured in cubic metres to the of buildings under the same management, in
area of the plot measured in square metres and which separate sleeping accommodation for
expressed in metres. a total of not more than 40 persons (beds), on
transient or permanent basis, with or without
2.39 Wet Riser — An arrangement for fire fighting dining facilities but without cooking facilities
within the building by means of vertical rising mains for individuals is provided. This includes ims,
not less than 100 mm nominal diameter with landing clubs, motels and guest houses.
valves on each floorflanding for fire fighting purposes
A lodging or rooming house shall be classified
and permanently charged with water from a pressurized
as a dwelling in sub-division A-2 if no room
supply.
in any of its private dwelling units is rented
appropriate class depending on the degree of hazard. or processing of highly combustible or explosive
Where different degrees of hazard of occupancy exist materials or products which are liable to bum with
in different parts of a building, the most hazardous of extreme rapidity and or which may produce poisonous
those shall govern the classification for the purpose of fumes or explosions for storage, handling,
this Code, except in cases where hazardous areas are manufacturing or processing which involve highly
segregated or protected as specified in the Code. corrosive, toxic or noxious alkalis, acids or other liquids
or chemicals producing flame, fumes and explosive,
a) Sub-division G-1 — This sub-division shall poisonous, irritant or corrosive gases; and for the
include any building in which the contents are storage, handling or processing of any material
of such comparative low combustibility and the producing explosive mixtures of dust which result in
industrial processes or operations conducted the division of matter into fine particles subject to
therein are of such a nature that there are hardly spontaneous ignition. Examples of buildings in this
any possibilities for any self propagating fue to class are those buildings which are used foc
occur and the only consequent danger to life
and property may arise from panic, fumes or a) Storage, under pressure of more than
smoke, or fwe from some external source. 0.1 N/mm* and in quantities exceeding 70 m3,
of acetylene, hydrogen, illuminating and
b) Sub-division G-2 — This sub-division shall
natural gases, ammonia, chlorine, phosgene,
include any building in which the contents or
sulphnr dioxide, carbon dioxide, methyloxide
industrial processes or operations conducted
and all gases subject to explosion, fume or
therein are liable to give rise to a fire which
toxic hazard, ~ogenic gases, etc;
will burn with moderate rapidity or result in
other hazardous situation and may give off a b) Storage and handling of hazardous and highly
considerable volume of smoke, but from flammable liquids, liquefiable gases like LPG,
which neither toxic fumes nor explosions are rocket propelltis, etc;
to be feared in the event of fire. c) Storage and handling of hazardous and highly
c) Sub-division G-3 — This sub-division shall flammable or explosive materials (other than
include any building in which the contents or liquids); and
industrial processes or operations conducted d) Manufacture of artificial flowers, synthetic
therein are liable to give rise to a fire which leather, ammunition, explosives and fwworks.
will bum with extreme rapidity or result in NOTE — A list of hazardous substances giving
other hazardous situation or from which quantities, for which or exceeding which owners
poisonous fumes or explosions are to be handling such substances are required to be covered
under the Public Liability Insurance Act, has been
feared in the event of a fire. For fire safety in notified under Government of India, Ministry of
petroleum and fertilizer plant, good practice Environment and Forests Notification No. G.S.R.
[4(3)] may be referred. 347(E) dated 1 August 1996.
safety requirements of the new buildings. Such Type 1 Construction, Type 2 Construction, Type 3
alterations shall not in anyway bring down level of Construction and Type 4 ‘Construction’. The fire
fire and life safety below that which existed earlier. resistance ratings for various types of construction for
Any addition or alterations or construction of cubicles structural and non-structural members shall be as given
or partitioning for floor area exceeding 500 mz for all in Table 1.
high rise buildings shall be with approval of local fire
For buildings 15 m in height or above non-combustible
authority.
materials should be u$ed for construction and the
3.3 Types of Construction internal walls of staircase enclosures should be of
3.3.1 General brick work or reinforced concrete or any other
material of construction with minimum of 2 h rating.
The design of any building and the type of materials
The walls for the chimney shall be of Type 1 and
used in its construction are important factors in making
Type 2 Construction depending on whether the gas
the building resistant to a complete burn-out and in
temperature is above 200”C or less.
preventing the rapid spread of fire, smoke or fumes,
which may otherwise contribute to the loss of lives 3.3.2 It is required that an element/component shall
and property. have the requisite fire resistance rating when tested in
The fire resistance of a building or its structural and acco’’rdance with the accepted standard [4(1)].
non-structural elements is expressed in hours against Tables 2 to 18 provide available data regarding fire
Table 3 Masonry Walls: Hollow (Required to Resist Fire from One Side at a Time)
(Clause 3.3.2)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13)
i) Bricks of clay:
a) Without finish 170 170 170 2041 200 75 75 90 100 170-:’170
b) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate 100 100 170 170 170 75 75 90 90 90 100
gypsum plaster
ii) Blocks of concrete:
a) Without finish 90 125 125 140 140 150
b) With 13 MM cement/sarrcf or gypsrrrn/sand 190 200 200 — — 90 125 125 140 140 140
c) Whfr 13 mm fightweight aggregate 75 90 90 100 125 125
gypsum plaster
iii) Blocks of lightweight concrete:
a) Without finish 100 100 100 — — 75 90 90 100 140 150
b) With 13 mm cementhand or gypsrrnr/sand . — — — — 75 75 75 100 140 140
c) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate — — — — 63 63 63 75 90 100
gypsum plaster
S1 Nature of Construction and Materials/Timber Studs at Centres not Minimum Thickness (mm) of Protection
No. Exceeding 600 mm, Facwi on Each Side with for a Fire Resistance of lh
i) Plasterboard layers with joints staggered, joints in outer layer taped and filled — Total 25
thickness for each face
4,
ii) One layer of 12.7 mm plasterboard with a finish of lightweight aggregate gypsum 13
plaster
Nature of Construction and Materials/Steel or Timber Frame at Stud Minimum Thickness (mm) of Protection
Centres not Exceeding 600 mm, Facings on Both Sides of Construction for a Fire Resistance
/ 3
%h lh l%h 2h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
1. One layer of plasterboard with taped and filled joints Timber or steel 12.7
2. Two layers of plasterboard with joints staggered, joints in Timber or steel 19 25
outer layer taped and filled — Total thickness for each face
?
3. One layer of asbestos insulating board with transverse joints Timber or steel 9 12
backed by fillers of asbestos insulating board not less than 9 J
mm thick, or by-timber
4. One layer of wood wool slabs Timber 25
5. One layer of chipboard or of plywood Timber or steel 18
C) Wet finish:
Metal lath and plaster, thickness of plaster:
a) Sanded gypsum plaster Timber or steel 13
b) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster Timber 13 19 25
Steel 13
Timber studs at centers not exceeding 600 mm with internal linings of:
i) Plasterboard layers with joints in outer layer taped and filled, total thickness of 25
plasterboard
SI Nature of Construction and Materhds Minimum Di?nenakms (mm) Excluding any Finish,
No. for a Fire Redstance of
6
- \
%h lh 1%h 2h 3h 4b
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) [6) (7) (8)
i) Reinforced concrete (simply supported) Width 200 200 200 200 240 280
601) 7.01)
Cover 20 20 20 40
ii) Reinforced concrete (continuous) Width 200 200 200 200 240 280
Cover 20 20 20 30 40 5(JI)
iii) Prestressed concrete (simply supported) Width 100 120 150 200 240 280
Cover 25 40 55 70 80 90
iv) Prestressed concrete (continuous) Width 80 100 120 150 200 240
Cover 20 30 40 55 70 80
1I Requhe attention to tie additional measures necessary to reduce the risk of sP~fing.
S1 Nature of Construction and Materials Minimum Dimensions (mm) Excluding any Finiih,
No. for a Elre Resistance of
e
- \
1/2h lh l%h 2h 3h 4h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Reinforced concrete (simply supported) Thickness 75 95 110 125 150 170
Cover 20 20 25 35 451) 551)
ii) Reinforced concrete (continuous) Thickness 75 95 110 125 150 170
Cover 20 20 20 25 35 451)
1)Require attention to the ~dirional measures necessary to reduce the risk of sPsfling.
S1 Nature of Construction and Materials Mfnfmurn Dimensions (mm) Excluding any Firdsh,
No. for a Fire Resistance of
A
-
1/2h lh l%h 2h 3h 4h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Reinforced concrete (simply supported) Thickness of flea 75 95 110 125 150 170
Rib width 125 125 125 125 150 175
Cover 20 20 35 45 55 65
Cover 20 20 20 35 45 55
\
Nature of Construction and Materials Mirdrnarn Dimensions (nun) Excluding any Finish,
for a Fire Resistance of
A
/ -
lh l%h 2h 3h 4h
C) Solid protections
Table 16 Timber Floors — Tongued and Grooved Boarding, or Sheets of Tongued and Grooved
Plywwd or Wood Chipboard, of not Less than 21 mm I@ished ~
(Clause 3.3.2)
l%h Ih 2h
(1) (2) (3) (4)
0 Finished on toP with 25 mm minimum thick glass fibre or mineral wool laid between jOb.
Exceptions and deviations to the general provisions of Residential UL 2.0 1.4 1.0
Educational UL 2.0 1.4 1.0
requirements of individual occupancies are given as
Institutional UL 1.5 1.0 0.8
applicable to each type of occupancy in 6.1 to 6.9. In Assembly UL 1.0 0.7 0.5
case of practical difficulty or to avoid unnecessary Business UL 2.9 2.3 1.6
hardship, without sacrificing reasonable safety, the Mercantile 8.0 1.8 1.4 1.0
Authority may grant exemptions from the Code. Industrial 7.5 1.9 1.6 1.3
Storage(see Note 5) 6.0 1.5 1.3 1.0
with hydrant outlets on the floors constructed a) Densityin terms of dwellingunits per hectare;
with a fire service inlet to boost the water in the b) Traffic considerations;
dry riser and maintenance should be as per the c) Parking spaces;
requirements laid down in good practice [4(6)]. d) Local fire fighting facilities;and
e) Water supply, drainage and sanitationrequirements.
b) Drums tilled with water of 2000 litres capacity
4 The FAR values specified in this table may be increased
with two fiie buckets on each floor; and by 20 percent for the following services:
c) A water storage tank of minimum 20000 @ A basement or cellar space under a building constructed
litres capacity, which may be used for other on stilts and used as a parking space and air-
construction purposes also. conditioning plant room used as accessory to the
principal use;
3.4.4 Maximum Height b) Watchman’s booth, pumphouse, garbage shaft, electric
cabin or sub-station and other utility structures meant
Every building shall be restricted in its height above for the services of the building under considerations;
the ground level and the number of storeys, depending c) Projections and accessory buildings as specifically
upon its occupancy and the type of construction. The exempted under the Code; and
height shall be measured as specified in Part 3 d) Staircase room and lift rooms above the topmost storey;
‘Development Control Rules and General Building architectural feature; and chimneys and elevated tanks
of dimensions as permissible under the Code; the area
Requirements’. The maximum permissible height of the lift shaft shall be taken only on one floor.
for any combination of occupancy and types of 5 In so far as single storey storage and hazardous occupancies
construction should necessarily be related to the width are concerned, they would be farther governed by volume to
of street fronting the building, or floor area ratios and plot area ratio (VPR) to be decided by the Authority.
the local fire fighting facilities available.
3.4.5.1 Each portion of a building, which is separated
3.4.5 Floor Area Ratio
by one or more continuous fire resisting walls, having
The comparative floor area ratios for different a fire resistance of not less than 2 h, extending from
occupancies and types of construction are given in the foundation to 1 m above the roof at all points, may
;
t
be considered to be a separate building for the protected with a fire-resisting assembly as specified
calculation of maximum permissible height and floor in 3.4.9.
area, provided openings, if any, in the separating
3.4.8.2 For Type 4 construction, openings in the
wall are also protected by fire assemblies of not less
separating walls or floors shall be fitted with 2 h fire-
than 2 h.
resisting assemblies.
3.4.6 Open Spaces
3.4.8.3 Openings in walls or floors which are
The open spaces around or inside a building shall necessary to be provided to allow passages of all
conform to the requirements of Part 3 ‘Development building services like cables, electrical wirings,
Control Rules and General Building Requirements’. telephone cables, plumbing pipes, etc, shall be
protected by enclosure in the form of ducts/shafts
3.4.6.1 For high rise buildings, the following
having afire resistance not less than 2 h. The inspection
additional provkions of means of access to the building
door for electrical shafts/ducts shall be not less than
shall be ensured (see Part 3 ‘Development Control
2 h and for other services shafts/ducts, the same shall
Rules and General Building Requirements’):
have fire resistance not less than 1 h. Medium and low
a) The width of the main street on which the voltage wiring running in shafts/ducts, shall either be
building abuts shall not be less than 12 m and armoured type or run through metal conduits. Further,
one end of this street shall join another street the space between the conduits pipes and the walls/
3.4.11.1 Air-conditioning and ventilating systems 3.4.12.4 The discharge apertures of all natural draft
shall be so installed and maintained as to minimize the smoke vents shall be so arranged as to be readily
danger of spread of fire, smoke or fumes from one accessible for opening by fire service personnel.
floor to other or from outside to any occupied building
3.4.12.5 Power operated smoke exhausting systems
or structure (see C-1.17).
shall be substituted for natural draft. vents only by
3.4.11.2 Air-conditioning and ventilating systems specific permission of the Authority.
circulating air to more than one floor or f~e area shall be
3.4.13 Heating
provided with dampers designed to close automatically
Class 1 Surfaces of very low flame spread. a) Wired glass — The wired glass shall be of
Class 2 Surfaces of low flame spread. minimum half hour fire resistance rating.
Class 3 Surfaces of medium flame spread. b) Sashes and frames — The sashes or frames
Class 4 Surfaces of rapid flame spread. or both shall be entirely of iron or other
suitable metal such as stainless steel, securely
3.4.15.3 The uses for which surface materials falling bolted or keyed into the wall, except in the
into various classes shall be adopted in building case of panels in internal doors.
construction are given below:
c) Setting of glass — The panels of glass shall
be set in rebates or grooves not less than
Class 1 Class 2 Class 3
6.0 mm in width or depth, with due allowance
May be May be used in May be used only for expansion, and shall be secured by hard
used in any any situation, in living rooms and metal fastenings to the sashes or frames
situation except on walls, bed rooms (but not independently of any cement or putty used
facade of the in rooms on the for weather-proofing purposes.
building, roof) and only as a
staircase and lining to solid walls 3.4.16.3 Electro-copper glazing shall comply with the
corridors and partitions; not following requirements:
on staircases or
a) Electro-copper glazing — The electro-copper
corridors or facade
3.4.15.5 When frames, walls, partitions or floors are Hard metal casements, not exceeding 0.8 m2 fitted with
lined with combustible materials, the surfaces on both wired glass or electro-copper glazing in accordance
sides of the materials shall conform to the appropriate with 3.4.16.2 and 3.4.16.3, secured to the frames by
class, because there is considerable danger from fire hard metal hinges not more than 600 mm apart and by
starting and rapidly spreading within the concealed fastening at top, centre and bottom shall be permissible.
cavity unknown to the occupants whose escape may
3.4.17 Skylights
be hampered there by. For detailed information on
materials and details of construction with their fire- 3.4.17.1 Wired glass for skylights or monitor lights
resistance rating, reference may be made to good shall comply with the following requirements:
practice [4(15)].
a) Wired glass for skylights or monitor lights —
3.4.16 Glazing The wired glass for skylights or monitor lights
shall be of minimum half hour fire resistance
3.4.16.1 Building of Types 1 to 4 construction shall rating.
employ one of the two types of glazing described
b) Frames and glazing — The frame shall be
in 3.4.16.2 and 3.4.16.3 except that Type 4 construction
continuous and divided by bars spaced at not
may have the alternative of hardwood sashes or frames
more than 700 mm centres. The frame and
or both.
bars shall be of iron or other hard metal, and
3.4.16.2 Wired glass shall comply with the following supported on a curb either of metal or of wood
requirements: covered with sheet metal. The toughened glass
shall be secured by hard metal fastenings to 4.2.8 The floors of areas covered for the means of exit
the frame and bars independently of any lead, shall be illuminated to values not less than 1 ft candle
cement or putty used for weather-proofing (10 lUX)at floor level. In auditoriums, tbeatres, concert
purposes. halls and such other places of assembly, the
illumination of floor exit/access maybe reduced during
3.4.18 Louvers
period of performances to values not less than 1/5 ft
Louvers wherever provided shall be of minimum half candle (2 lux).
hour fire resistance rating.
4.2.9 Fire doors with 2 h fire resistance shall be
3.4.19 Glass of facade for high rise buildings, etc shall provided at appropriate places along the escape route
be of minimum 1 h fire resistance rating. and particularly at the entrance to lift lobby and stair
well where a ‘funnel or flue effect’ may be created,
4 LIFE SAFETY inducing an upward spread of fire to prevent spread of
4.1 General fire and smoke.
Every building shall be so constructed, equipped, 4.2.10 All exits shall provide continuous means of
maintained and operated as to avoid undue danger to egress to the exterior of a building or to an exterior
the life and safety of the occupants from fire, smoke, open space leading to a street.
fumes or panic during the time period necessary for 4.2.11 Exits shall be so arranged that they may be
4.2.4 Every building meant for human occupancy shall 4.4.1 The unit of exit width, used to measure the
be provided with exits sufficient to permit safe escape capacity of any exit, shall be 500 mm. A clear width
of occupants, in case of fire or other emergency. of 250 mm shall be counted as an additional half unit.
Clear widths less than 250 mm shall not be counted
4.2.5 In every building or structure, exits shall comply for exit width.
with the minimum requirements of this part, except
NOTE — The total occupants from a particular floor must
those not accessible for general public use.
evacuate within 2% minutes for Type 1 construction,
IY2 minutes for Type 2 constructionand 1 minute for Type 3
4.2.6 No building shall be so altered as to reduce the
construction.Size of the exit doorfexitwayshrdlbe calculated
number, width or protection of exits to less than that accordingly keeping in view the travel distance as per
required. Table 22. “
4.2.7 Exits shall be clearly visible and the route to 4.4.2 Occupants per unit exit width shall be in
reach the exits shall be clearly marked and signs posted accordance with Table 21.
to guide the occupants of the floor concerned. Signs
4.4.3 Horizontal Exit Allowance
shall be illuminated and wired to an independent
electrical circuit on an alternative source of supply. When horizontal exit is provided in buildings of
The sizes and colours of the exit signs shall be in mercantile, storage, industrial, business and assembly
accordance with good practice [4( 16)]. The colour of occupancies, the capacity per storey per unit width of
the exit signs shall be green. exit of stairways in Table 21 may be increased by 50
NOTE — This provision shall not apply to A-2 and A-4 percent and in buildings of institutional occupancy it
occupanciesless than 15 m in height. may be increased by 100 percent.
26 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
“r--
4.7.5 Exit doorways shall be openable from the side 4.9.9 Handrails shall be provided at a height of
1000 mm to be measured from the base of the middle
which they serve without the use of a key. F-
of the treads to the top of the handrails. Balusters/railing
4.7.6 Mirrors shall not be placed in exit ways or exit shall be provided such that the width of staircase does
doors to avoid confusion regarding the direction of exit. not reduce (see Fig. 1).
4.8 Corridors and Passageways 4.9.10 The number of people in between floor landings
in staircase shall not be less than the population on
4.8.1 Exit corridors and passageways shall be of width
each floor for the purpose of design of staircase. The
not less than the aggregate required width of exit
design of staircase shall also take into account the
doorways leading from them in the direction of travel
following:
to the exterior.
a) The minimum headroom in a passage under
4.8.2 Where stairways discharge through corridors and the landing of a staircase and under the
passageways, the height of corridors and passageways staircase shall be 2.2 m.
shall be not less than 2.4 m.
b) For building 15 m in height or more, access
4.8.3 All means of exit including staircases lifts lobbies to main staircase shall be through afire/smoke
and corridors shall be adequately ventilated. check door of a minimum 2 h fire resistance
rating. Fire resistance rating may be reduced
4.9 Internal Staircases to 1 h for residential buildings (except hotels
and starred hotels).
4.9.1 Internal stairs shall be constructed of non-
combustible materials throughout. c) No living space, store or other fire risk shall
open directly iqto the staircase or staircases.
4.9.2 Internal stairs shall be constructed as a self-
d) External exit door of staircase enclosure at
contained unit with an external wall of the building
ground level shall open directly to the open
constituting at least one of its sides and shall be
spaces or throug~ a large lobby, if necessary.
completely enclosed.
e) The main and external staircases shall be
4.9.3 A staircase shall not be arranged round a lift shaft. continuous from ground floor to the terrace
level.
4.9.4 Hollow combustible construction shall not be
permitted. f) No electrical shafts/AC ducts or gas pipes, etc,
shall pass through or open in the staircases.
4.9.5 No gas piping or electrical panels shall be Lifts shall not open in staircase.
allowed in the stairway. Ducting in stairway may be
g) No combustible material shall be used for
permitted if it is of 1 h fire resistance rating.
decoration/wall paneling in the staircase.
4.9.6 Notwithstanding the detailed provision for exits h) Beams/columns and other buildlng features
in accordance with 4.3, 4.4 and 4.5, the following shall not reduce the head room/width of the
minimum width shall be provided for staircases: staircase.
28 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
5LU3 I tK
FIG. 1 TYPICALDETAILFORHANDRAIL/BL~JSTERS
OF A STAIRCASE
j,
The exit sign with arrow indicating the way 4.10 Pressurization of Staircases (Protected Escape
to the escape route shall be provided at a Routes)
suitable height from the floor level on the wall
4.10.1 Though in normal building design,
and shall be illuminated by electric light
compartmentation plays a vital part in limiting the
connected to corridor circuits. All exit way spread of fire, smoke will readily spread to adjacent
marking signs should be flush with the wall spaces through the various leakage openings in the
and so designed that no mechanical damage compartment enclosure, such as cracks, openings
shall occur to them due to moving of furniture around pipes ducts, airflow grills and doors, as perfect
or other heavy equipments. Further, all sealing of all these openings is not possible. It is smoke
landings of floor shall have floor indicating and toxic gases, rather than flame, that will initially
boards prominently indicating the number of obstruct the free movement of occupants of the
floor as per bye-laws. building through the means of escape (escape routes).
The floor indication board shall be placed on Hence the exclusion of smoke and toxic gases from
the wall immediately facing the flight of stairs the protected routes is of great importance.
and nearest to the landing. It shall be of size 4.10.2 Pressurization is a method adopted for protected
not less than 0.5 m x 0.5 m. escape routes against ingress of smoke, especially in
k) Individual floors shall be prominently high-rise buildings. In pressurization, air is injected
indicated on the wall facing the staircases. into the staircases, lobbies or corridors, to raise their
m) In case of single staircase it shall terminate pressure slightly above the pressure in adjacent parts
at the ground floor level and the access to of the building. As a result, ingress of smoke or toxic
the basement shall be by a separate staircase. gases into the escape routes will be prevented. The
The second staircase may lead to basement pressurization of staircases shall be adopted for high
levels provided the same is separate at rise buildings and building having mixed occupancy/
ground level by ventilated lobby with multiplexes having covered area more than 500 m2.
discharge points to two different ends 4.10.3 The pressure difference for staircases shall be
through enclosures. as under:
30 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
4.12 Horizontal Exits capacity and limiting dimensions except where
specified in 6.1 to 6.9 for special uses and occupancies.
4.12.1 The width of horizontal exit shall be same as
for the exit doorways. 4.14.2 The slope of a ramp shall not exceed 1 in 10.
In certain cases steeper slopes maybe permitted but in
4.12.2 A horizontal exit shall be equipped with at least
no case greater than 1 in 8.
one fire/smoke door of minimum 1 h fire resistance,
of self-closing type. Further, it is required to have direct 4.14.3 For all slopes exceeding 1 in 10 and wherever
connectivity to the fire escape staircase for evacuation. the use is such as to involve danger of slipping, the
ramp shall be surfaced with approved non-slipping
4.12.3 For buildings more than 24 m in height, refuge
material.
area of 15 m2 or an area equivalent to 0.3 m2 per person
to accommodate the occupants of two consecutive 4.15 Fire Lifts
floors, whichever is higher, shall be provided as under:
4.15.1 Where applicable, fire lifts shall be provided
The refuge area shall be provided on the periphery of with a minimum capacity for 8 passengers and fully
the floor or preferably on a cantilever projection and automated with emergency switch on ground level. In
open to air at least on one side protected with suitable general, buildings 15 m in height or above shall be
railings. provided with fire lifts.
a) For floors above 24 m and Up to 39 m —
HOSE REEL
SINGLE HEAD
HP - HYDRANT PUMP/ LANDING VALVE
MAIN ELECTRIC PUMP AIR RELEASE VALVE
!JP - JOCKEY PUMP t
DP - DIESEL PUMP SLUICE VALVE
SP - SPRINKLER PUMP
SPRINKLER LINE TEST DRAIN d L WET RlsER + NON - RETURN VALVE
SH - SUCTION HEADER
-—-—-—
-—. —-—
.—
--—-—
-— ——-—
-
-—-
ICV - INSTALLATION — CABLE CONDUIT FOR
CONTROL VALVE l!!!! b! MANUAL CALL BOX
*
EJQ
.. == + HOOTER
7“A
t
-—-—-
—-—-—
-—-
—.
—-—
-— ~ FIRE BRIGADE INLET
[[’66
p: Jlllll
m Ian \t!!!!:! TANK FILLING
. ;60000
FIRST FLOOR
-—-—-
-—-—- —-— .— -—-
—- —-— -— —- —-— -—-
-—-— -
F“””””””
YARD b II I iiii i!iiiiiiii FIRE ALARM PANEL WITH
n 1
I
HYDRANT I A
—-—.
●
—
-—-—-
-—-—-
.—
—4
GROUND r~’Lvwm
-
—-
—.—
~fin
—-— -~
.—. —- -
b
~:::
1111
T
BATTERY BACK-UP AND
P.A. SYSTEM
4
-I
A L rax
IIo 66(
L UG FIRE
TANK
,
S1 Type of Building Type of Installation Water Supply Pump Capacity
No. Occupancy (in 1) (in I/tin)
Fire Hose Dry Wet Down- Yard Automatic Manually Automatic Underground Terrace pump Near At the
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
a) Lodging or Rooming
Houses (A-1)
(see Note 1)
i) Up to 15 rooms R NR NR NR NR NR R NR NR NR 5000 NR NR
(see Note 2) (see Note 3)
w
W
*
r~
Table 23 — Contintied
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (H) (12) (13) (14) (15)
C) Dormitories(A-3)
Apartment
Houses (A-4)
d) Hotek (A-5)
a) Hospitals, Sanatoria
and Nursing Homes
(c-l)
1) Less than 15 m in height
with plot area up to
1000 m2
.@
*>
‘ ,*
1 alne u — Continued
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
a) Buildings
(D-1 to D-5)
1) Less than 10 m in height
,$
? Table 23 —Continued
~
& (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
ii) Morethan R R NR NR R NR R R NR NR 15000 NR 900
300 persons (seeNote 2) (5 000)
(~eeNote 4)
2) Above10m but not R R NR R NR NR R R R 50000 5000 (see Note 20) 450
exceeding15m in height (see Note2) (5 000) (450)
(seeNote4)
(1) (2) . (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
ii) Groundplus one R R NR NR R NR R R NR NR 25 (XXI NR 900
storeyand covesed (seeNote 2)
area exceeding
500 mz
iii) Built up areamom R ...$ F& R R R R NR R 100 txlo 10000 (seeNote 20) 450
than 500 mz (see Note 7)
b) Moderate Haard
(G2) (see Note 14)
upto1000m2
E
iv) Builtup areamore R R NR R R R R R R 100 O(M 20000 (seeNote20) 900
i tharr1000m2 (seeNote7)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
1) Up to 15m in height
R — Required
NR — Not Reqnired
NOTES
1 Buildingsabove15m in height not to be permittedfor occupanciesA-1 and A-2.
2 Requiredto be installedin basementif area of basementexceeds200 m’.
3 Requiredto be providedif basementarea exc~ds 200 mz.
4 Additionalvalue given in parenthesisshallbe addedif basementarea exceeds200 m’.
5 Requiredto be providedfor buildingswith more than two storeys(Ground+ One).
6 As per the requirementof local authorityDry Riser maybe used in hilly areas,industrialareasor as required.
7 Requiredto be providedfor buildingswith height i%ove15 m.
8 To be installedin basement. If basementprovi&d is used for car parkingand area thereofexceeds750 m’ then the sprinklersshall be fed water from both undergroundstatic water storagetank and
terrace tank.
9 R~~ to be providedfor boil~$ withrnoia than one storey.
10 To be iostalkd in entite building. “
11 TObe iostal.ledirrall floors at appropriateplaces and in consultationwith 10CSI
fire authorities.
12 Buildittgsshove 30 m in height not to be permittedfor GroupB, GroupC, Group D sad Group F occupancies.
13 All n@ergroundshoppingareas shouldbe folly air-conditioned.
14 The requirementsgiven in this table for GroupG IndustrialBuildingsare for small scaleindustryunits. For other industriesthe requirementswill have to be workedout on the basis of relevantIndian
Stsmkwdsand also in consultationwith the local tire authorities.
15 Buildkgs above 18 m in height not to be permittedfor G-1 and G-2 occupancies.
16 Buildingsabove 15m in heightnot to he permittedfor G-3 crccupancies.
17 Buildingsabove 15m in height not to be permittedfor GroupH end GroupJ occupancies.
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
LEGENO :-
II, F.1 DIESEL ORIVEN FIRE PUMP
-& F-2
F-3
F4
EL. HYDRANT FIRE PUMP
JOCKEY PUMP
EL. SPRINKLER PINP
.
Pv PRESSURE VESSEL
FH FIRE NYDRANT
—x— VN.VS
,3n- .’
~
—i-.
FLEXISLE C0NNEC70N
NON RETURN VALVE
WIRING TO FAP
OL VALVE
nil. /7 /-FIANGE JOINT
------ SWITCH
.. . ..
l=
FLOW
WTiE::
DETAIL-’A’
F’”% t
0.S0 m
TO E)O_ERNAL FIRE
HYDRANT
=’LEF’”WA”T”
(EXTERNAL)
- w
1776 I &
TO SPRINKLER
SYSTEM 4 1-1 I F4 I I FIRE
. .. WATER
.... TAMC-2
. . .
.
PLAN
4 Nos. 0 63 mm
INLET
——
VALVE BOX
I
/ CABINET
A [
PRIME
MOVER 7 r FIRE
I
L. — .i
MANHOLE
t! GL
———. ~-——— ———
—--- 4-——— 2 s z —-- A m-s
,
f w
FIRE , J < SEPARATION
u.
FIGHTINGk > WALL
-A, .- –-––
4 Nos.063 mm
F. B. INLET
VALVE BOX ———
1
/ CABINET I I
\ \ I I
I I
OVERFLOW
) $ I
AND VENT
DOMESTIC WATER
SUPPLY TANK (OTHER SUPPLY L. . -- -1
THAN DRINKING WATER)
SEPARATION WALL
SLUICE 0 ~~ mm
TO DOMESTIC
X PUMP SUCTION PRIME
SLUICE
VALVE
GL
[4(24)] on premises where water or foam cannot be A-5 as specified in Table 23 and Annex C (for High
used for fire extinguishing because of the special nature Rise Buildings) shall apply.
of the contents of the buildings/areas to be protected.
6.1.3 Exit Facilities
For some special fire risldessential applications, carbon
dioxide may not be suitable and it may be necessary to The capacity of any open mezzanine or balcony shall
provide BCF (Bromochlorodifluoromethane) — Halon be added to the capacity of the floor for the purpose of
1211 or BTM (Bromochlorotrifluoromethane) — determining the exit capacity.
HaIon 1301 or some other identified substitutes.
6.1.3.1 In addition to requirements specified for
However, the use of halons shall be discouraged, as occupancy sub-division A-2, the following shall be
halons are ozone depleting substances (ODS) and their provided for occupancy sub-division A-1:
use is being phased out throughout the world.
Every sleeping room above the street floor shall
5.1.11 Fire fighting equipment shall be suitably have access to two separate means of exits, at least
located and clearly marked by luminous signs. one of which shall consist of an enclosed interior
NOTE — This provision shall not apply to occupancies A-2
stairway, or a fwe escape or horizontal exit all so
and A-4 less than 15 m in height. arranged as to provide a safe path of travel to the
outside of the building without traversing any
5.2 Fire Detection/Extinguishing System
6.2.2 Buildings intended for educational occupancy 6.2.6.2 In gymnasiums and in multi-purpose school
a) Doors leading directly outside the building; 6.3.4.2 Bare minimum quantities of flammable
b) Stairways; material such as chloroform, ethyl alcohol, spirit, etc
c) Ramps; shall be allowed to be stored and handled. The handling
of such liquids shall not be permitted by un-authorized
d) Horizontal exits; and
persons. Bulk storage of these items, will be governed
e) Fire tower. by relevant rules and safe practices.
6.3.3.3 All required exits that serve as egress from
6.3.5 Exceptions and Deviations
hospital or infirmary sections shall be not less than
2 m in clear width including patient bedroom doors to It is recognized that in institutions or part of buildings
permit transportation of patients on beds, litters, or housing various types of psychiatric patients, or used
mattresses. The minimum width of corridors serving as penal and mental institutions, it is necessary to
patients bedrooms in buildings shallbe2400 mm. For maintain locked doors and barred windows; and to such
detailed information on recommendations for buildings extent the necessary provision in other sections of the
and facilities for the physically handicapped, reference Code requiring the keeping of exits unlocked may be
may be made to good practice [4(27)]. waived. It is also recognized that certain type of
6.3.4.1 No combustible material of any kind shall be a) Every place of assembly of sub-division D-1
6.4.6.3.1 Rows of seats between aisles shall have not 6.4.6.10 Every place of assembly in which projection
more than 14 seats. of motion pictures by light is made shall have the
projection apparatus enclosed in a fire-resisting fixed
6.4.6.3.2 Rows of seats opening on to an aisle at one
booth in accordance with good practice [4(27)], except
6.4.6.5 Rooms containing high pressure boilers, 6.4.7 Exception and Deviation
refrigerating machinery other than domestic
refrigerator type, large transformers or other service 6.4.7.1 Where boilers or central heating plants using
equipments subject to possible explosion shall not be liquid or solid fuel are located at grade level, these
Iocated directly under or adjacent to the required exits. shall be separated from the remainder of the building
All such rooms shall be effectively cut off from other by a separating wall with openings protected as in 3.4.7
parts of the building and provided with adequate vents and 3.4.8.
to the outer air. 6.4.7.2 Gymnasiums, indoor stadiums and similar
6.4.6.6 All rooms or areas used for storage of any occupancies may have floors/running tracks of wood,
combustible materials or equipment, or for painting, cinder, synthetic or un-protected steel or iron.
refinishing, repair or similar purposes shall be 6.4.7.3 The underside of continuous steel deck grand
effectively cut off from assembly areas or protected stands when erected outdoots need not be fwe-protected
with a standard system of automatic sprinklers. They when occupied for public toilets.
shall be located away from staircases.
6.4.8 Fire Protection and Fire
f Fighting System for
6.4.6.7 Every stage equipped with fly galleries, grid Metro Stations
irons and rigging for movable theatre type scenery,
6.4.8.1 Wet riser system
shall have a system of automatic sprinklers over and
under such stage areas or spaces and auxiliary spaces, Main and diesel fire pump of 1800 lhnin capacity to
such as dressing rooms, store rooms and workshops, be provided to support 3 to 4 hydrants at a time. Jockey
and the proscenium opening shall be provided with a pump capacity shall be 180 I/rnin. Where it is possible
fire- resisting curtain, capable of withstanding a lateral to extend reliable DG supply to the fue pump room
pressure of 4 kN/m2 over the entire area. The curtain without routing through the station building, the
shall have an emergency closing device capable of provision of diesel pump can be dispensed with and
causing the curtain to close without the use of power instead, two electric pumps may be provided out of
and when so closed, it shall be reasonably tight against which at least one should have DG back-up. The jockey
the passage of smoke. pump should also have DG back-up.
PLATFORM
1. Internal Hydrants Two at each platform. The hydrants at two platforms may be
staggered for maximum coverage.
2. Manual call box One on each platform preferably near emergency plunger.
3. Portable Extinguishers One set of Water COZ and C02 type on each platform at a central
area.
CONCOURSE
1. Internal Hydrants Two at each concourse. When concourse is in two parts then each
part should have at least one hydrant.
2. Additional first-aid reel point Additional fiist-aid reel point for every additional 1000 m2, if the
area is more than 2000 m2. Similarly, if the concourse is in two parts
EXTERNAL AREAS
1. Hydrants One at ground floor at each entry to station near staircase/DG room.
2. Two/four way fire brigade inlet To be provided for each riser/sprinlder riser.
3. Fire brigade Draw-off connection To be provided on water tank,
6.5 Business Buildings (Group E) 6.5.2.1 Occupancy sub-division E-1 (except oflice
6.5.1 In addition to the general requirements specified buildings)
in 3.4 for type of construction and occupancy group
Details of Fire Detectio@Minguishing
and the exit requirements given in 4, the requirements
Occupancy System
given in 6.5.2 to 6.5.5 shall be complied with.
6.5.2 Fire Detection/Extinguishing System E-1 Automatic fwe alarm system {good
practice [4(17)] and [4(18)], and
The requirements for occupancy sub-divisions as
Table 23}.
specified in Table 23 and Annex C (for High Rise
Buildings) shall apply.
d) Electrical switch Automatic fme alarm system 6.6 Requirements of Mercantile Buildings
board {good practice [4(18)] and (Group F)
[4(19)], - and Table 23} and
COZ fire extinguishing 6.6.1 In addition to the general requirements specified
installation in 3.4 for type of construction and occupancy and the
exit requirements given in 4, the requirements given
6.5.2.4 Occupancy sub-division E-4 in 6.6.1.1 to 6.6.5 shall be complied with.
required aisles or approaches thereto. will be overtaken by the spread of fire or smoke within
1800 mm of the floor level before they have time to
6.6.4.4 Open-air mercantile operations, such as open- reach exits, provided, however, that in no case may
air markets, gasoline filling stations, roadside stands the distance of travel to reach the nearest exit exceed
for the sale of a farm produce and other outdoor 45 m where smoke venting is required as a condition
mercantile operations shall be so arranged and for permitting distances of travel to exits in excess of
conducted as to maintain free and unobstructed ways the maximum otherwise allowed.
of travel at all times to permit prompt escape from any
point of danger in case of fire or other emergency, but 6.7.3.3 Additional precautions
no dead-ends in which persons might be trapped due a) In any room in which volatile flammable
to display stands, adjoining buildings, fences, vehicles substances are used or stored, no device
or other obstructions. generating aglow or flame capable of igniting
flammable vapour shall be installed or used.
6.6.4.5 If mercantile operations are conducted in
Such a room shall be provided with a suitably
roofed-over areas, these shall be treated as mercantile
designed exhaust ventilation system (see
buildings, provided canopies over individual small
Annex D). To ensure safety from fire due to
stands to protect merchandise from the weather shall
short circuit, faulty electrical connection or
not be constructed to constitute buildings for the
some similar cause, proper care shall be taken
purpose of the Code.
in designing electrical installations in such
6.6.5 Exception and Deviation room (see Part 8 ‘Building Services, Section 2
Electrical Installations’).
Any mercantile occupancy, where goods of a highly
hazardous nature are pre-dominant, shall be considered b) The storage, use and handling of gasoline,
under Group J occupancy for the purpose of the Code. fuel oil and othqr flammable liquids shall
not be permibed’ in any Group G occupancy
6.7 Requirements of Industrial Buildings (Group G) unless it complies with regulations
pertaining to Petroleum Act, 1934 and Rules
6.7.1 In addition to the general requirements specified
thereunder.
in 3.4 for the type of construction and occupancy group
c) Every boiler room or room below the first
and the exit requirements given in 4, the requirements
floor containing a heating plant shall be
given in 6.7.2 to 6.7.5 shall be complied with.
adequately separated from the rest of the
6.7.2 Fire Detection/Extinguishing System buildings.
The requirements for occupancy sub-divisions G-1 to d) For requirements regarding electrical
G-3 as specified in Table 23 and Annex C (for High generating and distribution stations, reference
Rise Buildings) shall apply. may be made to good practice [4(23)].
and repair sections are effectively separated the grade is one storey or more lower at the
by separation walls. rear than at the street).
b) Every floor of every closed parking garage
6.8.3.4 Exits from aircraft hangers (storage or
shall have access to at least two separate servicing areas) shall be provided at intervals of not
means of exit, so arranged that from any point more than 45 m on all exterior walls of aircraft hangers.
in the garage the paths of travel to the two There shall be a minimum of two exits serving each
means of exit shall be in different directions,
aircraft storage or servicing areas. Horizontal exits
except that a common path of travel may be through interior fire walls shall be provided at intervals
permitted for the first 15 m, from any point. of not more than 30 m. ‘Dwarf or ‘smash’ doors
c) On the street floor, at least two separate exit accommodating aircraft may be used to comply with
doors shall be provided, except that any these requirements. All doors designated as exits shall
opening for the passage of automobiles may be kept unlocked in the direction of exit travel while
serve as a means of exit, provided no door or the area is occupied.
shutter is installed thereon. Street floor exits
in closed garages shall be so arranged that no 6.?3.3.5 Exits from mezzanine floors in aircraft storage
point in the area is more than 30 m from the or servicing areas shall be so arranged that the
nearest exit, or 45 m in the case of garages maximum travel to reach the nearest exits from any
point on the mezzanine shall not exceed 22.5 m. Such
ANNEX C
C-O GENERAL on top of the shaft and separated from the shaft
by the floor of the room.
In addition to the general provisions given in this Part,
c) Landing doors in lift enclosures shall have a
the Authority may insist on suitable protection
fire resistance of not less than 1 h.
measures (see C-1 to C-n) in a building 15 m in height
or above. d) The number of lifts in one row for a lift bank
shall not exceed 4 and the total number of
C-1 CONSTRUCTION lifts in the bank (of two rows) shall not exceed
8. A wall of 2 h fire rating shall separate
C-1.l All materials of constructions in load bearing
individual shafts in a bank.
elements, stairways and corridors and facades shall be
non-combustible. e) Lift car door shall have a fiie resistance rating
of half an hour.
C-1.2 The interior finish materials shall not have aflame Collapsible gates shall not be permitted for
f)
spreadability rating exceeding Class 1 (see 3.4.15.2). lifts and shall have solid doors with fire
C-1.3 The internal walls or staircase shall be of brick resistance of at least 1 h.
or reinforced concrete with a minimum of 2 h fire g) If the lift shaft and lobby is in the core of the
rating. building, a positive pressure between 25 and
30 Pa shall be maintained in the lobby and a
C-1.4 The staircase shall be ventilated to the
positive pressure of 50 Pa shall be maintained
atmosphere at each landing and a vent at the top; the
in the lift shaft. The mechanism for
vent openings shall be of 0.5 mz in the external wall
pressurization shall act automatically with the
and the top. If the staircase cannot be ventilated,
fire alarm; it shall be possible to operate this
because of location or other reasons, a positive pressure
mechanically also.
50 Pa shall be maintained inside. The mechanism for
pressurizing the staircase shall operate automatically h) Exit from the lift lobby, if located in the
with the fire alarm. The roof of the shaft shall be 1 m core of the building, shall be through a self-
above the surrounding roof. Glazing or glass bricks if closing smoke stop door of half an hour fire
used in staircase, shall have fire resistance rating of resistance.
minimum 2 h. j) Lifts shall not normally communicate with
the basement; if, however, lifts are in
C-1.5 Lifts communication, the lift lobby of the
basements shall be pressurized as in (g), with
General requirements of lifts shall be as follows:
self-closing door as in (h).
a) Walls of lift enclosures shall have a fire rating k) Grounding switch, at ground floor level,
of 2 h; lifts shafts shall have a vent at the top shall be provided on all the lifts to enable the
of area not less than 0.2 mz. fire service to ground the lifts.
b) Lift motor room shall be located preferably m) Telephone or other communication facilities
The basement shall not be permitted below the ward block C-1.11 Refuge Area
of a hospitdhnu-sing home unless it is fully sprinkled. Provisions contained in 4.12.3 shall apply for all
buildings except multi-family dwellings, refuge area
Building services such as electrical sub-stations, boiler
rooms in basements shall comply with the provisions of not less than 15 m2 shall be provided on the external
walls.
of the Indian Electricity Act/Rules.
C-1.12 Electrical services shall conform to the
C-1.6.6 If cut outs are provided from basements to
following:
the upper floors or to the atmospheres, all sides cut
out openings in the basements shall be protected by a) The electric distribution cables/wiring shall
sprinkler head at close spacing so as to form a water be laid in a separate duct. The duct shall be
curtain in the event of a fire. sealed at every floor with non-combustible
materials having the same fwe resistance as
C-1.7 Openable windows on external walls shall be
that of the duct. Low and medium voltage
fitted with such locks that can be opened by a fireman’s
wiring running in shaft and in false ceiling
axe.
shrdl run in separate conduits;
C-1.8 All floors shall be compartmented with area not b) Water mains, telephone lines, intercom lines,
exceeding 750 m2 by a separation wall with 2 h fire gaspipes or any other service line shrdl not be
rating, for floors with sprinklers the area may be laid in the duct for electrical cables; use of
increased by 50 percent. In long building, the fire bus ducts/solid rising mains instead of cables
separation walls shall be at distances not exceeding is preferred;
40 m. For departmental stores, shopping centres and
c) Separate circuits for f~e fighting pumps, lifts,
basements, the area may be reduced to 500 m2 for
staircases and corridor lighting and blowers
compartmentation. Where this is not possible, the
for pressurizing system shall be provided
spacings of the sprinklers shall be suitably reduced.
directly from the main switch gear panel and
When reducing the spacing of sprinklers, care should
these circuits shall be laid in separate conduit
be taken to prevent spray from one sprinkler impeding
pipes, so that fue in one circuit will not affect
the performance of an adjascent sprinkler head.
the others. Such circuits shall be protected at
C-1.8.1 It is essential to make provisions for drainage origin by an automatic circuit breaker with
of any such water on all floors to prevent or minimize its no-volt coil removed. Master switches
water damage of the contents. The drain pipes should controlling essential service circuits shall be
be provided on the external wall for drainage of water clearly labelled;
a) A sub-station or a switch-station with oil filled j) Air ducts serving main floor areas, corridors,
equipment shall not be located in the building. etc, shall not pass through the staircase
The sub-station structure shall have separate enclosure.
fire resisting walls/surroundings and shall k) The air-handling units shall be separate for
necessarily be located at the periphery of the each floor and air ducts for every floor shall
floor having separate access from fire escape be separated and in no way inter-connected
C-1.17 Air-conditioning shall conform to the n) The vertical shaft for treated fresh air shall
following: be of masonry construction.
P) The air filters of the air-handling units shall
a) Escape routes like staircases, common
be of non-combustible materials.
corridors, lift lobbies, etc, shall not be used
q) The air-handling unit room shall not be used
as return air passage.
for storage of any combustible materials.
b) The ducting shall be constructed of substantial
gauge metal in accordance with good practice r) Inspection panels shall be provided in the
[4(31]. main trunking to facilitate the cleaning of
ducts of accumulated dust and to obtain access
c) Wherever the ducts pass through fire walls or
for maintenance of fire dampers.
floors, the opening around the ducts shall be
sealed with materials having fire resistance s) No combustible rrgwerial shall be fixed nearer
rating of the compartment. than 150 mm to &y duct unless such duct is
d) Where duct crosses a compartment which is properly enclosed and protected with non-
fire rated, the ducts shall be fire rated for same combustible material (glass wool or spunglass
fire rating. Further depending on services with neoprene facing enclosed and wrapped
passing around the duct work, which may get with aluminimum sheeting) at least 3.2 mm thick
affected in case of fire temperature rising, the and which would not readily conduct heat.
ducts shall be insulated. t) Fire Dampers
e) As far as possible, metallic ducts shall be used 1) These shall be located in conditioned air
even for the return air instead of space above ducts and return air ducts/passages at the
the false ceiling. following points:
f) Where plenum is used for return air passage, i) At the fwe separation wall.
ii) Where ductslpassages enter the prevent the flow of oil into the boiler room in
central vertical shaft. case of tank rupture.
iii) Where the ducts pass through floors. f) Foam inlets shall be provided on the external
iv) At the inlet of supply air duct and the walls of the building near the ground level to
return air duct of each compartment enable the fire services to use foam in case of
on every floor. fire.
2) The dampers shall operate automatically y
C-2 PROVISION OF FIRST-AID FIRE FIGHTING
and shall simultaneously switch off the
APPLIANCES
air-handling fans. Manual operation
facilities shall also be provided. The first-aid fire fighting equipment shall be provided
NOTE — For blowers, where extraction system on all floors, including basements, lift rooms, etc, in
and duct accumulators are used, dampers shall be accordance with good practice [4(2 1)] in consultation
provided. with the Authority.
3) Fire/smoke dampers (for smoke extraction
shafts) for buildings more than 24 m in C-3 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
height. C-3.1 All buildings with heights of 15 m or above
For apartment In non-ventilated shall be equipped with manually operated electrical
houses lobbiesl corridors fire alarm (MOEFA) system and automatic fire alarm
ANNEX D
D-2.1.2 The hot gases at the roof level moved by D-2.1.12 In industrial buildings of floor area less than
convection currents contribute to rapid lateral spread 750 m2 and used as low fire hazard occupancies,
of fire. conventional ventilators fitted high up near the eaves
of the external walls may serve as vents for smoke and
D-2.1.3 The provision of properly designed and
hot gases, provided care is taken to ensure that they
suitably located vents in adequate number helps the
are kept open at all times or are designed to open
speedy removal of smoke and hot gases, thereby
automatically in case of fire.
preventing spread of fire, besides reducing risks of
explosion of unburnt gases and reducing damage to D-2.1.13 Extinction of fires by closing the doors and
the contents and structure of the building by heat and windows is not likely in the case of industrial buildings
smoke. In addition, they facilitate fire fighting because of their large size, where sufficient air to
operations, and minimize personal hazards to the sustain the fire at least in the initial stages can be
firemen. expected to be present.
D-2.1.4 The time taken for accumulation of smoke D-2.1.14 Of the two types of building ventilation,
and hot gases within a building on fire being very short, namely, vertical and horizontal, vertical ventilation is
the venting devices installed shall be designed to the one commonly adopted in the case of single storey
Iargely based on the assumed build-up of the fire from which shall be designed for both manual and automatic
the time of initial outbreak to the time of effective fire operation.
fighting action by fire brigade.
D-2.3.7 Sawtooth roof skylight shall be considered as
D-2.2.2 The vent area required to be provided shall satisfactory for venting purposes only when designed
be approximately proportional to the perimeter of the for automatic operation.
fire area, because the entrained air forms the bulk of
D-2.3.8 Likewise, exterior wall windows shall not be
the vented gases.
reckoned as satisfactory means for venting of fire gases
D-2.2.3 The effective area shall be the minimum cross- and smoke in industrial buildings. However, they may
sectional area through which the hot gases must flow be reckoned as additional means of venting when, they
out to the atmosphere. are located close to the eaves and are provided with
ordinary glass or movable sash arranged for both
D-2.2.4 No consideration shall be given to the
manual and automatic operation.
increased air movement obtained by power operated
fans, since it must be assumed that in the event of fire, D-2.3.9 Baffles shall not be installed inside vents, as
power will be interrupted, or fans damaged by heat. they greatly reduce the effective area for venting.
D-2.2.5 The total vent areas to be provided shall be D-2.4 Vent Operation
as per the following ratios of effective area of vent
D-2.5 Size, Spacing and Disposition of Vents D-2.6.2 They shall be of sheet metal or any other
substantial non-combustible material strong enough to
D-2.5.1 Vents shall be correctly sited to ensure their withstand damage by heat or impact.
functional efficiency. Ideally, they shall be sited at the
highest point in each area to be covered. D-2.6.3 They shall be reasonably gas-tight, although
small openings for passage of pipes, conduits, etc, shall
D-2.5.2 They shall, as far as possible, be located be permitted.
immediately above the risk to be protected so as to
allow free and speedy removal of smoke and other D-2.6.4 They shall extend down from the roof/ceiling
combustion products in the event of fire. for a minimum depth of 2.2 m. Around specific
hazards, the depth shall be 4 m. Where roof/ceiling
D-2.5.3 The minimum dimension for an effective vent height exceeds 15 m they shall extend down to within
opening shall be not less than 1.25 m in any direction. 3 m of the floor. For pitched sawtoothed roofs, they
D-2.5.4 The spacing of the individual vents shall be shall extend down to truss level dividing the roof into
based on the principle that more number of well compartments.
distributed smaller vents are more effective than less
D-2.6.5 In moderate hazard occupancies, the distance
D-3.2.8 The maximum explosion pressure in a vented D-3.3.7 Movable sash shall be of the top or bottom
structure decreases as the size of the vent increases, but hinged or protected type. These shall be equipped with
is independent of the rupturing pressure of a diaphragm. a latch or friction device to prevent accidental opening
due to wind action or intrusion. Such latches or locks
D-3.2.9 The most effective vent for the release of shall be well maintained.
explosion pressures is an unobstructed vent opening.
D-3.3.8 Fixed sash shall be set in place with very light
D-3.2.1O Pressure required to rupture diaphragms of wall anchorages, or, if right, shall be securely fitted
the same area and material directly varies with the and glazed with plastic panes in plastic putty.
thickness of the material.
D-3.3.9 Where the process is such that the whole of a
D-3.2.11 The slower the rate of pressure rise, the more building or a room may be desirable to arrange for a
easily can the explosion be vented. lightly constructed wall or roof to collapse and thus
D-3.2.12 The degree of venting required is directly avert the worst effects of an explosion.
proportional to the degree of explosion hazard.
D-3.4 Design, Size and Disposition of Vents
D-3.2.13 Experience has shown that most explosions
D-3.4.1 The required area of explosion vents shall
of dusts, vapours and gases do not involve a large part
ordinarily depend on the expected maximum intensity
of the total volume of the enclosure, and frequently
of an explosion in the occupancy, the strength of the
occur near the upper or lower limits of the explosive
structure, the type of vent closure and other factors.
range. Consequently, such explosions are relatively
weak compared with the optimum. D-3.4.2 Venting shall be planned in such a manner as
D-3.4.3 When ductwork isused, theductsshall beef D-3.4.15 Small enclosures, such as machines, shall
sufficient strength to withstand the maximum expected be vented more generously than buildings, because if
explosion pressure. an explosion occurs in a machine, its entire volume
.
may be involved.
D-3.4.4 Where explosions are likely within duct and
piping systems, they shall be vented by the use of D-3.4.16 Vents for the protection of buildings and
suitable diaphragms designed to blow out at a equipment shall be installed on the following basis:
predetermined pressure. There shall be no physical
D-3.4 .16.1 Small enclosures of less than 30 m3,
connection between ductwork system for more than
machines and ovens of light construction: 1000 cmz
one collector.
for each 0.3 m3 to 0.9 m3.
D-3.4.5 In large structures, the position of vents shall
D-3.4.16.2 For small enclosures of more substantial
be relative to the point of origin of explosion, when it
construction having reasonably high bursting strength:
can be determined.
1000 cm2 for each 0.9 m3.
D-3.4.6 Where relatively slow explosions involving
D-3.4.16.3 Fairly large enclosures of 30 to 700 m3,
Any person discovering fire, heat or smoke shall E-4.2 Floor Numbering Signs
immediately report such condition to the fire brigade,
E-4 SIGNS AND PLANS A sign shall be posted and maintained on each floor
within each stairway and on the occupancy side of the
E-4.1 Signs at Lift Landings stairway where required, indicating whether re-entry
A sign shall be posted and maintained in a conspicuous is provided into the build$ng and the floor where
place on every floor at or near the lift landing in such re-entry is provided, in accordance with the
accordance with the requirements, indicating that in requirements given below:
case of fire, occupants shall use the stairs unless The lettering and numerals of the signs shall be at least
instructed otherwise. The sign shall contain a diagram 12.5 mm high of bold type. The lettering and
showing the location of the stairways except that such background shall be of contrasting colours and the
diagram may be omitted, provided signs containing signs shall be securely attached approximately 1.5 m
such diagram are posted in conspicuous places on the above the floor level.
respective floor.
E-4.5 Fire command station shall be provided with
A sign shall read “IN CASE OF FIRE, USE STAIRS floor plan of the building and other pertinent
UNLESS INSTRUCTED OTHERWISE”. The lettering information relative to the service equipment of the
shall be at least 12.5 mm block letters in red and white building.
E-5 FIRE SAFETY PLAN written programme for all occupants, to ensure prompt
reporting of fire, the response of fire alarms as
E-5.1 A format for the Fire Safety Plan shall be as
designated, and the immediate initiation of fire safety
given in E-8.
procedures to safeguard life and contain fire until the
E-5.2 The applicable parts of the approved Fire Safety arrival of the fire brigade.
Plan shall be distributed to all tenants of the building
by the building management when the Fire Safety Plan E-8.3 Fire Safety Director
has been approved by the Fire Authority. a) Name
E-5.3 The applicable parts of the approved Fire Safety b) Regularly assigned employment — Title
Plan shall then be distributed by the tenants to all their c) Regularly assigned location
employees and by the building management to all their d) How is he notified when at regular location?
building employees.
e) How is he notified when not at regular location?
E-5.4 Where the owner of the building is also an f) Normal working hours
occupant of the building, he shall be responsible for g) Duties of Fire Safety Director (see E-9.1)
the observance of these rules and the Fire Safety Plan
in the same manner as a tenant. E-8.4 Deputy Fire Safety Director
A Fire Command Station shall be established in the g) Duties of Deputy Fire Safety Director
lobby of the building on the entrance floor. Such (see E-9.2)
command station shall be adequately illuminated.
E-8.5 Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire Wardens
E-7 COMMUNICATIONS AND FIRE ALARM a) Are their names on Organization Charts for
A means of communication and flue alarm for use during each floor andlor tenancy?
fire emergencies shall be provided and maintained by b) Submit typical completed Organization Chart
the owner or person in charge of the building. for Fire Drill and Evacuation Assignment.
c) Duties of Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire
E-8 FIRE SAFETY PLAN FORMAT Wardens (see E-9.3).
E-8.1 Building Address
E-8.6 Building Evacuation Supervisor
Street and Pin Code Number ...............................
a) Name
Telephone Number ...............................................
b) Regularly assigned employment — Title
E-8.2 Purpose and Objective c) Regularly as~i~ed location
E-9.3 Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire Wardens and/or floors above are unusable due to
Duties contamination or cut off by fire and/or smoke
or that several floors above fire involve
The tenant or tenants of each floor shall, upon request
large numbers of occupants who must be
of the owner or person in charge of buildings, make
evacuated, consideration may be given to
responsible and dependable employees available for
using elevators in accordance with the
designation by the Fire Safety Director as Fire Warden
following:
and Deputy Fire Wardens.
1) If the elevators servicing his floor also
E-9.3.1 Each floor of a building shall be under the service the fire floor, they shall not be
direction of a designated Fire Warden for the used. However, elevators may be used if
evacuation of occupants in the event of fire. He shall there is more than one bank of elevators,
be assisted in his duties by the Deputy Fire Wardens. and he is informed from the Fire Command
A Deputy Fire warden shall be provided for each Station that one bank is unaffected by the
tenancy. When the floor area of a tenancy exceeds fire.
700 mz of occupiable space, a Deputy Fire Warden 2) If elevators do not service the fire floor
shall be assigned for each 700 m2 or part thereof. and their shafts have no openings on the
fire floor, they may be used, unless
E-9.3.2 Each Fire Warden and Deputy Fire Warden
directed otherwise.
shall be familiar with the Fire Safety Plan, the location
E-9.3.9 After evacuation, perform a head count to NOTE — A chart designating employees and their
assignmentsshall be prepared.
ensure that all regular occupants known to have
occupied the floor have been evacuated. E-9.6 Occupant’s Instructions
E-9.3.1O When alarm is received, the Fire Warden a) The applicable parts of the approved Fire
shall remain at a selected position in the vicinity of the Safety Plan shall be distributed to all tenants
communication station on the floor, in order to of the building by the building management
j) Interior fire alarms, or alarms to central Safety Director. One copy of a representative floor plan
stations. shall be submitted to the Fire Department with the Fire
k) Communications systems and/or walkie Safety plan.
talkie, telephones, etc.
E-9.1O Fire Safety Plan
m) Standpipe system; size and location of risers,
gravity or pressure tank, fire pump, location In planning, evaluate the individual floor layouts, the
of siamese connections, name of employee population of floors, the number and kinds of exits,
with certificate of qualification and number the zoning of the floor by area and occupants.
of certificate. Determine the movement of traffic by the most
n) Sprinkler system; name of employee with expeditious route to an appropriate exit and alternative
Certificate of Fitness and certificate number. route for each zone, since under tire conditions one or
Primary and secondary water supply, fire more exits may not be usable. This format is to be used
pump and areas protected. in the preparation of the Fire Safety Plan. Nothing
Special extinguishing system, if any, contained in this Fire Safety Plan format is to be
P)
components and operation. construed as all inclusive. All rules and other
requirements are to be fully complied with.
q) Average number of persons normally employed
in building. Daytime and night time.
E-9.11 Personal Fire Instruction Card
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ 3844:1989 Code of practice for installation
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The and maintenance of internal fire
standards listed may be used by the Authority as a guide hydrants and hose reels on
in conformance with the requirements of the referred premises (first revision)
clauses in the Code. (7) 3614 Specification for fire check
(part 1): 1966 doors: Pmt 1 Plate, metal covered
IS No. Title
and rolling type
(1) 3808:1979 Method of test for non-
(8) 12458:1988 Method of test for fire resistance
combustibility of building
test for fire stops
materials (first revision)
(9) 1646:1997 Code of practice for fire safety
(2) 8757:1999 Glossary of terms associated
of buildings (general) :
with fire safety (jirst revision)
Electrical installations (second
7673:1975 Glossary of terms for fire revision)
fighting equipment
2309:1989 Code of practice for protection of
(3) 15394:2003 Fire safety in petroleum refinery building and allied structures
and fertilizer plants — Code of against lighting (second revision)
practice
(lo) ................ Specification for fire dampers
(4) 8758:1993 Recommendations for fire for air conditioning ducts (under
precautionary measures in the preparation)
construction of temporary
(11) 11360:1985 Specification for smoke
structures and PANDALS (first
detectors for use in automatic
revision) electrical fwe alarm system
(5) 3809:1979 Fire resistance test of structure Safe@ code for air-conditioning
(12) 659:1964
(jirst revision)
(13) 1649:1962 Code of practice for design and
1641:1988 Code of practice for fwe safety construction of flues and
of buildings (general): General chimneys for domestic heating
principles of fire grading and appliances (first revision)
classification (first revision)
1642:1989 Code of practice for safety of
15103:2002 Specification for fire resistant buildings (general): Details of
steel construction (/irst revision)
(6) 9668:1990 Code of practice for provision (14) 12777:1989 Fire safety-flame-spread of
and maintenance of water products — Method for
supplies and fire fighting classification
8096:1992 Specification for fire beaters 13386:1992 Specification for 50 litre capacity
(J%-strevision) fire extinguisher, mechanical
foam type
8149:1994 Functional requirements for twin
2726:1988 Code of practice for fire safety 12407:1988 Graphic symbols for fire
of industrial buildings: Cotton protection plans
STANDARDS
MATERIALS
OF INDIAN
PART 5 BUILDING
BUREAU
CONTENTS
FOREWORD ... 3
1 SCOPE ... 5
2 MATERIALS ... 5
3 NEW OR ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS ... 5
4 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION ... 5
5 USED MATERIALS ... 5
6 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ... 5
7 METHODS OF TEST ... 5
FOREWORD
Ensuring the quality and effectiveness of building materials used in the construction and their storage are as
important as the other phases of building activity like planning, designing and constructing the building itself.
This Part, therefore, lists Indian Standards for materials used in building construction. The methods of tests, to
ensure the requirements demanded of the materials in the various situations, are also included.
Historically choice of building materials was determined by what was locally available, appropriateness to geo-
climatic conditions and affordability of users. In recent past, different initiatives have been taken in the areas of
research and development, standardization, and development and promotion of innovative materials. A review
of the recent trends indicates that the growth in the area of building materials covers emerging trends and latest
developments in the use of wastes, mineral admixtures in cement and concrete, substitutes to conventional timber,
composite materials and recycling of wastes, at the same time ensuring desired response of materials to fire, long
In this context, the following factors have become important for facilitating application and adoption in practice,
of the materials:
a) Utilization of industrial, mining, mineral and agricultural wastes; plantation timbers; and renewable
natural fibres and residues for production of building materials.
b) Impact of production of building materials on the consumption levels of natural resources.
c) Change in energy demand in production of building materials due to development of efficient
manufacturing processes.
d) Impact of production and usage of materials and disposal thereof on the environment.
To encourage use of appropriate materials, it may be desirable to have, to the extent possible, performance
oriented approach for specifications rather than prescriptive approach. The approach has been already adopted in
some cases in development of standards, wherever found possible.
Indian Standards cover most of the requirements for materials in use. However, there may be a gap between
development of new materials and techniques of application and formulation of standards. It, therefore, becomes
necessary for a Building Code to be flexible to recognize building materials other tlmn those for which Indian
Standards are available. This Part, therefore, since its first version, duly takes care of this aspect and explicitly
provides for use of new or alternate building materials, provided it is proved by authentic tests that the new or
alternative material is effective and suitable for the purpose intended. However, it is worthwhile that more and
more emphasis is given to the satisfaction of performance requirements expected of a building material, so that
a wide range of such new or alternate materials can be evaluated and used, if found appropriate.
As already emphasized, quality of material is quite important for their appropriate usage, whether it is a material
for which an Indian Standard is available or a new or alternative material as defined in 3 of this Part. Third party
certification schemes available in the country for quality assurance of above materials can be used with advantage
to ensure the appropriateness of these materials.
This Part of the Code was first published in 1970 and subsequently revised in 1983. The first revision of this Part
incorporated an updated version of the list of Indian Standards given at the end of this Part of the Code. The
present draft revision of this Part, while basically retaining the structure of 1983 version of the Code, explicitly
takes care of the following:
a) While continuing to emphasize on conformity of building materials to available Indian Standards, the
building regulating authority also recognizes use of building materials conforming to other specifications
and test methods (see 3), in case Indian Standards are not available for particuhu materials.
Following are the Indian Standards for various building 29. WIRE ROPES AND WIRE PRODUCTS
materials and components, to be complied with in
fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. 1. ALUMINIUM AND OTHER LIGHT METALS
L
AND THEIR ALLOYS
In the following list, while enlisting the Indian
Standards, the materials have been categorized in such 1S No. Title
a way as to make the list user friendly. In the process, 733:1983 Specification for wrought
if so required, some of the standards have been included aluminium and aluminium alloys,
even in more than one category of products, such as in bars, rods and sections for general
the category based on composition as well as on end engineering purposes (third
application of the materials. The list has been arranged revision)
in alphabetical order of their principal category as given
737:1986 Specification for wrought
below:
aluminium and alumiNum alloys,
1. ALUMINIUM AND OTHER LIGHT METALS sheet rods and strip for general
AND THEIR ALLOYS engineering purposes (third
2. BITUMEN AND TAR PRODUCTS revision)
206:1992 Specification for tee and strap 4992:1975 Specification for door handles for
hinges ~ourth revision) mortice locks (vertical type) (jirst
revision)
208:1996 Specification for door handles (fifih
revision) 5187:1972 Specification for flush bolts (jlrst
revision)
281:1991 Specification for mild steel sliding
door bolts for use with padlock 5899:1970 Specification for bathroom latches
(third revision) 5930:1970 Specification for mortice latch
Specificationforparliament hinges (vertical type)
362:1991
(jifth revision) 6315:1992 Specification for floor springs
(hydraulically regulated) for heavy
363:1993 Specification for hasps and staples
doors (second revision)
~otwth revision)
6318:1971 Specification for plastic window
364:1993 Specification for fanlight catch
stays and fasteners
(third revision)
6343:1982 Specification for door closers
452:1973 Specification for door springs, rat-
(pneumatically regulated) for light
tail type (second revision)
door weighing up to 40 kg (jirst
(Part 9): 1973 Determination of soundness 13757:1993 Specification for burnt clay fly ash
building bricks
(Part 10) :1973 Determination of popping and
pitting of hydrated lime d) Jallies
(Part 11) :1984 Determination of setting time of 7556:1988 Specification for burnt clay jallies
hydrated lime (jirst revision)
10360:1982 Specification for lime pozzolana
e) Tiles
concrete blocks for paving
10772:1983 Specification for quick setting lime 654:1992 Specification for clay roofing tiles,
pozzolana mixture Mangalore pattern (third revision)
12894:2002 Specification for pulverized fuel 1464:1992 Specification for clay ridge and
(Part 8): 1963 Petrographic examination (Part 2): 2003 For use as admixture in cement
mortar and concrete (second
2430:1986 Methods ofsampling ofaggregates
revision)
of concrete first revision)
6491:1972 Method of sampling of flyash
6579:1981 Specification for coarse aggregate
for water bound macadam (first 6925:1973 Methods of test for determination
revision) of water soluble chlorides in
concrete admixtures
9142:1979 Specification for artificial light-
weight aggregates for concrete 9103:1999 Specification for admixtures for
masonry units concrete (jirst revision)
(Part 1): 1991 Flyash based (third revision) 456:2000 Code of practice for plain and
(Part 2): 1991 Calcined clay based (third revision) reinforced concrete (fourth
revision)
3466:1988 Specification for masonry cement
(second revision) 1343:1980 Code of practice for prestressed
6452:1989 Specification for high alumina concrete (jirst revision)
cement for structural use (first 4926:2003 Code of practice for ready-mixed
revision) concrete (third revision)
6909:1990 Specification for supersulphated e) Cement and Concrete Sampling and Methods of
cement Test
8041:1990 Specification for rapid hardening
516:1959 Methods of test for strength of
Portland cement (second revision)
concrete
8042:1989 Specification for white Portland
1199:1959 Methods of sampling and analysis
cement (second revision)
of concrete
8043:1991 Specification for hydrophobic
2770 Methods of testing bond in
Portland cement (second revision)
(Part 1): 1967 reinforced concrete: Part 1 Pullout
8112:1989 Specification for 43 grade ordinary
test
Portland ‘cement @rst revision)
3085:1965 Methods of test for permeability of
12269:1987 Specification for 53 grade ordinary
cement mortar and concrete
Portland cement
3535:1986 Methods of sampling hydraulic
12330:1988 Specification for sulphate resisting
cement (jirst revision)
Portland cement
4031 Methods of physical tests for
12600:1989 Specification for low heat Portland
hydraulic cementi
cement
(Part 1): 1996 Determination of fineness by dry
c) Mineral/Chemical Admixtures and Pozzolanas sieving (second revision)
1344:1981 Specification for calcined clay (Part 2): 1999 Determination of fineness by
pozzolana (second revision) specific surface by Blaine air
1727:1967 Methods of test for pozzolanic permeability method (second
materials @rst revision) revision)
(Part 1): 1983 Cold drawn stress-relieved wire 6073:1971 Specification for autoclave
(second revision) reinforced cellular concrete floor
As drawn wire (first revision) and roof slabs
(Part 2): 1983
1786:1985 Specification for high strength 6441 Methods of test for autoclave
deformed steel bars and wires for cellular concrete products:
concrete reinforcement (third (Part 1): 1972 Determination of unit weight or
revision) bulk density and moisture content
2090:1983 Specification forhigh tensile steel (Part 2),; 1972 Determination of drying shrinkage
bars used inprestressed concrete (Part 4) ‘: 1972 Corrosion protection of steel
@rst revision) reinforcement in autoclave
6003:1983 Specification for indented wire cellular concrete
forprestressed concrete (first (Part 5): 1972 Determination of compressive
revision) strength
6006:1983 Specification for uncoated stress- (Part 6): 1973 Strength, deformation and cracking
relieved strand for prestressed of flexural members subject to
concrete @rst revision)
(Part 2): 1985 For working voltages from 3.3 kV (Part 24) :1984 Water soluble impurities test of
up to and including 33 kV (Jirst insulating paper
revision) (Part 25) :1984 Conductivity of water extract test
(Part 3): 1993 For working voltages from 66 kV of insulating paper
up to and including 220 kV (/irst (Part 26) :1984 pH value of water extract test of
revision) insulating paper
9968 Specification for elastomer- (Part 27) :1984 Ash content test of insulating
insulated cables: paper
(Part 1): 1988 For working voltages up to and (Part 28) :1984 Water absorption test (Electrical)
including 1 100 V (first revision) (Part 29) :1984 Environmental stress cracking test
(Part 2): 2002 For working voltages from 3.3 kV (Part 30) :1984 Hot set test
up to and including 33 kV (first
(Part 31) :1984 Oil resistance test
revision)
(Part 32) :1984 Carbon content test for polyethylene
10810 Methods of test for cables
(Part 33) :1984 Water absorption test (Gravimetric)
4160:1967 Specification for interlocking (Part 5/See 5): Particular requirements, Section 5
switch socket outlet 1987 Flood light
4615:1968 Specification for switch socket 11037:1984 Electronic type fan regulators
outlets (non-interlocking type) 13010:2002 AC watt-hour meters, Class 0.5, 1
4649:1968 Specification for adaptors for and 2 (jirst revision)
flexible steel conduits 13779:1999 AC static watthour meters (Class 1
5077:1969 Specification for decorative and 2) (jirst revision)
lighting outfits 13947 Specification for low-voltage
6538:1971 Specification for three-pin plugs (Part 3): 1993 switchgear and controlgear: Part 3
made of resilient material Switches, disconnectors, switch
disconnectors and fuse
8030:1976 Specification for luminaires for
combination units
hospitals
14763:2000 Conduit for electrical purposes,
8828:1996 Specification for circuit-breakers
outside diameters of conduits for
for over current protection for
electrical installations and threads
household and similar installation
9510:1980 Specification for bitumen mastic 13711:1993 Sampling and basis for acceptance
acid resisting grade of ceramic tiles
13026:1991 Specification for bitumen mastic 13753:1993 Specification for dust pressed
for flooring for industries handling ceramic tiles with water absorption
LPG and other light hydrocarbon of E > 10% Group (B 111)
products 13754:1993 Specification for dust pressed
15194:2002 Specification for pitch-mastic ceramic tiles with water absorption
flooring for industries handling of 6% < E < 10% Group (B II b)
3951 Specification for hollow clay tiles (Part 2): 2001 Coated/laminated gypsum plaster
for floor and roofs: boards ,.*-
(Part 3): 1996 Reinforced gypsum plaste~boards {
(Part 1): 1975 Filler type t&st revision) $
(second revision)
(Part 2): 1975 Structural type (/irst revision) I
2542 Methods of test for gypsum plaster,
10388:1982 Specification for corrugated coir
wood wool cement roofing sheets concrete and products:
~
12583:1988 Specification for corrugated (Part l/See 1): Plaster and concrete, Section 1 .
bitumen roofing sheets 1978 Normal consistency of gypsum
plaster (first revision)
12866:1989 Specification for plastic translucent
sheets made from thermosetting (Part l/see 2): Plaster and concrete, Section 2 I
polyester resin (glass fibre 1978 Normal consistency of gypsum :
reinforced) concrete (fwst revision)
(Part 2/See 2): Gypsum products, Section 2 1326:1992 Specification for non-coniferous
1981 Determination of mass (first sawn timber (baulks and scantlings)
revision) (second revision)
(Part 2/See 3): Gypsum products, Section 3 1331:1971 Specification for cut sizes of timber
1981 Determination of mass and thickness (second revision)
of paper surfacing (first revision) 3337:1978 Specification for ballies for general
(Part 2/See 4): Gypsum products, Section 4 purposes (first revision)
1981 Transverse strength (j$rst revision) 5966:1993 Specification for non-coniferous
(Part 2/See 5) : timber in converted form for
Gypsum products, Section 5
general purpose (first revision)
1981 Compressive strength (@t revision)
14960:2001 Specification for preservative
(Part 2/See 6): Gypsum products, Section 6
treated and seasoned sawn timber
1981 Water absorption (jirst revision)
from rubberwood (Hevea
(Part 2/See 7) : Gypsum products: Section 7 brasiliensis)
1981 Moisture content @irst revision)
iii) Timber Testing
(Part 2/See 8) : Gypsum products, Section 8
1981 Nail retention of precast reinforced 1708 Methods of testing small clear
gypsum slabs (/irst revision) specimens of timber:
2547 Specification for gypsum building (Part 1) :1986 Determination of moisture content
plaster: (second revision)
1
strength (second revision) quality of timber under different
wood operations — Method of test
(Part 6) : 986 Determination of static bending
(/irst revision)
strength under two point loading
(second revision) 8720:1978 Methods of sampling of timber
scantlings from depots and their
(Part 7): 986 Determination of impact bending
conversion for testing
strength (second revision)
8745:1994 Methods of presentation of data of
(Part 8): 1986 Determination of compressive
2455:1990 Method of sampling of model trees 4895:1985 Specification for teak logs (first
and logs for timber testing and their revision)
conversion (second revision) 5246:2000 Specification for coniferous logs
2753 (/irst revision)
Methods for estimation of
preservatives in treated timber and 7308:1999 Specification for non-coniferous
treating solutions: logs (/irst revision)
(Part 18) :1983 Impact resistance test on the (Part 10) :1977 Falling hammer impact test @rst
surface of plywood (second revision)
revision) (Part 11) :1977 Surface hardness (@t revision)
(Part 19) :1983 Determination of nails and screws (Part 12) :1977 Central loading of plate test (j%
holding power (second revision) revision)
(Part 13) :1977 Long time loading bending test iii) Wood-Based Laminates
@rst revision)
3513 (Part3) : Specification for resin treated
(Part 14) :1977 Screw and nail withdrawal test 1989 compressed wood laminates
@rst revision) (compregs): Part 3 For general
(Part 15) :1977 Lateral nail resistance (’first purposes (fzrst revision)
revision) 3513 (Part 4): Specification for high and medium
(Part 16) :1977 Determination of water absorption 1966 density wood laminates (compreg):
@rst revision) Part 4 Sampling and tests
(Part 19) :1977 Durability cyclic test for interior (Part 2): 1979 Edgewise compression test
use (jirst revision) (Part 3): 1979 Flatwise compression test
(Part l/See 3): Test on liquid paints (general and (Part 5/See 4): Mechanical test on paint films,
1986 physical), Section 3 Preparation of 1986 Section”4 Print free test (third
panels (third revision) revision)
(Part l/See 4) : Test on liquid paints (general and (Part 6/See 1): Durability tests, Section 1
1987 physical), Section 4 Brushing test 1988 Resistance to humidity under
(third revision) conditions of condensation (third
revision)
(Part l/See 5): Test on liquid paints (general and
1989 physical), Section 5 Consistency (Part 6/See 2): Durability tests, Section 2 Keeping
(third revision) 1989 properties (third revision)
(Part l/See 6): Test on liquid paints (general and (Part 6/See 3): Durability tests, Section 3 Moisture
1987 physical), Section 6 Flash point 1990 vapour permeability (third
(third revision) revision)
(Part 9/See 1): Tests for lacquers and varnish, 3536:1999 Specification for ready mixed
1993 Section 1 Acid value ‘paint, brushing, wood primer (jirst
revision)
(Part 9/See 2): Tests for lacquers and varnish,
1993 Section 2 Rosin test 3537:1966 Specification for ready mixed
paint, finishing, interior for general
104:1979 Specification for ready mixed
purposes, to Indian Standard
paint, brushing, zinc chrome,
colours No. 101, 216, 217, 219,
priming (second revision)
275:”281, 352, 353, 358 to 361,
109:1968 Specification for ready mixed
363,364,388,410,442, 444,628,
paint, brushing, priming, plaster to
631,632,634,693,697, white and
Indian Standard colours No. 361
black
and 631 (jirst revision)
3539:1966 Specification for ready mixed
123:1962 Specification for ready mixed
paint, undercoating, for use under
paint, brushing, finishing, semi-
oil finishes, to Indian Standard
gloss, for general purposes, to
colours, as required
Indian Standard colours No. 445,
446, 448, 449, 451 and 473; and 3585:1966 Specification for ready mixed paint,
red oxide (colour unspecified) aluminium, brushing, priming,
(revised) water resistant, for wood work
14293:1995 Method”of test for trapezoid tearing 5219 (Part 1): Specification for cast copper alloy
— Geotextiles 1969 traps: Part 1 ‘P’ and ‘S’ traps
14294:1995 Method of determination of 5455:1969 Specification for cast-iron steps for
apparent opening size by dry manholes
sieving technique — Geotextiles 6411:1985 Specification for gel-coated glass
14324:1995 Method of test for determination of fibre reinforced polyester resin
water permeability -permittivity — bath tubs (jirst revision)
Geotextiles 8718:1978 Specification for vitreous
4443:199’7 Specification for polycarbonate enamelled steel kitchen sinks
sheets 8727:1978 Specification for vitreous
4643:1999 Specification for unsintered enamelled steel wash basins
polytetrafluoroethy lene (PTFE) 9140:1996 Method of sampling of vitreous
tape for thread sealing applications and fire clay sanit~ appliances
4706:1999 Sampling and preparation of test (second revision)
specimen of geotextiles 12701:1996 Specification for rotational moulded
1879:1987 Specification for malleable cast 12988:1991 Rubber sealing rings for CID
iron pipe fittings (second revision) joints for light duty AC pipes —
3486:1966 Specification for cast iron spigot Dimensional requirements
and socket drainpipes 13382:1992 Cast iron specials for mechanical
3989:1984 Specificationforcentrifugally cast and push on flexible joints for
(spun) iron spigot and socket pressure pipelines for water, gas
soil, waste and ventilating pipes, and sewage
fittings and accessories (second
iii) Lead Pipes and Fittings
revision)
5531:1988 Specification for cast iron specials 404 (Part 1): Specification for lead pipes: Part 1
for asbestos cement pressure pipes 1993 For other than chemical purpose
for water, gas and sewage (second (third revision)
revision)
iv) Fibre Pipes and Fittings
6163:1978 Specification for centrifugally cast
(spun) iron low pressure pipes 11925:1986 Specification for pitch-
for water, gas and sewage (first impregnqted fibre pipes and fittings
6418:1971 Specification for cast iron and v) Plastic Pipes and Fittings
malleable cast iron flanges for
general engineering purposes 3076:1985 Specification for low density
polyethylene pipes for potable
7181:1986 Specification for horizontally cast
water supplies (second revision)
iron double flanged pipes for water,
gas and sewage (jlrst revision) 4984:1995 Specification for high density
polyethylene pipes for water
8329:2000 Specification for centrifugally cast
supply (fourth revision)
(spun) ductile iron pressure pipes
for water, gas and sewage (third 4985:2000 Specification for unplasticized
revision) PVC pipes for potable water
supplies (third revision)
8794:1988 Specification for cast iron
detachable joints for use with 7834 Specification for injection moulded
asbestos cement pressure pipes PVC socket fittings with solvent
(first revision) cement joints for water supplies:
9523:1980 Specification for ductile iron (Part 1): 1987 General requirements tjirst revision)
fittings for pressure pipes for water, (Part 2): 1987 Specific requirements for 45°
gas and sewage elbows (lirst revision)
10292:1988 Dimensional requirements for (Part 3): 1987 Specific requirements for 90°
rubber sealing rings for CID joints elbows (jirst revision)
in asbestos cement piping (first (Part 4): 1987 Specific requirements for 90° tees
revision) @rst revision)
10299:1982 Cast iron saddle pieces for service (Part 5): 1987 Specific requirements for 45° tees
connection from asbestos cement (jirst revision)
pressure pipes
(Part 6): 1987 Specific requirements for sockets
11606:1986 Methods of sampling cast iron @rst revision)
pipes and fittings
(Part 7): 1987 Specific requirements for unions
12820:1989 Dimensional requirements of
(jirst revision)
rubber gaskets for mechanical
(Part 8): 1987 Specific requirements for caps
joints and push on joints for use
with cast iron pipes and fittings for (first revision)
carrying water, gas and sewage 8008 Specification for injection moulded
12987:1991 Cast iron detachable joints for use high density polyethylene (HDPE)
with asbestos cement pressure fittings for potable water supplies:
pipes (light duty) (Part 1): 2003 General requirements
PART 5 BUILDINGMATERIALS 29
IS No. Title IS No. Title
(Part 2): 2003 Specific requirements for 90° 12235 Methods of test for unplasticized
bends first revision) PVC pipes for potable water
(Part 3): 2003 Specific requirements for 90° tees supplies:
(Part 1) :1986 Method of measurement of outside
(Part 4): 2003 Specific requirements for reducers
diameter
(Part 5): 2003 Specific requirements for ferrule
(Part 2): 1986 Measurement of wall thickness
reducers (jirst revision)
(Part 3): 1986 Test for opacity
(Part 6): 2003 Specific requirements for pipe ends
(Part 4): 1986 Determining the detrimental effect
(Part 7): 2003 Specific requirements for sandwich
on the composition of water
flanges
(Part 5): 1986 Reversion test
(Pti 8) :2003 Specific requirements for reducing
(Part 6): 1986 Stress relief test
tests
(Part 7): 1986 Test for resistance to sulphuric acid
(Part 9): 2003 Specific requirements for end caps
lj$rst revision) (Part 8): 1986 Internal hydrostatic pressure test
(Part 9): 1986 Impact strength test
8360 Specification for fabricated high
density polyethylene (HDPE) (Part 10) :1986 Method for determination of
(Part 1) :1977 General requirements (Part 11) :1986 Extractability of cadmium and
mercury occurring as impurities
(Part 2): 1977 Specific requirements for 90° tees
12709:1994 Specification for glass-fibre
(Part 3): 1977 Specific requirements for 90°
reinforced plastic (GRP) pipes
bends
joints and fittings for use for
10124 Specification for fabricated PVC potable water supply (fzrst revision)
fittings for potable water supplies: 12818:1992 Specification for unplasticized
(Part 1): 1988 General requirements (first revision) PVC screen and casing pipes for
(Part 2): 1988 Specific requirements for sockets bore/tubewell (jirst revision)
(first revision) 13592:1992 Specification for UPVC pipes for
(Part 3): 1988 Specific requirements of straight soil and waste discharge systems
reducers (jirst revision) inside buildings including
ventilation and rainwater system
(Part 4): 1988 Specific requirements for caps
14333:1996 Specification for high density
(first revision)
polyethylene pipes for sewerage
(Part 5): 1988 Specific requirements for equal
14402:1996 Specification for GRP pipes, joints
tees (jirst revision)
and fittings for use for sewerage,
(Part 6): 1988 Specific requirements for flanged industrial waste and water (other
tail piece with metallic flanges than potable)
@rst revision)
14735:1999 Specification for unplasticized
(Part 7): 1988 Specific requirements for threaded polyvinyl chloride (UPVC)
adaptors (first revision) injection moulded fittings for soil
(Part 8): 1988 Specific requirements for 90° and waste discharge system for
bends (first revision) inside buildings including
ventikition and rain water system
(Part 9): 1988 Specific requirements for 60°
bends @rst revision) 14885:2001 Specification for polyethylene pipe
for supply of gaseous fuel
(Part 10) :1988 Specific requirements for 45°
bends (’jirst revision) 15225:2002 Specification for chlorinated
polyvinyl chloride compounds
(Part 11) :1988 Specific requirements for 30°
used for pipes and fittings
bends (jirst revision)
15328:2003 Specification for unplasticized
(Part 12) :1988 Specific requirements for 22Y2°
non-pressure polyvinyl chloride
bends (first revision)
(PVC-U) pipes for use in
(Part 13) :1988 Specific requirements for 1 1%0 underground drainage and sewerage
bends (jirst revision) ‘system
4270:1992 Steel tubes used for water wells 773:1988 Specification for enamelled cast
(second revision) iron water-closets railway stock
type ~ourth revision)
5504:1997 Specification for spiral welded
[See 8 (a) (ii) under the category ‘Composite Matrix 2556 Specification for vitreous sanitary
Products’ ] appliances (vitreous china):
(Part 1): 1994 General requirements (third
ix) Concrete Pipes and Pipes Lined/Coated with revision)
Concrete or Mortar
(Part 2): 1994 Specific requirements of wash-
[See 8 (a) (iv) under the category ‘Composite Matrix down water-closets (fourth
Products’ ] revision)
(Part 3): 1994 Specific requirements of squatting
c) Kitchen and Sanitary Appliances
pans (jourth revision)
771 Specification for glazed fire clay (Part 4): 1994 Specific requirements of wash
sanitary appliances: basins’ (third revision)
(Part 1) :1979 General requirements (second (Part 5): 1994 Specific requirements of laboratory
revision) sinks (third revision)
(Part 2): 1985 Specific requirements of kitchen (Part 6): 1995 Specific requirements of urinals
and laboratory sinks (third revision) and partition plates (Jourth revision)
(Part 3/See 1) : Specific requirements of urinals, (Part 7): 1995 Specific requirements of accessories
1979 Section 1 Slab urinals (second for sanitary appliances (third
revision) revision)
(Part 3/See 2) : Part 3 Specific requirements of (Part 8): 1995 Specific requirements of siphonic
1985 urinals, Section 2 Stall urinals wash-down water closets ~ourth
(third revision) revision)
1977:1996 Specification for low tensile 15103:2002 Specification for fire resistant
structural steels (third revision) steel
2062:1999 Specification for steel for general d) Bars, Rods, Wire and Wire Rods
structural purposes (j$fth revision)
280:1978 Specification for mild steel wire for
2830:1992 Specification for carbon steel general engineering purposes
billets ingots, blooms and slabs for (third revision)
re-rolling into steel for general
1148:1982 Specification for hot rolled steel
structural purposes (second
revision) rivet bars (up to 40 mm diameter)
for structural purposes (third
2831:2000 Specification for carbon steel
revision)
billets ingots, blooms and slabs for
re-rolling into low tensile structural 1149:1982 Specification for high tensile steel
steel (third revision) rivet bars for structural purposes
(third revision)
8053:1976 Specification for steel ingots and
billets for the production of steel 1673:1984 Specification for mild steel wire
wire for the manufacture of wood cold heading quality (second
screws revision)
PART 5 BUILDINGMATERIALS 33
IS No. Title IS No. Title
1812:1982 Specification for carbon steel wire 1122:1974 Method of test for determination of
for the manufacture of wood screw true specific gravity of natural
(second revision) building stones (jirst revision)
1835:1976 Specification for round steel wire 1123:1975 Method of identification of natural
for ropes (third revision) building stones (first revision)
2591:1982 Dimensions for hot rolled bars for 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of
threaded components (second water absorption, apparent specific
revision) gravity and porosity of natural
3150:1982 Specification for hexagonal wire building stones (j$rst revision)
netting for general purposes 1125:1974 Method of test for determination of
4826:1979 Specification for hot-dipped weathering of natural building
galvanized coatings on round steel stones (jirst revision)
wires first revision) 1126:1974 Method of test for determination of
6527:1995 Stainless steel wire rod (first durability of natural building
revision) stones (jirst revision)
6250:1981 Specification for roofing slate tiles 1863:1979 Specification for hot rolled steel
(j%-st revision) bulb flats (jirst revision)
7779 Schedule for properties and 2314:1986 Specification for steel sheet piling
availability of stones for construction sections (jirst revision)
purposes: 3443:1980 Specification for crane rail sections
(Part l/See 1): Gujarat state, Section 1 Availability (first revision)
1975 of stones 3908:1986 Specification for aluminium equal
(Part l/See 2): Gujarat state, Section 2 Engineering leg angles (jirst revision)
1975 properties of building stones 3909:1986 Specification for aluminium
(Part l/See 3): Gujarat state, Section 3 Engineering unequal leg angles (first revision)
1975 properties of stone aggregates 3921:1985 Specification for aluminium
(Part 2/See 1): Maharashtra state, Section 1 channels (jirst revision)
1979 Availability of stones 3954:1991 Specification for hot rolled steel
(Part 2/See 2): Maharashtra state, Section 2 channels sections for general
1979 Engineering properties of building engineering purposes (first
stones revision)
1852:1985 Specification for rolling and 2676:1981 Dimensions for wrought aluminium
cutting tolerances for hot rolled and aluminium alloys, sheet and
steel products (jourth revision) strip (@t revision)
6598:1972 Specification for cellular concrete (Part 11) :1985 Compressive strength
for thermal insulation (Part 12) :1989 Horizontal burning characteristics
7509:1993 Specification for thermal insulating (Part 13) :1992 Determination of flammability by
cement (/irst revision) oxygen index
8154:1993 Specification for preformed calcium 11307:1985 Specification for cellular glass
silicate insulation for temperature block and pipe thermal insulating
up to 650”C) (jirst revision) 11308:1985 Specification for thermal insulating
8183:1993 Specification for bonded mineral castables (hydraulic setting) for
wool (first revision) temperatures up to 1 250”C
730:1978 Specification for hook bolts for (Part 6): 1994 Mechanical properties and test
corrugated sheet roofing (second methods for nuts with specified
revision) proof loads (third revision)
1120:1975 Specification for coach screws (Part 7): 1980 Mechanical properties and test
(first revision) methods for nuts without specified
proof loads (second revision)
1363 Specification for hexagon head
bolts, screws and nuts of product (Part 8): 2002 Mechanical and performance
properties for prevailing torque
grade C:
type steel hexagon nuts (third
(Part 1): 2002 Hexagon head bolts (size range M 5
revision)
to M64) ($ourth revision)
(Part 9/See 1): Surface diyontinuities, Section 1
(Part 2): 2002 Hexagon head screws (size range 1993 Bolts, screws and studs for general
M5 to M64) ~ourth revision) applications (third revision)
(Part 3): 2002 Part 3 Hexagon nuts (Size range (Part 9/See 2): Surface discontinuities, Section 2
M5 to M64) ~ourth revision) 1993 Bolts, screws and studs for special
1364 Specification for hexagon head applications (third revision)
bolts, screws and nuts of product (Part 10) :2002 Surface discontinuities on nuts
Grades A and B: (third revision)
(Part 1): 2002 Hexagon head bolts (size range (Part 11) :2002 Electroplated coatings (third
Ml.6 to M64) (Jourth revision) revision)
(Part 2): 2002 Hexagon head screws (size range (Part 12) :1981 Phosphate coatings on threaded
Ml.6 to M64) (fourth revision) fasteners (second revision)
(Part 13) :1983 Hot dip galvanized coatings 4206:1987 Dimensions for nominal lengths,
on threaded fasteners (second and thread lengths for bolts, screws
revision) and studs (first revision)
(Part 14/Sec 1): Mechanical properties of corrosion 4762:2002 Specification for worm drive hose
2002 resistance stainless steel fasteners, clips for general purposes (second
Section 1 Bolts, screws and studs revision)
(third revision) 5369:1975 General requirements for plain
(Part 14/Sec 2) : Mechanical properties of corrosion washers and lock washers (first
2002 resistance stainless steel fasteners, revision)
Section 2 Nuts (third revision) 5372:1975 Specification for taper washer for
(Part 14/Sec 3) : Mechanical properties of corrosion channels (ISMC) (first revision)
2002 resistance stainless steel fasteners, 5373:1969 Specification for square washers
Section 3 Set screws and similar for wood fastenings
fasteners not under tensile stress 5374:1975 Specification for taper washers for
(third revision) L-beam (ISMB) (first revision)
(Part 3): 1992 Determination of capillary water 5898:1970 Specification for copper and
take-up copper “alloy bare solid welding
rods and electrodes
(Part 4): 1992 Determination of pH value
6419:1996 Specification for welding rods and
(Part 5): 1992 Determination of minimum film
bare electrodes for gas shielded arc
forming temperature and white
welding of structural steel (first
point
revision)
13826 Bitumen based felts — Method of
test: 6560:1996 Specification for molybdenum and
chromium-molybdenum low alloy
(Part 1): 1993 Breaking strength test
steel welding rods and bare
(Part 2): 1993 Pliability test electrodes for gas shielded arc
(Part 3): 1993 Storage sticking test welding (jirst revision)
FOREWORD ... 3
1 SCOPE ... 5
2 DEAD LOAD ... 5
3 IMPOSED LOAD ... 5
4 WIND LOAD ... 14
5 SEISMIC LOAD ... 53
6 SNOW LOAD ... 75
7 SPECIAL LOADS ... 81
8 LOAD COMBINATIONS ... 86
9 MULTI-HAZARD RISK IN VARIOUS DISTRICTS OF INDIA ... 86
FOREWORD
This Section covers the various loads, forces and effects which are to be taken into account for structural design
of buildings. The various loads that are covered under this Section are dead load, imposed load, wind load,
seismic load, snow load, special loads and load combinations.
This Code was first published in 1970 and revised in 1983. Subsequently the f~st revision of this Section was
modified in 1987 through Amendment No. 2 to the 1983 version of the Code to bring this Section in line with the
latest revised loading code. Now, in view of the revision of the important Indian Standard on earthquake resistant
design of structure, that is IS 1893, a need to revise this Part was felt. This revision has therefore been prepared
to take into account this revised standard, IS 1893 (Part 1) :2002 ‘Criteria for earthquake resistant design of
structures: Part 1 General provision and buildings (fijih revision)’ and also incorporate latest information on
The information contained in this Section is largely based on the following Indian Standards:
IS 1893 (Part 1) :2002 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures: Part 1 General provisions
and buildings (@h revision)
This Section has to be read together with Sections 2 to 7 of Part 6 ‘Structural Design’.
A reference to SP 64 (S&T) :2001 ‘Explanatory Handbook on Indian Standard Code of practice for design
loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures: Part 3 Wind loads IS 875 (Part 3) :1987’ may be
useful. This publication gives detailed background information on the provisions for wind loads and also the use
of these provisions for arriving at the wind loads on buildings and structures while evaluating their structural
safety,
Reference may also be made to the Vulnerability Atlas of India, 1997 and Landslide Hazard Zonation Atlas of
India, 2003 Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council, Ministry of Urban Development and Poverty
Alleviation, Government of India. The vulnerability Atlas contains information pertaining to each State and
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
‘medium’ and ‘heavy’ are introduced in order to aflow for more economical dedgrss but the terms have no speeiaf meaning in
themselves other than the imposed load for which the relevant floor is de.sigttad.1$is, however, important particularly in the case
of heavy weight loads, to assess the actual loads to ensure that they are not in exq of 10 kN/mz; h case where they are in excess,
the design shall be based on the actual loadings.
4)For v~ous mechmical hm~ng equipment which ~e uSed to ~ansp~ goo&, ss in w~ttous, WOr~OpS, StOre r@eu’tS, ek, the
actual load coming from the use of such equipment shall be ascertained and design shouId cater to such loads,
SI Type of Roof Imposed Load Measured on Flgri Aka Minimum Imposed Load
No. Mearmred on Plan
(1) (2) (3) (4)
NOTES
1 The loads given above do not include loads due to snow, rain, dust collection, etc. The roof shatl be designed for imposed loads
given above or for snowkitr load, whkhever is greater.
2 For special types of roofs with highly permeable and absorbent material, the contingency of roof material increasing in weight due
to absorption of moisture shall be provided for.
3.4.1.1 Roofs of buildings used for promenade or 3.4.3 Loads Due to Rain
incidental to assembly purposes shall be designed for
the appropriate imposed floor loads given in Table 1 On surfaces whose positioning, shape and drainage
for the occupancy. system are, such as, to make accumulation of rain water
possible, loads due to such accumulation of water and
3.4.2 Concentrated Load on Roof Coverings the imposed loads for the roof as given in Table 2 shrdl
To provide for loads incidental to maintenance, unless be considered separately and the more critical of the
otherwise specified by the Engineer-in-Charge, all roof two shall be adopted in the design.
coverings (other than glass or transparent sheets made
3.4.4 Dust Loads
of fibre glass) shall be capable of carrying an incidental
load of 0.90 kN concentrated on an area of 12.5 cmz so In areas prone to settlement of dust on roofs (example,
placed as to produce maximum stresses in the covering. steel plants, cement plants), provision for dust load
The intensity of the concentrated load maybe reduced equivalent to probable thickness of accumulation of
with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge, where it dust may be made.
is ensured that the roof coverings would not be traversed
3.4.5 Loads on Members Supporting Roof Coverings
without suitable aids. In any case, the roof coverings
shall be capable of carrying the loads in accordance Every member of the supporting structure which is
with 3.4.1, 3.4.3, 3.4.4 and wind load. directly supporting the roof covering(s) shall be
3.5 Imposed Horizontal Loads on Parapets and NOTE — In the case of guard parapets on a floor of multi-
storeyed car park or crash barriers provided in certain buildings
Balustrades
for fire escape, the value of imposed horizontal load (together
3.5.1 Parapets, Parapet Walls and Balustrades with impact load) may be determined.
Parapets. parapet walls and balustrades, together with which induce impact or vibration, as far as possible,
the members which give them structural support, shall calculations shall be made for increase in the imposed
be designed for the minimum loads given in Table 3. load due to impact In the absence of
or vibration.
These are expressed as horizontal forces acting at sufficient data for such calculation, the increase in the
handrail or coping level. These loads shall be imposed loads shall be as follows:
considered to act vertically also but not simultaneously
with the horizontal forces. The values given in Table 3 Structures Impact Allowance,
are minimum values and where values for actual Percent,
loadings are available, they shall be used instead. Min
a) For frames supporting lifts 100
3.5.2 Grandstands and the Like
and hoists
Grandstands, stadia, assembly platforms, reviewing b) For foundations, footings 40
stands and the like shall be designed to resist a and piers supporting lifts and
horizontal force applied to seats of 0.35 kN per linear hoisting apparatus
metre along the line of seats and 0.15 kN per linear
c) For supporting structures and 20
metre perpendicular to the line of the seats. These
foundations for light
loadings need not be applied simultaneously. Platforms
machinery, shaft or motor
without seats shall be designed to resist a minimum units
horizontal force of 0.25 kN/m2 of plan area.
For supporting structures and 50
3.6 Loading Effects Due to Impact and Vibration foundations for reciprocating
machinery or power units
The crane loads to be considered under imposed loads
shall include the vertical loads, eccentricity effects 3.6.2 Concentrated Imposed Loads with Impact and
induced by vertical loads, impact factors, lateral and Vibration
longitudinal braking forces acting across and along the
crane rails respectively. Concentrated imposed loads with impact and vibration
which may be due to installed machinery shall be
3.6.1 Impact Allowance for Lifls, Hoists andillachinery considered and provided for in the design. The impact
factor shall not be less than 20 percent which is the
The imposed loads specified in 3.3.1 shall be assumed
amount allowable for light machinery.
to include adequate allowance for ordinary impact
conditions. However, for structures carrying loads 3.6.2.1 Provision shall also be made for carrying any
a) For Single Bay Frames — Effect of one crane generally blows horizontal to the ground at high wind
in the bay giving the worst effect shall be speeds. Since vertical components of atmospheric
considered for calculation of surge force; and motion are relatively small, the term ‘wind’ denotes
b) For.14ulti-Bay Frames — Effect of two cranes almost exclusively the horizontal wind, vertical winds
working, one each in any of two bays in the are always identified as such. The wind speeds are
cross-section to give the worst effect shall be assessed with the aid of anemometers or anemographs
considered for calculation of surge force. which are installed at meteorological observatories
at heights generally varying from 10 to 30 m above
3.6.4.3 Tractive force ground.
,
a) Where one crane is in operation with no
4.1.2 Very strong wind speeds (greater than 80 kmJh)
provision for future crane, tractive force from
are generally associated with cyclonic storms,
only one crane shall be taken.
thunderstorms, dust storms or vigorous monsoons. A
b) Where more than one crane is in operation or feature of the cyclonic storms over the Indian area is
there is provision for future crane, tractive that they rapidly weaken after crossing the coasts and
force from two cranes giving maximum effect move as depressions/lows inland. The influence of a
shall be considered. severe storm after striking the coast does not, in general,
NOTE — Lateral surge force and longitudinal tractive exceed about 60 km, though sometimes, it may extend
force acting across and along the crane rail respectively even up to 120 km. Very short duration hurricanes of
All general buddi~gs and structures 50 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Temporary sheds, structures such as those 5’ 0.82 0.76 0.73 0.71 0.70 0.67
used during construction operations (for
example, formwork and falsework),
structures during construction stages and
boundary walls
Buildings and structures presenting a low 25 0.94 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.89
degree of hazard to life and property in the .
event of failure, such as isolated towers in
wooded areas, farm buildings, other than
residential buildings
Important buildings and structures, such as 100 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.07 1.08 1.08
hospitals, communications buildings/towers
1
A-B h{-–h(l-P~)}
XN PN [ N 1
kl=
x* =
50,0.63
A+4B
where
Zone A B
33 nds 83.2 9.2
39 mis 84.2 14.0
44 I-n/s 88.0 18.0
47 Ill/s 88.0 20.5
50 Ill/s 88.8 22.8
55 In/s 90.8 27.3
NOTE — The factor ICIk based on statistical concepts which take account of the degree of reliability required and period of time
in years during which there will be exposure to wind, that is, life of the structure. Whatever wind speed is adopted for design
purposes, there is always a probability (however small) that it may be exceeded in a storm of exceptional violence; the greater
the period of years over which there will be exposure to wind, the greater js the probability. Higher return periods ranging from
100 to 1 000 years (implying lower risk level) in association with greater periods of exposure may have to be selected for
exceptionally important structures, such as nuclear power reactors and satellite communication towers. Equation given above
may be used in such cases to estimate kl factors for different periods of exposure and chosen probability of exceedence (risk
level). The probability level of 0.63 is normally considered sufficient for design of buildings and structures against wind effects
and the values of kl corresponding to this risk level are given in Table 4.
design of a structure may vary depending on Catego~ . 1 — Exposed open terrain with few
the direction of wind under consideration. or no obstructions and in which the average
Wherever sufficient meteorological height of any objects surrounding the structure
information is available about the nature of is less than 1.5 m.
wind direction, the orientation of any building NOTE — This category includes open sea-coasts and
or st~eture may be suitably planned. flat treeless plains.
Terrian, in which a specific structure stands, Categq 2 — Open terrain with well scattered
shall be assessed as being one of the following obstructions having heights generally between
terrain categories: 1.5 and 10 m.
Table 5 k2 Factors to Obtain Design Wind Speed Variation with Height in DifTerent
Terrains for Different Classes of Building Structures
NOTES >.
1 See 4.4.3.2 (b) for definitions of Class A, Class B and Class C structures.
2 Intermediate values may he obtained by finear interpolation, if desired. It is permissible to asarrrueconataqt“windspeed between two
heights for simplicity.
(1) I (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
/<3
0 +0.7 -0.2 -0.5 -0.5
W-5 -0.8
90 -0.5 -0.5 +0.7 –0.2
~<1
W-5
a
c
~<~<4
2W e 0 +0.7 -0.25 -0.6 -0.6
-1.0
x A
B
90 -0.5 -0.5 +0.7 -0.1
El a
e
A
D
B
0
90
+0.7
-0.6
-0.25
-0.6
-0.6
+0.7
-0.6
-0.25
-1.1
3Z<4
c
II
2W o +0.7 -0.3 -0.7 -0.7
e -1.1
B
\
A 90 -0.5 -0.5 +0.7 -0.1
3h
~<1—<6 c
w
13
—=—
0 +0.95 -1.85 -0.9 -0.9
–1.25
W2 +0.9 –0.85
90 -0.8 -0.8
NOTE — h is the height of eaves or parapet, 1 is the greater horizontal dimension of a building and w is the lesser horizontal
dimension of a building.
L
Y
ti I
I
WIND I
I
e~
Y = h or 0.15 w, whichever is the lesser
& I
I
I
I
I
I
Roof Angle
m OVERALL
NOTE — Area H and area L refer to the whole quadrant.
COEFFICIENTS
Wind Angle 8
J
10 -1.0 -0.5 -1.0 -0.8 -1.0 -0.5 4.8 -1.0 -0.4 –1 .0
15 –0.9 -0.5 -1.0 4.7 –1.0 -0.5 -0.6 -1.0 -0.3 -1.0
20 -0.8 -0.5 -1.0 -0.6 -0.9 -0.5 -0.5 -1.0 -0.2 -1.0
25 -0.7 -0.5 -1.0 -0.6 -0.8 -0.5 -0.3 -0.9 -0.1 4.9
30 -0.5 -0.5 -1.0 -0.6 -0.8 -0.5 -&l’ -0.6 0 -0.6
Degree H, ~ Hz L, b H L
NOTE — h is the hekht to eaves at lower side, 1 is greater horizontal dimension of a building and w is the lesser horizontal
dimension of a buildin~.
ROOF ANGLE
+Cp
-ikudrw”oKEY PLAN
Roof Angle Solidity Ratio Maximum (Largest +ve) and Minimum (Largest -ve)
lressure Coefficients - -
NOTE— For monopitch canopies the centre of pressure should be taken to act at 0.3 w from the windward edge.
ROOF ANGLE
*7
+Cp h
J
-ve ROOF ANGLE
po-ykwo,
Roof Angle Solidity Ratio Maximum (Largest +ve) and Minimum (Largest -ve) Pressure Coefficients
NOTE — Each slope of a duopitch canopy should be able to withstand forces using both the maximum and the minimum coefficients,
and the whole canopy should be able to support forces using one slope at the maximum coefficient with the other slope at the
minimum coefficient. For duopitch canopies the centre of pressure should be taken to act at the centre of each slope.
r & t
I
l---d~ hr=0.8hJ
c’
,“
PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS, Cp
D D’ E E’ I Ed Surfacee
I c c’ G G’
0° 0.1 0.8 -0.7 0.9 — — — —
I
h= O.5d I
I C’& G’ I
I I
a
L---d---l
ct
————
t
G
I
b=5d Rw 0
n.
-1 f= O.2d
G
. ——--
I c
0!= 10°
e = 0° – 45°, D, D; E, E’full length
e= 90°, D, D; E, E’part length b’
PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS, Cp
0 D D’ E I E’ I End Surfaces
c c’ G G’
0° –1.0 0.3 -0.5 0.2
h’= 0.8h d
1 1
B
1
1
b=5d
7
n Rm
t---
●
f= O.2d b: id
---- I
I PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS, Cp
i? D D’ E E’
e D D’ E E’ 00 -0.7 0.8 -0.6 0.6
00
0.3 --0.7 0.2 --0.9 45° -0.4 0.3 -0.2 0.2
45° 0.0 -0.2 0.1 -0.3 90° -0.1 0.1 -0.1 0.1
90° --0.1 0.1 --0.1 0.1 180° -0.4 -1.2 --0.6 --0.3
00 Forfi CPtop= 0.4; CPbottom= 1S. 0° For~ C’Ptop= 1.1; CPbottom= 0.9.
0° – 90° Tangentially acting friction: RWO = 0.1 pd.bd. 0° – 180° Tangentially acting friction: RWO= 0.1 pd.bd.
Table 19 External Pressure Coefficients (CP,) for Pitched Roofs of Multi-span Buildings
(All Spans Equal) with h > w‘
[Clause 4.5.2.2 (f)]
--i t---l.l w’
r
Y
W 0.1 w’
rhl
Ii
‘?..
h
SECTION
Roof Angle Wind Angle First First Intermediate Span Other Intermediate End Span Local Coefficient
Span Span
degrees degrees
a 8 u b’ c d m n x z ml m
a
I degrees
(3 hi
I
hz
1
h3
Frictional drag: when wind angle 6’ = 0° horizontal forces due to frictional drag are allowed for in the above values;
when wind angle (?= 90° allow for frictional drag in accordance with 4.5.3.1.
NOTE — Evidence on these buildings is fragmentary and any departures from the cases given should be investigated separately.
---1 p---l.l w’
III /)2
1 w
I
\\\\\\\\\\\~////////w~w////l///~/////Awk\\\\\\\\\y
SECTKMJ
Wind Angle First Span First Intermediate Other Intermediate End Span Local
Span Span Coefficient
degrees
(3 a b c d m n x“ z Isssl Ezzl
I
1
o +0.6 -0.7 --0.7 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 -0.3
-2.0 –1.5
180 -0.5 -0.3 -0.3 -0.3 -0.4 -0.6 -0.6 ~ -0.1
9 hl h2 h3
Frictional drag: when wind angle O = 0° horizontal forces due to frictional drag are allowed for in the above values;
when wind angle O = 90° allow for frictional drag in accordance with 4.5.3.1.
NOTE — Evidence on these buildings is fragmentary and any departures froni the cases given should be
investigated separately.
3) 0.75, if the overhanging slopes upwards. his the height of a vertical cylinder or length
of a horizontal cylinder. Where there is a free
For overhanging portions on sides other than
flow of air around both ends, his to be taken
windward side, the average pressure coefficients
as half the length when calculating h/D ratio.
on the adjoining walls maybe used.
1) -0.8, where h/D is not less than 0.3; and
h) Cylindrical Structures =—For the purpose of
2) –0.5, where h/D is less than 0.3.
r
@/d=25
I fh/d=7
‘h/d=l
I
Position of Periphery, d Pressure CoefflcienL . Cmr-
o.2D<h<3D
tan a c ().2
/
0
45
WIND
A
0.2 a
Cpe 9-
- 151
05.
●
FIG. 2 EXTERNALPRESSURECOEFFICIENTS
ON THEUPPERROOF SURFACEOF SINGULAR
CIRCULARSTANDINGON THEGROUND
DIRECTION ~e=o.1 D
Cpe —--e =O.l D
OF WIND -i
I 1
+
+, 1
I
(a) I (d)
I I
I
t Cpe
I
I
--i--- ,+
a, b and c I d
H/D Roof (z/H) -1 Roof Bottom
0.5 -0.65 1.00 -0.75 –0.8
1.0 -1.00 1.25 -0.75 -0.7
2.0 -1.00 1.50 -0.75 -0.6
Total force acting on the roof of the structure, P = 0.785 D2 (c~i – Cp)pd.
The resultant of P lies eccentrically, e = 0.1 D.
DIRECTION
+ ().4
OF WIND
-0.6
+
+ b -0.6
n
a
r’ ~
“ 0.5
I
hl
2
,
?&J
b,> b, b,~~
Portion a b a&b
c. -0.6 +0.7 See Table for
Combined Roofs
AC I
r
EG
7I
e J K L M
T
//4
0° , +0.9 -0.5 +0.9 -0.5
oF \ M
w
w I
&f. -CPofK=-l.O
Mw– COof J= +1.0
WIND
J K
e
0“ ----
c G
L M
o D oH
~.
0 A B c D E F G
o“ -1.0 +0.9 –1,0 +0.9 -0.7 +0.9 +0.7 +0.9
45° -1.0 +0.7 -0.7 +0.4 -0.5 +0.8 -0.5 +0.3
135° -0.4 -1.1 -0.7 -1.0 -0.9 -1.1 -0.9 -1.0
180° -0.6 -0.3 -0.6 -0.3 -0.6 -0.3 -0,6 -0.3
45° hffR - Cp (top) = ‘2.0
45° MR– Cp (bottom) = +1.0
o +1.0
15 +0.9 Cf = ().5 for DVZ c 7
30 +0.5 = 0.2 for DVZ ~ 7
45 -0.1
60 -0.7 &
75 -1.1
90 -1.2
105 –1.0
120 -0.6
135 -0.2
150 +0.1
165 +0.3
180 +0.4
Two design conditions shall be examined, one through the slits round the closed windows and doors
with an internal pressure coefficient of and through chimneys, ventilators and through the joints
between roof coverings, the total open area being less
+0.2 and another with an internal pressure than 5 percent of the irea of the walls having the
coefficient of –0.2. openings.
The internal pressure coefficient is algebraically b) Building with medium and large openings —
added to the external pressure coefficient and Buildings with medium and large openings
the analysis, which indicates greater distress may also exhibit either positive or negative
of the member, shall be adopted. In most internal pressure depending upon the direction
situations, a simple inspection of the sign of of wind. Buildings with medium openings
the external pressure will at once indicate the between about 5 to 20 percent of wall area
proper sign of the internal pressure coefficient shall be examined for an internal pressure
to be taken for design. coefficient of +0.5 and later with an internal
NOTE — The terms normal permeability relates to the pressure coefficient of –0.5, and the members
flow of air commonly afforded by the claddings not shall be adopted. Buildings with large
only through the open windows and doors, but also openings, that is, openings larger than
m2/s up to 1/ 1 2 5“ 10 20 00
-D b Ellipse b/d = 2
“El
<4 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 1.0
r bid =1
rib= 1/3
24 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5
“u
<10 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.3
r bld = 1
rib= 1/6
>10 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6
d
4 bld = 1/2 All values 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7
r b r/b=l16
r--t-+
“m b
bld = 2
rlb = 1/12
All values 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.5 1.9
m21s LJp
to 1 1 2 5 10 2C
AU surfaces
b b/d = 2
rlb = 1/4
u’!?!!?!!
>6 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6
I
<10 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.5
a rla = 1/3
..
“o
\
rla = 1/12 All values 0.9 -0.9 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.6
\
A“
~ \‘a rla = 1/48 All values 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.6
45°
@
-.
7
“4 1
b rlb = 1/12 All values 0.8 0.8 D.8 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.4
7
4 1
b rlb = 1/48 All values 0.7 0.7 ).8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3
r
---b rlb = U4
12 sided
polygon,
--o Octagon All values 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.4
NOTE — Stmctrrres that, because of their size and the design wind velocity, are in the supercritkal flow regime may need fmther
calculation to ensure that the greatest loads do not occur at some wind speed below the maximum when the flow will be sub-
critical.
The coefficients are for buildings without projections, except where othenviae showo. In this table V b is used as an indication of the
airflow regime.
1.4
I n 1
Lf I I
FOR 3X104< Re<lo~ — =1.2
I +% ; X103
1.2 I I I
r
.—— —— - 60
- I I I 1 I 40
1.0 1 1 1 i I
I
0.8 IY
1 L --lw-u——J—
Cf
-..
q+% 0“6 - m ~ 0051
~ ~ ~ 0:01
3.0- ‘/
~ 0.002
2.0-
0.4 I
Cf = DRAG COEFFICIENT
I [ I I
. I i II I
0.2 L 1 I 1 I [ I 1 I I I I I I I I
0 I I I I I I I
105 2 345681062 345681072 34568108
Re —p
Cf
FIG. 5 VARIATION OF 1+_2C WITH Re <3 x 104 FOR CIRCULAR SECTIONS
D
rbl
I I h’
5 The wake shed from an upstream body may intensify b) Flutter — Flutter is unstable oscillatory motion
motions in the direction of the wind, and may also effect of a structure due to coupling between
crosswind motions. aerodynamic force and the elastic deformation of
the structure. Perhaps the most common form is
6 The designer must be aware of the following three
the oscillatory motion due to combined bending
forms of wind induced motion which are characterized
and torsion. Although oscillatory motions in each
by increasing amplitude of oscillation with increase of
degree of freedom may be dampled, instability
wind speed.
can set in due to energy-. transfer from one mode
a) Galloping — Galloping is transverse oscillations of oscillation to another, and the structure is seen
of some structures due to the development of to execute sustained or divergent oscillations with
aerodynamic forces which are in phase with the a type of motion which is a combination of the
motion. It is characterized by the progressively individual modes of motion. Such energy transfer
increasing amplitude of transverse vibration with takes place when the natural frequencies of the
increase of wind speed. The cross-sections which modes, taken individually, are close to each other
are particularly prone to this type of excitation (ratio being typically less than 2.0). Flutter can
include the following: set in at wind speeds much less than those required
i) All structures with non-circular cross- for exciting the individual modes of motion. Long
sections, such as triangular, square, polygons, span suspension bridge decks or any member of a
as well as angles, crosses and T-sections. structure with large values of dt (where d is the
ii) Twisted cables and cables with ice depth of a structure or structural member parallel
encrustations. to wind stream and tis the least lateral dimension
4.6.2.1 Slender structures — For a structure, the NOTE — It may be noted that investigations for various types
shedding frequency, ~ shall be determined by the of wind induced oscillations out lined in 4.6 are in no way
related to the use of gust facmr method given in 4.7. Although
following formula:
study of 4.6 is needed for using gust factor method.
4.0 4000
3.5 \ 3500
3.0 3000
2.5 2500
\
2.0 2000
L
m- 1●75 “1750 =
IA
1500 :
0
u“ 15
/K/” 0
; 1.25 1250 &J
> z!
>
1.0 1000
/
/ // 900
0.9 /
//
0.8
/ 0 800
‘/
0.7 ‘/ 700
/’
0.6 600
I 1 1 I I t I I 1 1 i 500
0.5
20 50 100 200 500
BUILDING HEIGHT, m
5.1.9 Ductility
where Ductility of a structure, or its members, is the capacity
? = mean deflection at the position where the to undergo large inelastic deformations without
acceleration is required. significant loss of strength or stiffness.
%
k
J .
0.8
0.6
0.4
m 0.3
a“
o
1-
0
$ ‘*2
0.04
b
Czh/L~
FIG. 8 BACKGROUND
FACTOR,B
04
9
03
.
.
02
0.15
.
01
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
f~ ~h /~h
FIG. 9 GUSTENERGYFACTOR.E
.. .
4 \ J
08.
05●
04,
C/’)
—. 03
*“.
U24 1
T
1 1 w
g 0.15
1- lx ‘\ .
01
(J fi n’fi
< U.uo
IL
z 0.05
Q 004
~ 0.03
~ 0.02
~ 0.05
fY
~ 0.01
~ 0.008 I
I
I \
0.005 \
0.004
0.003
0.002
C2 fO h
REDUCED FREQUENCY, FO = _
vh
.
5.1.10 Epicentre standard short-period torsion seismometer (with a
period of 0.8 s, magnification 2800 and damping
The geographical point on the surface of earth
nearly critical) would register due to the earthquake at
vertically above the focus of the earthquake.
an epicentral distance of 100 km.
5.1.11 Eflective Peak Ground Acceleration (EPGA)
5.1.19 Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCE)
It is 0.4 times the 5 percent damped average spectral
acceleration between period 0.1 to 0.3 s. This shall be The most severe earthquake effects considered by this
taken as zero period acceleration (ZPA). Code.
Floor response spectra is the response spectra for a Modal mass of a structure subjected to horizontal or
time history motion of a floor. This floor motion time vertical, as the case may be, ground motion is a part of
history is obtained by an analysis of multi-storey the total seismic mass of the structure that is effective
building for appropriate material damping values in mode k of vibration. The modal mass for a given
subjected to a specified earthquake motion at the base mode has a unique value irrespective of scaling of the
of structure. mode shape.
The representation of the maximum response of It is the level at which inertia forces generated in the
idealized single degree freedom systems having certain structure are transferred to the foundation, which then
period and damping, during earthquake ground motion. transfers these forces to the ground.
The maximum response is plotted against the
5.2.3 Base Dimensions (d)
undamped natural period and for various damping
values, and can be expressed in terms of maximum Base dimension of the building along a direction is
absolute acceleration, maximum relative velocity, or the dimension at its base, in metres, along that
maximum relative displacement. direction.
It is the seismic weight divided by acceleration due to The point through which the resultant of the masses of
gravity. a system acts. This point corresponds to the centre of
gravity of masses of system.
5.1.29 Seismic Weight (W)
5.2.5 Centre of Sti&zess
It is the value of acceleration response spectrum for It is the difference in levels between the base of the
period below 0.03 s (frequencies above 33 Hz). building and that of floor i.
It is a horizontal truss system that serves the same It is the distance between centre of mass and centre of
function as a diaphragm. rigidity of floor i.
It is the portion of the column that is common to other It is the space between two adjacent floors.
members, for example, beams, framing into it.
5.2.23 Storey Drift
5.2.14 Lateral Force Resisting Element
It is the displacement of one level relative to the other
It is part of the structural system assigned to resist level above or below.
lateral forces.
5.2.24 Storey Shear ( Vi )
5.2.15 Moment-Resisting Frame
It is the sum of design lateral forces at all levels above
It is a frame in which members and joints are capable the storey under consideration.
of resisting forces primarily by flexure.
5.2.25 Weak Storey
5.2.15.1 Ordinary moment-resisting frame
It is one in which the storey lateral strength is less than
5.3.1.3 The design approach adopted in this standard 5.3.1.6 Equipment and other systems, which are
is to ensure that structures possess at least a minimum supported at various floor levels of the structure, will
strength to withstand minor earthquakes (cDBE), be subjected to motions corresponding to vibration at
which occur frequently, without damage; resist their support points. In important cases, it may be
moderate earthquakes (DBE) without significant necessary to obtain floor response spectra for design
structural damage though some non-structural damage of equipment supports. For detail reference be made
may occur; and aims that structures withstand a major to good practice [6-1(5)]
earthquake (MCE) without collapse. Actual forces that
5.3.1.7 Additions to existing structures
appear on structures during earthquakes are much
‘greater than the design forces specified in this Code. Additions shall be made to existing structures only as
However, ductility, arising from inelastic material follows:
ibehaviour and detailing, and overstrength, arising from
a) An addition that is structurally independent
the additional reserve strength in structures over and
from an existing structures shall be designed
‘above the design strength, are relied upon to account
and constructed in accordance with the
for this difference in actual and design lateral loads.
seismic requirements for new structures.
resonance-like conditions have been seen to occur two orthogonal horizontal dkection, EL in 5.3.3.1.1 and 5.3.3.1.2
between long distance waves and tall structures founded shall be replaced by (ELI &0.3 .ELY)or (ELY A 0.3 ELx).
on deep soft soils.
5.3.3.3 Design vertical earthquake load
b) Earthquake is not likely to occur simultaneously
When effects due to vertical earthquake loads are to
with wind or maximum flood or maximum
be considered, the design vertical force shall be
sea waves.
calculated in accordance with 5.3.4.5.
c) The value of elastic modulus of materials,
wherever required, may be taken as for static 5.3.3.4 Combination for two or three component motion
analysis unless a more definite value is 5.3.3.4.1 When responses from the three earthquake
available for use in such condition (see Part 6 components are to be considered, the responses due
‘Structural Design, Section 5 Concrete and to each components may be combined using the
Section 6 Steel’. assumption that when the maximum response from one
5.3.3 Load Combination and Increase in Permissible component occurs, the responses from the other two
Stresses component are 30 percent of their maximum. All
possible combinations of the three components (ELX,
5.3.3.1 Load combinations ELY and .ELZ)including variations in sign (plus or minus)
When earthquake forces are considered on a structure, shall be considered. Thus, the response due earthquake
force (EL) is the maximum of the following three cases
NOTES
1 The allowable bearing pressure shall be determined in accordance with good practice [6-1(6)].
2 If any increase in bearing pressure has already been permitted for forces other than seismic forces, the totat increase in aflowable
bearing pressure when seisrrrtcforce is afso included shall not exceed the limits specified above.
3 Desirable minimum field~alues of N — If soils of smaller N-values are met, compacting may be,adopted to achieve these values or
deep pile foundations going to stronger strata should be used.
4 The values of N (corrected vatues) are at the founding level and the allowable bearing pressur$ shafl be determined in accordance
with good practice [6-1(6)].
5 The piles should be designed for lateral loads neglecting lateral resistance of soil layers liable to fiquefy.
6 Accepted standard [6-1(7)] and good practice [6-1(8)] may also be referred.
7 Isolated R.C.C. footing without tie beams, or unreinforced strip foundation shafl not be permitted its soft soils with N<1O.
earthquake (MCE) zone factor to the factor For Rocky, or hard soil sites
for design basis earthquake (DBE).
Zone factor for some important towns are s 1+15T; O.OO<TSO.1O
—a = 2.50 O.1O<T <0.40
given at Annex J. g { 1.00IT 0.40< T <4.00
I = Importance factor, depending upon the
functional use of the structures, characterised For Medium soil sites
by hazardous consequences of its failure,
s 1+15T; O.OO<T<O.1O
post-earthquake functional needs, historical —a = 2.50 O.1OST<O.55
value, or economic importance (Table 35). g { L361T 0.55< T s 4.00
R= Response reduction -factor, depending on
the perceived seismic damage performance For Soft soil sites
of the structure, characterized by ductile
s 1+15T; O.OOSTSO.1O
or brittle deformations. However, the —a = 2.50 O.1O<TSO.67
ratio (l/R) shall not be greater than 1.0 g { 1.671T 0.67 S T <4.00
(Table 36). The values of R for buildings
are given in Table 36. Table 32 Multiplying Factors for Obtaining
s/g=
it Average response acceleration coefficient Values for Other Damping
for rock or soil sites as given by Fig. 12 and (Clause 5.3.4.2)
Table 32 based on appropriate natural
periods and damping of the structure. These Damping O 2 5 7 10 15 20 25 30
percent
curves represent free field ground motion.
Factors 3.20 1.40 1.00 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.60 0.55 0.50
NOTE — For various types of structures, the values
of Importance Factor Z,Response Reduction Factor 1?,
and damping values are given in the respective parts 5.3.4.6 In case design spectrum is specifically
of this standard. The method (empirical or otherwise) prepared for a structure at a particular project site, the
to calculate the natural periods of the structure to be
same may be used for design at the discretion of the
adopted for evaluating S,/g is also given in the
respective parts of this Code. project authorities.
+7
L
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
TYPE I (ROCK, OR HARD SOIL)
\ ~-~-~.
I I I I I I 1
than buildings with irregular configurations. A building Table 34 Definition of Irregular Buildings —
shall be considered as irregular for the purposes of this Vertical Irregularities (Fig. 14)
standard, if at least one of the conditions given (Clause 5.4.1)
in Tables 33 and 34 is applicable.
S1 No. Irregularity Type and Description
Table 33 Definitions of Irregular Buildings —
i) a) Sti@ess Irregularity — Soft Storey
Plan Irregularities (Fig. 13)
A soft storey is one in which the lateral stiffness is less
(Clause 5.4.1) than 70 percent of that in the storey above or less than
80 percent of the average lateral stiffness of the three storeys
... m.
L ————
————
————
-1
FLOOR
\l
I
L! I A2
L —-—. ---- -——— J
Al 1 7
I__ /
/VL >0.15-0.20 A/L >0.15-0.20 A
‘1
L A/L >0.15-0.20
A
1
t
I + Al
T L2
M ~
13 B RE - ENTRANT CORNER
— Continued
FIG. 13 PLANIRREGULARITIES
I
I
RIGID I
DIAPHRAGM ;
OPE
I
\ 1 0
%- \ --- I FLEXIBLE /
-
-1 DIAPHRAGM
e
OPENING
13 C DIAPHRAGM DISCONTINUITY
SHEAR WALL
*
-@
BUILDING SECTION
WALL
~
I
SHEAR WALL
13 E NON - PARALLELSYSTEM
I ———
I
B ———
I -——
-——
SOFT STOREY WHEN
1 ——.
ki<().7ki+l
k3
-—- I kj+l+ki+z+ki+s
1 OR ki<o.s( )
—--
k2 3
. ——— I L 1
I
k1
1
SEISMIC
-HEAVY WEIGHT
/ MASS
/
I
w n-1
1 w n-2
A A
w2
\ w 1
. MASS IRREGULARITY
MASS RATIO
WHENt Wi>2.0Wi -1
or Wi>2@OVVi+l
14 B MASS IRREGULARITY
FIG. 14 VERTICALIRREGULARITIES
— Continued
.
A ‘“
.
.<,.,%
pA--
T
u
A
r /L>o,l
A
l---!
--!
SHEAR WALL
L~2--l
STOREY STRENGTH
(LATERAL)
H
Fn
!
Fn. I
1
Fn.2
I I
UPPER
{ FLOOR 1
I F3
a F2
b 1
FI
LOWER
11 FLOOR 14 E WEAK STOREY,
WHEN Fj ~ 0.8 Fi +1
b
FIG. 14 VERTICALIRREGULARITIES
The minimum value of importance factor, I, for (Clauses 5.3.4.2 and 5.4.2)
different building systems shall be as given in Table 35.
S1 Lateral Load Resisting System R
The response reduction factor, l?, for different building No.
svstems
* shall be as given in Table 36. Building Frame Systems
5.4.3 Design Imposed Loads for Earthquake Force i) Ordinary RC Moment-Resisting Frame (OMRF)2) 3.0
ii) Special RC Moment-Resisting Frame (SMRF)3) 5.0
Calculation iii) Steel Frame with
a) Concentric Braces 4.0
5.4.3.1 For various loading classes as specified in b) Eccentric Braces 5.0
IS 875 @rt 2), the earthquake force shall be calculated iv) Steel Moment Resisting Frame designed as per 5.0
for the full dead load plus the percentage of imposed SP: 6(6)
load as given in Table 37. Building with Shear Walls 4)
v) Load Bearing Masonry Wall Buildings 5)
5.4.3.2 For calculating the design seismic forces of a) Unreinforced 1.5
the structure, the imposed load on roof need not be b) Reinforced with horizontal RC Bands 2.5
considered. c) Reinforced with horizontal RC bands and 3.0
vertical bars at comers of rooms and jambs
5.4.3.3 The percentage of imposed loads given of openings
vi) Ordinary Reinforced Concrete Shear Walls c) 3.0
Where the probable loads at the time of earthquake 4, Buildings with shear walls also include buildings having shear
walls and frames, but where
are more accurately assessed, the designer may alter
a) frames are not designed to carry lateral loads, or
the proportions indicated or even replace the entire
b) frames are designed to carry lateral loads but do not fulfil
the requirements of ‘duals ystems’.
Table 35 Importance Factors, Z
5, Reinforcement should be as per IS 4326.
(Clauses 5.3.4.2 and 5.4.2) G)prohibited in Zones IV and V.
7, Ductile shear walls are those designed and detailed as per IS 13920
S1 St~cture Importance
No. Factor 8, Buildings with dual systems consist of shear walls (or braced
frames) and moment resisting frames such that
i) Important service and community buildings, 1.5
a) the two systems are designed to resist the total design
such as hospitals; schools; monumental
force in proportion to their lateral stiffness considering
structures; emergency buildings like telephone
exchange, television stations, radio stations, the interaction of the dual system at all floor levels;
railway stations, fire station buildings; large and
community halls like cinemas, assembly halls b) the moment resisting frames are designed to
and subway stations, power stations. independently resist at least 25 percent of the design
seismic base shear.
ii) All other buildings. 1.0
5.4.3.5 Other loads apart from those given above (for where
example, snow and permanent equipment) shall be
h = Height of building, in metres. This excludes
considered as appropriate.
the basement storeys, where basement walls
5.4.4 Seismic Weight are connected with the ground floor deck or
fitted between the building columns. But, it
5.4.4.1 Seismic weight offloors
includes the basement storeys, when they are
The seismic weight of each floor is its full dead load not so connected.
plus appropriate amount of imposed load, as specified
5.4.6.2 The approximate fundamental natural period
in 5.4.3.1 and 5.4.3.2. While computing the seismic
of vibration (T,), in seconds, of all other buildings,
weight of each floor, the weight of columns and walls
$.4.5.2 The design lateral force shall f~st be computed 5.4.7.1 Vertical distribution of base shear to different
for the building as a whole. This design lateral force jloor levels
shall then be distributed to the various floor levels.
The design base shear (VB ) computed in 5.4.5.3 shall
The overall design seismic force thus obtained at each
be distributed along the height of the building as per
floor level, shall then be distributed to individual lateral
the following expression:
load resisting elements depending on the floor
diaphragm action.
5.4.5.3 Design seismic base shear— The total design
lateral force or seismic base shear (V~) along any
principal direction shall be determined by the following
expression: where
A.=
.. Design horizontal acceleration spectrum value
For the purposes of displacement requirements only Tower, tanks, parapets, smoke stacks (chimneys) and
(that is, in 5.4.11 .1,5.4.11.2 and 5.4.11.3 only), it is other vertical cantilever projections attached to
permissible to use seismic force obtained from the buildings and projecting above the roof, shall be
computed fundamental period (7’) of the building designed and checked for stability for five times the
without the lower bound limit on design seismic force design horizontal seismic coefficient Ah specified
specified in 5.4.8.2. in 5.3.4.2. In the analysis of the building, the weight
All horizontal projections like cornices and balconies 6.3 Snow Load in Roof(s)
shall be designed and checked for stability for five
6.3.1 The minimum design snow load on a roof area
times the design vertical coefficient specified in 5.3.4.5.
or any other area above ground which is subjected to
5.4.12.2.3 The increased design forces specified snow accumulation is obtained by multiplying the snow
in 5.4.11.2.1 and 5.4.12.2.2 are only for designing the load on ground, SOby the shape coefficient V, as
projecting parts and their connections with the main applicable to the particular roof area considered:
structures. For the design of the main structure, such
s=~so
increase need not be considered.
where
5.4.12.3 Corrrpound walls
s= Design snow load in Pa on plan area of roof,
Compound walls shall be designed for the design
horizontal coefficient Ah with Importance Factor I = 1.0 P= Shape coefficient (see 5.4), and
specified in 6.4.2 so = Ground snow load in Pa (1 Pa=l N/m*)
In India, part of Jammu and Kashmir (Baramulah Inmost regions, snow-falls are accompanied or followed
District, SrinagarDistrict, Anantnag District and Ladakh by winds. The winds will re-distribute the snow, and on
District); Punjab and Himachal Pradesh (Chamba, Kulu some roofs especially multilevel roofs, the accumulated
Kinnaur District, Mahasu District, Mandi District, drift load may reach a mdltiple of the ground load. Roofs
Sirrnur District and Simla District); and Uttaranchal which are sheltered by other buildings, vegetation, etc,
(Debra Dun District, Tehri Garhwal District, Ahrtora may collect more snow load than the ground level. The
District and Nainital District) experience snow fall of phenomenon is of the sade nature as that illustrated for
varying depths two or three times in a year. multi-level roofs in 6.4.2.4.
hi (metres) — Vertical dimensions with numerical The distribution of snow in the direction parallel to
subscripts, if necessary. the caves is assumed to be uniform.
@
F1
P P
t
0“< p~ 3(yJ
I. J*= PI=O.8
I
E
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
IJl = 0.8
15 °c13530” P*
‘08+’
4%)
::%%)
-.
30°C PS 6@ P,= —
0.8 (60#
)
M,= o<8 60 -p
30 ()
--~--
~> 60° IJl iJ2 =IJl=o
/m
=0
F$’+1 P
#31;132
E
00<$<30” — —
30 ) 30 )
w, = 0.8 IJl = 0.8
IJ2 =1.6 lJ2=l.6
3VCi3 c 60”
P, =(+!22 )
30
IJ2 =1.6 IJ2 =1.6
~> 60”
I- Jl=o IJj=o
II For asymmetrical simple pitched roofs, each side of the roof shall be treated as one half of corresponding Syttttmtrkalroofs.
76
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
6.4.2.3 Simple curved roofs
Pi = 0.8
t
CASE 1
‘r!
.
P
T
L.
I
1-
l==
‘r-l IJw
1-
I
-1
7
PI
p<15”:p,=o
!J A more extensive formula forp is described in Annex A. 1) The load on the upper roof is calculated according to 6.4.2.1
w
‘) If 1,<13,the coefficientfl is determined by interpolation between or 6.4.2.2.
,u, andp2.
—1, >
P
+ T hl r-
h2
7
-71 “
d-l
12+13<11
!2+[3>11
5m<12< 15rn,
5melz< 15m;
& and p, = (p, + pW), are calculated according to 6.4.2.1,6.4.2.2 and 6.4.2.4.
rh
&=~
o
h = is in metres
SO= is in kilopascals (kilonewtons per square metre)
k = 2 kN/m2
p = 0.8
Restrictions:
0.8< pW 52.0
5m<l<15m
6.4.3 Shape Coef/lcients in Areas Exposed to Wind within a distance;’from the building equal to
ten times the height of the obstruction above
The shape coefficients given in 6.4.2 and Annex K
the roof level; and
may be reduced by 15 percent, provided the designer
has demonstrated that the following conditions are b) The roof does not have any significant
fulfilled: projections, such as, parapet walls which may
prevent snow from being blow off the roof.
a) The building is located in an exposed location,
such as open level terrain with only scattered NOTE — In some areas, winter climate may not be of
such a nature as to produce a significant reduction of
buildings, trees or other obstructions so that
roof loads from the snow load on the ground these areas
the roof is exposed to the winds on all sides area
and is not likely to become shielded in the @ Winter calm valleys in the mountains where
future by obstructions higher than the roof sometimes layer after layer of snow accumulates
L_ n
N
d’, “k
7.3.3 Safe-guarding of structures and structural being considered, unless otherwise specified in relevant
members against overturning and horizontal sliding codes of practice.
shall be verified. Imposed loads having favorable
Each element of the structure shall be designed for the
effect shall be disregarded for the purpose. Due
number of stress cycles of each magnitude to which it
consideration shall be given to the possibility of’ soil
is estimated that the element is liable to be subjected
being permanently or temporarily removed.
during the expected life of the structure. The number
7.4 Fatigue of cycles of each magnitude shall be estimated in the
light of available date regarding the probable frequency
7.4.1 General of occurrence of each type of loading.
Fatigue cracks are usually initiated at points of high NOTE — Apart from the general observations made herein,
stress concentration. These stress concentrations may the section is unable to provide any precise guidance in
estimating the probabilistic behaviour and response of
be caused by or associated with holes (such as, bolt or structures of various types arising out of repetitive loading
rivet holes in steel structures), welds including stray approaching fatigue conditions in structural members, joints,
or fusions in steel structures, defects in materials, and materials, etc.
local and general changes in geometry of members.
7.5 Structural Safety During Construction
The cracks usually propogate, if loading is continuous.
7.5.1 All loads required to be carried by the structures
Where there is such loading cycles, sudden changes
or any part of it due to storage or positioning of
of shape of a member or part of a member, especially
construction materials and erection equipment
in regions of tensile stress and/or local secondary
including all loads due to operation of such equipment,
bending, shall be avoided. Suitable steps shall be taken
shall be considered as erection loads. Proper provision
to avoid critical vibrations due to wind and other
shall be made, including temporary bracings, to take
causes.
care of all stresses due to erection loads. The
7.4.2 Where necessary, permissible stresses shall be conjunction with the temporary bracings shall be
reduced to allow for the effects of fatigue. Allowance capable of sustaining these erection loads, without
for fatigue shall be made for combinations of stresses exceeding the permissible stresses specified in
due to dead load and imposed load. Stresses due to respective codes of practice. Dead load, wind load and
wind and earthquakes may be ignored when fatigue is such parts of imposed load, as would be imposed on
7.6.1 Impact and Collisions With regard to safety, railings put up to protect
structures against collision due to road traffic, it should
7.6.1.1 General
be shown that the railings are able to resist the impact
During an impact, the kinetic impact energy has to be as described in 7.6.1.2.
absorbed by the vehicle hitting the structure and by
NOTE — When a vehicle collides with safety railings, the
the structure itself. In an accurate analysis, the kinetic energy of the vehicle will be absorbed partly by the
probability of occurrence of an impact with a certain deformation of the railings and partly by the deformation of
energy object hitting the structure and the structure the vehicle. The part of the kinetic energy which the railings
itself at the actual place must be considered. Impact should be able to absorb without breaking down may be
determined on the basis of the assumed rigidity of the vehicle
energies for dropped object should be based on the
during compression.
actual loading capacity and lifting height.
Common sources of impact are: 7.6.1.4 Crane impact load on buffer stop
7.6.2.2 Explosion effect in closed rooms Buildings with more than 4 storeys 41 kN/m2
Buildings of particularly stable construction 28 kN/m2
Gas explosion may be caused, for example by leaks in
irrespective of the number of storeys
gas pipes (inclusive of pipes outside for room),
evaporation from volatile liquids or unintentional
In the case of buildings with floors that are acted upon
evaporation of gas from wall sheathings (for example,
by a characteristic imposed action larger than
caused by fire).
5.0 kN/m2, the above values should be increased by
NOTES the difference between the average imposed action on
1 The effect of explosions depends on the exploding medium, all storeys above the one concerned and 5.0 kN/m2.
80
70 ~
60
50
40 ,
30
20 k
10 ,
A -1
iim.
30
. ———. —
1- t,#- ,2 -1 TIME(s,
It is important to study and examine the possibility of b) Cyclone and Flood Risk Prone — Districts
which have cyclone and flood prone areas.
occurrence of multiple hazards, as applicable to an area.
Here floods can occur separately from
However, it is not economically viable to design all
cyclones, but simultaneous also along with
the structures for multiple hazards. The special
possibility of storm surge too.
structures, such as, nuclear power plants, and life line
structures, such as, hospitals and emergency rescue c) Earthquake, Cyclone and Flood Risk Prone
shelters may be designed for multiple hazards. For such — Districts which have earthquake Zone of
special structures, site specific data have to be collected intensity 7 or more, cyclone prone as well as
and the design be carried out based on the accepted flood prone (protected or unprotected) areas.
levels of risk. The factors that have to be considered Here the three hazards can occur separately
and also simultaneously as in (a) and(b) above
in determining this risk are:
but earthquake and cyclone will be assumed
a) The severity of the hazard characterized by to occur separately only.
A-1 The total imposed loads from different floor levels floor levels using 3.3.2.1. Floor loads do not exceed
(including the roof) combing on the central column of 5.0 kN/m2.
a rnulti-storeyed building (with mixed occupancy) is A-1.l Applying reduction coefficients in accordance
shown in Fig. 20. Calculate the reduced imposed with 3.3.2.1, total reduced floor loads on the column
load for the design of column members at different at different levels is indicated along with Fig. 18.
11130 I
ROOF
I
2 40 30
(30+40)(1-0.1)=63
7 50 (30+40 +50+50+40+45)(1-0.4)=153
I
8 50 ‘30+40 +50+50
L +40+45 +50)( 1- O.4)= 183
(30+40 +50+50+40+45+50+50+40)
10 40
(1 -0.4)= 237
(30+40 +50+50+40+45+50+50+40+40)
11 40
r i
1 (1-0.4)= 261
(30+40 +50+50+40+45+50+50+40+404
(30+40 +50+50+40+45+50+50+40+40
15 80
+40 + 55 + 55 + 70) (1-0.5)= 327.5
/
lt---’--
(30+40 +50+50+40+45+50+50+40+40
+40 + 55 + 55+ 70 + 80) (1-0.5)= 367.5 I
FIG. 18
(Clause 4.2)
NOTATIONS
ANNEX C
(Clause 4.4.2)
ANNEX D
[Clause 4.4.3.2(d)]
D-1 LOW TO HIGH NUMBER determined in relation to the less rough (more
D-1.l In cases of transitions from a low category distant) terrain.
number (corresponding to a low terrain roughness) to
D-2 HIGH TO LOW NUMBER
a high category number (corresponding to a rougher
terrain), the velocity profile over the rougher terrain D-2.1 In cases of transitions from a more rough to a
shall be determined as follows: less rough terrain, the velocity profile shall be
determined as follows:
a) Below height hX, the velocities shall be
determined in relation to the rougher terrain; a) Above height hX, the velocities shall be
and determined in accordance with the rougher
b) Above height hX, the velocities shall be (more distant) terrain; and
WIND DIRECTION
L-X44’ ‘ATE’”””
0****.***9.** 0-.09.00
●
PROFILE FOR CATEGORY 4
DESIGN. PROFILE AT A
CATEGORY 4 CATEGORY 2 !’
A B
CATEGORY 3 CATEGORY 1 CATEGORY 4
t--x’ t--x’
9
●
9
●’
VELOCITY VELOCITY
VELOCITYPROFILE FORCATEGORY4
VELOCITYPROFILE FORCATEGORY3
VELOCITY PROFILE FORCATEGORY 1 .
DESIGNP~OFILE
ANNEX E
(Clause 4.4.3.3)
EFFECT OF A CLIFF OR ESCARPMENT ON THE EQUIVALENT HEIGHT
ABOVE GROUND (k3 FACTOR)
g~
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
relatively flat, (El < 3°) for a distance exceeding L~, Slope c
then the feature should be treated as an escarpment. If
not then the feature should be treated as a hill or ridge.
Examples of typical features are given in Fig. 20.
NOTES
3°<0<
>17°
170 1.2 ;
0.36
()
1 No difference is made in evaluating k~ between a three
s is a factor derived in accordance with E-2.l
dimensional hill and two dimensional ridge.
2 In undulating terrain, it is often not possible to decide whether
appropriate to the height, H above mean ground level
the local topography to the site is significant in terms of wind and the distance x from the summit or crest, relative to
flow. In such cases, the average value of the terrain upwind of the effective length, Le.
the site for a distance of 5 km should be taken as the base level
from wind to assess the height L.and the upwind slope (3of the E-2.1 The factors should be determined from:
feature.
a) Figure 21 for cliffs and escarpments, and
E-2 TOPOGRAPHY FACTOR, lq b) Figure 22 for hills and ridges.
NOTE — Where the downwind slope of a hill or ridge is
The topography factor k~ is given by the following:
greater than 3“, there will be large regions of reduced
k3=l+cs accelerations or even shelter and it is not possible to give
general design rules to cater for these circumstances. Values
where C has the following values: ofs from Fig. 22 may be used as upper bound values
WIND t-’”5L:~2”5Le—
I I
AVERAGE GROUND
LEVEL
[
/“
,CREST
DOWNWIND SLOPE > 3“
WIND DOWNWIND SLOPE <3° WIND
+ +
2.0 2.0
I
1.5 r \ 1.5
$$
0 I 1
1.0 1.0 :
1/ !
e
0.5 0.5
\
0 0
-1.5 -1.0 -0.5 01”00 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
.x_
DOWNWIND &
‘w’ND Le
.,-
CREST CREST
2.0 ‘ I 2.0
A
1.5 \ 1,5
\
@
Q \
1.0 — ~ 1.0
. 0,2
@
0.4
0.5 ‘ 0.5
o’ 0
-1.5 -1.0 -0.5 01”00 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
x &
‘PW’ND G ‘OwwND Le
ANNEX F ,
F-1 The wind force on any object is given by: p~ = Design pressure of the wind.
ANNEX G
(Clause 5.0)
SYMBOLS
The symbols and notations given below apply to the b, ith Floor plan dimension of the building
provisions of this Code: perpendicular to the direction of force
c Index for the closely-spaced
A, Design horizontal seismic coefficient
d Base dimension of the building, in metres,
A, Design horizontal acceleration spectrum
in the direction in which the seismic force
value for mode k of vibration
is considered.
ANNEX H
(Clause 5.1.15)
The scale was discussed generally at the inter- Type A — Building in field-stone, rural
governmental meeting convened by UNESCO in April structures, unburnt-brick houses,
1964. Though not finally approved the scale is more clay houses.
comprehensive and describes the intensity of Type B — &iinary brick buildings, buildings
earthquake more precisely. The main definitions used
of large block and prefabricated
are followings: type, half timbered structures,
a) Type of Structures (Buildings) buildings in natural hewn stone.
(Clause 5.3.4.2)
ZONE FACTORS FOR SOME IMPORTANT TOWNS
A more comprehensive formula for the shape coefficient for multilevel roofs
< WINDDIRECTION
~h—-+---k-----J
r
-I IJl
L
l-----l+ 7
Restriction:
h = 1 + + (m,l, + m,l,) (12–2h)
+
K, = 0.8 0
1, = 2h where
(h and 1 being in metres) SOis in kilopascals (kilonewtons per square metre)
Values of ml (m2) for the higher (lower) roof depend The coefllcients ml and m2 may be adjusted to take
on its profile and are taken as equal to: into account conditions for transfer of snow on the roof
0.5 for plane roofs with surface (that is wind, temperature, etc).
fl
slopes (3<20° and vaulted roofs with — S — NOTE — The other condition of loading shatl also be tried.
118
ANNEX L
(Clause 7.7)
VIBRATIONS IN BUILDINGS
ANNEX M
(Clause 9.2)
E.Q. and Flood Cyclone and Flood E.Q. Cyclone and Flood E.Q. and Cyclone
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Assam 4Pmi,jab
Barpeta, Bongaigaon, CacharlJ, Darrang, Dhemaji, Dhuburi, Amritsar, Bathinda, Faridkot, FiIozpur, Gurdaspur, Hoshisrrpur,
Dibrugarh, Goalpara, Golaghat, Hailaknadil), )orhat, Kamrup, Jrdsmdhar,Kaputthala, Ludtriarta, Patiata, Rup Nagar, Sangrur
Karbianglong, Karimganj 1),Kokrajhar, Lakhimpur, Morigaon, 5)Ut~r fiad~h
Nagaon, Nalbari, Sibsagar, Sonitpur, Tinsrrkia
Agra, Aligarh, Allahabad, Azamgarh, Bahraich, Bahia,
Biharzl Barabanki, Bareilly, Basti, Bijnor, Btrdaun, Bulandshahr, Deoria,
Araria, Begusarai, Bhagalpur, Bhojpur, Darbhrrnga, Gopalganj, Etah, Etawah, Faizabad, Farrukhabad, Fatehpur, Firozabad,
Katihar, Khagaria, Kishanganj, Madhepttra, Madhubani, Munger, Ghaziabad, Ghazipur, Gonda, Gorakhpur, Hardoi, Haridwar,
Muzaffarpur, Nalanda, Nawada, Paschim Champaran, Patna, Jaunpur, Kanpur (Dehat), Karrpur (Nagar), Kheri, Lucknow,
Purbachamparan, Pumia, Samastipur, Saran, Saharsa, Sitamarhi, Maharajganj, Mainpuri, Mathura, Mau, Meerut, Mirzapur,
Siwan, Vaishali Mordabad, Muzaffarnagar, Nainital, Pilibhit, Partapgarh,
Raebareli, Rampur, Srrharanpur, Shabjahrmpur, Siddartfr Nagar,
3JHaryana Sitapur, Sultanpur, Unnao, Varattasi
Ambala, Bhiwani, Faridabad, Gurgaon, Hissar, find, Ktrrukshetra,
Rohtak
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ Code.
in the fulfilme~t of ~he requirements OFthe Code. The
In the following list, the number appearing in the fwst
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may column within parentheses indicates the number of the
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance reference in this Part/Section.
(1) 875 Code of practice for design (7) 1498:1970 Classification and identification
(Part 1): 1987 loads (other than earthquake) of soils for general engineering
for buildings and structures purposes @rst revision)
Part 1 Dead loads — Unit (8) 2131:1981 Method for standard penetration
weights of building material test for soils (@t revision)
and stored materials (second
(9) 4326:1993 Code of practice for earthquake
revision)
resistant design and construction
(2) 8888 Guide for requirements of low of buildings (second revision)
(Part 1) :1993 income housing: Part 1 Urban
(10) 3414:1968 Code of practice for design
area (jirst revision)
and installation of joints in
(3) 807:1976 Code of practice for design,
buildings
manufacture, erection and
(11) 1642:1989 Code of practice for fire safety
testing (structural portion)
of buildings (general): Details
of cranes and hoists ($irst
of construction @st revision)
revision)
3177:1999 Code of practice for electric (12) 15498:2004 Guidelines for improving
FOREWORD ... 3
1 SCOPE ... 5
2 TERMINOLOGY ... 5
3 SITE INVESTIGATION ... 7
4 CLASSIFICATION AND IDENTIFICATION OF SOILS ... 11
5 MATERIALS ... 11
6 TYPE OF FOUNDATIONS ... 11
7 SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS ... 11
8 DRIVEN/BORED CAST ZN-SITU CONCRETE PILES ... 22
9 DRIVEN PRECAST CONCRETE PILES ... 27
10 BORED PRECAST CONCRETE PILES ... 28
FOREWORD
This Section deals with the structural design aspects of foundations and mainly covers the design principles
involved in different types of foundations.
This Section was published in 1970, and subsequently revised in 1983. In the first revision design considerations
in respect of shallow foundation were modified, provisions regarding pier foundation were added and provisions
regarding draft foundation and pile foundation were revised and elaborated.
As a result of experience gained in implementation of 1983 version of the Code and feed back received as well
as revision of standards and preparation of new standards in the field of soils and foundations, a need to revise
this Section was felt. This revision has therefore been prepared to take into account these developments. The
For detailed information regarding structural analysis and soil mechanics aspects of individual foundations,
reference should be made to standard textbooks and available literature.
The information contained in this Section is mainly based on the following Indian Standards:
IS No. Title
1080:1985 Code of practice for design and construction of shallow foundations in soils
(other than raft, ring and shell) (second revision)
1904:1986 Code of practice for design and construction of foundations in soils: General
requirements (third revision)
2911 (Part l/See 1) :1979 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations: Part 1 Concrete
piles, Section 1 Driven cast in-situ concrete piles (first revision)
2911 (Part l/See 2) :1979 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations: Part 1 Concrete
piles, Section 2 Bored cast in-situ piles (first revision)
2911 (Part l/See 3) :1979 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations: Part 1 Concrete
piles, Section 3 Driven precast concrete piles (first revision)
2911 (Part l/See 4) :1984 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations: Part 1 Concrete
piles, Section 4 Bored precast concrete piles
2911 (Part 3) :1980 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations: Part 3 Under-
reamed piles (first revision)
2950 (Part 1) :1981 Code of practice for design and construction of raft foundations: Part 1 Design
(second revision)
9456:1980 Code of practice for design and construction of conical hyperbolic paraboidal
types of shell foundations
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
2.2.8 Make-up Ground — Refuse, excavated soil or 2.3.5 Bored Pile — A pile formed with or without
rock deposited for the purpose of filling a depression or casing by excavating or boring a hole in the ground
raising a site above the natural surface level of the and subsequently filling it with plain or reinforced
ground. concrete,
2.2.9 Offset — The projection of the lower step from 2.3.6 Bored Precast Pile — A pile constructed in
the vertical face of the upper step. reinforced concrete in a casting yard and subsequently
lowered in the pre-bored holes and the space around
2.2.10 Permanent Load — Loads which remain on grouted.
the structure for a period, or a number of periods, long
enough to cause time dependent deformation 2.3.7 Cut-offLevel — It is the level where the installed
settlement of the soil. pile is cut-off to connect the pile caps or beams or any
other structural components at that level.
2.2.11 Shallow Foundation — A foundation whose
width is generally equal to or greater than its depth. 2.3.8 Driven Cast in-situ Pile — A pile formed within
the ground by driving a casing of permanent or
NOTE — These cover such types of foundations in which load
transference is primarily through shear resistance of the bearing
temporary type and subsequently filling in the hole so
strata (the frictional resistance of soil above bearing strata is not formed with plain or reinforced concrete. For
taken into consideration) and are laid normally to depth of 3 m. displacing the subsoil, the casing is installed with a
2.2.12 Spread Foundation — A foundation which plug or a shoe at the bottom end. When the casing is
left permanently, it is termed as cased pile and when
transmits the load to the ground through one or more
the casing is taken out, it termed as uncased pile.
footings.
2.3.9 Driven Precast Pil; — A pile constructed in
2.3 Pile Foundation
concrete (reinforced or prestressed) in a casting yard
2.3.1 Batter Pile (Raker Pile) — The pile which is and subsequently driven in the ground when it has
installed at an angle to the vertical. attained sufficient strength.
2.3.2 Bearing Pile — A pile formed in the ground for 2.3.10 E@ciency of a Pile Group — It is the ratio of
transmitting the load of a structure to the soil by the the actual supporting value of a group of piles to the
resistance developed at its tip and/or along its surface. supporting value arrived at by multiplying the pile
It maybe formed either vertically or at an inclination resistance of an isolated pile by their number in the
(Batter Pile) and may be required to take uplift pressure. group.
If the pile supports the load primarily by resistance 2.3.11 Factor of Safety — It is the ratio of the ultimate
developed at the pile point or base, it is referred to as load capacity of a pile to the safe load of a pile.
2.3.12 Multi- Under-ReamedPile — An under-reamed for all types of formations, but should be used
pile having more than one bulb. The piles having two for small depths (up to 3 m). In the case of
bulbs may be called double under-reamed piles. cuts which cannot stand below water table,
proper bracing should be given.
2.3.13 Negative Skin Friction — Negative skin friction
b) Auger boring — The auger is either power of
is the force developed through the friction between
the pile and the soil in such a direction as to increase hand operated with periodic removal of the
the loading on the pile, generally due to drag of a cuttings.
consolidating soft layer around the pile resting on a c) Shell and auger boring — Both manual and
stiffer bearing stratum such that the surrounding soil mechanized rig can be used for vertical
settles more than the pile. borings. The tool normally consists of augers
for soft to stiff clays, shells for very stiff and
2.3.14 Ultimate Load CapaciQ — The maximum load hard clays, and shells or sand pumps for sandy
which a pile can carry before failure of ground when strata attached to sectional boring rods.
the soils fails by shear or failure of pile materials.
d) Wash boring — In wash boring, the soil is
2.3.15 Under-Reamed Pile — A bored cast in-situ or loosened and removed from the bore hole by
bored compaction concrete pile with enlarged bulb(s) a stream of water or drilling mud is worked
made by either cutting or scooping out the soil or by up and down or rotated in the bore hole. The
D i
i) Isolated spread footing or raft One and a half times the width (B) (see Fig. 1)
ii) Adjacent footings with clear spacing less One and a half times the length (L) of the footing (see Fig. 1)
than twice the width
iii ) Adjacent rows of footings See Fig. 1
iv) Pile and well foundations To a depth of one and a half times the width of structure from the bearing (toe of
pile or bottom of well)
v) a) Road cuts Equal to the bottom width of the cut
b) Fill Two metres below ground level or equal to the height of the fill whichever is greater
9- B-9 ●
D=14BFORA94B
L=W
w~
D=4+BFORA<2B
D=3BFORA>2B
u=l;t3FoRA74B
Soil Disturbed Chunk samples 3.4.5.1 The following tests shall be carried out in
Auger samples (for accordance with good practice [6-2(4)].
example, in clay) a) Particle size distribution,
Shell samples (for
b) Density,
example, in sand)
Undisturbed Chunk samples c) Natural moisture content,
Tube samples d) Consistency limits,
Rock Disturbed Wash samples from e) Consolidation characteristics,
percussion of rotary f) Strength characteristics,
drilling
Sulphate, chloride and pH content of soil and
g)
Undisturbed Core barrel sampling
ground water, and
,
Table 2 Mass of Soil Sample Required ~~
[Clause 3.4,2(a)]
In the case of concrete placed against a soil containing 7.1 Design Considerations
harmful chemicals (sulphates, chlorides), among other
protective measures, it shall be ensured to provide 7.1.1 Design Loads
nominal cover required as prescribed in Part 6 The foundation shall be proportioned for the following
‘Structural Design, Section 5 Concrete for the combination of loads:
Applicable Environment Exposure Condition’.
a) Dead load + imposed load; and
5.2.1.1 Preferably concrete of higher grade shall be
b) Dead load + imposed load + wind load or
used in situations subject to aggressive environment.
seismic loads, whichever is critical.
5.2.2 Timber
For details, reference shall be made to Part 6 ‘Structural
Where timber is exposed to soil, it shall be treated in Design, Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects’.
accordance with good practice [6-2(6)].
NOTES
1 For load, imposed, wind, seismic and other loads, see Part 6
6 TYPE OF FOUNDATIONS
‘Structural Design, Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects’.
6.1 Types of foundations covered in this Section 2 For coarse grained soil$, settlements shall be estimated
are: corresponding to 7.1.1 (b) and for fine grrtined soils settlement
shall be estimated correspondi~ to permanent loads only.
a) Shallow Foundations
7.1.2 Allowable Bearing Pressure
1) Pad or spread and strip foundations,
2) Raft foundations, and The allowable bearing pressure shall be taken as either
of the following, whichever i’sless:
3) Ring and shell foundations.
b) Pile Foundations a) The safe bearing capacity on the basis of shear
1) Driven cast in-situ concrete piles, strength characteristics of soil, or
2) Bored cast in-situ concrete piles, b) The allowable bertring pressure that the soil
3) Driven precast concrete piles, can take without exceeding the permissible
settlement (see 7.1.3).
4) Bored precast concrete piles,
5) Under-reamed concrete piles, and 7.1.2.1 Bearing capacizy by calculation
6) Timber piles. Where the engineering properties of the soil are
c) Other Foundations available, that is, cohesion, angle of internal friction,
Pier foundations. density, etc the bearing capacity shall be calculated
Type I — Rock or Hard Soil: Type II — Medium Type III — Soft Soils:
Well graded gravel and sand Soils: All soils with N All soils other than SP1)
gravel mixtures with or without between 10 and 30, and with N <10
clay binder, and clayey sands poorly graded sands or
poorly graded or sand clay gravelly sands with little
mixtures (GB, CW, SB, SW, and or no fines (SP1)) with
SC)l) having N*) above 30, where N> 15
N is the standard penetration
value
NOTES
1 The allowable bearing pressure shall be determined in accordance with good practice [6-2(7)] and [6-2(8)].
2 If any increase in bearing pressure has already been permitted for forces other than seismic forces, the total increase in allowable
bearing pressure when seismic force is also included shall not exceed the limits specified above.
3 Desirable minimum field values of N — If soils of smaller IV-values are met, compacting maybe adopted to achieve these values or
deep pile foundations going to stronger strata should be used.
4 The values of IV(corrected values) are at the founding level and the allowable bearing pressure shall be determined in accordance with
good practice [6-2(7)] and [6-2(8)].
<5 15
III, IV and V
25 25 For values of depths between 5 m
and 10 m, linear interpolation is
H ~5 15 recommended
(for important
structures only) ~ 10 25
}
5 The piles should be designed for lateral loads neglecting lateral resistance of soil layers liable to liquefy.
6 Good practice [6-2(5)] and [6-2(9)] may also be referred,
7 Isolated RCC footing without tie beams, or unreinforced strip foundation shall not be permitted in soft soils with. A/ <10.
(Clause 7.1.3)
s] Type of Structure Isolated Foundations Raft Foundations
Sand and Hard Clay Plastic Clay Sand and Hard Clay Plastic Clay
/ A
- ~~ ~
i) For steel structure 50 .003 3L 1/300 50 .003 3L 1/300 75 .003 3L 1/300 100 .003 3L 1/300
ii) For reinforced concrete 50 .001 5L 1/666 75 .001 5L 1/666 75 .002 lL 1/500 100 .002 OL 1/500
structures
iii) For multistoreyed
buildings
a) RC or steel framed 60 ,002L 1/500 75 .002L 1/500 75 .002 5L 1/400 125 .003 3L 1/300
buildlngs with panel
walls
b) For load bearing
walls
1) IJH=2* 60 .000 2L 1/5 000 60 .000 2L 1/5000 4 Not likely to be encountered ~
2) L/H=7* 60 .000 4L 1/2 500 60 .000 4L 1/2500
iv) For water towers and 50 .001 5L 11666 75 .001 5L 11666 100 .002 5L 1/400 125 .002 5L 1/400
silos
NOTE — The vahres given in the table may tie ~en only as a guide and the permissible total settiementklifferent settlement and tilt (angular distortion) in each case should be decided as per
. .x
requirements of the designer.
L denotes the length of deflected part of walllraft or centre-to-centre distance between columns.
H denotes the height of wall from foundation footing.
* For intermediate ratios of UH, the vrdues can be interpolated.
7.1.4 Depth of Foundations load counteracting against swelling pressures also
provide satisfactory foundations.
7.1.4.1 The depth to which foundations should be
carried depends upon the following principal factors: 7.1.5 Foundation at Dl~erent Levels
a) The securing of adequate allowable capacity. 7.1.5.1 Where footings are adjacent to sloping
b) In the case of clayey soils, penetration below ground or where the bottoms of the footings of a
the zone where shrinkage and swelling due structure are at different levels or at levels different
to seasonal weather changes, and due to trees from those of the footings of adjoining structures,
and shrubs are likely to cause appreciable the depth of the footings shall be such that the
movements. difference in footing elevations shall be subject to
c) In fine sands and silts, penetration below the the following limitations:
zone in which trouble may be expected from a) When the ground surface slopes downward
frost. adjacent to a footing, the sloping surface shall
d) The maximum depth of scour, wherever not intersect a frustum of bearing material
relevant, should also be considered and the under the footing having sides which make
foundation should be located sufficiently an angle of 30° with the horizontal for soil
beIow this depth. and horizontal distance from the lower edge
of the footing to the sloping surface shall be
.!
FIG. 2 FOOTING
INSLOPING
GROUND
FIG. 3 FOOTING
INGRANULAR
SOIL
/ SLOPE OF JOINING
LINE NOT STEEPER
\ LOWER
THAN TWO HORIZONTAL FOOTING
TO ONE VERTICAL
FIG. 4 FOOTING
IN CLAYEYSOIL
7.1.7.1 In certain areas mass movements of the ground Where a structure is to be placed on sloping ground,
are liable to occur from causes independent of the loads additional complications are introduced. The ground
applied by the foundations of structures. These include itself, particularly if of clay, may be subject to creep
mining subsidence, landslides on unstable slopes and or other forms of instability, which may be enhanced
creep on clay slopes. if the strata dip in the same direction as the ground
surface. If the slope of the ground is large, the overall
7.1.7.2 Mining subsidence
on granular soils. Long-term consolidation of deep soil static and dynamic penetration tests, pressure
layers shall be taken into account in the analysis. This meter tests etc); and
may necessitate evaluation of contact pressure f) A review of the performance of similar
distribution both immediately after construction and structure, if any, in the locality.
after completion of the consolidation process. The
design must be based on the worst conditions. 7.3.3 Choice of Ra# Type
7.3.1.9 Rigidity of foundations 7.3.3.1 For fairly small and uniform column spacing
and when the supporting soil is not too compressible a
Rigidity of the foundation tends to iron out uneven flat concrete slab having uniform thickness throughout
deformation and thereby modifies the contact pressure (a true mat) is most suitable (see Fig. 5A).
distribution. High order of rigidity is characterized
by long moments and relatively small, uniform 7.3.3.2 A slab maybe thickened under heavy loaded
settlements. A rigid foundation may also generate high columns to provide adequate strength for sheai and
secondary stresses in structural members. The effect negative moment. Pedestals may also be provided in
of rigidity shall be taken into account in analysis. such cases (see Fig. 5B).
7.3.1.10 Rigidity of the superstructure 7.3.3.3 A slab and beam type of raft is likely to be
more economical for large column spacing and unequal
Free response of the foundations to soil deformation column loads particularly when the supporting soil is
❑ o ❑ o ❑ o ❑ o ❑ ❑
@ 0 ❑ ❑ 9 s 0 ❑ 0 m
) SECTION’B6
SECTION AA
in ❑ o 0 d b a o 0 d
❑ lnrlil ❑ o 0 ❑
❑
-—-—- —-—-
c
r T c D 0 0
0
0
0
0
a
07
Q
D
In o 0 ❑ d D
SECTION ~C SECTION DD
combined action of the superstructure and the In the case of uniform conditions when the variations in
foundation) with relative stiffness factor adjacent column loads and column spacings do not
K> 0.5 (for evaluation o~Ksee Annex C); and exceed 20 percent of the higher value, the raft may be
b) The column spacing is less than 1.75/a (see divided into perpendicular strips of widths equal to the
Annex C). distance between midspans and each strip may be
analysed as an independent beam with known column
The raft is analysed as a whole in each of the two loads and known contact pressures. Such beams will
perpendicular directions. The contact pressure not normally satisfy statics due to shear transfer between
distribution is determined by the procedure outlined adjacent strips and design may be based on suitable
in Annex D. Further analysis is also based on statics. moment coefficients, or by moment distribution.
b) General method — For the general case of concreting may be used under favorable non-
a flexible foundation not satisfying the aggressive subsoil condition and where concrete of
requirements of (a), the method based on higher strength is not needed structurally or due to
closed form solution of elastic plate theory aggressive site conditions. For concreting in aggressive
may be used. This method is based on the surroundings due to presence of sulphates, etc the
theory of plates on winkler foundation which provisions given in Part 6 ‘Structural Design, Section
takes into account the restraint on deflection 5 Concrete’ shall be followed.
of a point provided by continuity of the
8.L2 Steel Reinforcement
foundation in orthogonal foundation. The
distribution of deflection and contact pressure Steel reinforcement shall conform to any one of the
on the raft due to a column load is determined types of steel specified in Part 6 ‘Structural Design,
by the plate theory. Since the effect of a Section 5 Concrete’.
column load on an elastic foundation is
8.2 Design Considerations
damped out rapidly, it is possible to determine
the total effect at a point of all column loads Pile foundation shall be designed in such a way that
within the zone of influence by the method the load from the structure it supports can be
of superimposition. The computation of effect transmitted to the soil without causing any soil failure
at any point may be restricted to columns of and without causing such settlement, differential or
two adjoining bays in all directions. The total under permanenth-ansient loading as may result
procedure is outlined in Annex F. in structural darnage andhr functional distress. The
pile shaft should have adequate structural capacity to
7.4 Ring Foundations withstand all loads (vertical, axial or otherwise) and
moments which are to be tmnsmitted to the subsoil.
For provisions regarding ring foundations good
practice [6-2( 16)] shall be referred to. NOTE— When working near existing structures, care shall be
taken to avoid any damage to structures.
8 DRIVEN/BORED CAST ZN-SZTU CONCRETE
8.2.1 Soil Resistance
PILES
The bearing capacity of a pile is dependent on the
8.0 General
properties of the soil in which it is embedded. Axial
Piles find application in foundations to transfer load load from a pile is normally transmitted to the soil
from a structure to competent sub-surface strata having through skin friction along the shaft and end bearing
adequate load bearing capacity. The load transfer at its tip. A horizontal load on a vertical pile is
mechanism from a pile to the surrounding ground is transmitted to the subsoil primarily by horizontal
complicated and is yet to be fully understood, although subgrade reaction generated in the upper part of the
8.2.1.2 Static formula The piles shall have the necessary structural strength
to transmit the loads imposed on them ultimately to
By using static formula, the estimated value of the
the soil.
ultimate bearing capacity of a typical pile is obtained,
the accuracy being dependent on the reliability of the 8.2.3.1 Axial capacity
formula and the reliability of the soil properties for
Where a pile is fully embedded in the soil (having an
various strata available. The soil properties to be
undrained shear strength not less than 10 kN/m2) its
adopted in such a formula maybe assigned from results
axial carrying capacity is not limited by its strength as
of laboratory tests and field tests as per good practice a long column. Where piles are installed through very
[6-2( 1)]. Two separate static formulae commonly weak soils (having an undrained shear strength less
applicable for cohesive and non-cohesive soils are
than 10 kN/m2), special consideration shall be given
indicated in Annex G, to serve only as a guide. Other
to determine whether the shaft would behave as a long
alternative formulae may be applicable, depending on
column or not; if necessary suitable reductions shall
the subsoil characteristics and method of installation
be made in its structural strength considering the
of piles.
buckling phenomenon.
8.2.1.3 Dynamic formula
When the finished pile projects above ground level
For driven piles in non-cohesive soils, such as gravels, and is not secured against buckling by adequate
coarse sand and other similar deposits, an approximate bracing, the effective length will be governed by the
value of the bearing capacity may be determined by a fixity conditions imposed on it by the structure it
dynamic pile formula as per good practice [6-2(17)]. supports and by the nature of the soil into which it is
Dynamic formulae are not directly applicable to installed. The depth below the ground surface to the
cohesive soil deposits, such as saturated slits and clays, lower point of contraflexure varies with the type of
as the resistance to impact of the toe of the casing will soil. In good soil the lower point of contraflexure may
be exaggerated by their low permeability, while the be taken at a depth of 1 m below ground surface
frictional resistance on the sides is reduced by subject to a minimum of three times the diameter of
lubrication. If as a result of test loadings on a given the shaft. In weak soil (undrained shear strength less
area a suitable coefficient can be applied to a dynamic than 10 kN/m2) such as soft clay and soft slit, this point
formula, the results may then be considered as may be taken at about half the depth of penetration
reasonable. into such stratum but not more than 3 m or 10 times
the diameter of the shaft, whichever is less. A stratum
8.2.1.4 Load test results
of liquid mud should be treated as if it was water.
The ultimate load capacity of a single pile is determined The degree of fixity of the position and inclination
Piles shall always be reinforced with a minimum 8.2.10.5 The clear overhang of the pile cap beyond
amount of reinforcement as dowels, keeping the the outer most pile in the group shall normally
minimum bond length into the pile shaft and with be 100 mm to 150 mm, depending upon the pile
adequate projection into the pile cap. size.
NOTE — In some cases the cage may lift at bottom or at the top 8.2.10.6 The cap is generally cast over a 75 mm thick
during withdrawal of casing. This can be minimized by making
levelling course of concrete. The clear cover for the
the reinforcement ‘U’ shaped at the bottom and up to well
secured joints, Also the lifting 5 percent of the length should be main reinforcement in the cap slab shall not be less
considered not to affect the quality of pile. than 60 mm.
8.2.9.3 Clear cover to all main reinforcements in pile 8.2.10.7 The pile should project 50 mm into the cap
shaft shall be not less than 50 mm. The laterals of a concrete.
reinforcing cage may be in the form of links or spirals.
8.2.11 Grade Beams
The diameter and spacing of the same are so chosen as
to impart adequate rigidity to the reinforcing cage 8.2.11.1 The grade beams supporting the walls shall
during its handling and installation. The minimum be designed taking due account of arching effect due
diameter of the links or spirals shall be 6 mm and the to masonry above the beam. The beam with masonry
spacing of the links or spirals shall be not less due to composite action behaves as a deep beam.
than 150 mm.
For the design of beams, a maximum bending moment
8.2.10 Design of Pile Cap of wl 2
~, where w is uniformly distributed load per
8.2.10.1 The pile caps may be designed considering metre run (worked out @ considering a maximum
that the reaction from any pile is concentrated at the height of two storeys in structures with load bearing
centre of the pile. The critical section for shear in walls and one storey in framed structures) and 1is the
diagonal tension is taken at a distance equal to half the effective span in metres, will be taken if the beams are
effective depth of cap from the face of column/pedestal supported during construction till the masonry above
or wall. For bending moment and shear for bond, the it gains strength. The value of bending moment shall
critical section is taken at the face of column/pedestal
or wall for cap supporting a concrete colwim, pedestal be increased to —,
~~ if the beams are not supported.
or wall; halfway between the centre line and the edge For considering c;rnposite action, the minimum height
of the wall for caps under masonry walls and half-way of wall shall be 0.6 times the beam span. The brick
between the face of the column or pedestal and the strength should not be less than 3 N/mmz. For
edge of the gusseted base for caps under gusseted bases. concentrated and other loads which come directly over
In computing the external shear or the critical section, the beam, full bending moment should be considered.
9.2.5 L@tg and Handling Stresses 9.3.2 The lateral reinforcement is of particular
importance in resisting the driving stresses induced in
Stresses induced by bending in the cross-section of a
the piles and should be in the form of hoops or links
precast pile during lifting and handling may be
and of diameter not less than 6 mm. The volume of
estimated just as for any reinforced concrete section
lateral reinforcement shall not be less than the
in accordance with relevant provisions of good practice
following:
[6-2( 13)]. The calculations with regard to moments
depending on the method of support during handling a) At each end of the pile for a distance of about
will be as given below. Excessive whippiness in handling 3 times the least width — not less than 0.6
precast pile may generally be avoided by limiting the percent of the gross volume of that. part of
length of pile to a maximum of 50 times the least width. the pile; and
L 50 mm THICK CONCRETE
SLAB OR BRICK ON EDGE
k+
[ 50 mm THICK CONCRETE
SLAB OR BRICK ON EDGE
LEVELLING COURSE 1
b) In the body of the pile — not less than soils likely to damage the concrete at the tip of the
0.2 percent of the gross volume of the pile. pile. The shoe can be of steel or cast iron. In uniform
clay or sand, the shoe may be omitted.
The spacing shall be such as to permit free flow of
concrete around it. The transition between the close Where jetting is necessary for concrete piles, a jet tube
spacing of lateral reinforcement near the ends and the may be cast into the pilp, the tube, being connected to
maximum spacing shall be gradually over a length of the pile shoe which, is provided with jet holes.
3 times the least width of the pile. Generally, a central jet is inadvisable, as it is liable to
.
become choked. At least,~o jet holes will be necessary
9.3.3 The cover of concrete overall the reinforcement,
on opposite sides of the shoe, four holes giving best
including ties, should not be less than 40 mm. But
results. Alternatively, two or more jet pipes may be
where the piles are exposed to sea-water or water
attached to the sides of the pile.
having other corrosive content, the cover should be
nowhere less than 50 mm. Cover should be measured 9.4 For detailed information regarding casting and
clear from the main or longitudinal reinforcement. curing, storing and handling, control of pile driving
and recording of data, reference maybe made to good
NOTE — Where concrete of the pile is liable to be exposed to
the attack of sulphates aad chlorides present in the ground water, practice [6-2(20)].
the piles may be coated with a suitable material.
10 BORED PRECAST CONCRETE PILES
9.3.4 Piles should be provided with flat or pointed co-
axial shoes if they are driven into or through ground, 10.1 Provisions of 9 except 9.3 shall generally apply.
such as rock, coarse gravel, clay with cobbles and other 10.2 For grouting the space around the pile, the precast
G- =/s’’’’”” a
GL
SECOND/iAST
w 1,”” ——A II
BULB
01 = 45° (APPROX.)
02 = 30°-’45° (APPROX)
Du = NORMALLY 2.5 D
upon the feasibility of construction and design 11.2.1.6 Under-reamed piles with more than one bulb
requirements. In bored cast in-situ under-reamed piles are not advisable without ensuring their feasibility in
and under-reamed compaction piles, the bulb diameter strata needing stabilization of bore holes by drilling mud.
shall be normally 2.5 and 2 times the stem diameter The number of bulbs in the case of bored compaction
respectively. piles should also not exceed one in such strata.
11.2.1.4 For piles of up to 300 mm diameter, the 11.2.1.7 Under-reamed batter piles without lining in
spacing of the bulbs should not exceed 1.5 times the dry conditions, that is, strata with low water table can
diameter of the bulb. For piles of diameter greater than be constructed with batter not exceeding 15°.
300 mm, spacing can be reduced to 1.25 times the bulb
11.2.2 Safe Load
diameter.
Safe load on a pile can be determined:
11.2.1.5 The topmost bulb should be at a minimum
depth of two times the bulb diameter. In expansive a) by calculating the ultimate load from soil
soils it should also be not less than 2.75 m below properties and applying a suitable factor of
ground level. The minimum clearance below the safety as given in Annex J;
underside of pile cap embedded in the ground and b) by load test on pile as good practice [6-2(18)];
the bulb should be a minimum of 1.5 times the bulb and
diameter. c) from safe load tables.
11.2.5.1 Generally the centre to centre spacing for 11.2.9 The design of pile cap and grade beams shall
bored cast in-situ under-reamed piles in a group should conform to the requirements specified in 8.2.10 and
be two times the bulb diameter (2 Du). It shall not be 8.2.11 respectively.
less than 1.5 Du. For under-grade beams, the maximum
11.2.10 For detailed information on under-reamed
spacing of piles should generally not exceed 3 m. In
piles regarding control of pile, installation, reference
under-reamed compaction piles, generally the spacing
may be made to good practice [6-2(22)].
should not be less than 1.5 DU. If the adjacent piles are
of different diameter, an aveage value of bulb diameter 12 TIMBER PILES
should be taken for spacing.
12.1 Materials
11.2.6 Group Efficiency
12.1.1 Timber
For bored cast in-situ under-reamed piles at a usual
spacing of 2 Du, the group efficiency will be equal to The timber shall have the following characteristics:
the safe load of an individual pile multiplied by the a) Only structural timber shall be used for piles
number of piles in the group. For piles at a spacing of (see Part 6 ‘Structural Design, Section 3 Timber
1.5 Du, the safe load assigned per pile in a group should and Bamboo, 3A’ Timber’ );
be reduced by 10 percent.
b) The length of an individual pile shall be:
In under-reamed compaction piles, at the usual spacing 1) the specified,,@gth * 300 mm for piles
of 1.5 Du, the group capacity will be equal to the safe up to and including 12 m in length, and
load on an individual pile multiplied by the number of 2) the specified length & 600 mm for piles
piles in the group. above 12 m in length;
11.2.7 Transient and Overloading c) The ratio of heartwood diameter to the pile
butt diameter shall be not less than 0.8;
Provisions of 8.2.7 and 8.2.8 shall generally apply.
and
11.2.8 Reinforcement d) Piles to be used untreated shall have as little
11.2.8.1 The minimum area of longitudinal sapwood as possible.
reinforcement (any type or grade) within the pile shaft
12.2 Design Considerations
shall be 0.4 percent of the sectional area calculate on
the basis of outside area of the shaft or casing if used. 12.2.1 General — See 8.0.
NOTE— For timber piles, the load carried shall be determined f J = Reduced allowable stress,
by the Engineering News formula given below. Care shall be ~ = Allowable stress,
taken that while counting the number of blows, the head of the
timber pile is not broomed or brushed and in case of interrupted H = Height of pier, and
driving counting shall be done after 300 mm of driving. D = Least lateral dimension.
For piles driven with drop hammer, NOTE — The above provision shall not apply for piers where
the least lateral dimension is 1.8 m or greater.
160 WH
For piles driven with single-acting steam hammer, When the height of the pier exceeds 18 times its least
dimension, the maximum load shall not exceed:
P=160WH
H
()
S i- 2.5
P’=P l.5– —
where 36D
P= Safe load on pile in kN, where
w= Weight of monkey in kN,
H. Free fall of monkey in m, and P’ = Permissible load;
s= Penetration of pile in mm to be taken as the average P= Permissible load when calculated as axirdly
of the last three blows, loaded short column,
H= Height of the pier measured from top of bell,
12.2.4 For detailed information on timber piles
if any, to the level of cut-off of pier, and
regarding spacing, classification, control of pile
driving, storing and handling, reference may be made D= Least lateral dimension.
to good practice [6-2(23)]. 13.2 Design of foundation units not already covered
by this section, such as well foundations, machine
13 OTHER FOUNDATIONS
foundations, shell foundations, etc, may be designed
13.1 Pier Foundations and constructed in accordance with good practice
[6-2(24)].
13.1.1 Design Considerations
(Clause 7.3.1.11)
DETERMINATION OF MODULUS OF ELASTICITY (E,)
AND POISSON’S RATIO (u)
A-1 DETERMINATION OF MODULUS OF where B~, BP represent sizes of foundation and plate
ELASTICITY (E,) and EP is the modulus determined by the plate load
test.
A-1.l The modulus of elasticity is a function of
composition of the soil, its void *ratio, stress history A-2.2 For stratified deposits or deposits with lenses
and loading rate. In granular soils it is a function of of different materials, results of plate load test will be
the depth of the strata, while in cohesive soil it is unreliable and static cone penetration tests may be
markedly influenced by the moisture content. Due to carried out to determine E,.
its great sensitivity to sampling disturbance, accurate
A-2.2.1 Static cone penetration tests shall be carried
evaluation of the modulus in the laboratory is extremely
out in accordance with good practice [6-2(1)]. Several
difficult. For general cases, therefore, determination
tests shall be carried out at regular depth intervals up
of the modulus may be based on field tests (A-2).
B-1 GENERAL number of plate load tests carried out over the area,
the number and location of the tests depending upon
B-1.l The modulus of subgrade reaction (k) as
the extent and importance of the structure.
applicable to the case of load through a plate of size
300 mm x 300 mm or beams 300 mm wide on the soils B-3 LABORATORY DETERMINATION
is given in Table 6 for cohesionless soils and in Table 7
for cohesive soils. Unless more specific determination B-3.1 For stratified deposits or deposits with lenses
of k is done (see B-2 and B-3) these values may be of different materials, evaluation of k from plate load
used for design of raft foundation in cases where the test will be unrealistic and its determination shall be
depth of the soil affected by the width of the footing based on laboratory tests [see 6-2(4)].
may be considered isotropic and the extra-polation of B-3.2 In carrying out the test, the continuing cell
plate load test results is valid. pressure may be so selected as to be representative of
the depth of the average stress influence zone (about
B-2 FIELD DETERMINATION
[r
good practice [6-2(27)]. The test shall be carried out
with a plate of size not less than 300 mm. E#4 ‘2 E, 1
k= O.65x —
EI (1-p’)z
B-2.2 The average value of k shall be based on a
1)The above values apply to a square plate 300 mm x 300 mm or beams 300 mm wide.
1)The values apply to a square plate 300 mm x 300 mm. The above values are based on the assumption that the average loading
intensity does not exceed half the ultimate bearing capacity.
E, = Modulus of elasticity of soil (see Annex A), When the structure is rigid (see Annex C), the average
E= Young’s modulus of foundation material, modulus of subgrade reaction may also be determined
/4. as follows:
Poisson’s ratio of soil,
I= Moment of inertia of the foundation, and ~ = Average contact pressure
B= Width of the footing. s Average settlement of the raft
ANNEX C
~FOuNDATION RAFT
El
a) For the whole structure, K = —
Zu = Moment of inertia of the upper column E,b3a
in m4,
E d3
1, = Moment of inertia of the lower column b) For rectangular rafts, K= ~ ;
in m4, and s [)
where
c) ‘or clrculm ‘afts’ K = 12 E, ()
2R
SPACING
(Clause 7.3.4.1)
where
z:=+ Y
directions respectively.
NOTE — If one or more of the values of (q) are nagative as
calculated by the above formula, it indicates that the whole area
of foundation is not subject to pressure and only a part of the
2 area is in contact with the soil, and the above formula will still
hold good, provided the appropriate vatues of 1,,1,, Iv, exand ey,
Z;= IY–+
are used with respect to the area in contact with the soil instead
x of the whole area.
E-1 CONTACT PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION E-1.2 The contact pressure for the full width of the
strip under an interior column load located at a point i
E-1.l The distribution of contact pressure is assumed
can be determined as (see Fig. 9 A):
to be linear with the maximum value attained under
the columns and the minimum value at mid span. 5P 48M.
“ = i’+ (o”
I I
I
i-l ~j+l
———— T I ———— —
1/2
112
pi (r)
pi (1)
————————
Pe Pi
.Ii .
k &
I 1/2 / 112
1
///\\\l
b
///\\\ I ///\\\ I ///’N\
1; I I
I
I
I I I I I I
L EXTERIOR PART
..
‘
where 4 pe – pmlr
i= Average length of adjacent span (m), “ ‘p’ = 4C+1,
P, = Column load at point i, and
Ml = Moment under an interior columns loaded E-2 BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAM
at i. E-2.1 The bending moment under an interior column
E-1.3 The minimum contact pressure for the full width located at i (see Fig. 9A) can be determined as:
of the strip at the middle of the adjacent spans can be
determined as (see Fig. 9A and 9B). M, = fi(O.24 AT +0.16)
M~=MO+Mi
‘m=’t+l-pi[:) pm + pti
where
Pm ‘fi(r)l
E-1.5 If E-2.3 (b) governs the moment under the (4< - pml,) c’
b) M., ‘- (4c+/1) ‘
exterior columns, the contact pressures are determined
as (see Fig. 9C):
ANNEX F
(Clause 7.3.4.2)
FLEXIBLE FOUNDATION — GENERAL CONDITION
(r
D4
(w) at any point by the following expressions:
T
z;(f) where
M, =-: Z,(~)-(l-@-
[ (f) 1 k= Modulus of subgrade reaction for footing
of width B,
z;(f)
M, =-: /JZ, (~)+(l-p)— D= Flexural rigidity of the foundation,
[ (f) 1 Et’
P=
w. g. z, (f) I’(l–/l’)’
38 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
%--’
N
0.4
Z“(rA)
F-1.2 The radial and tangential moments can be
0.3 ~(rA)
converted to rectangular co-ordinates:
where
0
0123456
F-1.4 When the edge of the raft is located within the
r7L
radius of influence, the following corrections are to be
applied. Calculate moments and shears perpendicular FIG.10 FUNCTIONSFOR SHEAR MOMENT
to the edge ,of the raft within the radius of influence, AND DEFLECTION
ANNEX G
(Clauses 8.2.1.2 and 8.2.3.2)
LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY — STATIC FORMULA
2 a) Static formula maybe used as a guide only for bearing resistance and skin friction of piles:
capacity estimates. Better reliance may be put on load
test on piles. Soil type ‘ qclN
b) For working ont safe load, a minimum factor of safety
Clays, silts, sandy silts and slightly 0.2
2.5 should be used on the ultimate bearing capacity
estimated by static formulae. cohesive silt-sand mixtures
3 In case of soft to very soft soils which are not sensitive, the Clean fme to medium sands and 0.3-0.4
value of a can be taken up to 1. slightly silty sands
G-3 When full static penetration data is available for Coarse sands and sands with little 0.5-0.6
the entire depth, the following correlations may be used gravel
as a guide for the determination of shaft resistance of
Sandy gravels and gravel 0.8-0.10
a pile:
100
50
FIG. 11 BEARINGCAPACITY
FACTOR,NqFORBOREDPILES
100
/
/
I
50
10
20 25 30 35 40 45
FIG. 12 BEARINGCAPACITY
FACTOR,Nq FORDRIVENPILES
where
Table 9 Values of Constant K1 (kN/m3)
k
2.1
1
\
‘1,
‘----- FIXED HEAD PILE
“~+ ‘~~,
1.5
--- ---9 -----
FOR PILES IN
PRELOADED
,}
1 I I 1 CLAYS
1.3
o 2 4 6 8 10
L1/R OR Lqfl
FIG. 13 DETERMINATION
OFDEPTHFIXITY
..
L
H-1.3 Knowing the length of the equivalent cantilever cantilever is higher than the actual maximum moment
the pile head deflection (Y) shall be computed using (M) of the pile. The actual maximum moment is
the following equations: obtained by multiplying the fixed end moment of the
equivalent cantilever by a reduction factor, m given in
Y(in ,n)= Qf~ +~f)’ ...... for free head pile Fig. 14. The fixed end moment of the equivalent
3 EI
cantilever is given by:
=Q(L+G)3 ...... for fixed head pile
12 EI A4f = Q (Ll + Lf) ...... for free head pile
1.0
0.8
0.4
0.2
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
LIIR OR Lf/T
Q
FOR PILES IN L1
PRELOADED CLAYS Ll+ Lf
.— FOR PILES IN SANDS AND R
Le
NORMALLY LOADED CLAYS
l-l *
t
14A FOR FREE HEAD PILE
1.0
0.8
0.6
o 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2,5
$
L1/R OR LI/T
— FOR PILES IN
PRELOADEJ) CU4YS f’+=fQ~: Ll+ Lf
— — FOR PILES IN SANDS AND
NORMALLY LOADED CLAYS
FIG. 14 DETERMINATION
OFREDUCTION
FACTORS
FORCOMPUTATION
OFMAXIMUMMOMENTINPILE
..
-y-?
ANNEX J
(Clause 11.2.2)
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ (Part 3/See 1): Determination of specific
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The 1980 gravity, Section 1 Fine grained
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time soils (first revision)
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may
(Part 3/See 2): Determination of specific
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance
1980 gravity, Section 2 Fine, medium
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
and coarse grained soils (jlrst
Code. “
revision)
IS No. Title (Part 4): i985 Grain size analysis (second
(1) 1892:1979 Code of practice for subsurface revision)
investigation for foundation (Part 5): 1985 Determination of liquid and
(@W revision) plastic limits (second
2131:1981 Method of standard penetration revision)
test for soils (@W revision) (Part 10) :1991 Determination of unconfined
2132:1986 Code of practice for thin walled compressive strength (second
4968 Method for sub-surface (Part 28) :1974 Determination of dry density of
sounding for soils: soils in place, by the sand
replacement method (first
(Part 1) :1976 Dynamic method using 50 mm
revision)
cone without bentonite slurry
(Part 29) :1975 Determination of dry density of
(jirst revision)
soils in place, by the core cutter
(Part 2) :1976 Dynamic method using cone method (first revision)
and bentonite slurry (first
(Part 33) :1971 Determination of the density
revision)
in-place by the ring and water
(Part 3) :1976 Static cone penetration test replacement method
(first revision)
(Part 34) :1972 Determination of density of
8763:1978 Guide for undisturbed soils in-place by rubber-
sampling of sands and sandy balloon method
soils
(Part 39/See 1): Direct shear test for soils
9214:1979 Method for determination of 1977 containing gravel, Section 1
modulus of subgrade reaction Laboratory test
(k-value) of soils in the field (5) 1498:1970 Classification and identification
(2) 10042:1981 Code of practice for site- of soils for general engineering
investigations for foundation in purposes (@t revision)
,,
gravel boulder deposits (6) 401:2001 Code of practice for preservation
(3) 13365 Guidelines for quantitative of timber (jourth revision)
(Part 1): 1998 classification systems of rock (7) 6403:1981 Code of practice for
mass: Part 1 RMR for predicting determination of bearing
of engineering properties capacity of shallow foundations
(4) 2720 Methods of tests for soils: (jirst revision)
(Part 1): 1983 Preparation of dry soil samples (8) 1888:1982 Method of load tests on soils
for various tests (second (second revision)
revision) (9) 2131:1981 Method for standard
(Part 2) :1973 Determination of water content penetration test for soils (lirst
(second revision) revision)
(10) 8009 Code of practice for calculation (Part 1): 1982 Foundations for reciprocating
(Part 1): 1976 of settlement of foundations: type machine (second revision)
Part 1 Shallow foundations (Part 2): 1980 Foundations for impact type
subjected to symmetrical static machines (hammer foundations)
vertical loads @rst revision)
(11) 1904:1986 Code of practice for design and (Part 3): 1992 Foundations for rotary type
construction of foundations in machines (medium and high
soils: General requirements frequency) (second revision)
(third revision)
(Part 4): 1979 Foundations for rotary type
(12) 3764:1992 Code of safety for excavation machines of low frequency
work (first revision)
first revision)
(13) 456:2000 Code of practice for plain and
(Part 5): 1987 Foundations for impact
reinforced concrete (fourth
machines other than hammers
revision)
(forging and stamping press;
(14) 1905:1987 Code of practice for structural pig breakers, drop crusher and
use of unreinforced masonry jetter) @rst revision)
FOREWORD . .. 3
1 SCOPE ... 5
2 TERMINOLOGY ... 5
3 SYMBOLS . .. 6
4 MATERIALS . .. 7
5 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES ... 21
6 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ... 22
7 DESIGN OF COMMON STEEL WIRE NAIL JOINTS ... 26
8 DESIGN OF NAIL LAMINATED TIMBER BEAMS ... 32
9 DESIGN OF BOLTED CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ... 34
10 DESIGN OF TIMBER CONNECTOR JOINTS ... 37
FOREWORD
This Section deals with the structural design aspect of timber structures. In this section, the various Species of
Indian timber, classified into three groups depending on the structural properties influencing the design, most are
included.
In the previous version of the Code, timber was covered under Section 3 of Part 6 under the title ‘Wood’, which
did not cover bamboo. Now this Section 3 has been enlarged as Section 3 Timber and Bamboo, which has been
sub-divided into sub-section 3A Timber and sub-section 3B Bamboo. This sub-section pertains to 3A Timber.
This Section was first published in 1970 which was subsequently revised in 1983. In the first revision provisions
of this Section were updated and design of nailed laminated timber beams were included and information on
a) A number of terminologies related to timber for structural purpose have been added.
b) Strength data of additional species of timber have been included.
c) Requirements for structural timber and preferred cut sizes thereof have been modified.
d) Requirements for glued laminated construction and finger joints have been introduced.
e) Requirements for laminated veneer lumber have been introduced.
f) Brief details have been included for structural sandwiches, glued laminated beams, lamella roofing, nail
and screw holding power of timber, structural use of plywood and trussed rafter; these are proposed to
be further elaborated in future revisions of this Section.
d Guidelines for protection against termite attack in buildings have been added.
h) Reference to all the concerned Indian Standards have been updated.
In the present day context of dwindling forest resources, all efforts are being made to effect judicious use of timber.
In this context, the Indian Standards now permit use of plantation timbers including certain fast growing species and
suitable guidelines in terms of their seasoning, sawing, treatment, etc have been made available. In the same way,
use of finger jointing and glued laminated timber is important and standardization on the same is desirable and is
under due consideration. However, in the absence of detailed Indian Standard Specifications and Codes of practice
in these areas at present, general details on the same have been incorporated in the revision of this part.
The information contained in this Section is largely based on the following Indian Standards:
IS No. Title
399:1963 Classification of commercial timbers and their zonal distribution (revised)
883:1994 Code of practice for design of structural timber in building (@rth revision)
1150:2000 Trade names and abbreviated symbols for timber species (third revision)
2366:1983 Code of practice for nail-jointed timber construction (first revision)
4891:1988 Specification for prefen-ed cut sizes of structural timber (&st revision)
4983:1968 Code of practice for design and construction of nailed laminated timber beams
11096:1984 Code of practice for design and construction of bolt-jointed timber construction
14616:1999 Specification for laminated veneer lumber
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
2.1.6 End Distance — The distance measured parallel 2.1.18 Structure, Temporaq — Structures which are
to grain of the member from the centre of the connector erected for a short period, such as hutments at project
to the closest end of timber. sites, for rehabilitation, temporary defence
constructions, exhibition structures, etc.
2.1.7 Finger Joint — Joint produced by connecting
timber members end-to-end by cutting profiles (tapered 2.1.19 Structural Element — The component timber
projections) in the form of V-shaped grooves to the members and joints which make up a resulting
ends of timber planks or scantlings to be joined, glueing structural assembly.
the interfaces and then mating the two ends together
2.1.20 Structural Grades — Grades defining the
under pressure.
maximum size of strength reducing natural
2.1.8 Fundamental or Ultimate Stress — The stress characteristics (knots, sloping grain, etc) deemed
2.1.21 Structural Timber — Timber in which strength 2.2.12 Loose Knot — A knot that is not held firmly in
is related to the anticipated in-service use as a controlling place by growth or position, and that cannot be relied
factor in grading and selection and/or stiffness. upon to remain in place; c~ ‘Tight Knot’.
2.1.22 Termite — An insect of the order Isoptera 2.2.13 A40uld — A soft vegetative growth that forms
which may burrow in the wood or wood products of a on wood in damp, stagnant atmosphere. It is the least
building for food or shelter. harmful type of fungus, usually confined to the surface
of the wood.
2.1.23 Wet Location — Position in buildings in which
timbers are almost continuously damp or wet in contact 2.2.14 Pitch Pocket — Accumulation of resin between
with the earth or water, such as piles and timber growth rings of coniferous wood as seen on the cross
foundations. section.
2.2 Definitions of Defects in Timber 2.2.15 Sap Stain — Discoloration of the sapwood
mainly due to fungi.
2.2.1 Check — A separation of fibres extending along
the grain which is confined to one face of a piece of 2.2.16 Sapwood — The outer layer of log, which in
the growing tree contain living cells and food material.
d
n UE
K9 = Constant equal to ~ 5q fw
Group A — E above 12.6 x 103 N/mmz and f,
above 18.0 N/mm*.
2.5E
K,O = Constant equal to 0.584 f Group B — E above 9.8 x 103 N/mm* and up
F v to 12.6 x 103 N/mm* and fbabove
L= Span of a beam or truss, mm 12.0 N/mmz and up to 18.0 N/mm*.
4.6.2 The prohibited defects given in 4.6.2.1 and All structural members shall be framed, anchored, tied
permissible defects given in 4.6.2.2 shall apply to and braced to develop the strength and rigidity
structural timber. necessary for the purposes for which they are used.
Species Locality Average’ Modsdus of Permissible Stress in N/mm* for Grade I Preservative Characters
/ - \ from Density at Elasticity --- - Y /
A
Y
Botanical Name Trade Name Where 12 percent (All Grades Bending and Shear Compression Compression ~Durability $Treat- $Refrac-
Tested Moistore and All Tension Along all Locations Parallel Perpendicular class ability teriness
Content Locations Grain, Extreme to Grain to Grain Grade to AU
x 103 Fibre Stress Seasoning
kg/m3 Nhmn2 ~~~ ~
GROUP A
Acacia catecthu Khair (KHA) U.P. 1009 13.44 20.1 16.8 13.4 1.6 2.2 13.8 12.3 10.1 7.7 6,0 4.9 I A
Acacia chundra Red kutch M,P. 1086 16.79 26.5 22.0 17.6 2.2 3.2 17.9 15.9 13.0 10.9 8.4 6.9 A
Albizia odoratissirna Kala siris (KSI) Chennai 737 13,54 18.7 i5.6 12.5 1.5 2.2 13.3 11.8 9.6 7.3 5.6 4.6 I e B
Bruguiera spp. Broguiera (BSV) Andmans 897 17,68 21.9 18.3 14.6 1.2 1.7 14.3 12.7 10.4 5.5 4.3 3.5 m
(Mangrove)
Grewia tiliijolia Dhaman (DHA) Cbennai 788 14.82 18.3 15.2 12.2 1.3 1.9 12.0 10.7 8.7 6,0 4.7 3.8 III d B
Hopea utilis Karnng Ch&mai 987 16.91 25.1 20.9 16.7 1.5 2.2 16.4 14.6 11.9 9.3 7.3 5.9 —
(Balana carpus utilis)
Hopeagkzbra Hopes (HOP) Chennai 1081 14.79 21.3 17.8 14.2 1.5 2.2 14.5 12.9 10.6 9.9 7.7 6.3 I — A
Hopea parvt>ra Hopes (HOP) Chennai 923 13.03 18.6 15.5 12.4 1.3 1.8 13.2 11.8 9.6 9.2 7.3 6.0 1 e A
.44anUotapolyandra (Syn. Piog (PIG) Assam 903 13.20 19.1 15.9 12.7 1.3 1.8 1.2 10.4 8.5 5.7 4.4 3.6 III b A
Cynometra polyandra)
IWesuaferrea Mesua (IvIES) . , Assam 965 16.30 23.3 19.4 15.5 1.2 1.8 15.5 13.8 11.3 5.9 4.6 3.7 I — A
MitrsusopsIittorqlis Bulle&woo&@IL) S. Andaman 1103 17.39 22.7 18.9 15.1 1.5 2.1 14.2 12.7 10.4 11.3 8.8 7.2 I — A
PeMo*earon imiicwo Ballagi (BAL) Chennai 1139 16.29 22.4 18.7 15.0 1.5 2.2 14.7 13.1 10.7 8.7 6.8 5.5 1 e A
PterocarpwS;amcdinus Red STttUb’S (MA) Chennai 1121 12.73 25.0 20.9 16.7 1.7 2.5 18,1 16.1 13.2 11.8 9.2 7.5 — — A
Sagawa ellipfiea Chooi fCOC) Andmatrs 869 15.06 21.5 17.9 14.3 1.1 1.5 12.5 11.1 9.1 5.3 4.1 3.4 — — A
Stereospernmncelonoides Padri (PAD) Chennai 731 12.94 19.0 15.8 12.7 1.1 1.6 11.9 10.6 8.7 4.0 3.1 2.6 III — B
Vitexaltissirna Miila (MIL) Msbarashtra 937 13.01 18.2 15.2 12.1 1.2 1.7 12.6 11.2 9.2 9.5 7.4 6.1 I e A
GROUP B
Albizzia lebbeck Kokko (KOK) Andaman 642 iL17 13.4 11.2 9.0 I.1 1.5 9.0 8.0’ 6.5 4.4 3.4 2.8 I e B
Table 1 — Continued
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
Anogeissus latifolia Dhaura, Axle wood U.P. 892 10.55 16.1 13.4 10.7 1.1 1.6 9.1 8.1 6.6 4.7 3.7 3.0 I e A
(AXL) (Baldi)
Artocaqws hirsulus Airri (m) Chennai 600 10.45 15.0 12.5 10.0 0.7 1.1 10.4 9.2 7.5 3.3 2.6 2.1 I — B
Acacia nilotica Babul (BAB) U.P. 797 — — 12.9 10.3 1.4 2.1 8.9 7.9 6.4 5.2 4.0 3.3 I b B
Acacia ferruginea Safed khsir ‘ Mahara.shtra 993 12.28 23.0 19.2 15.3 1.7 2.4 13.9 12.4 10.1 9.9 7.7 6.3 — —
I I u
Ioa)lol I I I
w MM.
Ww I E!
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
Terminalia citnna — Assam 755 11.89 17.1 14.3 11.4 1.1 1.6 10.8 9.6 7.9 5.0 3.9 3.2 — —
Terminalia rnanii Black-chuglam (BCH) S. Andatnarr 822 12.66 16.8 14.0 11.2 1.1 1.6 10.3 9.2 7.5 5.1 4.0 3.2 II a B
Tectona grandis Teak (TEA) U.P. 660 9.97 15.5 12.9 10.3 1.2 1.6 9.4 8.3 6.8 4.5 3.5 2.8 I e B
Terminalia paniculate Kindal(KIN) Maharashtra 765 10.57 13.1 10.9 8.7 0.9 1.3 8.6 7.7 6.3 3.6 2.8 2.3 I c A
Laurel (IAlJ), Sain 1.6 9.4 8.4 6.8 6.2 4.8 4.0 I b A
GROUP C
Tbizia procera Whte siris U.P. 643 9.02 13.4 11.2 8.9 1.0 1.4 8.5 7.6 6.2 4.3 3.3 2.7 I c B
Artocaqxts kakocha Lakooch (UK) U.P. 647 6.14 10.0 8.3 6.7 1.0 1.4 5.3 4.7 3.8 2.8 2.2 1.8 I — B
Artoca~us Iwtarophyllus Jack, kathrd (RAT) Chennai 617 9.46 13.9 11.6 9.2 1.0 1.5 9.3 8.3 6.8 4.5 3.5 2.9 I d B
(Syn. A. lntegnfilia)
Aphanamixispolyskzchya Pitraj (MT) West Bengal 668 8.98 12.3 10.2 8.2 1.1 1.5 8.0 7.1 5.8 4.0 3.1 2.6 I — B
(Syn. Anraora rehituka)
Adina cordifolia+ Haldu (HAL) 8.54 13.3 11.1 8.9 1.0 1.4 8.7 7.7 6.3 4.4 3.4 2.8 In a B
Anthocephyalus chinensis Kadam (w) 1.88 9.7 8.1 5.4 0.7 1.0 5.9 5.3 4.3 1.9 1.5 1.2 III a —
(SyrL A. Gw%anba)
Arlocaipus chaplasha Chaplash (cHP) -. 515 9.11 13.2 11.0 8.8 0.9 L2 8.5 7.5 6.2 3.6 2.8 2.3 III d B
Acacia Leacoph[oea Hiwar q . M.P. ‘ ’737 7.85 13.4 11.2 9.0 1.0 1.5 7.5 6.7 5.4 4.5 3.5 2.8 — — A
Acacia melanoxylone Black WOOd Chennai 630 9.45 13.0 10.8 8.7 1.1 L5 7.6 6.8 5.5 3.2 2.5 2.0 — — —
Acacia mearnsii Black wattle Chmnai 669 6.10 10.4 8.6 6.9 0.8 1.2 6.0 5.4 4.4 2.3 1.8 1.5 — — —
(Syn. A. mollissima)
Aecerspp. Ma@@4AP) Punjab, U.P. Ml 7.35 9.9 8.2 6.5 0.9 L3 5.5 4.9 4.0 2.1 1.7 1.4 III . B
A@a itW??@OS Bnel (BEL) U.P. WO 8.81 13.5 11.2 9.0 1.4 2.0 8=8 7.8 6.4 6.8 5.3 4.3 III — B
{S@. Itiia b@@
A&e/b.b@$a — Andarnan 705 9.16 13.2 11.0 8.8 1.1 1.5 7.9 7.1 5.8 4.0 3.1 2.6 — — —
Ailanthus grands Ookul (OOK) W. Bengal 404 7.94 8.3 6.9 5.5 Q.6 0.8 5.3 4.7 3.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 III — c
Anogeissus pe& Kardhai (KAH) U.P. 929 9.75 17.0 14.2 11.4 1.3 1.8 9.8 8.7 7.1 6.5 5.1 4.2 HI — A
Areca nut — Kerala 833 9.48 15.2 12.7 10.2 1.2 1.6 10.8 9.6 7.8 7.3 5.7 4.7 — — —
---k-- ....
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
Albizia lucida Amnachrd, 566 8.51 10.7 8.9 7.1 8.2 1.2 7.3 6.3 5.3 2.3 1.8 1.5 — —
A.P.
Azadirachta indica Neem (NEE) U.P. 836 8.52 14.6 12.1 9.7 1.3 1.8 10.0 8.9 7.3 5.o 3.9 3.2 — —
Boswellia seriata Salai (SAA) Bihar 551 7.21 9.4 7.9 6.3 0.7 1.1 5.5 4.9 4.0 2.1 1.6 1.3 I e c
Bridelia retusa Kassi (KAS) Bihar 584 9.42 11.6 9.7 7.7 0.9 1.3 7.1 6.3 5.1 4.0 3.1 2.6 I e B
Betula lnoides Birch (BIR) West Bengal 625 9.23 9.6 8.0 6.4 0.8 1.1 5.7 5.0 4.1 2.2 1.7 1.4 — — B.
13urserra serrata Muntenga (MUR) A.P. 756 1.17 15.5 13.3 10.5 0.9 1.3 10.1 9.0 7.4 5.3 4.1 3.4 II c —
(Syn. Protium serratarn)
Careya arbersa Kumbi (KUM) U.P. 889, 8.37 13.1 10.9 8.8 1.0 1.5 7.7 6.8 5.6 5.3 4.1 3.4 I e A
Cedras deoalwu Deodar @m) H.P. 557 9.48 10.2 8.7 7.2 0.7 1.0 7.8 6.9 5.7 2.7 2.1 1.7 I c c
Cupressus torulosa cypress (CYP) U.P. 506 8.41 8.8 7.6 6.2 0.6 0.8 6.9 6.2 5.0 2.4 1.8 1.5 I e c
Castanopsis hystrix Indian chestnut West Bengal 624 9.85 10.6 8.8 7.0 0.8 1.2 6.4 5.7 4.6 2.7 2.1 1.7 II b B
(ICI-I)
Chukrasia vclutina Cbickrassy (cHI) West Bengal 666 8.35 11.8 9.8 7.9 1.1 1.5 7.1 6.3 5.2 3.9 3.1 2.5 II c B
(Syn. C. Tabularis)
Calophyllum wightianum Peon (IWO) Mabarashtra 689 8.68 13.5 11.2 9.0 1.0 1.4 8.7 7.8 6.4 4.0 3.1 2.5 It B
Canarium sm”ctum White dhup Assam 569 10.54 10.1 8.4 6.7 0.7 1.1 6.2 5.5 4.5 2.1 1.6 1.3 III — c
Chlorapkom excelsa —
Cacosnuc~era Ceconut (COC) Kerala 761 7.34 9.2 7.7 6.1 0.7 1.1 9.5 8.4 6.9 3.9 3.0 2.5 . — —
Da&q@ lat~olia Rosewood (ROS) M,P. 884 8.39 12.9 10.8 8.6 1.1 1.6 8.0 7.1 5.8 4.2 3.3 2.7 I — B
Dalbergia sissee Siaso (SIS) Punjab 799 7.14 12.8 10.7 8.5 1.3 1.8 8.2 7.3 6.0 4.2 3.3 2.7 I e B
Ditlemio Mica Dillenia (ML) West Bengal 617 8.61 12.1 10.0 8.0 0.8 1.2 7.3 6.5 5.3 2.7 2.1 1.7 m a B
Dillenia ptmtagyne Dillenia (ML) West Bengal 622 7.56 11.8 9.9 7.9 0.9 1.3 7.1 6.3 5.2 3.5 2.7 2.2 III d B
~spyres melanoxylon Ebony (EBO) 818 7.69 10.9 9.1 7.3 0.9 1.2 7.0 6.2 5.1 3.3 2.6 2.1 n . A
Duabanga gmnd#lom Lampati (LAP) West Bengal 485 8.38 9.8 8.2 6.5 0.6 0.9 6.4 5.7 4.7 1.8 1.4 1.1 m c c
(Syn. L? Sonrtemtioides)
Ele+arpus mbercukztas Rudrak (I&D) Chermai 466 8.74 9.7 8.1 6.4 0.7 1.0 6.3 5.6 4.6 2.0 1.5 1.3 — — c
&calyptMs kybrid Myaore gum (MGU) Chemai 753 6.00 10.2 8.5 6.8 0.9 1.2 7.3 6.5 5.3 4.0 3.1 2.5 Ill e —
Cal&W #tombaiden — Chennai 607 6.48 9.2 7.7 6.1 0.7 1.0 6.9 6.1 5.0 4.0 3.1 2.6 — — —
{* l%ne$a Awnboidea)
Garugapinnata Gamga(GAU) U.P. 571 7.58 11.7 9.7 7.8 1.0 1.5 7.2 6.4 5.3 3.4 2.6 2.1 I e B
gGmdbIe anborea Gamari (GAM) U.P. 501 7.02 9.8 8.2 6.6 0.8 1.2 5.7 5.0 4.1 4.2 3.2 2.7 I e B
Gardenia .WJWJ Gardenia (GAI) M.P. 705 7.13 14.1 11.7 9.4 1.2 1.7 8.4 7.4 6.1 4.6 3.6 3.0 . . —
Har&wicki3 binati Al@ (AIW) M.P. 852 6.64 14.1 11,8 9.4 1.3 1.8 9.0 8.0 6.5 7.4 5.6 4.7 I e —
Hehpteka integrifolia Kanju (KAN) U.P. 592 7.46 12.0 10.0 8.0 0.9 1.3 6.7 6.0 4.9 2.8 2.2 1.8 m b B
Table 1 — Continued
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
Heterrophragma rexburghii Palang (PAL) M.P. 616 8.69 12.3 10.2 8.2 0.7 1.0 7.9 7.0 5.7 3.4 2.6 2.1 — —
Juglans Spp. walnut (wAL) U.P. 565 9.00 9.9 8.3 6.6 0.9 1.2 5.8 5.2 4.2 2.2 1.7 1.4 III — B
Lagerstrosmia speciosa Jsnd (JAAR) N. Andsman 622 8.53 12.1 10.1 8.1 0.8 1.8 7.7 6.8 5.6 3.4 2.6 2.2 II e B
(Syn. L. jlesregihal)
L4znnea grandis Jhingan (JHI) U.P. 557 5.63 8.5 7.1 5.7 0.6 0.9 4.9 4.4 3.6 2.2 1.7 1.4 m e B
/ m
1
---.=...
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
Prunus napeulensis Ampati West Bengal 548 9.41 104.4 8.7 69.6 0.9 1.2 6.7 6.0 4.9 2.4 1.9 1.6 — — —
Pterespernrum acer@Olium Hattipaila (HAT) West Bengal 607 9.55 13.5 11.3 9.0 0.9 1.2 8,7 7.7 6.3 3.2 2,5 2.0 III c B
Qucrcus spp. oak North East 657 11.65 11.4 9.5 7.6 0.8 1.2 6.7 5.9 4.8 2.0 1.6 1.3 u c B
Raderomachera xyloca~e Vedankonnai Chennai 696 8.52 13.2 11.0 8.8 1.1 1.5 9.0 8.0 6.6 4.3 3.3 2.7 II a —
(Syn. Sterosperam xylocarparn)
Schleichera oleosa Kusum (KUS) Bihar 1032 12.12 15.5 13.0 10.4 1.5 2.1 10.9 9.7 7.9 6.1 4.2 3.9 II a A
* Species thus marked sod tested from other localities show bigher strength to enable their categorisation in higher group.
For Example
i) Sal tested from West Beng~ Bihar, U.P. attd Assam can be classified as Grurrp ‘A’ q.weies;
ii) Haldu tested from Bihar cao be claasiikd as Gruup ‘B’ species;
iii) Morus Iaevigate (Bole) of Assam can be classi%d in Group ‘B’ species.
& Table 1 — Concluded
NOTES
1 Nails of 3.55 mm diameter are most commonly used. The above values can also be used for 4 mm diameter 100 mm long naiIs.
2 The values in N are approximate converted values from kgf. For exact conversion the value is 1 kgf = 9.80665 N.
—
1)Species requiring no prebonng for nail penetration.
NOTES
1 Nails of 5.00 mm diameter are most commonly used.
2 The values in N are approximate converted values from kgf. For exact conversion the value is 1 kgf = 9.80665 N.
i) Structural elements 12 14 17 20
ii) Doors and windows
a) 50 mm and above in thickness 10 12 14 16
b) Thinner than 50 mm 8 10 12 14
iii) Flooring strips for general purposes 8 10 10 12
iv) Flooring strips for tea gardens 12 12 14 16
NOTE — The country has been broadly divided into the following four zones based on the humidity variations in the country:
Zone I — Average annual relative humidity less than 40 percent.
Zone II — Average annual relative humidity 40 to 50 percent.
Zone III — Average annual relative humidity 50 to 67 percent.
Zone IV — Average annual relative humidity more than 67 percent.
For detailed zonal classification, tolerances, etc reference may be made to good practice [6-3A(4)].
..
Table 5 Preferred Cut Sizes of Structural Timbers for Roof Trusses
(Span from 3 m to 20 m)
(Clause 4.5. 1)
Thickness W]dth
mm mm
20 40 50 60 80 I(I!I — — —
25 40 50 60 80 1(M3 120 140 160
30 40 50 60 80 100 120 140 160
35 — 60 80 160 120 140 160
40 — 60 80 .100 120 140 160
50 — 60 80 100 120 140 160
60 — — — 80 1(XI 120 140 160
80 — — — — 100 120 140 160
NOTES
1 For truss spans marginally above 20 m, preferred cut sizes of structural timber may be allowed.
Thickness Width
mm mm
/
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Thickness Width
mm mm
A
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
10 40 50 60 80 — — — — —
15 40 50 60 80 100 — — — —
20 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 200 —
25 40 50 60 80 100 120 1(XI 200 240
30 40 50 60 80 100 120 160 200 240
40 40 — 60 80 1(X3 120 160 200 240
50 — 50 — 80 100 120 160 200 240
60 — — 60 80 103 120 160 2tXl 240
80 — — 80 100 120 160 200 240
i) Wane Shall be permissible at its deepest Shall be permissible at its deepest Shall be permissible at its deepest
portion up to a limit of 1/8 of the portion up to a limit of 1/6 of the portion up to a limit of 1/4 of the
width of the surface on which it width of the surface on which it width of the surface on which it
occurs occurs occurs
u) Worm holes Other than those due to powder Other than those due to powder Other than those due to powder post
post beetles are permissible post beetles are permissible beetles are permissible
iii) Slope of grain Shall not be more than 1 in 20 Shall not be more than 1 in 15 Shall not be more than 1 in 12
Widthof Permissible Maximum Size of Permissible Maximum Size of Permissible Maximum Size of
Wide Faces Live Knot on Live Knot on Live Knot on
OfCut Size2
75 10 10 19 19 29 30
100 13 13 25 25 38 39
150 19 19 38 38 57 57
200 22 25 44 50 66 75
250 25 29 50 57 66 87
300 27 38 54 75 81 114
350 29 41 57 81 87 123
400 32 44 63 87 96 132
450 33 47 66 93 99 141
500 35 50 69 100 105 150
550 36 52 72 103 108 156
600 38 53 75 106 114 159
75 12 25 36
100 18 35 54
150 25 50 75
200” 33 65 99
250 40 81 120
300 50 100 150
350 57 115 171
400 66 131 198
450 76 150 225
500 83 165 249
550 90 181 270
600 100 200 300
i) Bending and Inside 1) 18.0 12.0 8.5 For different durations of design load, the permissible
tension along stresses given in Table 1 shall be multiplied by the
grain modification factor Kz given in Table 11.
ii) Shear *) All locations 1.05 0.64 0.49
Horizontal NOTE — The strength properties of timber under load are time-
dependent. ,,
Along grain All locations 15 0.91 0.70 /
iii) Compression Inside 1) 11.7 7.8 4.9 Table 11 Modifications Factor Jfa, for Change
parallel to grain
in Duratiou of Loading
iv) Compression Inside 1) 4.0 2.5 1.1
perpendicular (C/ause 5,4.2)
to grain
Duration of Loading Modiieation Factor K2
V) Modulus of All locations 12.6 9.8 5.6
elasticity and grade (1) (2)
(x 103N/mm’)
Continuous (Normal) “1.0
1) For~or~ng stresses for other lWations of use, that is, outside Two months 1.15
and wet, ge~erally factors of 5/6 and 2/3 are applied. Seven days 1.25
Z)The values of horizontal shear to be used only for beams. In ~1 Wind and earthquake 1.33
other cases shear along grain to be used. Instantaneous or impact 2.00
5.4.2.1 The factor Kz is applicable to modulus of the prebored hole shall not be taken into account for
elasticity when used to design timber columns, this purpose.
otherwise they do not apply thereto.
6.3.2 The net section used in calculating load carrying
5.4.2.2 If there are several duration of loads (in capacity of a member shall be at least net section
addition to the continuous) to be considered, the determined as above by passing a plane or a series of
modification factor shall be based on the shortest connected planes transversely through the members.
duration load in the combination, that is, the one
6.3.3 Notches shall be in no case remove more than
yielding the largest increase in the permissible stresses,
one quarter of the section.
provided the designed section is found adequate for a
combination of other larger duration loads. 6.3.4 In the design of an intermediate or a long column,
gross sectionshall be used in calculating load carrying
[Explanation: In any structural timber design for dead
capacity of the column.
loads, snow loads and wind or earthquake forces,
members may be designed on the basis of total of 6.4 Loads
stresses due to dead, snow and wind loads using
Kz = 1.33, factor for the permissible stress (of Table 1) 6.4.1 The loads shall conform to those given in Part 6
to accommodate the wind load, that is, the shortest of ‘S~ctural Design, Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects’.’
duration and giving the largest increase in the 6.4.2 The worst combination and location of loads
All flexural members having a depth exceeding three 6.5.7.2 For concentrated loads:
times its width or a span exceeding 50 times its width
v = 1OC(Z–X) (x/D)’
or both shall be laterally restrained from twisting or
buckling and the distance between such restraints shall 9Z[2+(x/D)2]
not exceed 50 times its width.
and for uniformly distributed loads,
6.5.7 Shear
a) The maximum horizontal shear, when the load After arriving at the value of V, its value will be
on a beam moves from the support towards substituted in the formula:
the centre of the span, and the load is at a
distance of three to four times the depth of
H==
the beam from the support, shall be calculated Ib
from the following general formula:
6.5.7.3 In determining the vertical reaction V, the
~=~
following deductions in loads maybe made:
Ib
a) Consideration shall be given to the possible
b) For rectangular beams: distribution of load to adjacent parallel beams,
3V if any;
H=—
2 bD b) All uniformly distributed loads within a
distance equal to the depth of the beam from
c) For notched beams, with tension notch at the edge of the~earest support may be
supports (see 6.5.7.3): neglected except in case of beam hanging
3 VD downwards from a particular suppo~, and
H=—
2 bD; c) All concentrated loads in the vicinity of the
(Clause 6.5.8.3.1)
1
75 mm_ 150 mm max
L
min ‘BEARING —
1/48 for beams supported at both ends 6.6.1.2 For intermediate columns, the permissible
with point load at centre, and compressive stress is calculated by using the following
5/384 for beams supported at both formula:
ends with uniformly distributed
load.
4
6.6.2 Built-up Columns
(S/d)2
b) Intermediate columns — where is
2 6.6.3.4 For individual members of spaced columns,
between 8 and Kg; and & 2
S/d ratio shall not exceed 80.
c) Long columns — where ~ is greater 6.6.4 Compression members shall not be notched.
than K,. & 2 When it is necessary to pass services through such a
member, this shall be effected by means of a bored
6.6.2.2 For short columns, the permissible hole provided that the local stress is calculated and
compressive stress shall be calculated as follows: found to be within the permissible stress specified. The
&= m, distance from the edge of the hole to the edge of the
6.6.2.4 For long columns, the permissible compressive ~+ h is not greater than 1.
stress shall be calculated by using the following f. f,
formula: 6.7.2 Structural members subjected both to bending
and axial tension shall be designed to comply with the
0.329 UE
f,= following formula:
2
i) End distance Tension 12 n 7.7.5 Two nails in a horizontal row are better than
Compression 10 n using the same number of nails in a vertical row.
ii) In direction of Tension 10 n
grain Compression 5n 7.8 Special Considerati~n in Nail-Jointed Truss
iii) Edge distance — 5n Construction
iv) Between row of — 5n 7.8.1 The initial upward camber provided at the centre
nails perpendicular
of the lower chord of nail-jointed timber trusses shall
to the grain
be not less than 1/200 of the effective span for timber
NOTES structures using seasoned wood and 1/100 for
1 n is shank diameter of nails. unseasoned or partially seasoned wood.
2 The 5 n distance between rows perpendicular to the grain
may be increased subject to the availability of width of the 7.8.2 The total combined thickness of the gusset or
member keeping edge distance constant. splice plates on either side of the joint in a mono-chord
type construction shall not be less than one and a half
7.5.2 Node Joints times the thickness of the main members subject to a
The requirement for spacing of nails in node joints minimum thickness of 25 mm of individual gusset
shall be as specified in Fig. 3 where the members are plate.
EFFECTIVE END
DISTANCE, 10n min —D I
1 I I I I 1 I I
I I I I I I I I 1 1
1 I
I I I
J
!
I I I I I I I I
IL EFFECTIVE END
DISTANCE, 5n min
I I II I
1 I I I I
1
[
I
I
, I *
I 1 I , I
I
I I I
..
I I I I I I I I
I t
II101
I I I I ,,, I I I,
1 I
I
I
1111
,,, ,
11111
,,, , I
\ 1 /
1 I 1 I I 1 I 1 I I
I I I I I I I I
5rl 5n
EFFECTIVE END
DISTANCE, 10n min 10n min
1
5n mln
6
5n$in
Qoeo ~ eeee
5n+mln
4943430 ~ O@@@
5n+mln
DISTANCE, 5n min
I 1 I I I I I I
I t
1 I 1 1 1
# I I I I
1 I 1
1 1 1 1 I 1 I I I
I I I I I
I I , 1 I
- EFFECTIVEEND
n . SHANKDIAMETEROF NAIL DISTANCE, 5n mln
5n min 5n min
UNLOADED LOADED
EDGE EDGE
~
I : 1
II
II \ t 1
I1 @ ~n
1
II
I
I
II
:
10n
;
:1 :
I
3C
..
. —.”——.. .
t -<
d LOADED
I
I II
I
I I Ion
I I
# I
+“s”
I I 1
i
I I
r
I J LBO~OM
CHORD
4C
*% MAYBE INCREASED TO 10n, IF THE DESIGNED WIDTH OF CHORD MEMBER PERMITS.
OTHERWISE THE END OF THE LOADED WEB MEMBER MAYBE EXKNDED BY 5n min
n = SHANK DIAMETER OF ML
The fabrication of nail-jointed timber construction shall 8.3.1.1 The deflection in the case of nailed laminated
be done in accordance with good practice [6-3A(7)]. timber beams, joists, purlins, battens and other flexural
members supporting brittle materials like gypsum,
8 DESIGN OF NAIL LAMINATED TIMBER ceiling slates, tiles and asbestos sheets shall not exceed
BEAMS 1/480 of the span. The deflection in case of other
Table 14 Number and Size of Planks and Nails for Nailed Laminated Beams
(Clause 8.2.3)
S1 Overall Width of Beam No. of Planks Thickness of Each Plank Type and Size of Nail to be Used
No. mm mm mm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
NOTE — A number of combinations Of the different thickness Ofplanks may be adopted as long as the minimum and maximum
thickness of the planks are adhered to.
25
‘:.:::: ::::
. . . . . . . . .
— — — — —. — — . _
w I
25
— 25 CAMBER
-r
bolts, moisture conditions and the inclination of
01
N,
+ + +
loadings to the grains. In principle bolted joints follow
E
0
04
+ + +
the pattern of rivetted joints in steel structures.
0 0
ON
+ + +
o
m
9.2 Design Considerations
+ += +
o
mt
9.2.1 Bolted timber construction shall be designed in
H---L. 50 75 75
.-l accordance with 6. The concept of critical section, that
6A FOR 3.55 mm AND 4 mm DIAMETER NAILS is, the net section obtained by deducting the projected
area of bolt-holes from the cross-sectional area of
member is very important for the successful design
and economy in timber.
\ +----l + -1- +
1J
E 5
-1- + +
10
cN
, The allowable load for a bolt in a joint consisting of
+ +- +
two members (single shear) shall be taken as one half
- + + +
the allowable loads calculated for a three member joint
1 -1 I \
(double sheai) for the same t’/d3 ratio. The percentage
t of safe working compressive stress of timber on bolted
50 75 75
-1 “ 1 joints for different t’/d3 ratios shall be as given in
Table 15.
6B FOR 5 mm DIAMETER NAILS
Table 15 Percentage of Safe Working
All dimensions in millimetres.
Compressive Stress of Timber for Bolted
FIG. 6 STANDARD LENGTHWISESPACINGIN Joints in Double Shear
NAILED LAMINATED BEAM (Clause 9.2.2)
8.3.3.3 If the depth of the beam is more, then the t’ld3 Ratio Stress Percentage
vertical intermediate spacing of nails may be increased
Parallel to Grain Perpendicular to Grain
proportionately.
A, &
8.3.3.4 If the nails required at a point are more than (1) (2) (3)
th:~t can be accommodated in a row, then these shall
1.0 100 100
he provided lengthwise of the beam within the distance 1.5 100 96
equal to the depth of the beam at standard lengthwise 2.0 100 88
spacing. 2.5 100 80
3.0 100 72
8.3.3.5 For nailed laminated beam minimum depth 3.5 100 66
of 100 mm for 3.55 mm and 4 mm diameter nails, 4.0 96 60
4.5 90 56
and 125 mm for 5 mm diameter nails shall be provided. 5.0 80 52
5.5 72 49
8.4 I%brication 6.0 65 46
6.5 58 43 *
8.4.1 The Fabrication of nailed laminated timber beams 7.0 52 40
shall be done in accordance with good practice 7.5 46 39
[6-3A(8)]. 8.0 40 38
8.5 36 36
9 DESIGN OF BOLTED CONSTRUCTION 9.0 34 34
9.5 32 33
JOINTS 10.0 30 31
10.5 — 31
9.1 General —
11.0 30
11.5 — 30
Bolted joints suit the requirements of prefabrication
12.0 — 28
in small and medium span timber structures for speed
NUT
I
I Ill
1 1 1 1
26 min. ‘--
+ -e e
—
ill Ill
4d3
Ill 111
+ -e e
1 46~
t LOADED
EDGE
2d3min.
t UNLOADED
EDGE
1.5d3min ~ ~ 1 - 1.6d3min
No. and No. and Size Side Central Load End Inter- Load per
Diameter of Bolt used in Member Member Direction Distance mediate Pair
of Ring a Joint w. r.t. Distance of
used in a Grains of Connector
Joint Wood
~~~ ~
No. Size No. Size Thick- Width Thick- Width mm mm kgf
ness new
mm mm mm mm mm mm
(1) (2) (3) (4] (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
<. )
e ---- - ----
fl -h I
rr n
---- ---- I
II J
e t,
d-l t r
a/2
I
tl-a a12
LAP JOINT *
BUTT JOINT
Lap Joint: Bolt in simple tension due to clockwise turning moment on dowel:
Butt Joint: No tilting moment in dowel due to balancing effect [dowels are in shear (no bending, shearing
and tensile stress on bolts)]
Size of dowel for equal strength in both shearing and bearing.
rcd’/4x S=dxt/2xc
where
.,
workshop to the specifications of the designer. This is g) Assembly and pressing the laminations;
also economically important. Once the wood fittings h) Curing the glue lines, as specified; and
are shop tailored and made, the construction process j) Finishing, protection and storage.
in the field is greatly simplified.
11.2 Finger joints are glued joints connecting timber
Theoretical safe loads in design shall be confirmed members end-to-end (Fig. 10). Such joints shall be
through sample tests. produced by cutting profiles (tapered projections) in
NOTE — Some experimental studies have indicated the the form of V-shaped grooves to the ends of timber
following safe loads in kgf for dowels bearing parallel to the planks or scantling to be joined, glueing the interfaces
grain.
and then meeting the two ends together under pressure.
Finger joints provide long lengths of timber, ideal for
upgrading timber by permitting removal of defects,
minimizing warping and reducing wastage by avoiding
short off-cuts.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
SLII BabUl 680 1000 1360 1815 2270 2810 11.2.1 In finger joints the glued surfaces are on the
side grain rather than on the end grain and the glue
Sal Sissoo 545 770 1045 1360 1725 2130
line is stressed in shear rather in tension.
TIP GAP L
1
L = FINGER LENGTH
p = PITCH
.
.6
FIG. 10 TYPICALFINGERJOINTGEOMETRY
11.2.3.1 End joints shall be scattered in adjacent with fibre oriented along a specific direction have
laminations, which shall not be located in very highly been developed and are being adopted for load
stressed outer laminations. bearing applications. Laminated veneer lumber is one
11.2.4 Tip thickness will be as small as practically such product developed as a result of researches in
possible. plantation grown species of wood. Density of
iaminated v&eer lumber ranges from 0.6 to 0.75
12 LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER which is manufactured in accordance with good
12.1 Certain reconstituted lignocellulosic products practice [6-3A(1 2)].
..
12.1.1 Dimensions accordance with established engineering principles and
good practice. A glued laminated beam is a straight
Sizes of laminated veneer lumber composite shall be
member made from a number of laminations assembled
inclusive of margin for dressing and finishing unless
both ways either horizontally or vertically. While
rnanufiactured to order. The margin for dressing and
vertical laminations have limitations in restricting
finishing shall not exceed 3mm in the width and
the cross-section of a beam by width of the plank,
thickness and 12mmin the length.
horizontally laminated section offers wider scope to
12.1.2 Permissible Defects the designer in creating even the curved members.
Simple straight beams and joists are used for many
Jointing gaps — Not more than 3 mm wide, structures from small domestic rafters or ridges to the
provided they are well staggered in light industrial structures.
their spacing and position between
the successive plies. 13.2 Design
Slope of grain — Not exceeding 1 in 10 in the face The design of glue laminated wood elements shall be
layers. in accordance with good engineering practice and shall
Tight knot — Three numbers up to 25 mm take into consideration the species and grade of timber
diameter in one square metre used, presence of defects, location of end joints in
provided they are spaced 300 mm laminations, depth of beams and moisture contents
..
laminations in a structural member shall not differ by stiffness of wood result in structures characterized
more than 3 percent at the time of glueing. Glue shall by high stiffness for even medium spares. Plywood
be of type suitable for the intended service of a can act as web transmitting shear stress in web bearing
structural member. or stressed skin or sandwich construction. The
effective moment of inertia of web beam and stressed
13.4 FabricationfManu facture skin construction depends on modular ratio that is, E
In order to assure a well-bonded and well-finished of wood to E of plywood.
member of true shape and size, all equipments, end- 14.3 Structural plywood is also very efficient as
Jointing,glue spread, assembly, pressing, curing or any cladding material in wood frame construction, such as
other operation in connection with the manufacture of houses. This type of sheathing is capable of resisting
glued structural members shall be in accordance racking due to wind and quack forces. Structural
with the available good practices and as per glue plywood has been widely used as diaphragm
manufacturers’ instructions as applicable. (horizontal) as in roofing and flooring in timber frame
construction. It has been established that 6 mm thick
13.5 Testing
plywood can be used for sheathing and even for web
For examining the quality of glue and its relative and stressed skin construction, 9-12 mm thick plywood
strength wki-vis species of timber in glued laminated is suitable for beams, flooring diaphragms, etc. Phenol
construction, it is necessary to conduct block shear and formaldehyde (PF) and PRF adhesive are suitable for
,
I-SECTION DOUBLE-I BOX
T’FFNER
//=E PLYWOOD
---lx
UPT06-9m 9
Hill
SECTION XX
~spAN upTo 9 m e
DOUBLE TAPERD
HAUNCHED
..
,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FIG. 13 STRESSEDSKIN PANEL CONSTRUCTION(SINGLE SKIN ORDOUBLESKIN)
Trussed rafters require to be supported only at their accepted standard [6-3A( 13)]. Introduction of a
ends so that there is no need to provide load bearing plywood gusset simplifies the jointing and in addition
internal walls, Purlins, etc are dispensed with and in provides rigidity to the joint. Preservation of plywood
comparison with traditional methods of construction and other panel products shall be done in accordance
they use less timber and considerably reduces of site with good practice [6-3A( 14)].
labour, Mass production or reliable units can be carried
out under workshop controls. 16 STRUCTURAL SANDWICHES
Trussed rafter shall be designed to sustain the dead Sandwich constructions are composites of different
and imposed loads specified in Part 6 ‘Structural materials including wood based materials formed by
Design: Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects’ and the bonding two thin facings of high strength material to a
combinations expected to occur. Extra stresses/ light weight core which provides a combination of
deflections during handling, transportation and erection desirable properties that are not attainable with the
shall be taken care of. Structural analysis, use of load- individual constituent materials (Fig. 14). The thin
slip and moment, rotation characteristics of the facings are usually of strong dense material since that
individual joints may be used if feasible. Alternatively are the principal load carrying members of the
the maximum direct force in a member maybe assessed construction. The core must be stiff enough to ensure
to be given by an idealized pin-jointed framework, fully the faces remain at the correct distance apart. The
loaded with maximum dead and imposed load in the sandwiches used as structural elements in building
combination in which they may reasonably be expected construction shall be adequately designed for their
to occur. intended services and shall be fabricated only where
there are adequate facilities for glueing or otherwise
15.3 Timber bonding cores to facings to ensure a strong and durable
The species of timber including plantation grown product. The entire assembly provides a structural
species which can be used for trussed rafter element of high strength and stiffness in proportion to
construction and permissible stresses thereof shall be its mass.
in accordance with Table 1. Moisture contents to be as Non-structural advantages can also be derived by proper
per zonal requirements in accordance with 4.4. selection of facing and core material for example, an
impermeable facings can be used to serve as a moisture
15.4 Plywood
barrier for walls and roof panels and core may also be
Boiling water resistant (BWR) grade preservative selected to provide thermal and/or acoustic insulation,
treated plywood shall be used in accordance with fwe resistance, etc, besides the dimensional stability.
LAMELLA GRID
/WIND BLOCK
MIDDLE LAMELLA1
11111
L
I
H H
38”
w,=
BOLT
LAMELLA
“~ ‘\,
\
‘p. ‘r
LOADREACTIONDIAGRAM ‘
.
longitudinal directions due to skewness
of the building come into play predominantly. In structural nailed
of the lamella arch shall be adequately resisted. Thrust joints, nails are essentially loaded laterally, the design
at lamella joints shall be resisted by the moment of data for which is already available as standard code of
inertia in the continuous lamella and roof sheathening practice. Data on holding power of nailslscrews in
(decking) of lamella roofing. The interaction of arches different species is also useful for common commercial
in two directions adds to the strength and stability purposes. The resistance of mechanical fastenings is a
against horizontal forces. For design calculations function of the specific gravity of wood, direction of
several assumption tested and observed derivations, penetration with respect to the grain direction, depth
long-duration loading factors, seasoning advantages of penetration and the diameter of fastener assuming
and effects of defects are taken into account. that the spacing of fasteners should be adequate to
preclude splitting of wood.
17.2 Lamellas
18.2 Nails
Planking shall be of a grade of timber that is adequate
in strength and stiffness to sustain the assumed loads, Nails are probably the most common and familiar
forces, thrust and bending moments generated in fastener. They are of many types and sizes in
Lamella roofing. Lamella planks shall be seasoned to accordance with the accepted standards [6-3 A(16)].
a moisture content approximating that they will attain In general nails give stronger joints when driven into
in service. Lamella joints shall be proportioned so that the side grain of wood than into the end grain. Nails
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ timber testing and their
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The conversion (second revision)
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time (3) 4970:1973 Key for identification of
of the enforcement of the Code. The standards commercial timbers (first
listed may be used by the Authority as a guide in revision)
conform~nce with the requirements-of the ‘referred
(4) 287:1993 Recommendations for
clauses in the Code. maximum permissible
IS No. Title moisture content of timber
used for different purposes
(1) 707:1976 Glossary of terms applicable
(third revision)
to timber technology and
utilization (second revision) (5) 3629:1986 Specification for structural
timber in building (first
(2) 1708 Methods of testing small
revision)
(l%u-Ls1 to 18) :1986 clear specimens of timber
(6) 401:2001 Code of practice for
(second revision)
preservation of timber
2408: 1963 Methods of static tests of ~ourth revision)
timbers in structural sizes
(7) 2366:1983 Code of practice for nail-
2455:1990 Methods of sampling of jointed timber construction
model trees and logs for ($rst revision)
FOREWORD . . 3
1 SCOPE ... 5
2 TERMINOLOGY ... 5
3 SYMBOLS ... 7
4 MATERIALS . .. 7
5 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES ... 11
6 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ... 11
7 DESIGN AND TECHNIQUES OF JOINTS ... 13
8 STORAGE OF BAMBOO ... 20
---
.
FOREWORD
Bamboo is versatile resource characterized by high strength to weight ratio and ease in working with simple
tools. It has a long and well established tradition as a building material throughout the tropical and sub-tropical
regions. It is used in many forms of construction, particularly, for housing in rural areas. But, enough attention
had not been paid towards research and development in bamboo as had been in the case with other materials of
construction including timber. However, of late bamboo is being given its due importance and realization by
national and international organizations. A need is being felt for design and construction code in bamboo for a
number of social and trade advantages, engineering recognition and improved respectability. Forest Research
Institute, Debra Dun and some other organizations have been engaged in bamboo research to establish its
silviculture, botanical nomenclature, entomological and pathological aspects and utilization base.
Analogous to some constructional timbers, bamboo possesses better strength-to-mass and cost ratio. Resilience
coupled with lightness makes bamboo suitable for housing in disaster-prone areas such as areas prone to earthquake.
It has the capacity to absorb more energy and show larger deflections before collapse and as such is safer under
earth tremors. At present, the application of bamboo as an engineering material is largely based on practical and
engineering experience as the design guidelines are inadequate,
The bamboo culm has a tubular structure consisting essentially of nodes and inter-nodes. In the inter-nodes the
cells are axially oriented while the nodes provide the transverse inter-connection. The disposition of the nodes
and the wall thickness are significant in imparting strength to bamboo against bending and crushing. In a circular
cross-section, bamboo is generally hollow and for structural purposes this form is quite effective and advantageous.
Each of the species of barnboo has widely different characteristics affecting its usefulness as constructional
material. The strength of bamboo culms, their straightness, lightness combined with hardness, rtige and size of
hollowness make them potentially suitable for a variety of applications both structural and non-structural. With
good physical and mechanical properties, low shrinkage and good average density, bamboo is well suited to
replace wood in several applications, especially in slats and panel form.
In the earlier version of this Code, timber was covered under Section 3 of Part 6 under the title Wood, which did
not cover Bamboo. In this revision, this Section has been enlarged and titled as Section 3 Timber and Bamboo.
This has been sub-divided into sub-section 3A Timber and sub-section 3B Bamboo. Bamboo has found a place
in this draft revision of the Code for the first time. This subsection pertains to bamboo and may be read in
conjunction with sub-section 3A Timber.
The information contained in this Section is largely based on the works carried out at Forest Research Institute,
Debra Dun, Indian Plywood Industries Research and Training Institute, Bangalore, INBAR documents and the
following Indian Standards:
IS No. Title
6874:1973 Method of test for round bamboo
8242:1976 Method of test for split bamboo
9096:1979 Code of practice for preservation of bamboo for structural purposes
13958:1994 Specification for bamboo mat board for general purposes
.
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
2.0 For the purpose of this Section, the following 2.2.4 Bundle-Column — A column consisting of three
definitions shall apply. or more number of cuhu bound as integrated unit with
wire or strap type of fastenings.
2.1 Anatomical Purpose Definitions
2.2.5 Centre Internode — A test specimen having its
2.).1 Bamboo — Tall perennial grasses found in centre between two nodes.
tropical and sub-tropical regions. They belong to the
2.2.6 Characteristic Load— The value of loads which
family Poaceae and sub-family Bambusoidae.
has a 95 percent probability of not exceeding during
2.1.2 Bamboo Culm — A single shoot of bamboo the life of the structure.
usually hollow except at nodes which are often swollen.
2.2.7 Characteristic Strength — The strength of the
2.1.3 Bamboo Clump — A cluster of bamboo culms material below which not more than 5 percent of the
emanating from two or more rhizomer in the same test results are expected to fall.
place.
2.2.8 Cleavability — The ease with which bamboo
2.1.4 Cellulose — A carbohydrate, forming the can be split along the longitudinal axis. The action of
fundamental material of all plants and a main source splitting is known as cleavage.
of the mechanical properties of biological materials.
2.2.9 Column — A structural member which supports
2.1.5 Cell — A fundamental structural unit of plant axial load primarily by inducing compressive stress
and animal life, consisting of cytoplasm and usually along the fibres.
enclosing a central nucleus and being surrounded by a
2.2.10 Common Rafter — A roof member which
membrane (animal) or a rigid cell wall (plant).
supports roof battens and roof coverings, such as
2.1.6 Cross Wall — A wall at the node closing the boarding and sheeting.
whole inside circumference and completely separating
2.2.11 Curvature — The deviation from the
the hollow cavity below from that above.
straightness of the culm.
2.1.7 Hemi Cellulose — The polysaccharides
2.2.12 Delamination — Separation of mats through
consisting of only 150 to 200 sugar molecules, also
failure of glue.
much less than the 10000 of cellulose.
2.2.13 End Distance — The distance measured
2.1.8 Lignin — A polymer of phenyl propane units,
parallel to the fibres of the bamboo from the centre of
in its simple form (CGH~CHqCHzCH~).
the fastener to the closest end of the member.
2.1.9 Sliver — Thin strips of bamboo processed from
2.2.14 Flatten Bamboo — Bamboo consisting of culms
bamboo culm.
that have been cut and unfolded till it is flat. The culm
2.1.10 Tissue — Group of cells, which in higher plants thus is finally spread open, the diaphragms (cross walls)
consist of(a) Parenchyma — a soft cell of higher plants at nodes removed and pressed flat.
2.2.15 Full Culm — The naturally available circular 2.2.33 Roof Battens — A roof member directly
sectionlshape. supporting tiles, corrugated sheets, slates or other
roofing materials.
2.2.16 Fundamental or Ultimate Stress — The stress
which is determined on a specified typelsize of culms 2.2.34 Roof Skeleton — The skelton consisting of
..
of bamboo, in accordance with stmdard practice and bamboo truss or rafter over which solid bamboo purlins
does not take into account the effects of naturally are laid and lashed to the rafter or top chord of a truss
occurring characteristics and other factors. by means of galvanized iron wire, cane, grass, bamboo
leaves, etc.
2.2.17 Inner Diameter — Diameter of internal cavity
of a hollow piece of bamboo. 2.2.35 Slenderness Ratio — The ratio of the length of
member to the radius of gyration is known as
2.2.18 Inside Location — Position in buildings in
slenderness ratio of member. (The length of the
which bamboo remains continuously dry or protected
member is the equivalent length due to end conditions).
from weather,
2.2.36 Splits — The pieces made from quarters by
2.2.19 Joint — A connection between two or more
dividing the quarters radially and cutting
bamboo structural elements.
longitudinally.
2.2.20 Joist — A beam directly supporting floor,
2.2.37 Taper — The ratio of difference between
ceiling or roof of a structure.
2.2.25 Mortise and Tenon — A joint in which the 2.3 Definitions Relating to Defects
reduced end (tenon) of one member fits into the
corresponding slot (mortise) of the other. 2.3.1 Bamboo Bore/GHOON Hole — The defect
caused by bamboo GHOON beetle (Dinoderus spp.
2.2.26 Net Section — Section obtained by deducting from Bost~chdae), which attacks felled culms,
the gross cross-section (A), the projected areas of all
materials removed by boring, grooving or other means. 2.3.2 Crookedness — A localized deviation from the
straightness in a piece of bamboo.
2.2.27 Node — The place in a bamboo culm where
branches sprout and a diaphragm is inside the culm 2.3.3 Discoloration — A change from the normal
and the walls on both sides of node are thicker. colour of the bamboo which does not impair the
strength of bamboo or bamboo composite products.
2.2.28 Outer Diameter — Diameter of a cross-section
of a piece of bamboo measured from two opposite 2.4 Definitions Relating to Drying Degrades
points on the outer surface.
2.4.1 Collapse — The defect occurring on account of
2.2.29 Outside Location — Position in building in excessive shrinkage, particularly in thick walled
which bamboos are occasionally subjected to wetting immature bamboo. When the bamboo wall shrinks, the
and drying as in case of open sheds and outdoor outer layers containing a larger concentration of strong
exposed structures, fibro-vascular bundles set the weaker interior portion
embedded in parenchyma in tension, causing the latter
2.2.30 Permissible Stress — Stress obtained after
to develop cracks. The interior crack develops into a
applying factor of safety to the ultimate or basic stress.
wide split resulting in a depression on the outer surface.
2.2,31 Principal Rafter — A roof member which This defect also reduces the structural strength of round
supports purlins. bamboo.
2.2.32 Purlins — A roof member directly supporting 2.4.2 End Splitting — A split at the end of a bamboo.
roof covering or common rafter and roof battens. This is not so common a defect as drying occurs both
S1 Species Properties
No. -
-
In Green Condition In Air Dry Conditions
A A
/ - #- -
Density Modulus of Modulus of Maximum Density Modulus of Modulus
NOTES
1 As the strength of split bamboo is more than that of round bamboo, the results of tests on romd barnbo CaIIbe safely used for designing
withspit bamboo.
2 The values of stress in N/mm* have been obtained by converting the values in kgf/cm2 by dividing the same by 10.
,. .. .1-
.
!
GROUP A
i) Barnbusa glancescens (syn. B. nana) 20.7 3.28 15.4
ii) Dendrocalamus strictus 18.4 2.66 10.3
iii) Oxytenanthera abyss inicia 20.9 3.31 13.3
GROUP B
iv) Bambusa balcooa 16.4 1.62 13.3
v) B. pallida 13.8 2.87 15.4
vi) B. nutans 13.2 1.47 13.0
vii) B. tulda 12.8 1.77 11.6
viii) B. auriculata 16.3 3.34 10.5
ix) B. burmanica 14.9 2.45 11.4
NOTE — The values of stress in N/mm* have been obtained by converting the values in kgf/cm2 by dividing the same by 10.
bamboo increases exponentially and bamboo has an 4.3.2 Accelerated air seasoning method gives good
intersection point (fibre saturation point) at around 25 results. In this method, the nodal diaphragm (septa)
percent moisture content depending upon the species. are punctured to enable thorough passage of hot air
A typical moisture-strength relationship is given at from one end of the resulting bamboo tube to the other
Fig. 1. The moisture content of bamboo shall be end.
determined in accordance with good practice [6-3B(1)].
NOTE — For details, reference may be made to relevant
Matured culms shall be seasoned to about 20 percent publicationsof ForestResearchInstitute,Debra Dun.
moisture content before use.
4.4 Grading of Structural Bamboo
4.3.1 Air seasoning of split or half-round bamboo does
not pose much problem but care has to be taken to 4.4.1 Grading is sorting out bamboo on the basis of
prevent fungal discoloration and decay. However, characteristics important for structural utilization as
rapid drying in open sun can control decay due to under:
fungal and insect attack. Seasoning in round form a) Diameter and length of culm,
presents considerable problem for several of Indian
b) Taper of culm,
species of bamboo as regards mechanical degrade due
c) Straightness of culm,
to drying defects.
d) Inter nodal length,
NOTE — A general observation has been that immature bamboo
gets invariably deformed in cross-section during seasoning and
e) Wall thickness,
thick walled immature bamboo generally collapses. Thick f) Density and strength, and
mature bamboo tends to crack on the surface, with the cracks
originating at the nodes and at the decayed points. Moderately g) Durability and seasoning.
thick immature and thin and moderately thick mature bamboos
One of the above characteristics or sometimes
season with much less degrade. Bamboo having poor initial
condition on account of decay, borer holes, etc generally suffers combination of 2 or 3 characteristics form the basis of
more drying degrades. grading. The culms shall be segregated species-wise.
..
c
x 103
‘1”54
I“4C ●
f
126
I
‘E 1.12 ●
u
\
Xm 0.98
Ln
Ln
UJ
~ o-84 ✎
m ●
●4
~ 0“’7( ● *
m ! ● ,8* ●
3 ●
●
. *
~ 0.5( ,* ●☛ ● ☛
x ●
●
●
3 ●
●
● 0
● *
● ** ● *
> 0“4 .
● 8
●
● 9*
●
●
z ●
a ●
●
= 0“2 .
●
0.14
s i 1 a I 1
c Q 1 1 1 1
0 10 20 30 40 50 Go Yo eo go 100 110
FIG, 1 MOISTURESTRENGTHRELATIONSHIPBAMBUSANUTANS(BAMBOO)
4.LL2 Diameter and Length 4.4.2.2 The minimum length of culms shall be
preferably 6 m for facilitating close fittings at joints, etc.
4.4.2.1 Gradation according to the mean outer
diameter 4.4.3 Taper
For structural Group Aand Group B species, culms The taper shall not be more than 5.8 mm per metre
shallbe segregatedin steps of 10 mmofmean outer length (or 0.58 percent) of bamboo in any grade of
diameter as follows: bamboo.
4.4.6.3 Broken, damaged and discolored bamboo 5.1.1 The safety factor for deriving safe working
shall be rejected. stresses of bamboo shall be as unde~
4.4.6.4 Matured bamboo of at least 4 years of age shall Extreme fibre stress in beams –4
be used. Modulus of elasticity - 4.5
Maximum compressive stress parallel - 3.5
4.5 Durability and Treatability to grairdfibres
4.5.1 Durability 5.1.2 The coefficient of variation (in percent), which
The natural durability of bamboo is low and varies has been arrived based on data of test-results of at least
between 12 months and 36 months depending on the 15 consignments of bamboo in green conditions, shall
species and climatic conditions. In tropical countries be as under:
6.4.2 The worst combination and location of loads 6.6.4 The moment of inertia, Zshall be determined as
shall be considered for design. Wind and seismic forces follows:
shall not be considered to act simultaneously. a) The outside diameter and the wall thickness
shrdl be measured at both ends, correct up to
6.5 Structural Forms
1 mm for diameter of culm and 0.1 mm for
6.5.1 Main structural components in bamboo may the wall thickness. (For each cross-section the
include roof and floor diaphragms, shear walls, wall diameter shall be taken twice, in direction
panellings, beams, piles, columns, etc. Both from the perpendicular to each other and so the wall
point of view of capacity and deformation, trusses and thickness shall be taken as four times, in the
framed skeltons are much better applications of same places as the diameter has been taken
bamboo. twice.)
6.5.2 Schematization of Bamboo as a Structural b) With these values the mean diameter and the
Material mean thickness for the middle of the beam
shall be calculated and moment of inertia
This shall be based on the principles of engineering determined.
mechanics involving the following assumptions and
practices: 6.6.4.1 The maximum bending stress shall be
calculated and compared with the allowable stress.
a) The elastic behaviour of bamboo, till failure;
(plastic behaviour being considered 6.6.4.2 The deflection shall be calculated, and
insignificant); compared with the allowable deflection. The initial
curvature shall be considered in the calculation of the
b) Bamboo culms are analysed on mean wall
deflection.
thickness basis as hollow tube structure (not
perfectly straight) member on mean diameter 6.6.4.3 The shear stress in the neutral layer at the small
basis: end shall be checked, if the length of the beam is less
/-GUSSET (TYPICAL)
FIG. 2 SOMETYPICALCONFIGURATIONS
FORSMALLANDLARGETRUSSES
INBAMBOO
..
7.2 Bamboo Joints similar diameter and cut longitudinally to half depth
over at least one internode length and fastened as per
Efficient jointing is basic to the structural adequacy of
full lap joint (see Fig. 3).
a framed construction, may it be of any cellulosic
material. Round, tubular form of bamboo requires an 7.2.1.1.2 Butt joints
approach different to that used for sawn timber.
Culms of similar diameter are butted end to end, inter-
Susceptibility to crushing at the open ends, splitting
connected by means of side plates made of quarter-
tendency, variation in diameter, wall thickness and
round culm of slightly large diameter bamboo, for two
straightness are some of the associated issues which
or more internode lengths. Assembly shall be fixed
have to be taken care of while designing and detailing
and tied preferably with dowel pins. This joint transfers
the connections with bamboo.
both compressive and tensile forces equrdly well (see
7.2.1 Traditional Practices Fig. 4).
Such joining methods revolve around lashing or tying 7.2.1.1.3 Sleeves and inserts
by rope or string with or without pegs or dowels. Such
Short length of bamboo of appropriate diameter may
joints lack stiffness and have low efficiency.
be used either externally or internally to join two culms
7.2.1.1 Lengthening joints (end jointing) together (see Fig. 5).
b I i
II
i i
I
I u II u II I
3A FULL - LAPPED SPLICED JOINT
(OVER - LAPPED ATLEAST ONE lNTERNOtIE) HARD&&D\%Wfi
7/
n n
Ill 181 Ill Ill
Ill Ill Ill Ill
I
I Ill
Ill
u
Ill
Ill
Ill
Ill
u
Ill
Ill
n
I ,
II
I
II
II
I
FOR DOWELS
OR PINS
I
I
—l——
!
I
I
) ._J— —
LENGTHENING JOINT
L-=LD-l
FIG. 6 SCARF JOINT
..
.
7.2.1.2 Bearing joints 7.2.1.2.2 Tenon joint
For members which either bear against the other or It is formed by cutting a projection (tenon) in walls of
cross each other and transfer the loads at an angle other one piece of bamboo and filling it into corresponding
than parallel to the axis, bearing joints are formed. holes (mortise) in another and keyed. It is a neat and
versatile joint for maximum strength and resistance to
7.2.1.2.1 Butt joints
separation (see Fig. 8).
The simplest form consists of a horizontal member
7.2.1.2.3 Cross over joint
supported directly on top of a vertical member. The
top of the post may be cut to form a saddle to ensure It is formed when two or more members cross at right
proper seating of beam for good load transfer. The angles and its function is to locate the members and
saddle should be close to a node to reduce risk of to provide lateral stability. In case of the joint
splitting (see Fig. 7). connecting floor beam to post, it maybe load bearing
HORIZONTAL MEMBER
D o
VERTICAL
MEMBER
%IDE PLATE
7A SADDLE (BUIT) JOINT
(SADDLE TO BE CLOSE TO THE
7B VARIATIONS ON SADDLE JOINT
NODE )
FIG. 8 TENONJOINT
(see Fig. 9). Such joints are also used to transmit angle Alternatively steel bands clamps with integral
thrust. bolt/eye may be fitted around bamboo
sections for jointing.
7.2.1.3 Angled joints
7.2.3 Fixing Methods and Fastening Devices
When two or more members meet or cross other than
at right angles, angled joints are formed. For butt joints, In case of butt joints the tie maybe passed through a
the ends of the members may be shaped to fit in as pre-drilled hole or around hardwood or bamboo pegs
saddle joints. Tenons would help in strengthening such or dowels inserted into prefomed holes to act as horns.
joints (see Fig. 10). Pegs are driven from one side, usually at an angle to
increase strength and dowels pass right through the
7.2.2 Modern Practices (see Fig. 11)
member, usually at right angles. ,
Following are some of the modern practices for
7.2.3.1 Normally 1.60 mm diameter galvanized iron
bamboo jointing:
wire may be used for tight lashing.
a) Plywood or solid timber gusset plates maybe
7.2.3.2 Wire bound joints
used at joint assemblies of web and chord
connection in a truss and fixed with bamboo Usually galvanized iron 2.00 mm diameter galvanized
pins or bolts. Hollow cavities of bamboo need iron wire is tightened around the joints by binding the
to be stuffed with wooden plugs. respective pieces together. At least two holes are drilled
b) Use of wooden inserts to reinforce the ends in each piece and wire is passed through them for good
of the bamboo before forming the joints. results.
w
On 1
-. DOWEL
6. II
-- \\ II
-- u
2+
.-
W \.FTERx I
PURLIN
I
.-.
(
RAFTER
19. Oxytenanthera abyssinicia Native of tropical AfricW cultivated at I?RI, Debra Dun.
NOTES
1 The following abbreviations have been used in the above table:
Asm — Assam
Ben — Bengali
Guj — Gujarati
Hin — Hindi
Kan — Kannada
Mab — Maharashtra
Manip — Marripur
MP — Madhya Pradesh
Nep — Nepali
Saris — Sanskrit
2 The above Vdbledoes not provide an exhaustive list. It only attempts to entist some of the information readily available in regard to
species of bamboo from India and some of the neighbounng countries, and some connected information.
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’
(1) 6874:1973 Method of test for round bamboo
in the fulfillment of the requirements of this Code. The
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time (2) 9096:1979 Code of practice for preservation
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may of bamboo for structural purposes
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance (3) 6874:1973 Method of test for round bamboo
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
8242:1976 Method of test for split bamboo
Code.
STANDARDS
DESIGN
4 Masonry
PART 6 STRUCTURAL
OF INDIAN
BUILDING
Section
BUREAU
NATIONAL
CONTENTS
FOREWORD ... 3
1 SCOPE . .. 5
2 TERMINOLOGY ... 5
3 MATERIALS ... 7
4 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ... 9
5 STRUCTURAL DESIGN ... 18
6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS . .. 22
7 SPECIAL CONSIDERATION IN EARTHQUAKE ZONES . .. 24
8 GUIDELINES FOR IMPROVING EARTHQUAKE RESISTANCE OF ... 33
LOW STRENGTH MASONRY BUILDINGS
9 REINFORCED BRICK AND REINFORCED BRICK CONCRETE FLOORS ... 38
AND ROOFS
LIST OF STANDARDS . .. 42
FOREWORD
This Section primarily covers the structural design of unreinforced masonry elements in buildings. However,
provisions on reinforced brick and reinforced brick concrete floors and roofs have also been included.
This Section was first published in 1970 and revised in 1983. Subsequently the first revision of this Section was
modified in 1987 through Amendment No. 2 to bring this Section in line with the latest revised masonry Code. In
this amendment, certain provisions were updated following the revision of IS 1905 ‘Code of practice for structural
use of unreinforced masonry’ on which the earlier version was based. In the amendment, requirements of masonry
element for stability were modified; in the design of free standing wall, provisions were made for taking advantage
of the tensile resistance in masonry under certain conditions; provision regarding effective height of masonry
wall between openings was modified; method of working out effective height of wall with a membrane type
As a result of experience gained in the implementation of this Section and feedback received, as well as in view
of revision of IS 4326 ‘Code of practice for earthquake resistant design and construction of buildings’ and
formulation of some new standards in this field, a need to revise thk Section has been felt. This revision has,
therefore, been prepared to take care of these aspects. The significant changes incorporated in this revision
include the following:
a) The provision of special considerations in earthquake zones have been aligned in line with IS 4326:1993.
b) Anew clause covering guidelines for improving earthquake resistance of low strength masonry buildings
has been added.
c) Reference to design of reinforced brick and reinforced brick concrete floors and roofs has been included.
d) Reference to all the concerned Indian Standards have been updated.
Structural design requirements of this Section are based on IS 1905:1987 ‘Code of practice for structural use of
unreinforced masony (third revision)’ and IS 4326: 1993 ‘Code of practice for earthquake resistant design and
construction of buildings (second revision)’.
A reference to SP 20:1991 ‘Handbook on masonry design and construction (first revision)’ maybe useful.
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-refereed to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
2.1 For the purpose of this Section, the following 2.1.8 Effective Thickness — The thickness of a wall .
definitions shall apply. or column to be considered for calculating slenderness
ratio.
2.1.1 Bed Block — A block bedded on a wall, column
or pier to disperse a concentrated load on a masonry 2.1.9 Hollow Unit — A masonry unit of which net
element. cross-sectional area in any plane parallel to the bearing
surface is less than 75 percent of its gross cross-
2.1.2 Bond — Arrangement of masonry units in sectional area measured in the same plane.
successive courses to tie the masonry together both
longitudinally and transversely; the arrangement is 2.1.10 Grout — Mortar of pourable consistency.
usually worked out to ensure that no vertical joint of 2.1.11 Joint — A junction of masonry units.
one course is exactly over the one in the next course
above or below it, and there is maximum possible a) Bed joint — A horizontal mortar joint upon
amount of lap. which masonry units are laid.
b) Cross joint — A vertical joint, normal to the
2.1.3 Column, Pier and Buttress
face of the wall.
a) Column — An isolated vertical load bearing c) Wall joint — A vertical joint parallel to the
member, width of which does not exceed four face of the wall.
times the thickness.
2.1.12 Leaf — Inner or outer section of a cavity wall.
b) Pier — A thickened section forming integral
part of a wall placed at intervals along the 2.1.13 Lateral Support — A support which enables a
wall, to increase the stiffness of the wall or to masonry element to resist Iateral load and/or restrains
carry a vertical concentrated load. Thickness lateral deflection of a masonry element at the point of
of a pier is the overall thickness including the support.
thickness of the wall or, when bonded into a 2.1.14 Load Bearing Wall ~ A wrdl designed to carry
leaf of a cavity wall, the thickness obtained an imposed vertical load in addition to its own weight,
by treating that leaf as an independent wall together with any lateral load.
(see Fig. 1).
2.1.15 Masonry — An assemblage of masonry units
c) Buttress — A pier of masonry built as an
properly bonded together with mortar.
integral part of wall and projecting from either
or both surfaces, decreasing in cross-sectional 2.1.16 Masonry Unit — Individual units which are
area from base to top. bonded together with the help of mortar to form a
masonry element such as wall, column, pier, buttress,
2.1.4 Cross-Sectional Area of Masonry Unit — Net
etc.
cross-sectional area of a masonry unit shall be taken
as the gross cross-sectional area minus the area of 2.1.17 Partition Wall — An interior non-load bearing
cellular space. Gross cross-sectional area of cored units wall, one storey or part storey in height.
RCC COLUMN
CURTAIN
WALL
i-i
~
FIG. 2 MASONRYCURTAINWALL
2.1.18 Panel Wall — An exterior non-load bearing each leaf being ,lxdt of mason@ units and
wall in framed construction, wholly supported at each separated by a cavity and tied together with
storey but subjected to lateral loads. metal ties or bonding units to ensure that the
2.1.19 Shear Wall — A wall designed to carry two leaves act as one structural unit, the space
horizontal forces acting in its plane with or without between the leaves being either left as
vertical imposed loads. continuous cavity or filled with a non-load
bearing insulating and water-proofing
2.1.20 Slenderness Ratio — Ratio of effective height
material.
or effective length to effective thickness of a masonry
b) Faced wall — A wall in which facing and
element.
backing of two different materials are bonded
2.1.21 Types of Walls together to ensure common action under load
a) Cavity wall — A wall comprising two leaves, (see Fig. 3).
1 I 1 1
1=1 I
I ‘CONCRETE BACKING
\ \
L STONE FACING
‘EIRiCK BACKING ‘STONE FACING
FIG. 3 TYPICALFACEDWALL
NOTE — To ensure monolithicaction in faced walls, 3.2.1 Masonry units may be of the following types:
shearstrengthbetweenthe facing and the backingshall
be provided by toothing, bonding or other means. a) Common burnt clay building bricks,
c) Veneered wall — A wall in which the facing b) Burnt clay fly asp building bricks,
is attached to the backing but not so bonded
c) Pulverized fuel ash lime bricks,
as to result in a common action under load.
d) Stones (in regular sized units),
3 MATERIALS e) Sand-lime bricks,
3.1 General f) Concrete blocks (solid and hollow),
The materials used in masonry construction shall be g) Lime based blocks,
in accordance with Part 5 ‘Building Materials’. h) Burnt clay hollow blocks,
3.2 Masonry Units j) Gypsum partition blocks,
Masonry units used in construction shall conform to k) Autoclave cellular concrete blocks, and
accepted standards [6-4(1)]. m) Concrete stone masonry blocks.
3(a) Ml 1 0 o 5 5.0
3(b) 1 lCor B 0 0 6 3.0
3 (c) 0 o 1 (LP-40) 0 1?’42 3.0
4(a) M2 1 0 0 o 6 3.0
4(b) 1 2B 0 0 9 2.0
4(c) 0 1A 0 0 2 2.0
4(d) 0 lB 0 1 1 2.0
4!e ) 0 lCor B 0 2 0 2.0
4(f) 0 o 1 (LP-40) 0 134 2.0 .
*
s(a) M3 1 0 0 o 7 1.5
5(h) 1 3B 0 0 12 1.5
5(C) 0 1A 0 0 3 1.5
5(d) 0 lB 0 2 1 1.5
5(C) 0 lCor B 0 3 0 1.5
5(f-) 0 o 1 (LP-40) 0 2 1.5
6(a) L1 1 0 0 o 8 0.7
6(b) 0 lB 0 1 2 0.7
6(c) 0 lCor B 0 2 1 0.7
6(d) 0 o 1 (LP-40) 0 2% 0.7
6(e) 0 0 1 (LP-20) 0 1Y2 0.7
7(U) L2 o lB 0 o 3 0.5
7(b) 0 lCor B 0 1 2 0.5
7(C) 0 o 1 (LP-7) 0 1% 0.5
NOTES
1 Sand for making mortar should be well graded. In case sand is not well graded, its proportion shall be reduced in order to achieve
the minimum specified strength.
2 For mixes in S1 No. 1 and 2, use of lime is not essential from consideration of strength as it does not result in increase in strength.
However, its use is highly recommended since it improves workability.
3 For mixes in S1 No. 3(a), 4(a), 5(a) and 6(a), either lime C or B to the extent of% part of cement (by volume) or some plasticizer
$hou ld be added for improving workability. t
4 For mixes in S1 No. 4(b) and 5(b), lime and sand should first be ground in mortar mill and then cement added to coarse stuff.
5 It is essential that mixes in S1 No. 4(c), 4(d), 4(e), 5(d), 5(e), 6(b), 6(c), 7(a) and 7(b) are prepared by grinding in a mortar mill.
6 Mix in S1 No. 2(b) has been classified to be of same grade as that of S1 No. 2(a), mixes in S1 No. 3(b) and 3(c) same as that in
S1 No. 3(a), mixes in S1 No. 4(b) to 4(f) same as that in S1 No. 4(a), even though their compressive strength is less. This is from
consideration of strength of masonry using different mix proportions.
7 A, B and C denote eminently hydraulic lime, semi-hydraulic lime and fat lime respectively, as specified in appropriate standards
listed in Part 5 ‘Building Materials’.
..
4 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS a) In case of a wall, where slenderness ratio is
based on effective height, any of the following
4.1 General
constructions are provided:
Masonry structures gain stability from the support 1) RCC floor/roof slab (or beams and slab)
offered by cross walls, floors, roof and other elements, irrespective of the direction of span, bears
such as, piers and buttresses. Load bearing walls are on the supported wall as well as cross
structurally more efficient when the load is uniformly walls, to the extent of at least 90 mm;
distributed and the structure is so planned that 2) RCC floor/roof slab not bearing on the
eccentricity of loading on the members is as small as supported wall or cross wall is anchored
possible. Avoidance of eccentric loading by providing to it with non-corrodible metal ties of
adequate bearing of floor/roof on the walls providing 600 mm length and of section not less
adequate stiffness in slabs and avoiding fixity at the than 6 mm x 30 mm, and at intervals not
supports, etc, is especially important in load bearing exceeding 2 m, as shown in Fig. 4; and
walls in multi-storey structures. These matters should
receive careful consideration during the planning stage A
50 mm
of masonry structures.
. ,. .... , . , . - - .’:... ~ ...<........
4.2 Lateral Supports and Stability
.. .
METAL ANCHO
LONG, FIXED
(i) (ii)
6 A TIMBER JOISTS AT RIGHT ANGLES TO WALL
M
FI
(i) (ii)
‘EFFECTIVE OVERHANGING
WIDTH OF FLANGE, BOTH SIDES
i) Lateral as well as rotational restraint (that is, full restraint) at top and bottom. For example, when the floor/roof 0.75 H
spans on the W~lS so that reaction to load of floorlroof is provided hy the walls, or when an RCC fl~rlmof
has bearing on the wall (minimum 9 cm), irrespective of the direction of the span foundation footings of a wall
give lateral as well as rotational restraint
ii) Lateral as well as rotational restraint (that is, full restraint) at one end and ordy lateral restraint (that is, partial 0.85 H
restraint) at the other. For example, RCC floor/roof at one end spannrng or adequately bearing on the wall and
timber floorhoof not spanning on watl, but adequately anchored to it, on the other end
iii) Lateral restraint, without rotational restraint (that is, partial restraint) on both endsFor example, timber floorhoof, 1.00H
not spanning on the wall but adequately anchored to it on both ends of tie wall, that is, top and bottom
iv) Lateral restraint as well as rotational restraint (that is, full restraint) at bottom but have no restraint at the top. 1.50H
For example, parapet walls with RCC roof having adequate bearing on the lower wall, or a compound wall
with proper foundation on the soil.
NOTES
1 His the height of wall between centres of support in case of RCC slabs and timber floors. In case of footings or foundation block,
height (H) is measured from top of footing or foundation block. In case of roof truss, height (H) is measured up to bottom of the tie
5 When thickness of a wall bonded to a pier is at least two-thirds of the thickness of the pier measured in the same direction,the wall
and pier may be deemed to act as one stmctural element.
x
x -J — ‘----+--x
I f
x x
THE BEAM
\ ONLY x x
L STIFFENING WAL.L
12 B 12C
Roof Construction Effective Height About Axis Effective Height About Axis
Fig. 12B Fig. 12C
With precast concrete units X–X=l.0H2 X–X=l.5HZ
of in-situ concrete floor or Y– Y= l.OH1 Y–Y=l.OH1
roof Y–Y= 1.5H1
(No ties)
..
A
NOTES 0.5 H and it is equal to 2 H when height
1 A roof truss or beam supported on a column meeting the of any opening exceeds 0.5 H, and
requirements of 4.2.2.1 is deemed to provide lateral support to
the column only in the direction of the bearnhruss. 2) Effective height for the direction parallel
2 When floor or roof consisting of RCC beams and slabs is to the plane of the wall equals 2 H.
supported on columns, tbe columns would be deemed to be
laterally supported in both directions. 4.4 Effective Length
4.3.3 Openings in Walls Effective length of a wall shall be as given in Table 5.
When openings occur in a wall such that masonry
4.5 Effective Thickness
between the openings is by definition a column,
effective height of masonry between the openings shall Effective thickness to be used for calculating
be reckoned as follows: slenderness ratio of a wall or column shall be obtained
a) When wall has full restraint at the top: as in 4.5.1 to 4.5.5.
1) Effective height for the direction 4.5.1 For solid walls, faced walls or columns, effective
perpendicular to plane of wall equals thickness shall be the actual thickness.
0.75 H plus 0.25 HI, where H is the
distance between supports and H, is the 4.5.2 For solid walls adequately bonded into piers,
height of the taller opening; and buttresses, effective thickness for determining
i) Where a wait is continuous and is supported by cross wall and there is no opening within a distance of H/8 0.8 L
from the face of cross watl (see Fig. 13)
or
where a wait is continuous and is supported by piershrttresses conforming to LL2.12@)
ii) where a wall is suppotted by a cross watt at one end and continuous with cross watl at other end 0.9 L
or
Where a wafl is supported by a pierhrttress at one end and continuous with pierhtttress at other end
conforming to 4.2.l.3(b)
iii) Where a watt is supported at each end by cross wall 1.OL
or
Where a wall is supported at each end by a pierhrttress conforming to 4.2.l.2(b)
iv) Where a waif is ftee at one end and contiguous with a pierhrttress at the other end ;. 1.5L
or
where a wait is free at one end and continuous with a piedhtress at the other end conforming
to 4.2.l.2(tr)
v) Where a watl is free at one end and supported at the other end by a cross watl 2.0 L
or
Where a watl is free at one end and supported at the other end by a pierhrttress conforming to 4.2.12@)
where
L = Length of wall tlom or between cenfres of cross wafl, piers or buttress and
H = Actuaf height of wall between centtes of adequate taterat support.
NOTE — In case there is an opening tafler than 0.5 H in a wall, ends of the wall at the opening shatl be considered as free. Cross
wafls shrdl conform to 4.2.2.l(d).
1=0.9L
13B CASE2
x 2 H16, y 2 H16
/= L 13C CASE3
L
t-%
/=l,5&i
13F CASE6
l-%
I I
13G CASE7
S1 Mortar Basic Compressive Stresses in N/mm* Corresponding to Masonry Units of which Height to Width
No. Type Ratio does not Exceed 0.75 and Crushing Strength, in N/mm2, is not Less than
(Ref Table 1) -
-~ -
3.5 5.0 7.5 10 12.5 15 17.5 20 25 30 35 40
(}) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13) (14)
i) HI 0.35 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.16 1.31 1.45 1.59 1.91 2.21 2.5 3.05
ii) H2 0.35 0.50 0.74 0.96 1.09 1.19 1.30 1.41 1.62 1.85 2.1 2.5
iii) Ml 0.35 0.50 0.74 0.96 1.06 1.13 1.20 1.27 1.47 1.69 1.9 2.2
iv) M2 0.35 0.44 0.59 0.81 0.94 1.03 1.10 1.17 1.34 1.51 1.65 1.9
v) M3 0.25 0.41 0.56 0.75 0.87 0.95 1.02 1.10 1.25 1.41 1.55 1.78
vi) L1 0.25 0.36 0.53 0.67 0.76 0.83 0.90 0.97 1.11 1.26 1.4 1.06
vii) L2 0.25 0.31 0.42 0.53 0.58 0.61 0.65 0.69 0.73 0.78 0.85 0.95
NOTES
1 The table is valid for slenderness ratio up to 6 and loading with zero eccentricity.
2 The values given for basic compressive stress are applicable only when the masonry is properly cured.
3 Linear interpolation is permissible for units having crushing strengths between those given in the table.
4 The permissible stress for random rubble masonry may be taken as 75 percent of the eorrespcmding stress for coarsed walling of
similar materials,
5 The strength of ashlar masonry (natural stone masonry of massive type with thin joints) is closely related to intrinsic strength of the
stone and allowable working stress in excess of those given in the table may be allowed for such masonry at the discretion of the
designer.
6 For calculation of basic compressive stress of stabilized mud block having thickness 100 mm or more, reference to specialist
literature may be made.
*&’
‘--~-
NOTES
1 Linear interpolation between values is permitted.
2 Where in special cases the eccentricity y of loading lies between 1/3 and 1/2 of the thickness of the member, the stress reduction
factor should vary linearly between unity and 0.20 for slenderness ratio of 6 and 20 respectively.
3 Slenderness ratio of a member for sections within 1/8 of the height of the member above or below a lateral support may be taken to
be 6.
Table 10 Shape Modification Factor tension shall be disregarded for computing the
for Masonry Units load carrying capacity of the member.
(Clause 5.4.1.3) NOTE — When resultant eccentricity ratio of loading is
4.
1/24 or less, compressive stress due to bending shall be
Height to Shape Modification Factor (kP) for Units ignored and only axial stress need be computed for the
Width Ratio Having Crushing Strength in N/mm2 is purpose of design.
of Units ~~
(as Laid) S.. 5.4.1.5 Increase in permissible compressive stress for
7.5 10.0 15.0
(1)
walls subjected to concentrated loads
(2) (3) (4) (5)
up to 0.75 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 When a wall is subjected to a concentrated load (a load
1.0 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.0 being taken to be concentrated when area of supporting
1.5 1.5 1.3 1.2 1.1 wall equals or exceeds three times the bearing area),
2.0 to 4.0 1.8 1.5 1.3 1.2 certain increase in permissible compressive stress may
NOTE — Linear interpolation between values is permissible. be allowed because of dispersal of the load. Since,
according to the present state of art, there is diversity
5.4.1.4 Increase in permissible compressive stresses of views in regard to manner and extent of dispersal,
allowed for eccentric vertical loads, laterul loads under design of walls subjected to concentrated loads may,
certain conditions therefore, be worked out as per the best judgement of
the designer. Some guidelines in this regard are given
In members subjected to eccentric and/or lateral loads,
in Annex C.
increase in permissible compressive stress is allowed
as follows: 5.4.2 Permissible Tensile Stress
a) When resultant eccentricity ratio exceeds As a general rule, design of masonry shall be based on
1/24 but does not exceed 1/6, 25 percent the assumption that masonry is not capable of taking
increase in permissible compressive stress is any tension. However, in case of lateral loads normal
allowed in design. to the plane of wall, which causes flexural tensile stress,
b) When resultant eccentricity ratio exceeds as for example, panel, curtain partition and free
1/6, 25 percent increase in permissible stress standing walls, flexural tensile stresses as follows may
is allowed but the area of the section under be permitted in the design for masonry:
Grade Mlor – 0.07 N/mmz for bending in walls and section in case of columns in relation to
better mortar the vertical direction where strength of masonry units and grade of mortar to be
tension developed is normal used, taking into consideration various factors, such
to bed joints. as slenderness ratio, eccentricity y, area of section,
— 0,14 N/mmz for bending in workmanship, quality of supervision, etc, subject
the longitudinal direction further to provisions of 5.5.1.1 to 5.5.1.4.
where tension developed
5.5.1.1 Solid walls
is parallel to bed joints,
provided crushing strength Thickness used for design calculation shall be the actual
of masonry units is not less thickness of masonry computed as the sum of the
than 10 N/mm2. average dimensions of the masonry units specified in
Grade M2 mortar – 0.05 N/mm2 for bending in the relevant stdndard, together with the specified joint
the vertical direction where thickness. In masonry with raked joints, thickness shall
tension developed is normal be reduced by the depth of raking, of joints for
to bed joints. plastering/pointing.
— 0.10 N/mm* for bending in 5.5.1.2 Cavity walls
the longitudinal direction
a) Thickness of each leaf of a cavity wall shall
where tension developed
In either alternative, only the actual thickness of the Table 11 Height to Thickness Ratio of Free
load bearing leaf shall be used in arriving at the cross- Standing Walls Related to Wind Speed
sectional area resisting the load (see 5.5.1.1). (Clause 5.5.2.1)
Workmanship has considerable effect on strength of Special provision shall be made to control or isolate
masonry and bad workmanship may reduce the strength thermal and other movements so that damage to the
of brick masonry to as low as half the intended strength. fabric of the building is avoided and its structural
The basic compressive stress values for masonry as sufficiency preserved. Design and installation of
given in Table 8 would hold good for commercially joints shall be done according to the appropriate
obtainable standards of workmanship with reasonable recommendations in accordance with good practice
degree of supervision. If the work is inadequately [6-4(5)].
supervised, strength should be reduced to three-fourth
6.5 Chases, Recesses and Holes
or less at the discretion of the designer.
6.5.1 Chases, recesses and holes are permissible in
6.3.2 Bedding of Masoniy Units
masonry only if these do not impair strength and
Masonry units shall be laid on a full bed of mortar stability of the structure.
with frog, if any, upward such that cross-joints and
6.5.2 In masonry, designed by structural analysis, all
wall joints are completely filled with mortar. Masonry
chases, recesses and holes shall be considered in
units which are moved after initial placement shall
structural design and detailed in building plans.
be relaid in fresh mortar, discarding the disturbed
mortar. 6.5.3 When chases, recesses and holes have not been
considered in structural design and are not shown in
6.3.3 Bond
drawings, these may be provided, subject to the
Cross-joints in any course of one brick thick masonry constraints and precautions specified in 6.5.3.1
wall shall be not less than one-fourth of a masonry to 6.5.3.10.
unit in horizontal direction from the cross-joints in the
6.5.3.1 As far as possibk, services should be planned
course below. In masonry walls more than one brick
with the help of vertical chases and use of horizontal
in thickness, bonding through the thickness of wall
chases should be avoided.
shall be provided by either header units or by other
equivalent means in accordance with good practice 6.5.3.2 For load bearing walls, depth of vertical and
[6-4(4)]. horizontal chases shall not exceed one-third and one-
sixth of the wall thickness respectively.
6.3.4 Verticality and Alignment
6.5.3.3 Vertical chases shall not be closer than 2 m in
All masonry shall be built true and plumb within the
any stretch of wall and shall not be located within
tolerances prescribed below; care shall be taken to keep
345 mm of an opening or within 230 mm of a cross
the perpends properly aligned:
wall that serves as a stiffening wall for stability. Width
a) Deviation from vertical within a storey shall of a vertical chase shall not exceed thickness of wall
not exceed 6 mm per 3 m height. in which it occurs.
6.5.3.10 Chases, recesses or holes shall not be cut into Bricks/Blocks as per the accepted standards [6-4(1)]
walls made of hollow or perforated units, after the units having a crushing strength not less than 3.5 MPa shall
have been incorporated in masonry. be used. However, higher strength of masonry units
may be required depending upon number of storeys
6.6 Corbeling and thickness of walls in accordance with provisions
of this Section.
6.6.1 Where corbeling is required for the support
of some structural element, maximum projection of 7.3 Mortar
masonry unit should not exceed one-half of the
height of the unit or one-half of the built-in part of 7.3.1 Mortars, such as those given in Table 13 or of
the unit and the maximum horizontal projection of equivalent specification, shall preferably be used for
the corbel should not exceed one-third of the wall masonry construction for various categories of
thickness. buildings.
A M2 (Cement-sand 1:6) or
M3 (Lime-cinder 3) 1:3) or richer
B, C M2 (Cement-lime-sand 1:2:9 or
Cement-sand 1:6) or richer
D, E H2 (Cement-sand 1:4) or
Ml (Cement-lime-sand 1:1:6) or richer
i) Distance IZ from the inside corner of outside wall, Min o 230 mm 450 mm
ii) For total length of openings, the ratio (bl + bz + b~)i 11or
(bc + b7)/ 12shall not exceed:
a) one-storeyed building 0.60 0.55 0.50
b) two-storeyed building 0.50 0.46 0.42
c) three or four-storeyed building 0.42 0.37 0.33
iii ) Pier width between consecutive openings bl, Min 340 mm 450 mm 560 mm
iv) Vertical distance between two openings one above the other hs, Min 600 mm 600 mm 600 mm
v) Width of opening of ventilator bg, Max 900 mm 900 mm 900 mm
#
A=
/1 /2 -t
4- /-4
be
-1
‘I L
bs
4 b’
I
— I I I I
77y\v// //A\V// //A\V// /m /// /zws-//
1. DOOR 2. WINDOW 3. VENTILATOR 4. CROSS WALL
FIG. 15 RECOMMENDED
DIMENSIONS
OFOPENINGSANDPIERS(see Table 14)
SECTION AT XX 1
40 d 40 d
FIG. 16 STRENGTHENING
MASONARYAROUNDOPENING
..
7.5.5 If an opening is tall from bottom to almost top levels, vertical reinforcing bars at comers, junctions
of a storey, thus dividing the wall into two portions, of walls and jambs of opening.
these portions shall be reinforced with horizontal
7.6.2 Lintel band is a band provided at lintel level on
reinforcement of 6 mm diameter bars at not more than
all load bearing internal, external longitudinal and cross
450 mm intervals, one on inner and one on outer face,
walls. The specifications of the band are given in 7.6.3.
properly tied to vertical steel at jambs, corners or
junction of walls, where used. NOTE — Lintel band if provided in panel or partition walls
also will improve their stability during severe earthquake.
7.5.6 The use of arches to span over the openings is a
7.6.3 Roof band is a band provided immediately below
source of weakness and shall be avoided. Otherwise,
the roof or floors. The specifications of the band are
steel ties should be provided.
given in 7.6.5. Such a band need not be provided
7.6 Seismic Strengthening Arrangements underneath reinforced concrete or brick-work slabs
resting on bearing walls, provided that the slabs are
7.6.1 All masonry buildings shall be strengthened by
continuous over the intermediate wall up to the crumple
the methods, as specified for various categories of
sections, if any, and cover the width of end walls, fully
buildings, as listed in Table 15, and detailed
or at least 74 of the wall thickness.
in subsequent clauses. Figures 17 and 18 show,
schematically, the overall strengthening arrangements 7.6.4 Gable band is a band provided at the top of gable
\3
mm
(B)
1. LINTEL BAND 8. HOLDING DOWN BOLT
2. EAVE LEVEL (ROOF) BAND 9. BRICIUSTONE WALL
3. CABLE BAND 10. DOOR LINTEL INTEGRATE
4. DOOR WITH ROOF BAND
5. WINDOW
6. VERTICAL STEEL BAR
7. RAFTER
3060 t GO 30
19A SECTION OF BAND WITH TWO BARS 19B SECTION OF BAND WITH FOUR BARS
bl bz
t--i t-1
1. Longitudinal bars
2. Lateral ties
bl, b2- Wall thickness
All dimensions in millimetres.
..
Table 17 Vertical Steel Reinforcement in Masonry Walls with
Rectangular Masonry Units
(Clauses 7.6.8,7.6.9 and 8.7.2)
No. of Storeys Storey Diameter of HSD Single Bar in mm at Each Critical Section
Four Top 10 10 10
Third 10 10 12 Four storeyed
Second 10 12 building not
16
NOTES
1 The diameters given above are for high strength deformed steel bars. For mild steel plain bars, use equivalent diametcm as given in
Table 16 (Note 2).
2 The vertical bars will be covered with concrete M 15 or mortar 1:3 grade in suitably ermted pockets around the bars. This will
ensure their safety from corrosion and good bond with masonry.
3 In case of floors/roofs with small precast components, also refer good practice [6-4(8)] for floorhoofband details.
For earthquake resistant framed wall construction, beams are located at all floors, roof as well as lintel
(see 7.7). No vertical steel need be provided in levels of the openings. The sequence of construction
category A buildings. between walls and columns will be first to build the
wall up to 4 to 6 courses height leaving toothed gaps
7.6.8.1 The vertical reinforcement shall be properly
(tooth projection being about 40 mm only) for the
embedded in the plinth masonry of foundations and
columns and second to pour Ml 5 (1:2:4) concrete to
roof slab or roof band so as to develop its tensile
fill the columns against the walls using wood forms
strength in bond. It shall be passing through the lintel
only on two sides. The column steel should be
bands and floor level bands in all storeys.
accurately held in position all along. The band
Bars in different storeys may be welded or suitably concrete should be cast on the wall masonry directly
lapped. so as to develop full bond with it.
NOTE — Typical details of providing vertical steel in Such construction may be limited to only two storeys
brickwork masonry with rectangular solid units at corners and maximum in view of its vertical load carrying capacity.
T-junctions are shown in Fig. 20.
The horizontal length of walls between cross walls shall
7.6.9 Vertical reinforcement at jambs of window and be restricted to 7 m and the storey height to 3 m.
door openings shall be provided as per Table 17. It
may start from foundation of floor and terminate in 7.8 Reinforcing Details for Hollow Block Masonry
lintel band (see Fig. 21). The following details may be followed in placing the
J,
horizontal and vertical steel in hollow block masonry ,
7.7 Framing of Thin Load Bearing Walls (see
using cement-sand or cement-concrete blocks.
Fig. 21)
7.8.1 Horizontal Band
Load bearing walls can be made thinner than 200 mm
say 150 mm inclusive of plastering on both sides. U-shaped blocks may be used for construction of
Reinforced concrete framing columns and collar horizontal bands in various levels of the storeys as
beams will be necessary to be constructed to have shown in Fig. 22, where the amount of horizontal
full bond with the walls. Columns are to be located at reinforcement shall be taken 25 percent more than that
all corners and junctions of walls and spaced not more given in Table 16 and provided by using four bars and
than 1.5 m apart but so located as to frame up the 6 mm dia stirrups. Other continuity details shall be
doors and windows. The horizontal bands or ring followed, as shown in Fig. 19.
..
I I
-t-3-w--- L_-,;+ A
In_ .
1/2
1~
v
1~
1/2
E
1<
J’
r ‘ “1
+4+-
I-1-l-l-l-l--l
(a)
(b)
I-+1
m L
W_
1
“’%%ikrmn
tl I 1 141
1
1
1
(c) (d)
1/2 I I I
1/4
(e) (9
1 — One-brick length, k — Half brick length, V — Vertical steel bar with mortar/concrete filling in pocket
(a) and (b) — Alternate courses in one brick
(c) and (d) – Alternate courses at cornerjunction ofl%-brickwall
(c)and(f) —Alternate courses atT-junction ofl%-btick wall
..
“-” f-’
2000
1. WINDOW
2. DOOR
3. BRICK PANEL
4. LINTEL BAND
Bars, as specified in Table 17 shall be located inside b) Random rubble and half-dressed stone
the cavities of the hollow blocks, one bar in each cavity masonry construction using different mortars,
(see Fig. 23). Where more than one bar is planned these such as, clay mud, lime-sand and cement
can be located in two or three consecutive cavities. sand.
The cavities containing bars are to be filled by using 8.1.2 These constructions should not be permitted for
micro-concrete 1:2:3 or cement-coarse sand mortar 1:3, important buildings with 121.5 and should preferably
and properly rodded for compaction. The vertical bars be avoided for building category D and shall not be
should be spliced by welding or overlapping for used for category E (see Table 12).
developing full tensile strength. For proper bonding,
the overlapped bars should be tied together by winding 8.1.3 It will be useful to provide damp-proof course
the binding wire over the lapped length. To reduce the at plinth level to stop the rise of pore water into the
number of overlaps, the blocks maybe made U-shaped superstructure.
as shown in Fig. 23 which will avoid lifting and 8.1.4 Precautions should be taken to keep the rain
threading of bars into the hollows. water away from soaking into the wall so that the
mortar is not softened due to wetness. An effective
8 GUIDELINES FOR IMPROVING
way is to take out roof projections beyond the walls
EARTHQUAKE RESISTANCE OF LOW
by about 500 mm.
STRENGTH MASONRY BUILDINGS
8.1.5 Use of a water-proof plaster on outside face of
8.0 The term ‘low strength masonry’ includes fired
walls will enhance the life qfthe building and maintain
brickwork laid in clay mud mortar and random rubble;
its strength at the time of earthquake as well.
uncoursed, undressed or semi-dressed stone masonry
in weak mortars; such as cement sand, lime sand and 8.1.6 Ignoring tensile strength, free standing walls
clay mud. Special features of design and construction should be checked against overturning under the action
for improving earthquake resistance of buildings of of design seismic coefficient, ah, allowing for a factor
low strength masonry are given in 8.1 to 8.4.7. of safety of 1.5.
Reference may also be made to good practice [6-4(9)]
for detailed information. 8.2 Brickwork in Weak Mortars
o
0;.
~
,.’.
4“
....
I .. ,
I
[—][—]@l[-J[-]
I
l-’’===
[—] [—’
/
u n
u
c1
u I
●
El
4
,a..
@El
G WIRE
FIG. 23 VERTICALREINFORCEMENT
IN CAVITIES
8.2.2 The mortar should be lime-sand (1:3) or clay a) For Categories A, B and C — three storeys
mud of good quality. Where horizontal steel is used with flat roofi and two storeys plus attic for
between courses, cement-sand mortar (1:3) should be pitched roof.
used with thickness so as to cover the steel with 6 mm b) For Category D — two storeys with flat roofi
mortar above and below it. Where vertical steel is used, and one storey plus attic for pitched roof.
the surrounding brickwork of 1 x 1 or 1Y2 x 1Y2 brick
size depending on wall thidcness should preferably be 8.2.5 Special Bond in Brick Walls
built using 1:6 cement-sand mortar.
For achieving full strength of masonry, the usual
8.2.3 The minimum wall thickness shall be one brick bonds specified for masonry should be followed so
in one storey construction, and one brick in top storey that the vertical joints are broken properly from course
and 1?4 brick in bottom storeys of up to three storey to course. To obtain full bond between perpendicular
construction. It should also not be less than 1/16 of the walls, it is necessary to make a sloping (stepped)
length of wall between two consecutive perpendicular joint by making the corners first to a height of
walls. 600 mm and then building the wall in between them.
8.2.4 The height of the building shall be restricted to Otherwise the toothed joint should be made in both
the following, where each storey height shall not the walls, alternatively in lifts of about 450 mm (see
exceed 3.0 m: Fig. 14).
..
L
8.3 Stone Masonry (Random Rubble or Half- preservative so that it is durable against weathering
Dressed) and insect action.
8.3.1 The construction of stonemasonry of random 8.3.7 Use of ‘bonding’ elements of adequate length
rubble or dressed stone type should generally follow should also be made at comers and junctions of walls
good practice [6-4(3)]. to break the vertical joints and provide bonding
between perpendicular walls.
8.3.2 The mortar should be cement-sand (1:6), lime
sand (1:3) or clay mud of good quality. 8.3.8 Height of the stonemasonry walls (random rubble
or half-dressed) should be restricted as follows, with
8.3.3 The wall thickness ‘t’should not be larger storey height to be kept 3.0 m maximum, and span of
than 450 mm. Preferably it should be about 350 mm, walls between cross walls to be limited to 5.0 m:
and the stones on the inner and outer wythes should be
interlocked with each other. a) For categories A and B — Two storeys with
flat roof or one storey plus attic, if walls are
NOTE -– If the two wythes are not interlocked, they tend to
built in lime-sand or mud mortar; and one
delaminate during ground shaking bulge apart (see Fig. 24)
and buckle separately under vertical load leading to complete storey higher if walls are built in cement-sand
collapse of the wall and the building. 1:6 mortar.
b) For categories C and D — Two stroreys with
flat roof or two storeys plus attic for pitched
FIG. 25 THROUGHSTONEANDBANDELEMENTS
8.4.3 Where openings do not comply with the Table 19 Strengthening Arrangements
guidelines of Table 18, they should be strengthened Recommended for Low Strength
by providing reinforced concrete lining as shown in lvkonry Buildings
Fig. 16 with 2 high strength deformed steel bars of (Clause 8.5.1)
8 mm diameter.
Building Category Number of Storeys Strengthening to .
8.4.4 The use of arches to span over the openings is a be Provided
.6
source of weakness and shall be avoided, otherwise, (1) (2) (3)
steel ties should be provided.
A 1 b,c, jg
2and3 b,c, ~g
8.5 Seismic Strengthening Arrangements
B land2 b,c, $g
8.5.1 All buildings to be constructed of masonry shall 3 b,c, d,~g
be strengthened by the methods as specified for various (see Note 1)
the roof or floors. The details of the band are given 1 For building of category B in two storeys constructed with
stone masonry in weak mortar, it will be desirable to provide
in 8.5.5. Such a band need not be provided underneath
vertical steel of 10 mm dia in both storeys.
reinforced concrete or reinforced brick slabs resting
2 At tie level, all the trusses and the gable end should be
on bearing walls, provided that the slabs cover the provided with diagonal braces in plan so as to transmit the
width of end walls fully. lateral shear due to earthquake force to the gable walls acting
as shear walls.
8.5.4 Gable band is a band provided at the top of gable
..
masonry below the purlins. The details of the band are could be provided using wood beams in one or two
given in 8.5.5. This band shall be made continuous parallel pieces with cross elements as shown in
with the roof band at the eaves level. Fig. 26.
8.5.5 Lktails t#Band 8.5.6 Plinth band is a band provided at plinth level of
walls on top of the foundation wall. This is to be
8.5.5.1 Reinforced bund
provided where strip footings of masonry (other than
The band should be made of reinforced concrete of reinforced concrete or reinforced masonry) are used
grade not leaner than M 15 or reinforced brickwork in and the soil is either soft or uneven in its properties as
cement mortar not leaner than 1:3. The bands should frequently happens in hill tracts. Where used, its section
be of full width of the wall, not less than 75 mm in may be kept same as in 8.5.5.1. This band serves as
depth and should be reinforced with 2 high strength damp proof course as well.
deformed steel bars of 8 mm diameter and held in
8.5.7 Vertical Reinforcement
position by 6 mm diameter bar links, installed at
150 mm apart as shown in Fig. 19. Vertical steel at comers and junctions of walls which
are up to 350 mm thick should be provided as specified
NOTES
in Table 20. For walls thicker than 350 mm, the area
1 [n coastal areas, the concrete grade shall be of grade in
accord~ncewith Part 6 ‘StructuralDesign,Section5 Concrete’ of the bars should be proportionately increased.
and the filling mortar of 1:3 ratio (cement-sand)with water
8.5.7.1 The vertical reinforcement should be properly
1---1 8
~T -15X367
I I I 1500
75x3
IrlF
. ..
00
. ..
-1-
500+- 500+-5 . .
.
~75x38 .
26b PLAN OF BAND
No. of Storey Diameter of HSD Single Bar; in mm, at Each Critical Section for
Storeys
/
Category A Catego~ B Category C Category D
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
One — Nil Nil Nil 10
Two Top Nil Nil 10 10
Bottom Nil Nil 10 12
Three Top Nil 10 10 10
Middle Nil 10 10 12
Bottom Nil 12 12 12
NOTES
1 The diameters given above are for High Strength Deformed bars with yield strength 415 MPa. For mild steel plain bars, use
equivalent diameters.
2 The vertical bars should be covered with concrete of M15 grade or with mortar 1:3 (cement-sand) in suitably created pockets around
the bars. This will ensure their safety from corrosion and good bond with masonry.
3 For category B two storey stone masonry buildings, see Note 1 under Table 19.
+t=~”-
3 I
1. Stone wall 3. Casing pipe
2. Vertical steel bar 4. Through stone or bonding element
..
ANNEX A
(Clause 4.7)
SOME GUIDELINES FOR ASSESSMENT OF ECCENTRICITY OF
LOADING ON WALLS
A-1 Where a reinforced concrete roof and floor slab valid also for interior walls carrying independent slabs
of normal span (not exceeding 30 times the thickness spanning from both sides, provided the span of the floor
of wall) bear on external masonry walls, the point of on one side does not exceed that on the other by more
application of the vertical loading shall be taken to than 15 percent. Where the difference is greater, the
be at the centre of the bearing on the wall. When the displacement of the point of application of each floor
span is more than 30 times the thickness of wall, the load shall be’taken as one-sixth of its bearing width on
point of application of the load shall be considered the wall and the resultant eccentricity calculated
to be displaced from the centre of bearing towards therefrom.
the span of the floor to an extent of one-sixth the
A-5 For timber and other lightweight floors, even for
bearing width.
full width bearing on wall, an eccentricity of about
A-2 In case of a reinforced concrete slab of normal one-sixth may be assumed due to deflection. For timber
span (that is, less than 30 times the thickness of the floors with larger spans, that is, more than 30 times
A-4 Interior walls carrying continuous floors are A-7 For a wall corbel to support some load, the point
assumed to be axially loaded except when carrying of application of the load shall be assumed to be at the
very flexible floor or roof systems. The assumption is centre of the bearing on the corbel.
ANNEX B
(Clause 5.4.1)
B-1 DETERMINATION OF COMPRESSIVE of mortar joints and workmanship shall be the same
STRENGTH OF MASONRY BY PRISM TEST as will be used in the structure. Assembled specimen
shall be at least 400 mm high and shall have a height
When compressive strength of masonry (~~) is to be
to thickness ratio (h/t) of at least 2 but not more than
established by tests, it shall be done in advance of
5. If the h/t ratio of the prisms tested is less than 5 in
the construction, using prisms built of similar
materials under the same conditions with the same case of brickwork and more than 2 in case of
bonding arrangement as for the structure. In building blockwork, compressive strength values indicated by
the prisms, moisture content of the units at the time the tests shall be corrected by multiplying with the
of laying, the consistency of the mortar, the thickness factor indicated in Table 21.
‘‘[nterpd ation is valid for intermediate values. Basic compressive stress of masonry shall be
taken to be equal to 0.25 ~~ where f~ is the value of
Prisms shall be tested after 28 days between sheets of compressive strength of masonry as obtained from
nominal 4 mm plywood, slightly longer than the bed prism test.
(Clause 5.5.5)
GUIDELINES FOR APPROXIMATE DESIGN OF NON-LOAD BEARING WALL
Table 22 Bending —lVIoments in Laterally Loaded a) Walls with adequate lateral restraint at both
Panel Walls, Free at Top Edge and Supported ends but not at the top:
on Other Three Edges 1) The panel may be of any height, provided
Panel, H
Height of
the length does not exceed 40 times the
0.30 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 thickness; or
Lengthof Panel, L
2) The panel may be of any length, provided
P.L P.L P.L P.L P.L P.L P.L
Bending Moment ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ the height does not exceed 15 times the
thickness (that is, it may be considered
NOTE — For H/L ratio less than 0.30, the panel should be as a free-standing wall); or
designed as a free-standing watl and for H/L ratio exceeding
1.75, it should be designed as a horizontafty spanning membe] 3) Where the length of the panel is over 40
for a bending moment vatue of P.U8. times and less than 60 times the thickness,
the height pl~s twice the length may not
c) When either there are no window openings exceed 135 times the thickness;
or windows are of ‘hole-in-wall’ type, the b) Walls with adequate lateral restraint at both
panel is considered to be simply supported
ends at the top:
on all four edges. In this case also, amount of
1) The panel may be of any height, provided
maximum bending moment depends on
the length does not exceed 40 times the
height to length ratio of panel and ratio (+u)of
thickness; or
flexural strength of masonry in vertical
direction to that in the horizontal direction. 2) The panel may be of any length, provided
Approximate values for maximum bending the height does not exceed 30 times the
moment in the horizontal direction for thickness; or
masonry with p = 0.50, are given in Table 23. 3) Where the length of the panel is over
ANNEX E
(Clause 10)
E-1 The following notations, letter symbols and k= Shape modification factor
abbreviations shall have the meaning indicated against k; = Stress reduction factor
each, unless otherwise specified in the text of this L= Actual length of wall
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as “good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ (1) 1077:1992 Specification for common
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The burnt clay building bricks
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time (jljlh revis;on) -
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may 2180:1988 Specification for heavy duty
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance burnt clay building bricks
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the (third revision)
Code.
2185 Specification for concrete
In the following list, the number appearing in the first masonry units:
column within parentheses indicates the number of the (Part 1): 1979 Hollow and solid concrete
reference in this Part/Section. blocks (second revision)
FOREWORD ... 5
1 SCOPE ... 7
2 TERMINOLOGY ... 7
3 SYMBOLS ... 7
4 MATERIALS ... 8
5 CONCRETE ... 11
6 WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE ... 12
LIST OF STANDARDS . .. 88
FOREWORD
Section 5 of Part 6 of the Code covers plain and reinforced concrete as also the prestressed concrete. The Section
has been subdivided into the following sub-sections:
a) In recent years, durability of concrete structures have become the cause of concern to all concrete
technologists. This has led to codify the durability requirements world over. In this revision of the
Code, in order to introduce in-built protection from factors affecting a structure, earlier clause on durability
has been elaborated and a detailed clause covering different aspects of design of durable structure has
been incorporated.
b) Sampling and acceptance criteria for concrete have been revised. With this revision acceptance criteria
has been simplified in line with the provisions given in BS 5328 (Part 4) :1990 ‘Concrete: Part 4
Specification for the procedures to be used in sampling, testing and assessing compliance of concrete’.
The significant change incorporated in Section 5A (d) is the modification of the clause on Walls. The modified
clause includes design of walls against horizontal shear.
Working stress method has now been given in Annex B so as to give greater emphasis to limit state design. In this
Annex, modifications regarding torsion and enhanced shear strength on the same lines as in Section 5 have been
made.
Whilst the common methods of design and construction have been covered in this Code, special systems of design
and construction of any plain or reinforced concrete structure not covered by this Code may be permitted on
production of satisfactory evidence regarding their adequacy and safety by analysis or test or both (see 18).
In this Code it has been assumed that the design of plain and reinforced cement concrete work is entrusted to a
qualified engineer and that the execution of cement concrete work is carried out under the direction of a qualified
and experience supervisor.
In the formulation of this subsection, assistance has been derived from the following publications:
BS 5328 (Part 1) :1991 Concrete: Part 1 Guide to specifying concrete, British Standards Institution
BS 5328 (Part 2) :1991 Concrete: Part 2 Methods for specifying concrete mixes, British Standards Institution
BS 5328 (Part 3) :1990 Concrete: Part 3 Specification for the procedures to be used in producing and
transporting concrete, British Standards Institution
BS 5328 (Part 4) :1990 Concrete: Part 4 Specification for the procedures to be used in sampling, testing and
assessing compliance of concrete, British Standards Institution
BS 8110 (Part 1) :1985 Structural use of concrete: Part 1 Code of practice for design and construction,
British Standards Institution
BS 8110 (Part 2) :1985 Structural use of concrete: Part 2 Code of practice for special circumstances, British
Standards Institution
ACI 318:1995 Building code requirements for reinforced concrete, American Concrete Institute
AS 3600:1988 Concrete structures, Standards Association of Australia
DIN 1045 July 1988 Structural use of concrete, design and construction, Deutsches Institut fur Normung
E.V.
CEB-FIP Model Code 1990, Comite Euro International Du Belon
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
Ground granulated blast furnace slag obtained by 4.3.4 Coarse and fine aggregate shall be batched
grinding granulated blast furnace slag conforming to separately. All-in-aggregate may be used only where
accepted standards [6-5A(6)] may be used as part specifically permitted by the engineer-in-charge.
replacement of ordinary Portland cements provided
uniform blending with cement is ensured. 4.4 Water
4.3 Aggregates Water use for mixing and curing shall be clean and
free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts,
Aggregates shall comply with the requirements of sugar, organic materials or other substances that may
accepted standards [6-5A(7)]. As far as possible be deleterious to concrete or steel.
preference shall be given to natural aggregates.
Potable water is generally considered satisfactory
4.3.1 Other types of aggregates such as slag and for mixing concrete. As a guide the following
crushed overbumt brick or tile, which may be found concentrations represent the maximum permissible
suitable with regard to strength, durability of concrete values:
and freedom from harmful effects may be used for plain
concrete members, but such aggregates should not a) To neutralize 100 @ sample of water, using
contain more than 0.5 percent of sulphates as SOg and phenolphthalein as an indicator, it should not
should not absorb more than 10 percent of their own require more than 5 ml of 0.02 normal NaOH.
mass of water. The details of test are given in 7.1 of good
practice [6-5A(8)].
4.3.2 Heavy weight aggregates or light weight
b) To neutralize 100 ml sample of water, using
aggregates such as bloated clay aggregates and sintered
mixed indicator, it should not require more
fly ash aggregates may also be used provided the
engineer-in-charge is satisfied with the data on the than 25 ml of 0.02 normal H2SOd. The details
properties of concrete made with them. of test shall be as given in 7 of good practice
[6-5A(8)].
NOTE — Some of the provisions of the Code would require
modification when these aggregates are used; specialist c) Permissible limits for solids shall be as given
literature may be consulted for guidance. in Table 1.
sample shall not receive any treatment before testing 4.5.5 The chloride content of admixtures shall be
other than that envisaged in the regular supply of water independently tested for each batch before acceptance.
proposed for use in concrete. The sample shall be stored
4.5.6 If two or more admixtures are used
in a clean container previously rinsed out with similar
simultaneously in the same concrete mix, data should
water.
be obtained to assess their interaction and to ensure
4.4.1.2 Average 28 days compressive strength of at their compatibility.
least three 150 mm concrete cubes prepared with water
proposed to be used shall not be less than 90 percent 4.6 Reinforcement
of the average of strength of three similar concrete The reinforcement shall be any of the following
cubes prepared with distilled water. The cubes shall conforming to the accepted standards [6-5 A(12)]:
be prepared, cured and tested in accordance with good
practice [6-5A(9)]. a) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars.
b) High strength deformed steel bars.
4.4.1.3 The initial setting time of test block made with
c) Hard-drawn steel wire fabric.
the appropriate cement and the water proposed to be
d) Grade A of structural steel.
used shall not be less than 30 min and shall not differ
by* 30 min from the initial setting time of control test 4.6.1 All reinforcement shall be free from loose mill
block prepared with the same cement and distilled scales, loose rust and coats of paints, oil, mud or any
water. The test blocks shall be prepared and tested in oother substances which ‘may destroy or reduce bond.
accordance with the good practice [6-5 A(1O)]. Sand blasting or other treatment is recommended to
clean reinforcement.
4.4.2 The pH value of water shall be not less than 6.
4.6.2 Special precautions like coating of
4.4.3 Sea Water
reinforcement may be required for reinforced concrete
Mixing or curing of concrete with sea water is not elements in exceptional cases and for rehabilitation
recommended because of presence of harmful salts in of structures. Specialist literature may be referred to
sea water. Under unavoidable circumstances sea water in such cases.
may be used for mixing or curing in plain concrete with
4.6.3 The modulus of elasticity of steel shall be taken
no embedded steel after having given due consideration
as 200 kN/mm2. The characteristic yield strength of
to possible disadvantages and precautions including use
different steel shall be assumed as the minimum yield
of appropriate cement system.
stress/O.2 percent proof stress specified in the relevant
4.4.4 Water found satisfactory for mixing is also Indian Standard.
..
4.7 Storage of Materials characteristic strength of concrete unless there is an
evidence to justify a higher strength for a particular
Storage of materials shall be as described in good
structure due to age.
practice [6-5A(13)].
5.2.1.1 For concrete of grade M 30 and above, the
5 CONCRETE
rate of increase of compressive strength with age shall
5.1 Grades be based on actual investigations.
The concrete shall be in grades designated as per 5.2.1.2 Where members are subjected to lower direct
Table 2. load during construction, they should be checked for
stresses resulting from combination of direct load and
Table 2 Grades of Concrete
bending during construction.
(Clauses 5,1,8 .2.2,14.1,1 and 35.1)
5.2.2 Tensile Strength of Concrete
Group Grade S@fied Characteristic
Des&nation COmpredve Strcmgth of The flexural and splitting tensile strengths shall be
l*mm Cub@at2’Sdaysin obtained in accordance with good practice [6-5 A(14)].
Nhmn2
When the designer wishes to use an estimate of the
(1) (2) (3)
tensile strength from the compressive strength, the
Ordinary M 10 10 following formula may be used:
5.1.1 The characteristic strength is defined as the Actual measured values may differ by &20 percent
strength of material below which not more than 5 from the values obtained from the above expression.
percent of the test results are expected to fall.
5.2.4 Shrinkage
5.1.2 The minimum grade of concrete for plain and
The total shrinkage of concrete depends upon the
reinforced concrete shall be as per Table 5.
constituents of concre~, size of the member and
5.1.3 Concrete of grades lower than those given in environmental conditions. For a given humidity and
Table 5 maybe used for plain concrete constructions, temperature, the total shrinkage of concrete is most
lean concrete, simple foundations, foundation for influenced by the total amount of water present in the
masonry walls and other simple or temporary concrete at the time of mixing and, to a lesser extent,
reinforced concrete construction. by the cement content.
5.2 Properties of Concrete 5.2.4.1 In the absence of test data, the approximate
value of the total shrinkage strain for design may be
5.2.1 Increase of Strength with Age
taken as 0.0003 (for more information, see accepted
There is normally a gain of strength beyond 28 days. standard [6-5 A(15)] ).
The quantum of increase depends upon the grade
5.2.5 Creep of Concrete
and type of cement, curing and environmental
conditions, etc. The design should be based on 28 days Creep of concrete depends, in addition to the factors
i) Mild Concrete surfaces protected against weather or aggressive conditions, except those situated in coastal
area.
ii) Moderate Concrete surfaces sheltered from severe rain or freezing whilst wet.
Concrete exposed to condensation and rain.
Concrete continuously under water.
Concrete in contact or buried under non-aggressive soil/ground water.
Concrete surfaces sheltered from saturated salt air in coastal area.
}
iii) Severe Concrete surfaces exposed to severe rain, alternate wetting and drying or occasional freezing whilst wet
or severe condensation.
Concrete completely immersed in sea water.
Concrete exposed to coastal environment.
iv) Very Severe Concrete surfaces exposed to sea water spray, corrosive fumes or severe freezing conditkms whilst wet.
Concrete in contact with or buried under aggressive sub-soil/ground water.
v) Extreme Surface of members in tidal zone.
Members in direct contact with liquid/solid aggressive chemicals.
..
Table 4 Requirements for Coucrete Exposed to Sulphate Attack
(Clauses 7.2.2.4 and 8.1.2)
O 1 Traces Less Less Ordkxwy Portland cement or Portland slag 280 0.55
(<0.2) than 1.0 than 0.3 cement or Portland pozzolana cement
ii) 2 0.2 to 0.5 l.oto 1.9 0.3 to 1,2 Ordiuary Porttand cement or Portland slag 330 0.50
cement or Portland pozzolana cement
Supersulphated cement or sulphate resisting 310 0.50
Porttand cement
NOTES
1 Cement content given in this table is irrespective of grades of cement.
2 Use of supersulphated cement is generally restricted where the prevailing temperature is above 40”C.
3 Supersulphatedcement gives an acceptable life provided that the concrete is dense and prepared with a water-cement ratio of 0.4
or less, in minerat acids, down to pH 3.5.
4 The cement contents giveninCO16 of this table are the minimum recommended. For S03 contents near the upper limit of any class,
cement contents above these minimum are advised.
5 For severe conditions, such as thii sections nnder hydrostatic pressure on one side only and sections partly immersed, consideration
should be given to a further rednction of water-cement ratio.
6 Portland slag cement conforming to accepted standard [6-5A(3)] with slag content more than 50 percent exhibits better aulphate
resisting properties.
7 Where chloride is encountered along with sulphates in soil or ground water, ordinary Portland cement with C3A content from 5
to 8 percent shall be desirable to be nsed in concrete, instead of sulphate resisting cement, Alternatively, Portland slag cement
conforming to accepted standard [6-5A(3)] having more than 50 percent slag or a blend of ordhary Portt~d cement ad slag ~Y be
used provided sufficient information is available on performance of such blended cements M these conditions.
concentrations in near-neutral ground water having pH 7.2.3.2 The nominal coyer to the reinforcement shall
of 6 to 9. be provided as per 25.4;
For the very high sulphate concentrations in Class 5
7.2.4 Concrete Mix Proportions
conditions, some form of lining such as polyethylene
or polychloroprene sheet; or surface coating based on 7.2.4.1 General
asphalt, chlorinated rubber, epoxy; or polyurethane
The free water-cement ratio is an important factor in
materials should also be used to prevent access by the
governing the durability of concrete and should always
sulphate solution.
be the lowest value. Appropriate values for minimum
7.2.3 Requirement of Concrete Cover cement content and the maximum free water-cement
7.2.3.1 The protection of the steel in concrete against ratio are given in Table 5 for different exposure
corrosion depends upon au adequate thickness of good conditions. The minimum cement content and
quality concrete. maximum water-cement ratio apply to 20 mm nominal
NOTES
1 Cement content prescribed in this table is irrespective of the grades of cement and it is inclusive of additions mentioned in 4.2. The
additions such as fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag may be taken into account in the concrete composition with respect
to the cement content and water-cement ratio if the suitability is established and as long as the maximum amounts taken into account
maximum size aggregate. For other sizes of aggregate higher the chloride content, or if subsequently exposed
they should be changed as given in Table 6. to warm moist conditions, the greater the risk of
corrosion. All constituents may contain chlorides and
Table 6 Adjustments to Minimum Cement concrete may be contaminated by chlorides from the
Contents for Aggregates Other Than 20 mm external environment. To minimize the chances of
Nominal Maximum Size deterioration of concrete from harmful chemical salts,
(Clause 7.2.4.1) the levels of such harmful salts in concrete coming
from concrete materials, that is, cement, aggregates
S1 Nominal Maximum Adjustments to Minimum Cement water and admixtures, as well as by diffusion from the
No. Aggregate Size Contents Given in Table 5
environment should be limited. The total amount of
mm kglm3
chloride content (as Cl) in the concrete at the time of
(1) (2) (3)
placing shall be as given in Table 7.
i) 10 +40
ii) 20 0 The total acid soluble chloride content should be
iii) 40 -30 calculated from the mix proportions and the measured
chloride contents of each of the constituents. Wherever
7.2.4.2 Maximum cement content possible, the total chloride content of the concrete
should be determined.
Cement content not including fly ash and ground
granulated blast furnace slag in excess of 450 kg/m3
Table 7 Limits of Chloride Content of Concrete
should not be used unless special consideration has
(Clause 7.2.5.2)
been given in design to the increased risk of cracking
due to drying shrinkage in thin sections, or to early S1 Type or Use of Concrete Maximum Total Acid
thermal cracking and to the increased risk of damage No. Soluble Chloride
due to alkali silica reactions. Content Expressed as
kg/m3 of Concrete
7.2.5 Mix Constituents (1) (2) (3)
..
7.2.5.3 Sulphates in concrete d) Limiting the cement content in the concrete
mix and thereby limiting total alkali content
Sulphates are present in most cements and in some
in the concrete mix. For more guidance
aggregates; excessive amounts of water-soluble
specialist literatures may be referred.
sulphate from these or other mix constituents can cause
expansion and disruption of concrete. To prevent this, 7.2.6 Concrete in Aggressive Soils and Water
the total water-soluble sulphate content of the concrete
7.2.6.1 General
mix, expressed as SO~l should not exceed 4 percent by
mass of the cement in the mix. The sulphate content The destructive action of aggressive waters on concrete
should be calculated as the total from the various is progressive. The rate of deterioration decreases as
constituents of the mix. the concrete is made stronger and more impermeable,
and increases as the salt content of the water increases.
The 4 percent limit does not apply to concrete made Where structures are only partially immersed or are in
with supersulphated cement complying with accepted contact with aggressive soils or waters on one side only,
standard [6-5 A(20)]. evaporation may cause serious concentrations of salts
7.2.5.4 Alkali-aggregate reaction with subsequent deterioration, even where the original
salt content of the soil or water is not high.
Some aggregates containing particular varieties of
NOTE — Guidance regarding requirements for concrete
b) A cement with high alkali content, or another Additional protection may be obtained by the use of
source of alkali; and chemically resistant stone facing or a layer of plaster
c) Aggregate containing an alkali reactive of Paris covered with suitable fabric, such as jute
constituent. thoroughly impregnated with bituminous material.
Where the service records of particular cement/ 7.2.7 Compaction, Finishing and Curing
aggregate combination are well established, and do not
Adequate compaction without segregation should be
include any instances of cracking due to alkali-
ensured by providing suitable workability and by
aggregate reaction, no further precautions should be
employing appropriate placing and compacting
necessary. When the materials are unfamiliar,
equipment and procedures. Full compaction is
precautions should take one or more of the following
particularly important in the vicinity of construction
form:
and movement joints and of embedded water bars and
a) Use of non-reactive aggregate from alternate reinforcement.
sources.
Good finishing practices are essential for durable
b) Use of low alkali ordinary Portland cement concrete.
having total alkali content not more than 0.6
percent (as Na,O equivalent). Overworking the surface and the addition of waterl
cement to aid in finishing should be avoided; the
Further advantage can be obtained by use of
resulting laitance will have impaired strength and
fly ash (Grade 1) conforming to accepted
durability and will be particularly vulnerable to
standard [6-5A(5)] or granulated blastfurnace
freezing and thawing under wet conditions.
slag conforming to accepted standard
[6-5A(5)] as part replacement of ordinary It is essential to use proper and adequate curing
Portland cement (having total alkali techniques to reduce the permeability of the concrete
content as Na20 equivalent not more than and enhance its durability by extending the hydration
0.6 percent), provided fly ash content is at of the cement, particularly in its surface zone (see 12.5).
least 20 percent or slag cement is at least
7.2.8 Concrete in Sea-water
50 percent.
c) Measures to reduce the degree of saturation Concrete in sea-water or exposed directly along the
of the concrete during service, such as use of sea-coast shall be at least M 20 Grade in the case of
impermeable membranes. plain concrete and M 30 in case of reinforced concrete.
.-
... ,.,, -%
.
Grade of’ Total Quantity of Dry Aggregates by Proportion of Fine Aggregate to Quantity of Water per
Concrete Mass per 50 kg of Cement, to be Coarse Aggregate 50 kg of Cement,
Taken as the Sum of the Individual (by Mass) Max
Masses of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates, kg,
Max
(1) (~) (3) (4)
NOTE — The proportion of the fine to coarse aggregates should he adjusted from upper limit to lower limit progressively as the
grading of fine aggregates becomes finer and the maximum size of coarse aggregate becomes larger. Graded coarse aggregate shall be b
used.
Example
Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. The 10.2 Cleaning and Treatment of Formwork
mixer should comply with accepted standard
[6-5 A(24)]. The mixers shall be fitted with water All rubbish, particularly, chippings, shavings and
measuring (metering) devices. The mixing shall be sawdust shall be removed from the interior of the forms
continued until there is a uniform distribution of the before the concrete is placed. The face of formwork in
materials and the mass is uniform in colour and contact with the concrete shall be cleaned and treated
consistency. If there is segregation after unloading from with form release agent. Release agents should be
the mixer, the concrete should be re-mixed. applied so as to provide a thin uniform coating to the
forms without coating the reinforcement.
9.3.,1 For guidance, the mixing time shall beat least 2
min. For other types of more efficient mixers, 10.3 Stripping Time
manufacturers recommendations shall be followed; for
Forms shall not be released until the concrete has
hydrophobic cement it maybe decided by the engineer-
in-charge. achieved a strength of at least twice the stress to which
the concrete may be subjected at the time of removal
9.3.2 Workability should be checked at frequent of formwork. The strength referred to shall be that of
intervals (see accepted standard [6-5A(16)] ). concrete using the same ‘cement and aggregates and
9.3.3 Dosages of retarders, plasticizers and admixture, if any, with the same proportions and cured
superplasticizers shall be restricted to 0.5, 1.0 and 2.0 under conditions of temperature and moisture similar
percent respectively by weight of cementitious to those existing on the work.
materials, unless a higher value is agreed upon between
10.3.1 While the above criteria of strength shall be
the manufacturer and the constructor based on
the guiding factor for removal of formwork, in normal
performance test.
circumstances where ambient temperature does not
10 FORMWORK fall below 15°C and where ordinary Portland cement
is used and adequate curing is done, following striking
10.1 General period may deem to satisfy the guideline given
The formwork shall be designed and constructed so as in 10.3:
The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable Where high shear resistance is required at the
deep into the previously cast concrete and care shall be exercised not to disturb the concrete as
should not move to the side during pumping. far as possible while it is being deposited.
c) Drop bottom bucket — The top of the bucket
14 SAMPLING AND STRENGTH OF DESIGNED
shall be covered with a canvas flap. The
CONCRETE MIX
bottom doors shall open freely downward and
outward when tripped. The bucket shall be 14.1 General
filled completely and lowered slowly to avoid
Samples from fresh concrete shall be taken as per
backwash. The bottom doors shall not be
accepted standard [6-5A( 16)] and cubes shall be made,
opened until the bucket rests on the surface
cured and tested at 28 days in accordance with accepted
upon which the concrete is to be deposited
standard [6-5A(9)] .
and when discharged, shall be withdrawn
slowly until well above the concrete. 14.1.1 In order to get a relatively quicker idea of the
d) Bags — Bags of at least 0.028 m’ capacity of quality of concrete, optional tests on beams for modulus
jute or other coarse cloth shall be filled about of rupture at 72 &2 h or at 7 days, or compressive
two-thirds full of concrete, the spare end turned strength tests at 7 days maybe carried out in addition
under so that bag is square ended and securely to 28 days compressive strength test. For this purpose
tied. They shall be placed carefully in header the values should be arrive at based on actual testing.
14.4 Test Results of Sample For the individual test result requirements given inCO13
of Table 11 or in 15.2 (b), only the particular batch
The test results of the sample shall be the average of from which the sample was taken shall beat risk.
the strength of three specimens. The individual
variation should not be more than & 15 percent of the Where the mean rate of sampling is not specified the
average. If more, the test results of the sample are maximum quantity of concrete that four consecutive
invalid. test results represent shall be limited to 60 m3.
M 15 >~,~+ 0.825 x established standard deviation (rounded off to nearest 0.5 Nhnm2) > fck-3 NAnrn2
or
J&+ 3 N/mrn2, whichever is greater
M 20 or above >~k + 0.825 x established standard deviation (rounded off to nearest 0.5 N/mmz) >J~ – 4 N/mm*
be designed by Limit State Method. Account should The realization of design objectives requires
be taken of accepted theories, experiment and compliance with clearly defined standards for
experience and the need to design for durability. materials, production, workmanship and also
Calculations alone do not produce safe, serviceable and maintenance and use of structure in service.
durable structures. Suitable materials, quality control,
adequate detailing and good supervision are equally 18 LOADS AND FORCES
important. 18.1 General
17.2.2 Where the Limit State Method can not be In structural design, account shall be taken of the dead,
conveniently adopted, Working Stress Method may be imposed and wind loads and forces such as those
used (see Annex B). caused by earthquake, and effects due to shrinkage,
17.2.3 Design Based on Experimental Basis creep, temperature, etc, where applicable.
It is assumed that the quality of concrete, steel and 18.6 Other Forces and Effects
other materials and of the workmanship, as verified In addition, account shall be taken of the following
by inspections, is adequate for safety, serviceability forces and effects if they are liable to affect materially
and durability. the safety and serviceability of the structure:
17.4 Design Process a) Foundation movement (see good practice
Design, including design for durability, construction [6-5A(35)] ),
and use in service should be considered as a whole. b) Elastic axial shortening,
The combination of loads shall be as given in good Under transient wind load the laterrd sway at the top
practice [6-5A(33)]. should not exceed H/500, where His the total height
of the building. For seismic loading, reference should
18.8 Dead Load Counteracting Other Loads and be made to good practice [6-5A(34)].
Forces
20 FIRE RESISTANCE
When dead load counteracts the effects due to other
El
0 .,.
●,.4-
. . . . . . . ..
. .
“’~’. .1 ..*.
. .. .. . . . .
-., ●.
. . . .. .
. . .“
., .. .’ - .,
. ...”.
. .
. . . . . ...”...
l--b-l
.. ..:,,.,:.
d &bw
SLABS
‘El
,.
,..
“. ..4,
.!,.
U b D
COLUMNS
FULLY EXPOSED
NOTES
1 These minimum dimensions relate specifically to the covers given in Table 16A.
2 p is the percentage of steel reinforcement.
2) For end span with one end free and the b) When design imposed load does not exceed
other continuous, the effective span shall three-fourths of the design dead load, the load
be equal to the clear span plus half the arrangement may be design dead load and
effective depth of the beam or slab or design imposed load on all the spans.
the clear span plus half the width of the NOTE— For beamsand slabs continuousover support
discontinuous support, whichever is 21.4.1 (a) may be assumed.
less; 21.4.2 Substitute Frame
3) In the case of spans with roller or rocket
For determining the moments and shears at any floor
bearings, the effective span shall always
or roof level due to gravity loads, the beams at that
be the distance between the centres of
level together with columns above and below with their
bearings.
far ends fixed may be considered to constitute the
c) Cantilever — The effective length of a frame.
cantilever shall be taken as its length to the
face of the support plus half the effective 21.4.2.1 Where side sway consideration becomes
depth except where it forms the end of a critical due to unsymmetry in geometry or loading,
continuous beam where the length to the rigorous analysis may be required.
centre of support shall be taken. 21.4.3 For lateral loads, simplified methods may be
d) Frames — In the analysis of a continuous used to obtain the moments and shears for structures
frame, centre-to-centre distance shall be used. that are symmetrical. For unsymmetrical or very tall
structures, more rigorous methods should be used.
21.3 Stiffness
21.5 Moment and Shear Coefficients for Continuous
21.3.1 Relative Sti@ess
Beams
The relative stiffness of the members maybe based on
21.5.1 Unless more exact estimates are made, for
the moment of inertia of the section determined on the
beams of uniform cross-section which support
basis of any one of the following definitions:
substantially uniformly distributed loads over three or
a) Gross section — The cross-section of the more spans which do not differ by more than 15 percent
member ignoring reinforcemen~ of the longest, the bending moments and shear forces
b) Transformed section — The concrete cross- used in design may be obtained using the coefficients
section plus the area of reinforcement given in Table 12 and Table 13 respectively.
1 1 1 1
Dead load and imposed load (fixed) +— +—
12 16 –G –z
1 1. 1 1
Imposed load (not fixed) +— +— -— -—
10 12. 9 9
NOTE — For obtaining the bending moment, the coefficient shatl be multiplied by the totat design load and effective span.
Dead load and imposed load (fixed) 0.4 0.6 0.55 0.5
Imposed load (not fixed) 0.45 0.6 0.6 0.6
NOTE — For obtaining the shear force, the coet%cient shatl be multiplied by the totat design load.
For moments at supports where two unequal spans meet be used in the design of the member at that section
or in case where the spans are not equally loaded, the except as in 21.6.2.1.
average of the two values for the negative moment at
21.6.2.1 When the reaction in the direction of the
the support may be taken for design.
applied shear introduces compression into the end
Where coefficients given in Table 12 are used for region of the member, sections located at a distance
calculation of bending moments, redistribution referred less than d from the face of the support maybe designed
to in 21.7 shall not be permitted. for the same shear as that computed at distance d
(see Fig. 2).
21.5.2 Beams and Slabs Over Free End Supports
NOTE — The above clauses are applicable for beams generally
Where a member is built into a masonry wall which carrying uniformly distributed load or where the principaf load
is located farther than 2d from the face of the support.
develops only partial restraint, the member shall be
designed to resist a negative moment at the face of the 21.7 Redistribution of Moments
support of W1124 where W is the total design load and
Redistribution of moments maybe done in accordance
1is the effective span, or such other restraining moment
with 36.1.1 for Limit State Method and in accordance
as maybe shown to be applicable. For such a condition
with B-1.2 for Working Stress Method. However,
shear coefficient given in Table 13 at the end support
where simplified artalysis’using coefficients is adopted,
may be increased by 0.05.
redistribution of moments shall not be done.
21.6 Critical Sections for Moment and Shear
22 BEAMS
21.6.1 For monolithic construction, the moments
22.0 Effective Depth
computed at the face of the supports shall be used in
the design of the members at those section. For non- Effective depth of a beam is the distance between the
monolithic construction the design of the member shall centroid of the area of tension reinforcement and the
be done keeping in view 21.2. maximum compression fibre, excluding the thickness
of finishing material not placed monolithically with
21.6.2 Critical Section for Shear
the member and the thickness of any concrete provided
The shears computed at the face of the support shall to allow for wear. This will not apply to deep beams.
I
.
(b) (c)
(a)
b) For spans above 10 m, the values in (a) may For a cantilever, the clear distance from the free end
be multiplied by 10/span in metres, except of the cantilever to the lateral restraint shall not
for cantilever in which case deflection 100 b’
exceed 25 b or — whichever is less.
calculations should be made. d
c) Depending on the area and the stress of steel
for tension reinforcement, the values in (a) 23 SOLID SLABS
or (b) shall be modified by multiplying with
23.1 General
the modification factor obtained as per Fig. 4.
d) Depending on the area of compression The provisions of 22.2 for beams apply to slabs also.
reinforcement, the value of span to depth ratio NOTES
be further modified by multiplying with the 1 For slabs spanning in two directions, the shorter of the two
modification factor obtained as per Fig. 5. spans should be used for calculating the span to effective depth
ratios.
e) For flanged beams, the values of(a) or (b) be
2 For two-way slabs of shorter spans (up to 3.5 m) with mild
modified as per Fig. 6 and the reinforcement steel reinforcement, the span to overall depth ratios given below
percentage for use in Fig. 4 and 5 should be may generally be assumed to satisfy vertical deflection limits
based on area of section equal to b~d. for loading class up to 3 kN/m2.
NOTE — When deflections are required to be Simply supported slabs 35
calculated,the method given in Annex C may be used. Continuous slabs ‘ 40
22.3 Slenderness Limits for Beams to Ensure For high strength deformed bars of grade Fe 415, the values
given above should be multiplied by 0.8.
Lateral Stability
A simply supported or continuous beam shall be so 23.2 Slabs Continuous Over Supports
proportioned that the clear distance between the lateral Slabs spanning in one direction and continuous over
250 b’ supports shall be designed according to the provisions
restraints does not exceed 60 b or — whichever applicable to continuous beams.
d
is less, where d is the effective depth of the beam and
23.3 Slabs Monolithic with Supports
b the breadth of the compression face midway between
the lateral restraints. Bending moments in slabs (except flat slabs)
I
0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 2.83,0
*
PERCENTAGE TENSION REINFORCEMENT
Area of cross- section ofsteel required
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.1
10
..-
0 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00
1.00
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
0.75
0.70
..
constructed monolithically with the supports shall be Table 14 Values of k for Simply Supported
calculated by taking such slabs either as continuous and Continuous Slabs
over supports and capable of free rotation, or as (Clause 24.3.2.1)
members of a continuous framework with the supports,
taking into account the stiffness of such supports. If lne k for Simply k for Continuous
such supports are formed due to beams which justify Supported Slabs Slabs
fixity at the support of slabs, then the effects on the (1) (2) (3)
23.4.1 Restrained Slab with Unequal Conditions at FIG. 7 LOAD CARRIED BY SUPPORTED BEAMS
Adjacent Panels
24 COMPRESSION MEMBERS
in some cases the support moments calculated from
Table 26 for adjacent panels may differ significantly. 24.1 Definitions
The following procedure may be adopted to adjust 24.1.1 Column or strut is a compression member, the
them: effective length of which exceeds three times the least
a) Calculate the sum of moments at midspan and lateral dimension.
supports (neglecting signs). 24.1.2 Short and Slender Compression Members
b) Treat the values from Table 26 as fixed end
moments. A compression member may be consider~d as short
c) According to the relative stiffness of adjacent 1
when both the slenderness ratios ~ and ~ are less
spans, distribute the fixed end moments I!) b
across the supports, giving new support than 12:
moments.
where
d) Adjust midspan moment such that, when
added to the support moments from (c) 1 = Effective length in respect of the major axis,
(neglecting signs), the total should be equal ;= Depth in respect of the major axis,
to that from (a). 1 = Effective length in respect of the minor axis,
ey
H the resulting support moments are significantly and
greater than the value from Table 26, the tension steel b = Width of the member.
D = Depth of the cross-section measured in the 25.2.1.1 Design bond stress in limit state method for
plane under consideration. plain bars in tension shall be as below:
a) Lap splices shall not be used for bars larger The following values may be used where the strength
than 36 mm; for larger diameters, bars may of the weld has been proved by tests to be at least as
be welded (see 11.4); in cases where welding great as that of the parent bar.
is not practicable, lapping of bars larger than a) Splices in compression — For welded splices
36 mm may be permitted, in which case and mechanical connection, 100 percent of
additional spirals should be provided around the design strength of joined bars.
the lapped bars.
b) Splices in tension
b) Lap splices shall be considered as staggered
1) 80 percent of the design strength of welded
if the centre to centre distance of the splices
bars (100 percent if welding is strictly
is not less than 1.3 times the lap length supervised and if at any cross-section of
calculated as described in (c). the member not more than 20 percent of
b) Greater horizontal distance than the minimum shrinkage and temperature shall not be
specified in (a) should be provided wherever more than five times the effective depth
possible. However, when needle vibrators are of a solid slab or 450 mm whichever is
used the horizontal distance between bars of smaller.
a group may be reduced to two-thirds
the nominal maximum size of the coarse 25.4 Nominal Cover to Reinforcement
aggregate, provided that sufficient space is left 25.4.1 Nominal Cover
between groups of bars to enable the vibrator
to be immersed. Nominal cover is the design depth of concrete cover
to all steel reinforcements, including links. It is the
c) Where there are two or more rows of bars,
dimension used in design and indicated in the drawings.
the bars shall be vertically in line and the
It shall be not less than the diameter of the bar.
minimum vertical distance between the bars
shall be 15 mm, two-thirds the nominal
25.4.2 Nominal Cover to Meet Durability Requirement
maximum size of aggregate or the maximum
size of bars, whichever is greater. Minimum values for the nominal cover of normal-
weight aggregate concrete which should be provided
25.3.3 Maximum Distance Between Bars in Tension to all reinforcement, including links depending on the
Unless the calculation of crack widths shows that a condition of exposure described in 7.2.2 shall be as
b) Slabs NOTES
1) The horizontal distance between parallel 1 For main reinforcement up to 12 mm diarnoter bar for mild
main reinforcement bars shall not be exposure the nominat cover maybe reduced by 5 MM.
more than three times the effective depth 2 Unless specified otherwise, actuat concrato+~;er should not
of solid slab or 300 mm whichever is deviate from the required nominat cover by _ o MM.
smaller. 3 For exposure condition ‘severe’ and ‘very severe’, reduction
of 5 MM may be made, where concr@e grade is M 35 and
2) The horizontal distance between parallel
above.
reinforcement bars provided against
‘esistince ~
Simply Continuous Slabs Ribs columns
supported ~ ,—’—.
Simply Continuous Simply Continuous
supported supported
h mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
0.5 20 20 20 20 20 20 40
1 20 20 20 20 20 20 40
1.5 20 20 25 20 s 20 40
2 43 30 32 25 45 s 40
3 60 Q 45 z s 45 40
4 70 50 55 45 65 55 40
NOTES
1 The nominal covers given relate specifically to the minimum member dimensions given in Fig. 1.
25.5 Requirements of Reinforcement for two faces. The total area of such reinforcement shall
Structural Members be not less than 0.1 percent of the web area and
shall be distributed equally on two faces at a spacing
25.5.1 Beams
not exceeding 300 mm or web thickness whichever is
25.5.1.1 Tension reinforcement less.
a) Minimum reinforcement — The minimum 25.5.1.4 Transverse reinforcement in beams for shear
area of tension reinforcement shall be not less and torsion
than that given by the following:
The transverse reinforcement in beams shall be taken
~ 0.85 around the outer-most tension and compression bars.
—= —
In T-beams and I-beams, such reinforcement shall pass
bd f,
around longitudinal bars located close to the outer face
where of the flange.
A, = Minimum area of tension reinforcement, 25.5.1.5 Maximum spacing of shear reinforcement
b = Breadth of beam of the breadth of the
The maximum spacing of shear reinforcement
web of T-beam,
measured along the axis of the member shall not exceed
d= Effective depth, and
0.75 d for vertical stirrups and d for inclined stirrups
~= Characteristic strength of reinforcement at 45°, where d is the effective depth of the section
in N/mm*. under consideration. In no case shall the spacing exceed
b) Maximum reinforcement — The maximum 300 mm.
area of tension reinforcement shall not exceed
25.5.1.6 Minimum shear reinforcement
0.04 bl).
Minimum shear reinforcement in the form of stirrups
25.5.1.2 Compression reinforcement
shall be provided such that:
The maximum area of compression reinforcement shall
A
not exceed 0.04 bD. Compression reinforcement in J> 0“4
beams shall be enclosed by stirrups for effective lateral bs, - 0.87fy
restraint. The arrangement of stirrups shall be as
where
specified in 25.5.3.2.
A,v = Total cross-sectional area of stirrups legs
25.5.1.3 Side <face reinforcement effective in shear,
Where the depth of the web in a beam exceeds 750 mm, s v = Stirrup spacing along the length of the
side face reinforcement shall be provided along the member,
..
b= Breadtliof the beam or breadth of the web 25.5.2.2 Maximum diameter
of flanged beam, and
The diameter of reinforcing bars shall not exceed one-
f, = Characteristic strength of the stirrup eight of the total thickness of the slab.
reinforcement in N/mmz which shall not
be taken greater than 415 N/mm*. 25.5.3 Columns
Where the maximum shear stress calculated is less than 25.5.3.1 Longitudinal reinforcement
half the permissible value and in members of minor
a) The cross-sectional area of longitudinal
structural importance such as lintels, this provision
reinforcement, shall be not less than 0.8
need not be complied with.
percent nor more than 6 percent of the gross
25.5.1.7 Distribution of torsion reinforcement cross-sectional area of the column.
NOTE — The use of 6 percent reinforcement
When a member is designed for torsion (see 40 may involve practical difficulties in placing and
or B-6) torsion reinforcement shall be provided as compacting of concrete; hence lower percentage is
below: recommended. Where bars from the columns below
have to be lapped with those in the column under
a) The transverse reinforcement for torsion consideration, the percentage of steel shall usually not
exceed 4 percent.
shall be rectangular closed stirrups placed
perpendicular to the axis of the member. The b) In any column that has a larger cross-sectional
FIG. 10
~ TRANSVERSE
REINFORCEMENT
\
0 t~
FIG. 9
29.3 Shear
where
()
0.5 + -0.5
Where hollow blocks are used, for the purpose of
calculating shear stress, the rib width may be increased
to take account of the wall thickness of the block on
1 = Clear span, and one side of the rib; with narrow precast units, the width
D = Overall depth. of the jointing mortar or concrete may be included.
2) A zone measuring 0.3 D on either side 29.4 Deflection
of the mid-depth of the beam, which shall
contain the remainder of the tension steel, The recommendations for deflection in respect of
evenly distributed. solid slabs may be applied to ribbed, hollow block or
For span to depth ratios less than unity, voided construction. The span to effective depth ratios
the steel shall be evenly distributed over given in 22.2 for a flanged beam are applicable but
when calculating the final reduction factor for web
The moments and forces due to design loads on The recommendations given in 25.3 regarding
continuous slabs may be obtained by the methods given maximum distance between bars apply to areas of solid
in Section 5A (c) for solid slabs. Alternatively, the slabs concrete in this form of construction. The curtailment,
may be designed as a series of simply supported spans anchorage and cover to reinforcement shall be as
provided they are not exposed to weather or corrosive described below:
30.1.1 For the purpose of this clause, the following a) The direct design method as specified in 30.4,
definitions shall apply: and
b) The equivalent frame method as specified
a) Column strip — Column strip means a design
in 30.5.
strip having a width of 0.25 lZ,but not greater
than 0,2511 on each side of the column centre- In each case the applicable limitations given in 30.4
Iine, where 11 is the span in the direction and 30.5 shall be met.
moments are being determined, measured
centre-to-centre of supports and lZis the span 30.3.2 Bending Moments in Panels with Marginal
Beams or Walls
transverse to 11,measured centre-to-centre of
supports. Where the slab is supported by a marginal beam with
b) Middle strip — Middle strip means a design a depth greater than 1.5 times the thickness of the slab,
strip bounded on each of its opposite sides by or by a wall, then:
the column strip. a) the total load to be carried by the beam or
c) Panel — Panel means that part of a slab wall shall comprise those loads directly on
bounded on each of its four sides by the the wall or beam plus a uniformly distributed
centre-line of a column or centre-lines of load equal to one-quarter of the total load on
adjacent spans. the slab, and
/
/
\\ I //
CRITICAL SECTION
Y
—.— -—-
T
NOTE— D, is the diameter of column or colurna head to be considered for desigu artd dis effective doptli of
slab or drop as appropriate.
30.4.5.1 Columns built integrally with the slab system where KC and K, are flexural stiffnesses of
shall be designed to resist moments arising from loads column and slab respectively.
on the slab system.
Table 17 Minimum Permissible Values of oj
30.4.5.2 At an interior support, the supporting (Clause 30.4.6)
members above and below the slab shall be designed
to resist the moment M given by the following equation, Imposed Load/ Ratio ~ Value of actin
in direct proportion to their stiffnesses unless a general Dead Load 1
30.5.5.3 Column strip: Positive moment for each span 30.6.2.2 When unbalanced gravity load, wind,
earthquake or other forces cause transfer of bending
For each span, the column strip shall be designed to
moment between slab and column, a fraction (1 – LX)
resist 60 percent of the total positive moment in the
of the moment shall be considered transferred by
panel.
eccentricity of the shear about the centroid of the
30.5.5.4 Moments in the middle strip critical section. Shear stresses shall be taken as varying
linearly about the centroid of the critical section. The
The middle strip shall be designed on the following
value of a shall be obtained from the equation given
bases:
in 30.3.3.
a) That portion of the design moment not resisted
I I
I &.. ,a, ,,*. ~*Y
./
I
I
I
:?’:‘“ “**’”:;.: “
.4. -
. ..*
I
I
I
I
I
: “++..
”..
● * --d I
I d/2
~ SUPPORT SECTION
––––––––
-h _J
d/2 L-
LSECTION SECTION
I “4,
.:”’j
::.
*::~..
:i~.~
I r‘.,
I
it
I1
‘d ●:. .*,= ) d/2 I
\;:.,.
.’A:
..“*
J/
“.;*
.’ “~ ●*
‘)
.*
-*.”
d/2
I ,.a”
P”i
●
I ‘:* .:4:. ”~ a..
I**
I
‘,
“*o’
..’”
~e””:”
“a :. :*** ,
4:
‘
--M
\ i
‘I
\ / I d/2
---- L —————.—— —————J
T *
4 ij/2 k-
13C 13D
I i
❑ ✻
I I
i ..
$, ,Jb
4’. b’.
.
,. . i
I . . i. ...’ ?“
,,*,* .... . I
●, CRiTICAL
I
: : “:0 :J; ;:: I SECTION
.. ... * .,
I
! :W’..:i”’ I
4 1
d/2
T
i
L -———-
-----J“ I i t
dL d/2
~:?.;;;~-~;;--;j
SECTION
14A 14 B
..
— SUBTRACT FROM
OPENING
\ PERIPHERY
\ OPENING
CRITICAL
r CRITICAL SECTION
/ SECTION
\ L
~--’
COLUMN
--------
1.
. ...?..<..
L J
F
& b
OPENING
, 7 ~ LARGE OPENING *
r-------- i I
i 1
‘m
I .‘.:’”””-:”’
. ....!.. .’’.0.......
.: .,.-..
I
COLUMN
! “.’;.’ “’ ‘“*’ ‘s:: I
I I :.,.’“$’e::= “:”:;:
[ .....&, .. 1 *
I .’ ~ CRITICAL ; /;; ““~ ; :
I I SECTION ~
I I
L ---------- --~ \
L ------------ J CRITICAL
SECTION
150
50
~ REMAINDER
i?
.$
50
* REMAINDER
*
(n t
!$
:
1 1. La~, 1.1--9-Al 150mm—,. IWI
g g II
50 -, I--75 mm msx.
U2
~ REMAINDER
m Iwmm
la .,
I I/A /a H-
1
1.
I I
!r~~~ Iii
c yc
50
*
~ REMAINDER (ALL BARS) a . I
E
. . .
~ 1
g Lfui&f
m i? 50
ig REMAINDER
m
. ...... . ... . — 75 mm max
vfl .
I I I
I
1. CLEAR SPAN - I n
-J D L--CLEAR SPAN - I n D
t
FACE OF SUPPORT- FACE OF SUPPORT
FIG. 16 MINIMUMBENDJOINTLOCATION
ANDEXTENSION
FOR
REINFORCEMENT
INFLATSLABS
Openings of any size maybe provided in the flat slab d) Connections between the wall and the lateral
supports are designed to resist a horizontal
if it is shown by analysis that the requirements of
force not less than
strength and serviceability are met. However, for
31.5.1 For walls having thickness more than 200 mm, 32.2 Dktribution of Loading on Stairs
the vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall be
In the case of stairs with open wells, where spans partly
provided in two grids, one near each face of the wall.
crossing at right angles occur, the load on areas
31.5.2 Vertical reinforcement need not be enclosed common to any two such spans may be taken as one-
by transverse reinforcement as given in 25.5.3.2 for half in each direction as shown in Fig. 18. Where flights
CO1umn, if the vertical reinforcement is not greater or landings are embedded into walls for a length of
than 0.01 times the gross sectional area or where the not less than 110 mm and are designed to span in the
vertical reinforcement is not required for compression. direction of the flight, a 150 mm strip maybe deducted
from the loaded area and the effective breadth of the
32 STAIRS section increased by 75 mm for purposes of design (see
32.1 Effective Span of Stairs Fig. 19).
The effective span of stairs without stringer beams shall 32.3 Depth of Section
be taken as the following horizontal distances:
The depth of section shall be taken as the minimum
a) Where supported at top and bottom risers by thickness perpendicular to the soffit of the staircase.
beams spanning parallel with the risers, the
distance centre-to-centre of beams; 33 FOOTINGS
,1
f+”
/+%’
TT’f
DOWN
/
--w-
llomm~150mm
*fl&T,vEBRE.DTHJ
requirements are satisfied at every section. Sloped and 33.1.3 In the case of plain concrete pedestals, the angle
stepped footings that are designed as a unit shall be between the plane passing through the bottom edge of
constructed to assure action as a unit. the pedestal and the corresponding junction edge of
the column with pedestal and the horizontal plane (see
33.1.2 Thickness at the Edge of Footing
Fig. 20) shall be governed by the expression:
In reinforced and plain concrete footings, the thickness
at the edge shall be not less than 150 mm for footings 100 q.
on soils, nor less than 300 mm above the tops of piles
for footings on piles.
tan a g 0.9
d f.,
+1
“.
a) the footing acting essentially as a wide beam,
with a potential diagonal crack extending in
Calculated maximum bearing pressure at the
a plane across the entire width; the critical
base of the pedestal in N/mmz, and
section for this condition shall be assumed as
Characteristic strength of concrete at 28 days a vertical section located from the face of the
in ,N/mm: column, pedestal or wall at a distance equal
to the effective depth of footing in case of
~ -COLUMN
I/ /
footings on soils, and at a distance equal to
k’ half the effective depth of footing for footings
/ //
PLAIN CONCRETE on piles.
I
/
I ‘f/a
/ PEDESTAL
b) Two-way action of the footing, with potential
diagonal
truncated
cracking along the surface of
cone or pyramid around the
concentrated load; in this case, the footing
shall be designed for shear in accordance with
appropriate provisions specified in 30.6.
FIG. 20
33.2.4.2 In computing the external shear on any
33.2 Moments and Forces section through a footing supported on piles, the entire
62 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
The ‘design values’ are derived from the characteristic 35 CHARACTERISTIC AND DESIGN VALUES
values through the use of partial safety factors, one AND PARTIAL SAFETY FACTORS
for material strengths and the other for loads. In the
35.1 Characteristic Strength of Materials
absence of special considerations these factors should
have the values given in 35 according to the material, The term ‘characteristic strength’ means that value of
the type of loading and the limit state being considered. the strength of the material below which not more than
5 percent of the test results are expected to fall. The
34.2 Limit State of Collapse characteristic strength for concrete shall be in
The limit state of collapse of the structure or part of accordance with Table 2. Until the relevant Indian
the structure could be assessed from rupture of one or Standard Specifications for reinforcing ‘steel are
more critical sections due to elastic
and from buckling modified to include the concept of characteristic
or plastic instability (including the effects of sway strength, the characteristic value shall be assumed as
where appropriate) or overturning. The resistance to the minimum yield stress/0,2 percent proof stress
bending, shear, torsion and axial loads at every section specified in the relevant Indian Standard Specifications.
shall not be less than the appropriate value at that 35.2 Characteristic Loads
section produced by the probable most unfavorable
combination of loads on the structure using the The term ‘characteristic load’ means that value of load
appropriate partial safety factors. which has a 95 percent probability of not being
35.4 Partial Safety Factors a) Equilibrium between the internal forces and
the external loads is maintained.
35.4.1 Partial Safety Factor y~ for Loads
b) The ultimate moment of resistance provided
The values Yfgiven in Table 18 shall normally be used. at any section of a member is not less than 70
percent of the moment at the section obtained
Table 18 Values of Partial Safety Factor&
from an elastic maximum moment diagram
for Loads
covering all appropriate combinations of
(Clauses 17.2.3 .1,35.4.1 and B-4.3) loads.
Method of analysis as in 21 shall be used. The material a) Plane sections normal to the axis remain plane
strength to be assumed shall be characteristic values after bending.
in the determination of elastic properties of members . b) The maximum strain in concrete at the
irrespective of the limit state being considered. outermost compression fibre is taken as
Redistribution of the calculated moments maybe made 0.0035 in bending.
as given in 36.1.1. c) The relationship between the compressive
stress distribution in concrete and the strain
36.1.1 Redistribution of Moments in Continuous
in concrete may be assumed to be rectangle,
Beams and Frames
trapezoid, parabola or any other shape which
The redistribution of moments may be carried out result in prediction of strength in substantial
satisfying the following conditions: agreement with the results of test. An
NOTE— For the stress-straincurvein Fig.21the design NOTE— The limiting values of depth of neutral axis
stress blockparametersare as folIows(see Fig. 22). for different grades of steel based on the assumptions
of 37.1 are as follows:
Area of stress block = 0.36 -fC~.xu
Depth of centre of compressive force = 0.42 Xu fi Xu, dd
from the extremefibre in compression 250 0.53
where 415 0.48
fc, = Characteristiccompressive strength of concrete, 500 0.46
and
Xu= Depthof neutralaxis. The expression for obtaining the moments of resistance
for rectangular and T-Sections, based on the
assumptions of 37.1, are given in Annex G.
PARABOLIC fek
CURVE 38 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE:
COMPRESSION
r --, ~
38.2 Minimum Eccentricity
L~
The member shall be designed by considering
the assumptions given in 38.1 and the minimum
eccentricity. When the minimum eccentricity as
.—— — fy/1.~5
0.80fy
.0003 .001
fY
Es=200000N/mm2
o
STRAIN ~
FIG. 23 REPRESENTATIVE
STRESS-STRAINCURVESFORREINFORCEMENT
A,C =Area of longitudinal reinforcement for 38.4.1 The ratio of the volume of helical reinforcement
columns. to the volume of the core shall not be less than
0.36 (A,/AC-l)jJ~Y
38.4 Compression Members with Helical
Reinforcement where
The strength of compression members with helical A. = Gross area of the section,
reinforcement satisfying the requirement of 38.4.1 A: = Area of the core of the helically reinforced
shall be taken as 1.05 times the strength of similar column measured to the outside diameter of
member with lateral ties. the helix,
[1
PD~2
concrete, and i!’l==~
2000 D
.f, = Characteristic strength of the helical
reinforcement but not exceeding 415 N/mmz.
~_<b~2
38.5 Members Subjected to Combined Axial Load
and Uniaxial Bending
1
“-2000
–[ b
where
A member subjected to axial force and uniaxial bending
Pu = Axial load on the member,
shall be designed on the basis of 38.1 and 38.2.
lCX= Effective length in respect of the major axis,
NOTE — The design of member subject to combined axial
load and uniaxial bending will involve lengthy calculation by l,Y = Effective length in respect of the minor axis,
trial and error. In order to overcome these difficulties D = Depth of the cross-section at right angles to
interaction diagrams may be used. These have been prepared
the major axis, and
and published by BIS in 5P 16 ‘Design aids for reinforced
concrete to IS 456’. b = Width of the member.
38.6 Members Subjected to Combined Axial Load For design of section, 38.5 or 38.6 as appropriate shall
and Biaxial Bending apply.
NOTES
where
where 39.2.1.1 For solid slabs, the design shear strength for
VU = Shear force due to design loads; concrete shall be ~Ck, where k has the values given
below:
b = Breadth of the member, which for flanged
section shall be taken as the breadth of the
Overall 300 275 250 225 200 175 150
web, bW;and
Depth of or or
d = Effective depth. Slab, mm more less
39.1.1 Beams of Varying Depth k 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30
In the case of beams of varying depth the equation
NOTE — This provision shafl not apply to flat slabs for which
shall be modified as: 30.6 shafl apply
Concrete Code
100+
-
M 15 M 20 M 25 M 30 M 35 M 40 and above
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
NOTE — The term As is the area of longitudinal tension reinforcement which continue~ at least one effective depth beyond the
sectionbeing considered except at support where the full area of tension reinforcement maybe used ptuvided the &Udlhtg COnfOnnS
to 25.2.2 and 25.2.3.
c) For single bar or single group of parallel bars, 39.5.2 Shear Reinforcement for Sections Close to
all bent-up at the same cross-section: Supports
Vu, = 0.87 fY A,v sin a If shear reinforcement is required, the total area of this
is given by
where
A,, = Total cross-sectional area of stirrup legs or A,= a,b(~, -2 d~C/av)10.87~ >0.4 avb10.87fY
bent-up bars within a distance s,, This reinforcement should be provided within the
Sv = Spacing of the stirrups or bent-up bars along middle three quarters of aV, where a, is less than d,
with the length of the member, horizontal shear reinforcement will be effective than
Tv = Nominal shear stress, vertical.
._LLLull
~av--+
39.5.3 Enhanced Shear Strength Near Supports 40.1.1 The design rules laid down in 40.3 and 40.4
(SimplfiedApproach) shall apply to beams of solid rectangular cross-section.
However, these clauses may also be applied to flanged
The procedure given in 39.5.1 and 39.5.2maybe used
beams, by substituting bw for bin which case they are
for all beams. However for beams carrying generally
generally conservative; therefore specialist literature
uniform load or where the principal load is located
may be referred to.
farther than 2d from the face of support, the shear stress
may be calculated at a section a distance d from the 40.2 Critical Section
face of support. The value of ZC is calculated in
accordance with Table 19 and appropriate shear Sections located less than a distanced, from the face
reinforcement is provided at sections closer to the of the support may be designed for the same torsion
support, no further check for shear at such sections is as computed at a distance d, where d is the effective
required. depth.
In structures, where torsion is required to maintain Equivalent shear V., shall be calculated from the
equilibrium, members shall be designed for torsion in formula:
accordance with 40.2 to 40.4. However, for such
indeterminate structures where torsion can be V,= VU+l.6;
eliminated by releasing redundant restraints, no specific
design for torsion is necessary, provided torsional where
stiffness is neglected in the calculation of internal Ve = Equivalent shear,
forces. Adequate control of any torsional cracking is
vu = Shear,
provided by the shear reinforcement as per 39.
Tu = Torsional moment, and
NOTE— The approach to design in this clause is as follows:
b = Breadth of beam.
Torsional reinforcement is not calculated separately from that
required for bending and shear. Instead the total longitudinal The equivalent nominal shear stress ~v~ in this case
reinforcement is determined for a fictitious bending moment
shall be calculated as given in 40.1, except for
which is a function of actual bending moment and torsion;
similarly web reinforcement is determined for a fictitious shear substituting VUby V~.The values of ~v~shall not exceed
which is a function of actual shear and torsion. the values of ~C~,X given in Table 20.
40.4.1 Reinforcement for torsion, when required, shall b = Breadth of the member,
consist of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement. ~ = Characteristic strength of the stirrup
reinforcement,
40.4.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement
T,C = Equivalent shear stress as specified
The longitudinal reinforcement shall be designed to in 40.3.1, and
resist an equivalent bending moment, M~l, given by Tc = Shear strength of the concrete as per
Me, = M“ + M, Table 19.
where
A-1 Self compacting concrete is concrete that is A-3 CHARACTERISTICS OF FRESH SELF
able to flow under its own weight and completely COMPACTING CONCRETE
fill the formwork, even in the presence of dense The level of fluidity of self compacting concrete
reinforcement, without segregation, whilst maintaining is governed chiefly by the dosing and type of
homogeneity. superplasticizer. Due to the high fluidity of self
compacting concrete, the risk of segregation and
A-2 APPLICATION AREA
blocking is very high. Preventing segregation is
Self compacting concrete may be used in precast- therefore an important feature of the control regime.
applications or for concrete placed on site. It can be The tendency to segregation can be reduced by the
manufactured in a site batching plant or in a ready mix use of a sufficient amount of fines (e 0.125 mm), or
concrete plant and delivered to site by truck. It can using a Viscosity Modifying Admixture (VMA).
then be placed either by pumping or pouring into Features of fresh self compacting concrete
ANNEX B
(Clauses 17.2,2,21 .3.1,21.7,25.2.1 and 31.1)
NOTES
1 For high yield strength deformed bars of Grade Fe 500 the permissible stress in direct tension and flexural tension shall be 0.55 ~,.
The permissible stresses for shear and compression reinforcement shall be as for Grade Fe 415.
2 For welded wire fabric conforming to accepted standard [6-5A(46)], the permissible value in tension ax is 230 N/mmz.
3 For the purpose of this Section, the yield stress of steels for which there is no clearly defined yield point should be taken to be 0.2
percent proof stress.
4 When mild steel conforming to Grade II of accepted standard [6-5A(45)] is used, the permissible stresses shall be 90 percent of the
permissible stresses in CO13, or if the design details have already been worked out on the basis of mild steel conforming to Grade 1 of
accepted standard [6-5 A(45)]; the area of reinforcement shall be increased by 10 percent of that required for Grade 1 steel.
in 38.5 after applying appropriate load factors as given The negative sign in the formula applies when the
in Table 18. bending moment M increases numerically in the same
direction as the effective depth d increases, and the
B-5 SHEAR positive sign when the moment decreases numerically
B-5.1 Nominal Shear Stress in this direction.
The nominal shear stress Tv in beams or slabs of B-5.2 Design Shear Strength of Concrete
uniform depth shall be calculated by the following
B-5.2.1 The permissible shear stress in concrete in
equation:
beams without shear reinforcement is given in
v Table 23.
‘“”E B-5.2.1.1 For solid slabs the permissible shear stress
where
in concrete shall be kTCwhere k has the value given
V = Shear force due to design loads, below:
b = Breadth of the member, which for flanged
sections shall be taken as the breadth of the Overall 300 275 250 225 200 175 150
Depth of or or
web, and
Slab, mm more less
d = Effective depth.
In the case of beams of varying depth, the equation NOTE — This does not apply to flat slabs for which 30.6 shatl
apply.
shall be modified as:
B-5.2.2 Shear Strength of Members Under Axial
Compression
NOTE — A, is that area of Iongitudhud tension reinforeement which continues at least one efftxtive depth beyond the section beirtg
considered except at supports where the full area of tension reinforcement may be used provided the detailing conforms to 25.2.2
and 25.2.3.
B-5.4 Design of Shear Reinforcement Shear failure at sections of beams and cantilevers
without shear reinforcement will normally occur on
When ‘cVexceeds ‘cCgiven in Table 23, shear plane inclined at an angle 30° to the horizontal. If the
reinforcement shall be provided in any of the following angle of failure plane is forced to be inclined more
forms: steeply than this [because the section considered
a) Vertical stirrups, (X -X) in Fig. 24 is close to a support or for other
b) Bent-up bars along with stirrups, and reasons], the shear force required to produce failure is
increased.
c) Inclined stirrups.
The enhancement of shear strength maybe taken into
Where bent-up bars are provided, their contribution
account in the design of sections near a support by
towards shear resistance shall not be more than half
increasing design shear strength of concrete, ZCto 2d
that of the total shear reinforcement.
~C/avprovided that the design shear stress at the face
Shear reinforcement shall be provided to carry a shear of support remains less than the values given in
equal to V– ‘cCbd. The strength of shear reinforcement Table 24. Account may be taken of the enhancement
V, shall be calculated as beIow: in any situation where the section considered is closer
to the face of a support of concentrated load than twice
a) For vertical stirrups
the effective depth, d. To be effective, tension
reinforcement should extend on each side of the point
where it is intersected by a possible failure plane for a
distance at least equal to the effective depth, or be
b) For inclined stirrups or a series of bars bent- provided with an equivalent anchorage.
up at different cross-sections:
B-5.5.2 Shear Reinforcement for Sections Close to
Supports
B-6.3 Shear and Torison Two legged closed hoops enclosing the corner
longitudinal bars shall have an area of cross-section
B-6.3.1 Equivalent Shear A,v, given by
Equivalent shear, V. shall be calculated from the
formula & - ‘ Sv : ~;d: Jbut the total transverse
b,d, 6,, . 1 Sv
ANNEX C
(Clauses 21.3.2,22.2.1 and41.1)
CALCULATION OF DEFLECTION
C-1.l The total deflection shall be taken as the sum b = Breadth of compression face.
of the short-term deflection determined in accordance For continuous beams, deflection shall be
with C-2 and the long-term deflection, in accordance calculated using the values of Z , 1~, and M,
with C-3 and C-4. modified by the following equatio~
~
[1
=k x,+x,
C-2 SHORT-TERM DEFLECTION e 1 +(1 – kl)xo
2
C-2.1 The short-term deflection may be calculated by
where
the usual methods for elastic deflections using the
short-term modulus of elasticity of concrete, EC and Xe = Modified value of X,
an effective moment of intertia Z~ffgiven by the x,,x, = Values of X at the supports,
following equation: X. = Value of X at mid span,
k, = Coefficient given in Table 25, and
Ir x= Value of Z=, Z= or M, as appropriate.
Ieff = ; but
~2~~ ~_X bW
Mddb (1 C-3 DEFLECTION DUE TO SHRINKAGE
where
k, 0,5 0,6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
or a., ,C(F~) = Initial plus creep deflection due to
less
permanent loads obtained using an
k, O 0.03 0.08 0.16 0.30 0.50 0.73 0.91 0.97 1.0 elastic analysis with an effective
modulus of elasticity;
NOTE— k2 is given by
ANNEX D
(Clauses 23.4 and 36.1.2)
SLABS SPANNING IN TWO DIRECTIONS
D-1 RESTRAINED SLABS apply only to the middle strips and no re-distribution
shall be made.
D-1.O When the corners of a slab are prevented from
lifting, the slab may be designed as specified in D-1.l D-1.4 Tension reinforcement provided at mid-span in
to D-1.11. the middle strip shall extend in the lower part of the
slab to within 0.251 of a continuous edge, or 0.151 of
D-1.l The maximum bending m~ments per unit width
a discontinuous edge.
in a slab are given by the following equations:
D-1.5 Over the continuous edges of a middle strip,
Mx = ctxwl: the tension reinforcement shall extend in the upper part
of the slab a distance of 0.151 from the support, and at
MY =cXYWl; least 50 percent shall extend a distance of 0.31.
Interior Panels:
Negative moment at 0.032 0.037 0.043 0.047 0.051 0.053 0.060 0.065 0.032
continuous edge
Positive moment at 0.024 0.028 0.032 0.036 0.039 0.041 0.045 0.049 0.024
mid-span
2 One Short Edge
Discontinuous:
Negative moment at 0.037 0.043 0.048 0.051 0.055 0.057 0.064 0.068 0.037
continuous edge
Positive moment at 0.028 0.032 0.036 0.039 0.041 0.044 0.048 0.052 0.028
mid-span
3 One Long Edge
MIDDLE STRIP
——- 1
g~$’~g
to the sides of the slab and extending from the edges a adequate provision to resist torsion at corners and to
minimum distance of one-fifth of the shorter span. The prevent the corners from lifting, the maximum
lxlly 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.75 2.0 2.5 3.0
ax 0.062 0.074 0.084 0.093 0.099 0.104 0.113 0.118 0.122 0.124
~Y
0.062 0.061 0.059 0.055 0.051 0.046 0.037 0.029 0.020 0.014
ANNEX E
(Clause 25.2)
EFFECTIVE LEGNTH OF COLUMNS
relative lateral displacement of the ends is not E-2 To determine whether a column is a no sway or a
prevented. In the latter case, it is recommended that sway column, stability index Q may be computed as
the effective length ratio lC/l may not be taken to be given below:
less than 1.2.
NOTES
1 Figures 26 and 27 are reproduced from ‘The Strutural
where
Engineer’ No. 7, Volume 52, July 1974 by the permission of
the Council of the Institution of Structural Engineers, U.K. Pu = Sum of axial loads on all column in the
storey,
\.
HINGED 1.0
I \l l\l I I .
0.9
0.8 I 1 \ I \ I [
0.7 l\ 1 \ 1 x L>
t lx ‘b.\ % \~
0.6
N x
‘L
1 \
l\l
I w
I
N1’i’h
I lx I
0.5 I
0.4
0.3
o.2~
0.1
‘‘ ‘“”’”’
~ \“ L
l\ l\ l\ I
FiXED
0
(1 \ ().1 ().2 ().3 0.4 05 (36 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
$p
FIXED HINGED
..
;
,,, #
.-,
.
HINGED 1.0
0.9 I
0.8
0.7
0.6
(+
0.5
0.4
0.2
0.1
?07
FIXED
o\
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 o-g 1-0
Pz
FIXED HINGED
AU = Elastically computed first order lateral If Q <0.04, then the column in the frame may be taken
deflection, as no sway column, otherwise the column will be
considered as sway column.
Hu = Total lateral force acting within the storey,
and E-3 For normal usage assuming idealized conditions,
h, = Height of the storey. the effective length 1~~of in a given plane may be
assessed on the basis of Table 28.
84 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
Table 28 Effective Length of Compression Members
(Clause E-3)
I
Effectively held in position and /
restrained against rotation at 0.501 0.651
both ends
I
\
rl
Effectively held in position and
restrained against rotation at one
end, and at the other restrained
7 1+
/1
!
1.001 1.201
against rotation but not held in /
oosition 11
t
/////m/
1
L/
t+
one end but not restrained
against rotation, and at the other 2.001 2.001
end restrained against rotation /’
J
but not held in position /
/
I
restrained against rotation at one i
end but not held in position nor 2.001 2.001
restrained against rotation at the /’
1
other end 7/ /
Z??Z
..
~. /
ANNEX F
(Clauses 34.3.2 and 42.1)
CALCULATION OF CRACK WIDTH
Provided that the strain in the tension reinforcement is distributions, having a value of zero at the neutral axis
limited to 0.8 FY/E,, the design surface crack width, and a value at the centroid of the tension steel of
which should not exceed the appropriate value given 1 N/mm2 instantaneously, reducing to 0.55 N/mm2 in
in 34.3.2 may be calculated from the following the long-term, acting over the tension zone divided by
equation: the steel area.
Design surface crack width These assumptions are illustrated in Fig. 28,
3acrEm where
Wa=
~+z(a. –Cmn) h = Overall depth of the section,
h–x
x = Depth from the compression face to the
where neutral axis. *
a Cr = Distance from the point considered to the L = Maximum compressive stress in the concrete,
The concrete and the steel are both considered to be A, = Area of tension reinforcement,
fully elastic in tension and in compression. The elastic b = Width of the section at the centroid of the
modulus of the steel maybe taken as 200 kN/mm2 and tension steel,
the elastic modulus of the concrete is as derived from E, = Strain at the level considered, calculated *
the equation given in 5.2.3.1 both in compression and ignoring the stiffening of the concrete in the
in tension. tension zone,
Alternatively, as an approximation, it will normally a = Distance from the compression face to the
be satisfactory to calculate the steel stress on the basis point at which the crack width is being
of a cracked section and then reduce this by an amount calculated, and
equal to the tensile force generated by the triangular d = Effective depth.
k I Ec fc
As
STRESS IN CONCRETE
I ● ●
1 N / mmz IN SHORT TERM
0.55 N/mm2 IN LONG TERM
FIG. 28
.
ANNEX G
(Clause 38.1)
where
c)
Mu = 0.87 fy~,d
[1
l–—
‘% f,
bd f&
1
G-2 FLANGED SECTION
Mu,li. = 0.36% l–O.42~ bd’ f=,
[ G-2.1 For XUc Dr the moment of resistance may be
d) If x,jd is greater than the limiting value, the calculated from the equation given in G-1.l.
section should be redesigned.
G-2.1 The limiting value of the moment of resistance
In the above equations, of the section may be obtained by the following
equation when the ratio Df Id does not exceed 0.2:
x = Depth of neutral axis,
d“ = Effective depth,
$
A,t
= Characteristic strength of reinforcement,
= Area of tension reinforcement,
Mu = 0.36+
[
1–0.42+
1 f&bwd2
[1
& = Characteristic compressive strength of Df
+ 0.45 f& (b~+,) D~ d –y
concrete,
b = Width of the compression face,
where
Mu.,i~= Limiting moment of resistance of a section
without compression reinforcement, and Mu, Xu -, d and ~k are same as in G-1.1,
x . ma = Limiting value of x“ from 37.1. b~ = Breadth of the compression face/fkmge,
bw = Breadth of the web,
G-1.2 Section with Compression Reinforcement
D, = Thickness of the flange.
Where the ultimate moment of resistance of section
exceeds the limiting value, Mu. ~i~ compression G-2.2.1 When the ratio Df Id exceeds 0.2,the moment
reinforcement may be obtained from the following of resistance of the section may be calculated by the
equation: following equation:
where
+0.45 fCk (b~–bw) y~ d-;
[1 may be calculated by the ‘equations given in G-2.2
when D~Ixu does not exceed 0.43 and G-2.2.1 when
Df /xU exceeds 0.43; in both cases substituting Xu,-
Yf = (0.15 XU+ 0.65 D~), but not greater than D, by x..
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are 1S No. Title
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ (Part 4): 1972 Types of concrete
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The
(Part 5): 1972 Formwork for concrete
standards listed may be used by the Authority as a guide
in conformance with the requirements of the referred (Part 6): 1972 Equipment, tool and plant
(Part 1): 1965 General requirements (Part 10) :1973 Tests and testing apparatus
(Part 2): 1965 Reinforced concrete structures (Part 11) :1973 Prestressed concrete
(5) 3812 Specification for pulverized 2062:1999 Steel for general structural
fuel ash: purposes (flfih revision)
(Part 1): 2003 For use as pozzolana in cement, (13) 4082:1996 Recommendations on stacking
cement mortar and concrete and storage of construction
(second revision) materials and components at
site (second revision)
(Part 2): 2003 For use as admixture in cement
mortar and concrete (second (14) 516:1959 Method of test for strength of
revision) concrete
(6) 12089:1987 Specification for granulated 5816:1999 Method of test for splitting
slag for manufacture of Portland tensile strength of concrete
slag cement @rst revision)
(7) 383:1970 Specification for coarse and (15) 1343:1980 Code of practice forprestressed
(33) 875 Code of practice for design (Part 2): 1981 With hollow clay filler blocks
loads (other than earthquake) (jWst revision)
for buildings and structures: (44) 432 Specification for mild steel
(Part 1): 1987 Dead loads — Unit weights of (Part 1): 1982 and medium tensile steel bars
building material and stored and hard-drawn steel wire for
materials (second revision) concrete reinforcement Part 1
Mild steel and medium tensile
(Part 2): 1987 Imposed loads (second revision)
steel bars (third revision)
(Part 3): 1987 Wind loads (second revision)
(45) 1566:1982 Specification for hard-
(Part 4): 1987 Snow loads (second revision) drawn steel wire fabric for
(Part 5): 1987 Special loads and load concrete reinforcement (second
combinations (second revision) revision)
FOREWORD ... 3
1 SCOPE ... 5
2 STRUCTURAL DESIGN USING PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ... 5
FOREWORD
This sub-section is largely based on IS 1343:1980 ‘Code of practice for prestressed concrete @-st revision)’,
which is under revision at the time of publication of this Code. Major changes have been envisaged in the
revision of IS 1343. In the absence of availability of finalized version of revised IS 1343, at the time of revision
of this Code, the provision of design as per existing IS 1343: 1980 have been continued through appropriate
reference to the same.
STANDARDS
DESIGN
6 Steel
OF INDIAN
6 STRUCTURAL
Section
PART
BUREAU
NATIONAL
CONTENTS
FOREWORD ... 3
1 SCOPE ... 5
2 TERMINOLOGY .,. 5
3 PLANS AND DRAWINGS ... 5
4 MATERIALS ... 5
5 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION IN STEEL ... 5
6 DESIGN USING LIMIT STATE METHOD ... 5
7 SPACE FRAME ... 6
FOREWORD
This Section covers the structural design aspect of steel structures in buildings.
This Section covers the use of hot-rolled structural steel sections and steel tubes in buildings. It permits the
design by working stress method and plastic theory, and now in this revision by limit state method. Further,
reference to space frame has now found place in this Section.
This Section is based on IS 800:1984 ‘Code of practice for general construction in steel (second revision)’ and
IS 806:1968 ‘Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building construction @-st revision)’, and also
enables design using limit state method.
More rigorous analytical procedures than envisaged as per this Section are available and can be made use of for
finding effective lengths of compression members in determining elastic critical loads.
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
Section 6 Steel
6.1.2 In this method, the factored loads, in different 6.2 The detailed design procedure shall be as agreed
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ (Part 1): 1985 Tolerances of form, orientation,
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The location and run-out, and
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time appropriate geometrical
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may definitions (lirst revision)
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance (Part 2): 1992 Maximum material principles
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the (first revision)
Code.
(Part 3): 1992 Dimensioning and tolerancing
In the following list, the number appearing in the first of profiles (second revision)
column within parentheses indicates the number of the (Part 4): 1976 Practical examples of indications
reference in this PartJSection. on drawings
1S No. Title IS 8976:1978 Guide for preparation and
(1) 800:1984 Code of practice for general arrangement of sets of drawings
construction in steel (second and parts list
revision) (3) Structural Steel
(2) 962:1989 Code of practice for architectural 1977:1996 Specification for low tensile
and building drawings (second structural steels (third revision)
revision) 2062:1999 Specification for steel for
8000 Geometrical tolerancing on g&eral structural purpose (jijlh
technical drawings: revision)
Welding Consumables (Part 1): 1992 Hexagon head bolts (size range
Ml.6 to M64) ~ourth revision)
1278:1972 Specification for filler rods and
wires for gas welding (second (Part 2): 2002 Hexagon head screws (size
revision) range Ml.6 to M64) (fourth
revision)
814:1991 Specification for covered
electrodes for manual metal arc IS 1367 Technical supply conditions for
welding of carbon and carbon threaded steel fasteners:
manganese steels f$ijlh revision) (Part 1): 2002 General requirements for
1395:1982 Specification for low and bolts, screws and studs (third
medium alloy steel covered revision)
electrodes for manual metal arc (Part 2): 2002 Tolerances for fastners — Bolts,
welding (third revision) screws, studs and nuts —
7280:1974 Specification for bare wire Product grades A, B and C
electrodes for submerged arc (third revision)
weMing of structural steels IS 3640:1982 Specification for hexagon fit
3613:1974 Specification for acceptance bolts (jlrst revision)
tests for wire-flux combinations IS 3757:1985 Specification for high strength
for submerged arc welding first structural bolts (second
revision) revision)
6419:1996 Specification for welding rods IS 6623:1985 Specification for high strength
and bare electrodes for gas structural nuts (jirst revision)
shielded arc welding of
IS 6639:1972 Specification for hexagon bolts
structural steel (jirst revision)
for steel structures
6560:1996 Specification for molybdenum
Washers
and chromium-molybdenum
low alloy steel welding rods and IS 5369:1975 General requirements for plain
bare electrodes for gas shielded washers and lock washers oirst
arc welding @rst revision) revision)
FOREWORD ... 3
1 SCOPE ... 5
2 TERMINOLOGY ... 5
3 MATERIALS, PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ... 6
4 MODULAR CO-ORDINATION, ARCHITECTURAL TREATMENT . .. 6
AND FINISHES
5 COMPONENTS . .. 7
6 PREFABRICATION SYSTEMS AND STRUCTURAL SCHEMES ... 8
7 JOINTS ... 12
8 TESTS FOR COMPONENTS/STRUCTURES ... 13
9 MANUFACTURE, STORAGE, TRANSPORT AND ERECTION OF ... 14
PRECAST ELEMENTS
FOREWORD
Prefabrication, though desirable for large scale building activities, has yet to take a firm hold in the country. Two
aspects of prefabrication specifically to be borne in mind are the system to be adopted for the different categories
of buildings and the sizes of their components. Here the principle of modular co-ordination is of value and its use
is recommended.
Advantages of recent trends in prefabrication have been taken note of and also the hazards attended to such
construction. A few recommendations on the need to avoid ‘progressive collapse’ of the structure have been
included. This has become necessary in view of such collapses in the past. A specific point to be borne in mind,
therefore, is the need to make the structure reasonably safe against such a collapse.
Since the aim of prefabrication is to effect economy, improvement in quality and speed in construction, the
.-
selection of proper materials for prefabrication is also an important factor in the popularization of this technique.
The use of locally available materials with required characteristics and those materials which, due to their innate
characteristics like lightweight, easy workability, thermal insulation, non-combustibility, etc, effect economy
and improved quality, may be tried. However, this Section pertains to prefabricated elements with cementations
materials.
It is possible to achieve or evolve aesthetically satisfying designs using prefabricated construction. A careful and
judicious handling of materials and use of finishes on a prefabricated building can help the designer a great deal
in ensuring that the appearance of the building as aesthetically appealing. The purpose of finishes and architectural
treatment is not only to give prefabricated buildings an individual character but also to effect better performance
and greater user satisfaction.
The design of prefabricated buildings shall include provision for all installations of services and their required
piping, wiring and accessories to be installed in the building.
This Section was first published in 1970 and was subsequently revised in 1983. In the last revision the following
main changes were made:
In this revision, this Section, earlier named as Prefabrication and Systems Building has been named and restructured
as follows:
This sub-section covers Prefabricated concrete. In this revision the following main changes have been made:
a) Modular coordination and modular dimension of the components have been revised to have more
flexibility for planning.
b) The provisions on tolerance has been revised to include different types of prefabricated components.
All standards cross-refereed to in the main text of the sub-section, are subject to revision. The parties to agreement
based on this sub-section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the
standard.
systems, design considerations, joints and manufacture, a) to reduce the variety of component sizes produced, and
storage, transport and erection of prefabricated h) to allow the building designer greater flexibility in the
arrangement of components.
concrete elements for use in buildings and such related
requirements for prefabricated concrete. 2.1.10 Modular Grid — A rectangular coordinate
reference system in which the distance between
2 TERMINOLOGY consecutive lines is the basic module or a multi-
2.1 For the purpose of this sub-section, the following modtde. This multi-module may differ for each of the
two dimensions of the grid.
2.1.1 Authority Having Jurisdiction – The Authority 2.1.11 Multi-module — A module whose size is a
which has been created by a statute and which, for the selected multiple of the basic module.
purpose of administering the Code/Part, may authorize 2.1.12 Prefabricate — To fabricate components or
a committee or an official or an agency to act on its assembled units prior to erection or installation in a
behalfi hereinafter called the ‘Authority’. building.
2.1.2 Basic Module — The fundamental module used 2.1.13 Prefabricated Building — The partlylfully
in modular co-ordination, the size of which is selected assembled and erected building, of which the structural
for general application to building and its components. parts consist of prefabricated individual units or
NOTE — The value of the basic module has been chosen as assemblies using ordinary or controlled materials,
100 mm for the maximum flexibility and convenience. The including service facilities; and in which the service
symbol for the basic module is M.
equipment may be either prefabricated or constructed
2.1.3 Cellular Concrete — The material consisting of in-situ.
an inorganic binder (such as, lime or cement or both)
2.1.14 Sandwich Concrete Panels — Panels made by
in combination with a finely ground material
sandwiching an insulation material between two layers
containing siliceous material (such as sand), gas
of reinforced concrete to act as insulation for concrete
generating material (for example, aluminium powder),
panels.
water and harmless additives (optional); and steam
cured under high pressure in autoclaves. 2.1.15 Self Compacting Concrete — Concrete that is
able to flow under its own weight and completely fill
2.1.4 Components — A building product formed as a
the voids within the formwork, even in the presence
distinct unit having specified sizes in three dimensions.
of dense reinforcement without any vibration, whilst
2.1.5 Composite Members — Structural members maintaining homogeneity without segregation.
comprising prefabricated structural units of steel,
2.1.16 Shear Connectors — Stmctural elements, such
prestressed concrete or reinforced concrete and cast
as anchors, studs, channels and spirals, intended to
imsitu concrete connected together in such a manner
transmit the horizontrd Wear between the prefabricated
that they act monolithically.
member and the cast in-situ concrete and also to
2.1.6 Increments — Difference between two prevent vertical separation at the interface.
homologous dimensions of components of successive
sizes. 2.1.17 System — It is a particular method of
construction of buildings with certain order and
2.1.7 Light Weight Concrete — Concrete of discipline using the prefabricated components, tunnel
substantially lower unit weight than that made from form or large panel shutters which are inter-related in
gravel or crushed stone. functions and are produced based on a set of
2.1.8 Module — A unit of size used in dimensional instructions.
co-ordination. 2.1.18 Unit — Building material formed as a simple
2.1.9 Modular Co-ordination — Dimensional article with all three dimensions specified, complete
All materials shall conform to Part 5 ‘Building Materials’. These rules relate to the following basic elements:
3.1.1 While selecting the materials for prefabrication, a) The planning grid in both directions of the
the following characteristics shall be considered: horizontal plan shall be:
1) 15 M for industrial buildings,
a) Easy availability;
2) 3 M for other buildings.
b) Light weight for easy handling and transport;
The centre lines of load bearing walls should
c) Thermal insulation property;
preferably coincide with the gridlines.
d) Easy workability;
b) The planning module in the verticrd direction
e) Durability; shall be 2 M for industrial buildings and 1 M
f) Non-combustibility; for other buildings.
.!3) Sound insulation; c) Prefened increments for sill heights, doors,
h) Economy; and windows and other fenestration shall be 1 M.
a) Such drawings shall describe the elements and 4.2 Architectural Treatment and Finishes
the structure and assembly including all
Treatment and finishes have to be specified keeping
required data of physical properties of
in view the requirements of protection, function and
component materials. Material specification,
aesthetics of internal and external spaces and surfaces.
age of concrete for demoulding, casting/erection
tolerance and type of curing to be followed. While deciding the type of architectural treatment and
b) Details of connecting joints of prefabricates finishes for prefabricated buildings, the following
shall be given to an enlarged scale. points should be kept in view:
c) Site or shop location of services, such as a) Suitability for mass production techniques;
installation of piping, wiring or other b) Recognition of the constraints imposed by the
accessories integral with the total scheme shall level of workmanship available;
be shown separately.
c) Possibility of using different types of finishes;
d) Data sheet indicating the location of the inserts
d) Use of finishes and architectural treatment
and acceptable tolerances for supporting the
for the creation of a particular architectural
prefabricate during erection, location and
character in individual buildings and in
position of doors/windows/ventilators, etc, if
groups of buildings by the use of colour,
any.
texture, projectio~ and recesses on surfaces,
e) The drawings shall also clearly indicate etc; ,“
location of handling arrangements for lifting
e) Incorporation of structural elements like
and handling the prefabricated elements.
joists, columns, beams, etc, as architectural
Sequence of erection with critical checkpoints
features and the treatment of these for better
and measures to avoid stability failure during
overall performance and appearance;
construction stage of the building.
f) Satisfactory finishing of surfaces; and
4 MODULAR CO-ORDINATION, g) Use of light weight materials to effect
ARCHITECTURAL TREATMENT AND economy in the structural system.
FINISHES
Some of the acceptable methods of finishes integral
4.1 Modular Co-ordination with the precasting are:
The basic module is to be adopted. After adopting this, a) Concrete surface moulded to design; shape;
6.3.3.1.2 Based on construction, the precast walls may NOTE — This system derives its stability and stiffness from
the box units which are formed by four adjacent walls. Walls
be classified as: are jointed to make rigid connections among themselves. The
box unit rests on foundation which may be of conventional
a) Homogeneous walls — which could be solid,
type or precast type.
hollow or ribbed; and
b) Non-homogeneous walls — these could be 6.4 Design Considerations
composite or sandwich panels. The precast structure should be analyzed as a
6.3.3.1.3 Based on their locations and functional monolithic one and the joints in them designed to take
requirements the precast walls may also classified as: the forces of an equivalent discrete system. Resistance
to horizontal loading shall be provided by having
a) external walls, which may be load bearing or appropriate moment and shear resisting joints or
non-load bearing depending upon the lay-out; placing shear walls (in diaphragm braced frame type
these are usually non-homogeneous walls of of construction) in two directions at right angles or
sandwiched type to impart better thermal otherwise. No account is to be taken of rotational
comforts; and stiffness, if any, of the floor-wall joint in case of precast
b) internal walls providing resistance against bearing wall buildings. The individual components
vertical loads, horizontal loads, fire, etc; these shall be designed, taking into consideration the
are normally homogeneous walls. appropriate end conditions and loads at various stages
of construction. The components of the structure shall
6.3.3.2 Precustfloors
be designed for loads in accordance with Part 6
6.3.3.2.1 Depending upon the composition of units, ‘Structural Design, Section 1 Loads, Forces and
precast flooring units may be homogeneous or non- Effects’. In addition members shall be designed for
homogeneous. handling, erection and impact loads that might be
expected during handling ahd erection.
a) Homogeneous floors may be solid slabs,
cored slabs, ribbed or waffle slabs. 6.4.1 In some conventional forms of construction,
b) Non-homogeneous floors may be multi- experience has shown that the structures are capable
layered ones with combinations of light of safely sustaining abnormal conditions of loading
weight concrete or reinforced/prestres sed and remaining stable after the removal of primary
concrete, with filler blocks. structural members. It has been shown that some
forms of building structure and particularly some
6.3.3.2.2 Depending upon the way the loads are industrialized large panel systems have little reserve
transferred, the precast floors may be classified as one
strength to resist forces not specifically catered
way or two way systems: for in the design. In the light of this, therefore,
a) One way system transfers loads to supporting recommendations made in 6.4.2 to 6.4.9 should be kept
members in one direction only. The precast in mind for ensuring stability of such structure.
t
6.4.2 Adequate buttressing of external wall panels is which one element falls during erection and lands on
important since these elements are not fully restrained an element below. The connections of the lower
on both sides by floor panels. Adequate design element then give way under the loading, both static
precautions may be taken by the designer. Experience and dynamic, and a chain reaction of further collapse
shows that the external wall panel connections are the is set up.
:
weakest points of a precast panel building.
6.4.9.1 A precaution against the first form of failure
6.4.3 It is equally important to provide restraint to all is that the overall stability of a building shall be
load bearing elements at the comers of the building. considered in all its erection stages as well as in its
These elements and the external ends of cross-wall completed state. All joints that may be required to resist
units should be stiffened either by introducing columns moments and shears during the erection stage only,
as connecting units or by jointing them to non- shall be designed with these in mind. Temporary works
structural wall units which in emergency may support required to provide stability during construction shall
the load. Jointing of these units should be done bearing be designed carefully.
in mind the need for load support in an emergency.
6.4.9.2 To guard against the second form of failure,
6.4.4 In prefabricated construction, the possibility of that is, the dropping of a unit during erection, particular
gas or other explosions which can remove primary attention shall be given to the details of all pre-formed
structural elements leading to progressive collapse of units and their seatings to ensure that they are
6.4.9 Failures that have occurred during construction b) All buildings are provided with effective
appear to be of two types. The first of these is the pack- horizontal ties
of-cards type of collapse in which the absence of
1) Around the periphery
restraining elements, such as partitions, cladding or
shear walls, means that the structure is not stable during 2) Internally (in both directions)
the construction period. The second is the situation in 3) To columns and walls
Bars shall be lapped, welded or mechanically joined a) 2 F, ~ or 1,x F,12.5 kN whichever is less for
as in accordance with Part 6 ‘Structural Design, Section a column or for each metre length if there is a
5 Plain, Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete: 5A Plain wall 1,is the floor to ceiling height in metres.
and Reinforced Concrete’. b) 3 percent of the total ultimate vertical load in
the column or wall at that level.
6.5.3 Design of Ties
For corner columns, this tie force should be provided
6.5.3.1 Peripheral ties
in each of two directions approximately at right angles.
The tie should be capable to resisting a tensile force of Each column and each wall carrying vertical load
F, equal to 60 kN or (20 + 4N) kN whichever is less, should be tied continuously from the foundation to the
where N is the number of storeys (including basement) roof level. The reinforcement provided is required only
to resist a tensile force equal to the maximum design
t. +-
ultimate load (dead and imposed) received from any
-L1
NOTE — If there are cantilever slabs, supporting external
6.5.4 Key Elements
6.5.3.2 Internal ties The limited area defined above may be taken equal to
70 m2 or 15 percent of the area of the storey whichever
These are to be provided at each floor and roof level is lesser.
in two directions approximately at right angles. Ties
should be effectively continuous throughout their If key elements exists, it is preferable to modify the
length and be anchored to the peripheral tie at both layout so that the key element is avoided.
ends, unless continuing as horizontal ties to columns
6.6 Bearing for Precast Units
or walls (see Fig. 3). The tensile strength, in kN/m
width shall be the greater of Precast units shall have a bearing at least of 100 mm
on masonry supports and of 75 mm at least on steel or
(gk+q,)lr~ ~nd15F
concrete. Steel angle shelf bearings shall have a
7.5 5 “ ‘
100 mm horizontal leg to allow for a 50 mm bearing
where (g~ + q~) is the sum of average characteristic exclusive of fixing clearance. When deciding to what
dead and imposed floor loads in kN/m2 and 1, is the extent, if any, the bearing width may be reduced in
greater of the distance between the centre of columns, special circumstances, factors, such as, loading, span,
frames or walls supporting any two adjacent floor spans height of wall and provision of continuity, shall be
in the direction of the tie under consideration. taken into consideration.
● 0
@o ● 0
)
TIE BARS
NOTE — If the peripheral tie consists of bars in an edge beam, then the bottom bars in the slabs will not be
at the same level as the peripheral tie bars. It is suggested that either an additional bar be used for the
peripheral tie or the internal tie bars be extended and anchored around the top bar in the beam.
NOTE — For continuity in continuous slabs, bars are distributed evenly in a floor slab by means of lapping
some bottom steel at supports, either by extending existing bars or by the addition of splice bars.
..
rigid or welded joints may be adopted; the shearing to the dimensions requirements if no defective is found
force is usually small in the column and can be taken in the sample, and shall be rejected if the number of
up by the friction resistance of the joint. Here load defective is greater than or equal to the first rejection
transmission is accomplished by steel inserted parts number. If the number of defective is less than the
together with concrete. first rejection number the second sample of the same
size as taken in the first stage shall be selected from
7.2.2 When considering thermal shrinkage and heat
the lot at random and subjected to the dimensional
effects, provision of freedom of movement or
requirements. The number of defective in the first
introduction of restraint may be considered,
sample and the second sample shall be combined and
7.3 Joining techniques/materials normally employed if the combined number of defective is less than the
are: second rejection number, the lot shall be considered
as conforming to the dimensional requirements;
a) Welding of cleats or projecting steel,
otherwise not.
b) Overlapping reinforcement, loops and linking
steel grouted by concrete, The lot which has been found as satisfactory with
c) Reinforced concrete ties all round a slab, respect to the dimensional requirements shall then be
tested for load test. For this purpose one unit shall be
d) Prestressing,
selected for every 300 units or part thereof. The lot
e) Epoxy grouting, shall be considered as conforming to the strength
o Bolts and nuts connection, requirement if all the units meet the requirement;
All the units selected at random in accordance with 8.3.1.1 If within 24 h of the removal of the load, a
CO1 1 and 2 of Table 1 shall be subjected to the reinforced concrete structure does not show a recovery
dimensional requirements. A unit failing to satisfy any o’fat least 75 percent of the maximum deflection shown
of the dimensional requirements shall be termed as during the 24 h under load, test loading should be
defective. The lot shall be considered as conforming repeated after a lapse of 72 h. If the recovery is less
than 80 percent in second test, the structure shall be locally available labour force. The equipment
deemed to be unacceptable. machinery used may be minor in nature and moulds
are of mobile or stationary in nature.
8.3.1.2 If within 24 h of the removal of the load,
prestressed concrete structure does not show a recovery 9.1.2.2.2 Fully-mechanized
of at least 85 percent of the maximum deflection shown
The work will be carried out under shed with skilled
during the 24 h under load, the test loading should be
labour. The equipments used will be similar to one of
repeated. The structure should be considered to have
factory production. This type of precast yards will be
failed, if the recovery after the second test is not at
set up for the production of precast components of high
least 85 percent of the maximum deflection shown
quality, high rate of production.
during the second test.
Though there is definite economy with respect to cost
8.3.1.3 If the maximum deflection in mm, shown
of transportation, this system suffers from basic
during 24 h under load is less than 40 P-ID, where 1is
drawback of its non-suitability to any high degree of
the effective span in m; and D, the overall depth of the
mechanization and no elaborate arrangements for
section in mm, it is not necessary for the recovery to
quality control. Normal benefits of continuity of work
be measured and the recovery provisions of 8.3.1.1
is not available in this system of construction.
and 8.3.1.2 shall not apply.
9.1.3 The various processes involved in the
9 MANUFACTURE, STORAGE, TRANSPORT
TTY
& MIXING
+*
I
FILLING CONCRETE
T
COMPACTING
MOULD FITING
+
CURING 6
DETENBIONING
*
{ TESTING I
BY ROAO
-+&m--- ‘YMH
i) 1 procurement and storage of Unloading and trrmsporl of cement, coarse and the aggregates, and steel, and
construction materials storing them in bins, silos or storage sheds
ii) 2 Testing of raw matcnals Testing of all materials including steel
iii) 3 Design of concrete mix Testing of raw ma~erials, plotting of grading curves and triat of mixes in
laboratory
iv) 4 Making of reinforcement cages Unloading of reinforcement bars from wagons or lorries and stacking them in
the steel yard, cutting, bending, tying or welding the reinforcements and
making in the form of a cage, which can be directly introduced into the mould.
v) 5 Applying form release agent and Moulds are cleaned, apptied with form release agent and assembled and placed
laying of moulds in position at the right place.
vi) 6 Placing of reinforcement cages, The reinforcement cages are placed in the mordds with spacers, etc as per data
inserts and fktures sheet prepared for the particular prefabricate.
vii) 7 Preparation of green concrete Taking out aggregates and cement horn bins, silos, etc. batching and mixing.
@ 10 Curing of concrete and demoulding Either a natural curing with water or an accelerated coring using steam curing
and other techniques. hr the case of steam curing using trenches or autoclaves,
this stage involves transport of motdds with the green concrete into the trench
or autoclave and taking them out after the curing and demoulding elements
cutting of protruding wires rdao falls in this stage. In certain cases the moulds
have to be partly removed and inserts, have to be removed after initial set. The
total demoulding is done after a certain period and the components are then
allowed to be cured. All these fall in this operation.
xi) 11 Stacking of precast elements Lifting of precast elements from the mould and transporting to the stacking
yard for further transport by tiler or rail is part of this stage.
xii) 12 Testing of finished components Tests are carried out on the components individually and in combination to
ensure the adequacy of their strength.
xiii) 13 Miscellaneous a) Oexreration of steam involving storing of coat or oil necessaxy for
generation of steam and providing insulated steam pipe connection up
to the various technological lines.
b) Repair of machines used in the production.
9.1.6 The various accepted methods of manufacture 9.2 Preparation and Storage of Materials
of precast units can be broadly classified into two Storage of materials is of considerable importance in
methods: the precasting industry, as a mistake in planning in this
a) The ‘Stand Method’ where the moulds remain aspect can greatly influence, the economics of production.
stationary at places, when the various From experience in constr@on, it is clear that there
processes involved are carried out in a cyclic will be very high percentages of loss of materials as well
order at the same place, and as poor quality due to improper storage and transport.
So, in a precast factory where everything is produced
b) The ‘Flow Method’ where the precast unit
with special emphasis on quality, proper storage and
under consideration is in movement according
preservation of building materials, especially cement,
to the various processes involved in the work
coarse and fine aggregates, is of prime importance.
which are carried out in an assembly-line
Storage of materials shall be done in accordance with
method.
Part 7 ‘Constructional Practices and Safety’.
The various accepted precasting methods are listed in
9.3 Moulds
Table 3 with details regarding the elements that can be
manufactured by these methods. 9.3.1 Moulds for the manufacture of precast elements
ii) Battery Form Method (The Interior wall panels, shell Length : 18m Specially suitable for mass
shattering panels may be adjusted elements, reinforced Breadth : 3 m production of wall panels where
into the form of a battery at the concrete battens, rafters, Mass : 5t shuttenng cost is reduced to a
required distances equal to the purlins and, roof and floor large extent and autoclave or
thickness of the concrete member) slabs trench steam curing may be
adopted by taking the steam
pipes through the shattering
iii) Stack Method Ffoor and roof slab panels Length : Any desired For casting identical reinforced
M@ m P=timti panels one over
Breadth: lto4m the other with separating media
Mass : St interposed in between.
iv) Tilting Mould Method (This method Exterior wall panels Length : 6m Suitabie for manufacturing the
is capable of being skipped where special finishes are Breadth : 4 m external watt panels
vertically using hydraulic jacks) required on one face or Mass : 5t
for sandwich panel.
v) Long Line Prestressing Bed Method Double tees, ribbed slabs, Length : Any desired Ideafly suited for pretension
prrrlins, piles and beams Breadth : 2m members
Height : 2m
Mass : Upto lot
vi) Extrusion Method (Long concrete Roof slabs, foam concrete Length : Any desired May be used with advantage in
mould with constant cross-section wall panels and beams Breadth : Less than 2 m the case of on-reinforced blocks,
where concreting and vibration are cross-section where Height : Less than 3 m foam concrete panels
done automatically just as in hollow concreting and vibration
code slab casting) are done automatically
just as in hollow cored
slab casting.
9.4.1 After the accelerated hardening of the above Before the concrete products are subjected to any
products by any of the above accepted methods, the accelerated method of curing, the cement to be used
elements shall be cured further by normal curing shall be tested in accordance with accepted standards
methods to attain full final strength. (see Part 5 Building ‘Materials) especially for
soundness, setting time and suitability for steam curing.
9.4.2 Accelerated hardening may also be achieved by
the following techniques: In the case of elements manufactured by accelerated
curing methods, concrete admixtures to reduce the
a) Construction Chemicals — Suitable
construction chemicals may be used. water content can be allowed to be used. The normal
aeration agents used to increase the workability of
b) Consolidation by Spinning — Such a method
concrete should not be allowed to be used. Use of
is generally used in the centrifugal moulding
calcium chloride should be avoided for reinforced
of pipes and such units. The spinning motion
concrete elements.
removes excess water, effects consolidation
and permits earlier demoulding. 9.5.2.2 The surrounding walls, the top cover and the
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are In the following list the number appearing in the first
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ column within parentheses indicates the number of the
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The reference in this Part/Section.
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time IS No. Title
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may (1) 2185 Specification for concrete
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance masonry units:
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the (Part 1) :1979 Hollow and solid concrete
Code. blocks (second revision)
10297:1982 Code of practice for design and 10505:1983 Code of practice for construction
FOREWORD ... 3
1 SCOPE ... 5
2 TERMINOLOGY ... 5
3 MATERIALS, PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ... 6
4 MODULAR CO-ORDINATION, ARCHITECTURAL TREATMENT AND ... 6
FINISHES
5 COMPONENTS ... 6
6 FORMWORK SYSTEMS ... 6
7 SYSTEM AND STRUCTURAL SCHEMES ... 6
8 JOINTS ... 8
9 TESTS FOR COMPONENTS/STRUCTURES .. 8
10 CONSTRUCTIONAL ASPECTS . .. 8
FOREWORD
Systems building and mixed/composite construction is an upcoming field as far as its development and use in the
country is concerned. Two aspects specifically to be borne in mind are the system to be adopted for the different
categories of buildings and the sizes of their components. Here the principle of modular co-ordination is of value
and its use is recommended.
This section was first published in 1970 and was subsequently revised in 1983.
In this second revision, this section, earlier named as Prefabrication and Systems Building has been renamed and
restructured as follows:
This sub-section covers systems building and mixed/composite construction, while such systems approach using
predominantly concrete as material for components is being dealt within sub-section 7A.
In this sub-section, an attempt has been made to prescribe general requirements applicable to all valid existing
systems and mixed/composite constructions as also to accommodate any new system introduced in the country
in future.
All standards cross referred to in the main text of this sub-section, are subject to revision. The parties to agreement
based on this sub-section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the
standards.
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN — SECTION ‘7B SYSTEMS BUILDING AND MIXED/COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION 3
6$ (J
-,
LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Section
7 Prefabrication, Systems Building and
Mixed/Composite Construction:
76 Systems Building and Mixed/Composite Construction
See Part 6 ‘Structural Design, Sub-section 7A 6.4 Large Panel Shattering System
Prefabricated Concrete’.
This is a system, which gives an advantage of
5 COMPONENTS combining speed and quality of construction. The
vertical load carrying members are made of steel
5.1 The preferred dimensions of precast elements used
whereas the horizontal members are of plywood
and their casting tolerances shall be in accordance with
inserted into two wooden beams thereby forming a web
Part 6 ‘Structural Design, Sub-section 7A prefabricated
flange. All the formwork and support systems shall be
Concrete’.
designed for the loads coming during the actual
5.2 The permissible tolerances of timber used shall execution stage.
be in accordance with Part 6 ‘Structural Design, Sub-
section 3A Timber’. 6.5 Other/New Systems
5.3 For permissible tolerances of steel and masonry, Any otherlnew system may be used for systems
reference may be made to relevant Indian Standards. building after due exaihination and approval by the
Authority.
6 FORMWORK SYSTEMS
7 SYSTEM AND STRUCTURAL SCHEMES
The formwork systems which are utilized in buildings
shall be as given in 6.1 to 6.5. 7.1 Several schemes are possible, with certain
constraints, using the same set of components. The
6.1 Tunnel Form degree of flexibility varies from system to system.
However, in all the systems there is a certain order
This is a system which casts walls and slab together
and discipline.
like a portal in a single pour. Fagade walls are precast
or of block masonry to enable removal of tunnel form. 7.2 The following aspects, among others, are to be
All components are made up of steel. This produces considered in devising a system:
ANNEX A
(Clause 10.2)
A-1 RECEIVING, STORING AND LIFTING manufacturer. The information on each tag shall be
DECKING checked immediately upon arrival, to prevent incorrect
sheets being used, or unnecessary delays if changes
A-1.l Receiving Decking are necessary. In particular, the stated sheet thickness
Decking is packed by the manufacturer into bundles shall be checked against th~ requirement specified on
of up to 24 sheets, and the sheets are normally secured the drawings, and a visual inspection shall be made to
with metal banding. Each bundle may be up to 1 m ensure that there is no darnage.
wide (the width of a single sheet) by 750 mm deep, The bundles shall be lifted from the vehicle. Bundles
and may weigh up to 2.5 t, depending on sheet length shall never be off-loaded by tipping, dragging,
(average mass of sheet being about 1.5 t). Loads
dropping or other improvised means.
are normally delivered by articulated vehicles
approximately 16 m long with a maximum gross mass A-1.2 Storing Decking
of up to 40 t, and a turning circle of approximately
The decking shall not be delivered more than one
19 m. It shall be ensured that there is suitable access
month before its anticipated use, as it may be vulnerable
and appropriate standing and off-loading areas.
to abuse and damage if stored for longer periods on
Each bundle will be given an identification tag by the site. If it is not for immediate use, the decking shall be
The support steelwork shall be prepared to receive the Individual sheets shall be slid into place and, where
decking before lifting the bundles onto it. The top possible, fixed to the steelwork before moving onto
surface of the underlying beams shall be reasonably the next sheet. This will minimize the risk of an
clean. When through-deck welding of shear studs is accident occurring as a result of movement of a sheet
specified, the tops of the flanges shall be free of primer, when it is being used as a platform. However, for
paint and galvanizing. setting-out purposes, it maybe necessary to lay out an
ANNEX B
(Clause 10.3)
B-1 PLACING CONCRETE decking sheet are not balanced either side of the
intermediate support beam.
B-1.l Preparation
Where possible, the construction joints shall be located B-2.1 Concrete shall be placed in a way that minimizes
close to butt joints in the decking. Where shear the permanent deformation of the decking. This is
connectors are used, it is preferable to create the joint particularly important for spans greater than 3 m. When
to one side of the line of the shear connectors, to ensure concreting is progressed in the same direction as the
sound concrete around the studs. If the construction span of the decking (that is, parallel to the decking
joint cannot be made near a butt joint, it is suggested ribs), it shall be placed first over supports where the
that no more than one-third of the decking span from decking is continuous, followed by the mid-span region
a butt joint shall be left unpoured. Concreting shall and finally the areas above the end supports. When
not be stopped within a sheet length, because excessive concreting is progressed in a direction perpendicular
deflections may occur when the loads on a continuous to the decking span (that is, transverse to the decking
Pumping may be adopted for both normal and Skips shall have a means of controlling the rate of
lightweight concrete mixes. Flow rates in the order of discharge, and shall not be discharged from more than
0.5 ms to 1 ms of concrete per minute maybe achieved, 0.5 m above the decking or barrow. When discharging
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and’ accepted standards’ doubly-curved shell units (jlrst
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The revision)
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time
10297:1982 Code of practice for design
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may
and construction of floors and
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance
roofs using precast reinforced/
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
prestressed concrete ribbed or
Code.
cored units
IS No. Title 10505:1983 Code of practice for construction
(1) 3935:1966 Code of practice for composite of floors and roofs using
construction precast reinforced concrete
(2) 3201:1988 Criteria for the design and waffle units
construction of precast — trusses 13994:1994 Code of practice for design and
and purlins (first revision) construction of floor and roof
(3) 6332:1984 Code of practice for construction with precast reinforced concrete
of floor and roofs using precast planks and RC joists
14142:1994 Code of practice for design and (4) 11447:1985 Code of practice for construction
construction of floors and roofs with large panel prefabricates
with prefabricated brick panel (5) 6061 Code of practice for construction
14215:1994 Code of practice for construction of floor and roof with joists and
of floor and roof with RC channel filler blocks:
units (Part 1): 1971 With hollow concrete filler
14242:1994 Code of practice for design and blocks
construction of roof with L-Panel (Part 2): 1981 With hollow clay filler blocks
units (first revision)
STANDARDS
AND
PRACTICES
OF INDIAN
7 CONSTRUCTIONAL
BUREAU
NATIONAL
PART
I
CONTENTS
FOREWORD ... 5
1 SCOPE ... 7
3 GENERAL . . 11
4 STORAGE, STACKING AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS ... 12
5 UNLOADING RAIL/ROAD WAGONS AND MOTOR VEHICLES ... 21
6 GENERAL ... 22
7 TERMINOLOGY ... 22
8 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION, USE OF SIDE WALLS AND ... 23
TEMPORARY ENCROACHMENTS
9 TESTING ... 23
10 INSPECTION AND RECTIFICATION OF HAZARDOUS DEFECTS . .. 23
11 FOUNDATIONS .. . 24
12 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND COMMON HAZARDS DURING ... 24
EXCAVATION
13 PILING AND OTHER DEEP FOUNDATIONS . .. 25
14 WALLS . .. 27
15 COMMON HAZARDS DURING WALLING .. . 28
16 ROOFING . .. 29
17 ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ERECTION OF . .. 30
CONCRETE FRAMED STRUCTURES (HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS)
18 ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ERECTION OF . .. 33
STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
19 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS . .. 36
20 FINISHES ... 38
21 FRAGILE FIXTURES ... 38
22 SAFETY IN SPECIAL OPERATIONS . .. 38
23 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND LEWS ... 38
24 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .. . 38
25 CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY .. . 40
29 GENERAL ... 48
30 PRECAUTIONS PRIOR TO DEMOLITION ... 49
31 PRECAUTIONS DURING DEMOLITION ... 50
32 SEQUENCE OF DEMOLITION OPERATIONS ... 50
33 WALLS ... 50
34 FLOORING ... 50
35 DEMOLITION OF STEEL STRUCTURES ... 50
36 CATCH PLATFORM . .. 51
37 STAIRS, PASSAGEWAYS AND LADDERS ... 51
38 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION ... 51
39 DEMOLITION OF CERTAIN SPECIAL TYPES AND ELEMENTS OF ... 51
FOREWORD
This Part of the Code emphasizes the importance of carrying out all constructional operations in a safe and
efficient manner. Workers in large number, both skilled and unskilled, are engaged in the innumerable construction
works. Due to increased tempo of such a building activity and large scale mechanization, hazards of accidents
could increase considerably. It is, therefore, imperative that adequate safety rules are laid down for every phase
of construction work.
Planning the various constructional operations before hand and making adequate arrangements for procurement
and storage of materials, and the machinery to get work done is as important as carrying out these constructional
operations in accordance with good practice. Lack of planning or defective planning may result in avoidable
delay in the completion of work and consequently increased hazards from the point of view of fwe, health and
structural soundness.
Bamboo is a versatile renewable resource having low gestation period, characterized by high strength, low mass
and ease of working with simple tools. Resilience coupled with lightness makes it suitable for housing in
earthquake-prone and disaster-prone areas. It has the capacity to absorb more energy and shows larger deflections
before collapse and as such is safer under earth tremors. In this revision of this Part, therefore, provisions on
construction using bamboo have been incorporated. The structural design aspects are covered in Part 6 ‘Structural
Design, Section 3 Timber and Bamboo, 3B Bamboo’.
IS No. Title
3696 Safety code for scaffolds and ladders:
(Part 1): 1987 Scaffolds
(Part 2): 1991 Ladders
3764:1992 Code of practice for excavation work @-st revision)
4082:1996 Recommendations on stacking and storage of construction materials and components
at site (second revision)
4130:1991 Safety code for demolition of buildings (second revision)
4912:1978 Safety requirements for floor and wall ope&ngs, railing and toe boards (fh-st revision)
5121:1969 Safety code for piling and other deep foundations
5916:1970 Safety code for construction involving use of hot bituminous materials
7205:1974 Safety code for erection of structural steel work
7969:1975 Safety code for handling and storage of building materials
8989:1978 Safety code for erection of concrete framed structures
13415 ; 1992 Safety code for protective barrier in and around buildings
A reference to SP 62:1992 ‘Handbook on building construction practices (excluding electrical works)’ and
SP 70:2001 ‘Handbook on construction safety practices’ may also be made.
All standards, whether given herein above or cross referred to in the main text of this Part, are subject to revision.
The parties to agreement based on this Part are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most
recent editions of the standards.
2.3.3 Construction Using Bamboo For low income housing, appropriate planning and
selection of building materials and techniques of
2.3.3.1 Bamboo being a versatile resource characterized
construction have to be judiciously done and applied
by high strength, low mass and ease of working with
in practice. Requirements of low income housing
simple tools, it is desirable to increasingly make
specified in Part 3 ‘Development Control Rules and
appropriate use of this material. Design of structures
General Building Requirements’, shall be followed.
using bamboo shall be done in accordance with
However, all requiremerlfs regarding structural safety,
Part 6 <Structural Design, Section 3 Timber and
health safety and fire safety shall be in accordance with
Bamboo, 3B Bamboo’. For construction using bamboo,
this Code.
some of the important constructional provisions given
in 2.3.3.2 to 2.3.3.6 shall be followed. 2.3.5 Site Preparation
2.3.3.2 Working finishing While preparing the site for construction, bush and
2.3.3.2.1 Bamboo can be cut and split easily with very other wood, debris, etc, shall be removed and promptly
simple hand tools. Immature bamboos are soft, pliable disposed of so as to minimize the attendant hazards.
and can be moulded to desired shape. It takes polish
Temporary buildings for construction offices and
and paint well.
storage shall be so located as to cause the minimum
2.3.3.2.2 While it is possible to walk with bamboo fire hazards and shall be constructed from non-
simply using a machete, a few basic tools, such as, combustible materials as far as possible.
FIG. 1 BANIEiOOFOUNDATIONS
2.3.6 UseojNew/Alternati~.eConstruction Techniques the layout for stacking and storage of different
materials, components and equipments with proper
The provisionsof thispartarenot intendedtoprevent
access and proper manoeuvrability of the vehicles
use of any construction techniques including any
carrying the material. While planning the layout, the
alternative materials, nonspecifically prescribed bythe
requirements of various materials, components and
Code,providedany suchalternativehas beenapproved.
equipments at different stages of construction shall be
The Authority may approve any such alternative such
considered.
as ferrocement construction, row-lock (rat trap) bond
;n masonry, stretcher bond in filler slab and filler slab 3.1.2 Materials shall be segregated as to kind, size and
provided it is found that the proposed alternative is length and placed in neat, orderly piles that are safe
satisfactory and conforms to the provisions of relevant against falling. If piles are high they shall be stepped
parts regarding material, design and construction and back at suitable intervals in height. Piles of materials
that material, method, or work offered is, for the shall be arranged so as to allow a passageway of not
purpose intended, at least equivalent to that prescribed less than 1 m width in between the piles or stacks for
in the Code in quality, strength, compatibility, inspection or removal. All passageways shall be kept
effectiveness, fire and water resistance, durability and clear of dry vegetation.
safety.
3.1.3 Materials shall be stored, stacked and handled
in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or intrusion
SECTION 2 STORAGE, STACKING AND
of foreign matter and to ensure the preservation of their
HANDLING PRACTICES
quality and fitness for the work.
3 GENERAL 3.1.4 Materials shall be stacked on well drained, firm
and unyielding surface. Materials shall not be stacked
3.1 Planning and Storage Layout
so as to impose any undue stresses on walls or other
3.1.1 For any site, there should be proper planning of structures.
LOAD BEARING
mm
> WALL
2.4’onl
r
1.40m*
B
11
GL
I D
u L *
* 10 BAGS MAXIMUM
SECTION XX
b
T x
A
G x
DOOR
PLAN
A = Planks
B = Wooden Battens
c = 150 Dry Bricks in Two Layer or Lean Cement Concrete
D = 150 Consolidated Earth
shall be stored on plane level ground, as far plan. Proper access shall be provided for the
as possible near the concrete mixing place. replacement of silos.
After taking out the required quantity of Different types of cements shall be stacked
cement, the lid of the drum shall be securely and stored separately.
tied to prevent ingress of moisture. b) Handling — Hooks shall not be used for
In case cement is received in silos, the silos handling cement bags unless specifically
shall be placed near the concrete batching permitted by the engineer-in-charge.
stored in a covered shed, a minimum space &@k&aupport on a firm dry ground in tiers,
of 300 mm should be provided alround the up to a height of 1.2 m. A distance of about
0.8 m shall be kept between two adjacent
heaps to avoid bulging of wrdls.
stacks.
Unslaked lime shall be stored in a place
inaccessible to water and because of fire b) Bricks — Bricks shall be stacked in regular
tiers as and when they are unloaded to
a) Storage and sracking — CGI sheets shall be The coolest store room available shall be
stacked in not more than 100 bundles per utilized for the storage of the sheets. The store
stack built solidly, each bundle consisting of rooms where the sheets are stored shall be well
10 sheets. Bundles shall be so laid that the ventilated and direct light should not be
corrugations run in the same directions in allowed to fall on them.
every course. One end of the stack shall be The sheets shall be stored away from electric
raised by 100 mm to 150 mm to allow water generators, electric motors, switchgears and
flowing freely. If the sheets are not to be used other such electrical equipment as they
immediately, these shall be stacked under roof produce harmful gases as they produce
cover. harmful order in their vicinity.
b) Handling — In bulk handling of CGI sheets, Contamination of the sheets with vegetable
,
18 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
b) Handling — Workmen handling glass panes, b) Handling — Removal of pipe from a pile shall
waste glass pieces and fibre glass shall be be accomplished by working from the ends
provided with suitable hand protection. In of the pipe.
removing glass sheets from crates, due care
4.22 Unplasticized PVC Pipes
shall be taken to avoid damages. Glass edges
shall be covered or otherwise protected to a) Storage and Stacking — Pipes should be
prevent injuries to workmen. stored on a reasonably flat surface free from
stones and sharp projections so that the pipe
4.20 Cast Iron, Galvanized Iron and Asbestos is supported throughout its length. The pipe
Cement Pipes and Fittings should be given adequate support at all times.
a) Storage and Stacking — The pipes shall be In storage, pipe racks should be avoided. Pipe
unloaded where they are required, when the should not be stacked in large piles especially
trenches are ready to receive them. under warm temperature conditions as the
bottom pipes may distort thus giving rise to
Storage shall be provided at the bottom layer
difficulty in jointing. Socket and spigot pipes
to keep the stack stable. The stack shall be in
should be stacked in layers with sockets
pyramid shape or the pipes placed length-wise
placed at alternate ends or the stacks to avoid
and cross-wise in alternate layers. The
lopsided stacks.
pyramid stack is advisable in smaller diameter
a) Storage and Stacking — Paints, varnishes, a) Storage and Stacking — Bituminous roofing
lacquers, thinners and other flammable felts shall be stored away from other
materials shall be kept in properly sealed or combustible materials and shall be kept under
closed containers. The containers shall be kept shade.
in a well ventilated location, free from b) Handling — Bituminous roofing felts should
excessive heat, smoke, sparks or flame. The be handled in a manner to prevent cracking
floor of the paint stores shall be made up of and other damages.
100 mm thick loose sand. ...
Paint materials in quantities other than 4.28 Flammable Materials k
required for daily use shall be kept stocked a) Storage and Stacking — In addition to the
under regular storage place. requirements as laid down in 3.4, the
Where the paint is likely to deteriorate with following provisions shall also apply:
age, the manner of storage shall facilitate 1) Outdoor storage of drums requires some
removal and use of lots in the same order in care to avoid contamination because
which they are received. moisture and dirt in hydraulic brake and
Temporary electrical wirings/fittings shall not transmission fluid, gasoline, or lubricants
be installed in the paint store. when electric may cause malfunction or failure of
lights, switches or electrical equipment are equipment, with possible danger to
necessary, they shall be of explosion proof personnel. The storage area should be
design. free of accumulations of spilled products,
b) Handling — Ventilation adequate to prevent debris and other hazards.
the accumulation of flammable vapours to 2) Compressed gases and petroleum
hazardous levels of concentration shall be products shall not be stored in the same
provided in all areas where painting is done. building or close to each other. Storage
When painting is done is confined spaces of petroleum products should be as per
where flammable or explosive vapours may Petroleum Rules.
develop, any necessary heat shall be provided b) Handling — Petroleum products delivered to
through duct work remote from the source of the job site and stored there in drums shall be
flame. protected during handling to prevent loss of
Sources of ignition, such as open flame and identification through damage to drum
markings, tags, etc. Unidentifiable petroleum 4.32.2 Heavy units like precast concrete members shall
products may result in improper use, with be stacked near the hoist or the ramp.
possible fire hazard, damage to equipment or
4.32.3 Materials which normally deteriorate during
operating failure.
storage shall be kept constantly moving, by replacing
Workmen shall be required to guard carefully old materials with fresh stocks. Freshly arrived
against any part of their clothing becoming materials shall never be placed over materials which
contaminated with flammable fluids. They had arrived earlier.
shall not be allowed to continue work when
their clothing becomes so contaminated. 4.32.4 Appropriate types of fiie extinguishers shall be
provided at open sites where combustible materials are
4.29 Water
stored and for each storage shedlroom where
Water to be stored for construction purposes shall be flammable/combustible materials are stored. For
stored in proper tanks to prevent any organic impurities. guidance regarding selection of the appropriate types
The aggregate capacity of storage tanks shall be of fire extinguishers reference may be made to good
determined after taking into account the requirements practice [7(4)]. It is desirable that a minimum of two
of fire fighting. extinguishers are provided at each such location.
5.1.5 When raillroad wagons are being loaded or other hazards wherever specified by the Local/State
unloaded near passageways or walkways, adequate Authority or in the Acts of the Government take
warning signals shall be placed on each end of the precedence over whatever is herein specified in case
wagon to warn pedestrians. of a doubt or dispute.
5.2 Loading and Unloading from Motor Vehicles 6.3 Safety Management
5.2.1 The motor vehicles shall be properly blocked 6.3.1 The safety of personnel engaged in building
while being loaded or unloaded; brakes alone shall not construction should be ensured through a well planned
be depended upon to hold them. and well organized mechanism. For this, depending
on the size and complexity of building construction
5.2.2 When motor vehicles are being loaded or
project, safety committee shall be constituted to
unloaded near passageways or walkways, adequate
efficiently manage all safety related affairs. The site
warning signs shall be placed on each end of the vehicle
in-charge or his nominee of a senior rank shall head
to warn the pedestrians.
the committee and a safety officer shall act as member-
5.3 Handling Heavy/Long Items secretary, The meetings of the safety committee shall
be organized regularly say fortnightly or monthly
5.3.1 Loading and unloading of heavy items, shall, as depending on the nature of the project, however,
far as possible, be done with cranes or gantries. The emergency meetings shall be called as and when
8.1.1 Temporary structure referred in 8.1 shall apply 10 INSPECTION AND RECTIFICATION OF
to the following types of structures: HAZARDOUS DEFECTS
a) Structures with roof or walls made of straw, 10.1 Inspection
hay, ulugrass, golpatta, hogle, darma, mat,
canvas cloth or other like materials not The Authority shall inspect the construction equipment
adopted for permanent or continuous and if during the inspection, it is revealed that unsafe/
occupancy. illegal conditions exist, the Authority shall intimate
12.5.1 Burrowing or mining or what is known as 12.11 Precautions While Using Petroleum Powered
‘gophering’ shall not be allowed. In any trench where Equipment
such methods have been followed, the cavities felt shall At the site of excavation, where petroleum powered
be eliminated by cutting back the bare slope before equipment is used, petroleuth vapours are likely to
removing any further material from the section of the accumulate at lower levels and may cause fire
trench. explosion under favorable circumstances. Care
should, therefore, be taken to avoid all sources of
12.6 Health Hazards
ignition in such places.
Where gases or fumes are likely to be present in
trenches, sufficient mechanical ventilation, to protect 13 PILING AND OTHER DEEP FOUNDATIONS
the health and safety of persons working there, shall 13.1 General
be provided. If necessary, the persomel working there,
13.1.1 Safety Programme
shall be provided with respiratory protective equipment
when work in such unhealthy conditions has to be All operations shall be carried out under the immediate
carried out. The precautionary measures provided shall charge of a properly qualified and competent foreman
a) persons may pass; 17.1.2.4 Cranes shall not be used at a speed which
b) there is moving machinery; or causes the boom to swing.
17.1 Handling of Plant 17.1.2.8 Toe boards and limit stops should be provided
for wheel barrows on the loading/unloading platforms.
17.1.1 Mixers
Material should be loaded securely with no projections.
17.1.1.1 All gears, chains and rollers of mixers shall
17.1.2.9 Concrete buckets handled by crane or
be properly guarded. If the mixer has a charging skip
overhead cableway shall be suspended from deep
the operator shall ensure that the workmen are out of
throated hooks, preferably equipped with swivel and
danger before the skip is lowered. Railings shall be
safety latch. In the concrete buckets, both bottom drop
provided on the ground to prevent anyone walking
type and side drop type, closing and locking of the
under the skip while it is being lowered.
exit door of the bucket shall always be checked by the
17.1.1.2 All cables, clamps, hooks, wire ropes, gears man-in-charge of loading concrete in the bucket to
and clutches, etc, of the mixer, shall be checked and avoid accidental opening of the exit door and
cleaned, oiled and greased, and serviced once a week. consequent falling of concrete.
A trial run of the mixer shall be made and defects shall
17.1.2.10 Interlocking or other safety devices should
be removed before operating a mixer.
be installed at all stopping points of the hoists. The
17.1.1.3 When workmen are cleaning the inside of the hoists shaft way should be fenced properly.
drums, and operating power of the mixer shall be
17.1.2.11 When the buck& or other members being
locked in the off position and all fuses shall be removed
lifted are out of sight of the crane operator, a signalman
and a suitable notice hung at the place.
shall be posted in clear view of the receiving area and
17.1.2 Cranes the crane operator.
17.1.2.1 Crane rails where used shall be installed on 17.1.2.12 A standard code of hand signals shall be
firm ground and shall be properly secured. In case of adopted in controlling the movements of the crane, and
tower cranes, it shall be ensured that the level difference both the driver and the signaler shall be thoroughly
between the two rails remains within the limits familiar with the signals.
prescribed by the manufacturer to safeguard against
The driver of the crane shall respond to signals only
toppling of the crane.
from the appointed signaler but shall obey stop signal
17.1.2.2 Electrical wiring which can possibly touch at any time no matter who gives it.
17.2.1 Formwork shall be designed after taking into 17.2.11 Sills under the supports shall be set on fm
consideration spans, setting temperature of concrete, soil or other suitable material in a pattern which assures
dead load and working load to be supported and safety adequate stability for all props. Care shall be taken not
factor for the materials used for formwork {see also to disturb the soil under the supports. Adequate
good practice [7(6)] }. drainage shall be provided to drain away water coming
due to rains, washing of forms or during the curing of
17.2.2 All timber formwork shall be carefully the concrete to avoid softening of the supporting soil
inspected before use and members having cracks and starta.
excessive knots shall be discarded.
17.2.12 All centering shall be finally, inspected to
17.2.3 As timber centering usually takes an initial set
ensure that:
when vertical load is applied, the design of this
centering shall make allowance for this factor. a) footings or sills under every post of the
centering are sound.
17.2.4 The vertical supports shall be adequately braced
or otherwise secured in position that these do not fall b) all lower adjustment screws or wedges are
when the load gets released or the supports are sung against the legs of the panels.
accidently hit. c) all upper adjustment screws or heads of jacks
are in full contact with the formwork.
17.2.5 Tubular steel centering shall be used in
d) panels are plumb in both directions.
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. When
tubular steel and timber centering is to be used in e) all cross braces a~e in place and locking
combination necessary precautions shall be taken to devices are in closed and secure position.
avoid any unequal settlement under load. f) In case of CHHAJAS and balconies, the props
shall be adequate to transfer the load to the
17.2.6 A thorough inspection of tubular steel centering
supporting point.
is necessary before its erection and members showing
evidence of excessive resting, kinks, dents or damaged 17.2.13 During pouring of the concrete, the centering
welds shall be discarded. Buckled or broken members shall be constantly inspected and strengthened, if
shall be replaced. Care shall also be taken that locking required, wedges below the vertical supports tightened
devices are in good working order and that coupling and adjustment screws properly adjusted as necessary.
pins are effectively aligned to frames. Adequate protection of centering shall be secured from
moving vehicles or swinging loads.
17.2.7 After assembling the basic unit, adjustment
screws shall be set to their approximate final adjustment 17.2.14 Forms shall not be removed earlier than as
element(s) the anchor shall be kept turned up close to before releasing the lifting equipment. The permanent
anchor plate, wherever possible, to avoid serious structural comections shall be established at the earliest
damage if a hydraulic line fails. opportunity.
17.5.7 Wedges and other temporary anchoring devices 17.8.3 Levelling devices, such as wedges and nuts
shall be inspected before use. which have no load bearing function in the completed
structure shall be released or removed as necessary
17.5.8 The prestressing jacks shall be periodically prior to integrating the joints.
examined for wear and tear.
17.8.4 If it becomes necessary to use electric power
17.6 Erection of Prefabricated Members for in-situ work, the same should be stepped down to
17.6.1 A spreader beam shall be used wherever a safe level as far as possible.
possible so that the cable can be as perpendicular to
17.9 General
the members being lifted as practical. The angle
between the cable and the members to be lifted shall Workmen working in any position where there is a
not be less than 60°. falling hazard shall wear safety belts or other adequate
protection shall be provided.
17.6.2 The lifting wires shall be tested for double the
load to be handled at least once in six months. The 18 ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
guy line shall be of adequate strength to perform its FOR ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
function of controlling the movement of members WORK
being lifted,
18.1 Safety Organization
17.6.3 Temporary scaffolding of adequate strength
shall be used to support precast members at The agency responsible for erecting the steel work
predetermined supporting points while lifting and should analyze the proposed erection scheme for
placing them in position and connecting them to other safety; the erection scheme should cover safety aspects
members. right from the planning stage up to the actual execution
of the work.
17.6.4 After erection of the member, it shall be guyed
and braced to prevent it from being tipped or dislodged 18.2 Safety of Workpersons
by accidental impact when setting the next member.
18.2.1 General
17.6.5 Precast concrete units shall be handled at
While engaging persons for the job the supervisor
specific picking points and with specific devices.
should check up and make sure that they are skilled in
Girders and beams shall be braced during transportation
the particular job they have to perform.
and handled. In such a way as to keep the members
upright. 18.2.1.1 The helmets shall be worn properly and at
all times during the work and shall conform to the
17.6.6 Methods of assembly and erection specified by
accepted standards [7(9)].
the designer, shall be strictly adhered to at site.
Immediately on erecting any unit in position, temporary 18.2.1.2 The safety goggles shall be used while
connections or supports as specified shall be provided performing duties which are hazardous to eye like
drilling, cutting and welding. The goggles used shall pair of bridles slings can be placed far enough apart
conform to the accepted standards [7(15)] and should for them to be safe lifting points. The top flange of a
suit individual workers. truss, girder or long beam may be temporarily
reinforced with a structural member laid flat on top of
18.2.1.3 The welders and gas cutters shall be equipped
the member and secured temporarily.
with proper protective equipment like gloves, safety
boots, aprons and hand shields [see accepted standard 18.2.7 On deep girders, and even on some trusses, a
7( 15)]. The filter glass of the hand shield shall conform safety ‘bar’ running their full length will aid the riggers,
to the accepted standards [7(16)] and should be suitable fitters and others employed on the bottom flange or
to the eyes of the particular worker. bottom chord to work with greater safety. This can be
a single 16 mm diameter wire rope through vertical
18.2.1.4 When the work is in progress, the area shall
stiffeners of such members about one metre above the
be cordoned off by barricades to prevent persons from
bottom flange and clamped at the ends with wire rope
hitting against structural components, or falling into
clamps. If the holes cannot be provided, short eye bolts
excavated trenches or getting injured by falling objects.
can be welded to the webs of the girder at intervals to
18.2.1.5 Warning signs shall be displayed where be removed and the surface chipped or ground to leave
necessary to indicate hazards, for example (a) ’440 it smooth after all work on the piece has been
VOLTS’, (b) ‘DO NOT SMOKE’, (C) ‘MEN WORKING completed.
AHEAD’, etc. Hand lamps shall be of low voltage
18.2.3 When a number of trusses or deep girders is 18.2.10 The proper size, number and spacing of wire
loaded in one car or on one truck, all but one being rope clamps shall be used, depending on the diameter
lifted shall be tied back unless they have been tied or of the wire rope. They shall be properly fixed in
braced to prevent their falling over and endangering accordance with good practice [7( 17)]. They shall be
men unloading. checked as soon as the rope has been stretched, as the
rope, especially if new, tends to stretch under the
18.2.4 The erection gang shall have adequate supply applied load, which in turn may cause it to shrink
of bolts, washers, rivets, pins, etc, of the correct size. slightly in diameter. The clamps shall then be promptly
Enough number of bolts shall be used in connecting tightened to take care of this new condition. In addition,
each piece using a minimum of two bolts in a pattern the clamps shall be inspected frequently to be sure that
to ensure that the joint will not fail due to dead load they have not slipped and he tight enough.
and erection loads. All splice connections in columns,
18.2.11 When the men can work safely from the steel
crane girders, etc, shall be completely bolted or riveted
structure itself, this is preferable to hanging platforms
or welded as specified in the drawing before erection.
or scaffolds, as it eliminates additional operations,
18.2.5 Girders and other heavy complicated structural which in turn, reduces the hazard of an accident.
members may require special erection devices like
18.2.11.1 To aid men working on floats or scaffolds,
cleats and hooks, which can be shop assembled and
as well as men in erection gangs, or other gangs using
bolted or riveted or welded to the piece and may be
small material, such as bolts and drift pins, adequate
left permanently in the place after the work.
bolt baskets or similar containers with handles of
18.2.6 If a piece is laterally unstable when picked at sufficient strength and attachment to carry the loaded
its centre, use of a balance beam is advisable, unless a containers, shall be provided.
18.2.11.2 The men should be trained to use such 18.2.17.3 While using multilegged slings, each sling
containers, and to keep small tools gathered up and or leg shall be loaded evenly and the slings shall be of
put away in tool boxes when not in use. Material sufficient length to avoid a wide angle between the
shall not be dumped overboard when a scaffold is legs.
to be moved. Rivet heaters shall have safe containers
18.2.18 Rivetting Operations
or bucke~s for hot rivets left over at the end of the
clay. 18.2.18.1 Handling rivets
18.2.12 During the erection of tall buildings, it is Care shall be taken while handling rivets so that they
desirable to use nylon nets at a height of 3 m to 4 m to do not fall, strike or cause injury to men and material
provide safety to men, The safety net should be made below. Rivet catchers shall have false wooden bottoms
from man or machine-made fibre ropes which are UV to prevent rivets from rebounding.
stabli zed and conforming to the acceptable standard
18.2.18.2 Rivetting dollies
[7(18)].
Canvas, leather or rope slings shall be used for riveting
18.2.13 Safety Against Fire
dollies. Chain shall not be used for the purpose.
A fire protection procedure is to be set up if there is to
18.2.18.3 Rivetting hammers
be any flame cutting, burning, heating, rivetting or any
18.2.13.2 Sufficient fire extinguishers shall be placed The rivet heating equipment should be as near as
at strategic points. Extinguishers shall always be placed possible to the place of work. A pail of water shall
in cranes, hoists, compressors and similar places. always be kept already for quenching the fire during
Where electrical equipments are involved, C02 or dry rivetting operations and to prevent fires when working
powdeg extinguishers shall be provided {see also good near inflammable materials.
practice [7(4)] ].
18.2.19 Welding and Gas Cutting
18.2.14 Riding on a load, tackle or runner shall be
18.2.19.1 For safety and health requirements in electric
prohibited.
gas welding and cutting operations, reference may be
18.2.15 The load shall never be allowed to rest on wire made to good practice [7(21)]. The recommendations
ropes. Ropes in operation should not be touched. Wire given in 18.2.19.2 to 18.2.19.4 are also applicable.
rope with broken strand shall not be used for erection
18.2.19.2 All gas cylinders shall be used and stored
work. Wire ropes/manila ropes conforming to
in the upright position only and shall be conveyed in
acceptable standards [7(20)] shall be used for guying.
trolleys. While handling by cranes they shall be carried
18.2.16 Lijting Appliances in cages. The cylinders shall be marked ‘full’ or
Precautions as laid down in 17.1.2 shall be followed. ‘empty’ as the case may be. Gas cylinders shall be
stored away from open flames and other sources of
18.2.17 Slinging heat. Oxygen cylinders shall not be stored near
18.2.17.1 Chains shall not be joined by bolting or combustible gas, oil, grease and similar combustible
wiring links together. They shall not be shortened by materials. When the cylinders are in use, cylinder valve
tying knots. A chain in which the links are locked, key or wrench shall be placed in position. Before a
stretched or do not move freely shall not be used. The cylinder is moved, cylinder valve shall be closed. All
chain shall be free of kinks and twists. Proper eye cylinder valves shall be closed when the torches are
splices shall be used to attach the chain hooks. being replaced or welding is stopped for some reason.
The cylinder valve and connections shall not be
18.2.17.2 Pulley blocks of the proper size shall be used
lubricated.
to allow the rope free play in the sheave grooves and
to protect the wire rope from sharp bends under load. 18.2.19.3 Gas cutting and welding torches shall be
Idle sling should not be carried on the crane hook lighted by means of special lighters and not with
alongwith a loaded sling. When idle slings are carried matches. The cables from welding equipment should
they shall be hooked. be placed in such a way that they are not run over by
19.3.3.2 Suitable indicator gauges shall be used to 19.3.3.9 Piping shall not be warmed with burning rags
ascertain level and temperature of the material in the and instead blow-lamps or similar devices shall be used.
boiler. On no account shall workers be allowed to peep
19.3.3.10 Spilled bitumen or tar shall be promptly
into the boiler for this purpose. For ascertaining levels,
cleaned up around boilers.
in small plants, dipstick may also be used.
19.3.3.11 Inspection openings shall not be opened
19.3.3.3 Gas and oil-fwed bitumen and tar kettles or
while there is any pressure in the boiler.
pots shall be equipped with burners, regulators and
safety devices of types approved by the Authority. 19.3.3.12 When tanks are cleaned by steam, adequate
Heating appliances for vessels shall distribute the heat precautions shall be taken to prevent any built up of
uniformly over the heating surface so as to avoid pressure.
overheating. In case of bituminous mixtures using
19.3.4 Handling Bitumeflar
mineral aggregates filler together with bitumen, it is
preferable to have some means for stirring as well. Only Bitumen/tar shall not be heated beyond the temperature
vessels heated by electricity shall be used inside recommended by the manufacturer of the product.
buildings. Tar boilers shall never be used on While discharging heated binder from the boiler,
combustible roof. workers shall not stand opposite to the jet so as to avoid
the possibility of hot binder falling on them. The
19.3.3.4 Buckets for hot bitumen, bituminous
container shall be handled only after closing the control
materials of tar shall have:
valve. While handling hoi bitumenhar, workers shall
a) the bail or handle firmly secured, and exercise scrupulous care to prevent accidental spillage
b) a second handle near the bottom for tipping. thereof. The buckets and cans in which the hot material
is carried from boiler shalb’be checked before use to
19.3.3.5 Bitumen or tar boilers mounted on wheels
ensure that they are intact and safe. Mops and other
for easy transport or towing shall preferably be
applicators contaminated with bituminous materials
provided with hand pumps for spraying purposes.
shall not be stored inside buildings.
19.3.3.6 Vessels in operation shall be kept at a safe
19.3.5 Bitumen Plants
distance from combustible materirds. When vessels are
used in confined spaces, the gases, fumes and smoke Safety requirements shall be in accordance with good
generated shall be removed by exhaust ventilation or practice [7(22)].
by forced ventilations. Vessels that are being heated
19.4 Timber Structure
shall not be left unattended, Pieces of bituminous
material shall not be thrown into the hot vessels so as Preventive measures against hazards in work places
to cause splashing. Covers shall be kept closed when involving construction of timber structures shall be
vessels are not in use. Containers shall not be filled taken in accordance with good practice [7(23)].
Persons working at heights may use safety belts and For the purpose of this Section, the following
harnesses. Provision of cat-walks, wire mesh, railings definitions shrdl apply.
reduces chances of fall-ladder and scaffoldings,
26.2.1 Maintenance — The combination of all
stagings etc, should be anchored on firm footing and
technical and associated administrative actions
should be secured and railing should be provided as
intended to retain an item in or restore it to a state in
far as possible. All accesses should be barricaded to
which it can perform its required function.
prevent accidental fall, For details as fall prevention
reference may be made to good practice [7(27)]. 26.2.2 Maintenance Management — The organization
of maintenance within an agreed policy. Maintenance
24.5 Falling Materials Hazard Prevention
can be seen as a form of ‘steady state’ activity.
Preventive measures against falling materials hazards
26.2.3 Building Fabric — Elements and components
in work places shall be taken in accordance with good
of a building other than furniture and services.
26.3.2 Factors Affecting Maintenance 26.3.2.2.2 A list of common causes for maintenance
problems is given in Annex C for guidance. However,
26.3.2.1 Maintenance of the buildings is influenced
no such list is likely to be entirely comprehensive.
by the following factors:
a) Technical factors — These include age 26.3.3 Maintenance Policy
of building, nature of design, material The policy should cover such items as the owner’s
specifications, past standard of maintenance anticipated future requirement for the building taking
and cost of postponing maintenance. account of the building’s physical performance and
b) Policy — A maintenance policy ensures that its functional suitability. This may lead to decisions
value for money expended is obtained in regarding:
addition to protecting both the asset value and
a) the present use of the building anticipating
the resource value of the buildings concerned
any likely upgradings and their effect on
and owners.
the life cycles of existing components or
c) Financial and economics factors — (see engineering services; and
26.9).
b) a change of use for @e building and the effect
d) Environmental — All buildings are subject to
of any conversion ‘work on the life cycles of
the effects of a variety of external factors such
existing components or engineering services.
as air, wind precipitation, temperature etc.
which influence the frequency and scope of 26.3.4 Maintenance Work Programmed
maintenance.
The programming of maintenance work can affect an
The fabric of building can be adversely owner or his activities in the following ways:
affected as much by the internal environment
as by the elements externally. Similar factors a) maintenance work should be carried out at
of humidity, temperature and pollution should such times as are likely to minimize any
be considered. Industrial buildings can be adverse effect on output or function.
subject to many different factors subject to b) programme should be planned to obviate as
processes carried out within. Swimming pool far as possible any abortive work.
An owner responsible for a large number of buildings 26.3.8 Means of Effecting Maintenance
may have established procedures for maintenance. 26.3.8.1 Responsibility
When an owner is responsible for the maintenance of
only one building or a small number of buildings, the Some maintenance work will be carried out by
the occupier of a building or by the occupier’s
26.4.2.2 A wide variety of temporary access equipment 26.5.2.3 Records are of value only if they are kept up
may appropriately be provided for maintenance work, to date and arrangements for this should be included
ranging from ladders to scaffoldings or powered lift in any provision that may be made for records.
platforms.
26.5.2.4 Records should be readily accessible for use
26.4.2.3 Wherever possible it is better to provide and the place of storage should take into account the
permanent access facilities such as fixed barriers, form of the records and the conditions needed to keep
ladders, and stairways. When such permanent access them from damage of any kind. It is recommended
e) incoming supply details; the type of system, 26.6.3.1 Inspection of services should be carried out
voltage, phases, frequency, rated current and for three purposes as follows:
short circuit level, with the details of the
a) to check if maintenance work is required,
supply protection and time of operation as
appropriate; b) to check if maintenance work is being
adequately carried out, and
g) main switchgear details; for purpose made
equipment this should include a set of c) for safety reasons to comply with
manufacturers’ drawings and the site layout; statutory requirements and if required,
with recommendations of other relevant
h) transformer, capacitor and power plant
organizations. ,’
details; the leading details should be given,
for example, for transformers the V.A rating, 26.6.3.2 The frequency of inspections for purpose
voltages and type of cooling; and (a) will depend upon types of plant and system
j) Completion certificate, according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and subjective
Indian Electricity Act. judgement. Frequencies for purpose (b) should be
carried out on an annual basis.
26.6 Inspections
26.6.3.3 Method of inspection
26.6.1 General
The limited life of building services means it is
Regular inspections are actual part of the procedures important to record their residual life so that their
for the maintenance of buildings. They are needed for replacement can be budgeted for, and inspection
a variety of purposes and each purpose requires a methods should be arranged accordingly.
A checklist of items of plant to be inspected should be wear to the various components. Examination of the.
considered. Detailed specifications of how inspections equipment shall reveal any need for conditioning of
should be carried out are necessary because a simple the contact system, lubrication and adjustment of the
visual inspection is unlikely to show whether plant is mechanisms.
operating correctly and efficiently.
26.7.2.2 Post fault maintenance
Inspections frequently necessitate the use of
When there is a breakdown in the system and certain
appropriate instruments by oompetent persons, An
parts are identified for the replacement and then the
example of this is the inspections carried out to check
maintenance/repair of the defective part away from the
compliance with statutory requirements.
operating environment is covered under post fault
When instruments are used it is important that adequate maintenance.
training is provided in the use of the instruments and
26.7.3 Guidelines for the Maintenance of Electrical
the interpretation of the results.
Appliances
26.6.4 Records of all inspections should be kept.
26.7.3.1 Unintemupted and hazard free functioning of
26.6.5 Inspection Report the electrical installations are the basic parameters of
Inspection report may be prepared in the format as maintenance. The equipment should be restored to
correct working conditions. Special attention should
26.7.1.2 Repetitive nature of jobs involve little or no 26.8 Operating and Maintenance Manuals
pre-planning whereas infrequent nature of jobs may The engineering services within buildings frequently
need careful planning even if the person attending the are dynamic, involving complex systems of integrated
job is technically competent. plant items. Operation of such plant can require detailed
26.7.1.3 Planned routine maintenance will facilitate knowledge and direction. Maintenance can also require
continued safe and acceptable operation of an electrical extensive information to be available. It is, therefore,
system with a minimum risk of breakdown and important to have suitable operating and maintenance
consequent interruption of supply. manuals to provide the necessary guidance. These
should be included as part of the contractual
26.7.1.4 As far as the electrical equipments/ requirements for new installations and should ideally
installations are concerned, it is not possible to laydown be prepared as reference documents for existing
precise recommendations for the interval between the installations where no such information exists.
maintenance required. The recommendation for
frequency of maintenance in this regard from the 26.9 For details on labour management concerning
manufacturer is more relevant. The manufacturer building maintenance, reference shall be made to good
should be requested to specify minimum maintenance practice [7(32)].
frequency under specified conditions. These intervals 26.10 For details on financial management concerning
depend greatly upon the design of the equipment, the building maintenance, reference shall be made to good
duty that it is called onto perform and the environment practice [7(33)].
in which it is situated.
27 PREVENTION OF CRACKS
26.7.2 Following two types of maintenance are
envisaged. 27.1 Cracks in buildings are of common occurrence.
A building component develops cracks whenever stress
26.7.2.1 Routine maintenance
in the component exceeds its strength. Stress in a
Routine maintenance of the electrical equipments goes building component could be caused by externally
alongwith the regular inspections of the equipments. applied forces, such as dead, imposed, wind or seismic
Inspections shall reveal the undue damage and excessive loads, or foundation settlement or it could be induced
27.2 Cracks could be broadly classified as structural e) Re-building non-structural walls, smoke
chimneys, parapet walls, etc;
or non-structural. Structural cracks are those which are
due to incorrect design, faulty construction or f) Re-plastering of walls as required;
overloading and these may endanger the safety of a @ Rearranging disturbed roofing tiles;
building. Extensive cracking of an RCC beam is an h) Relaying cracked flooring at ground level;
instance of structural cracking. Non-structural cracks and
are mostly due to internally induced stresses in building Redecoration — whitewashing, painting, etc.
j)
materials and these generally do not directly result in
The architectural repairs as stated above do not restore
structural weakening. In course of time, however,
the original structural strength of structural components
sometime non-structural cracks may, because of
in the building and any attempt to carry out only repairs
penetration of moisture through cracks or weathering
to architectural/non-structural elements neglecting
action, result in corrosion of reinforcement and thus
the required structural repairs may have serious
may render the structure unsafe. Vertical cracks in a
implications on the safety of the building. The damage
long compound wall due to shrinkage or thermal
would be more severe in the event of the building being
movement is an instance of non-structural cracking.
shaken by the similar shock because original energy
Non-structural cracks, normally do not endanger the
31.1 Prior-to commencement of work, all material of 33.1 While walls of sections of masonry are being
fragile nature like glass shall be removed. demolished, it shall be ensured that they are not allowed
to fall as single mass upon the floors of the building
31.2 All openings shall be boarded up.
that are being demolished so as to exceed the safe
31.3 Dust shall be controlled by suitable means to carrying capacity of the floors. Overloading of floors
prevent harm to workmen. shall be prevented by removing the accumulating
debris through chutes or by other means immediately.
31.4 Stacking of materials or debris shall be within
The floor shall be inspected by the engineer-in-charge
d) The mechanical device when being used shall 39.4.3 Where deliberate collapse is feasible, the crown
not cause any damage to adjacent structure, may be broken by the demolition brdl method working
power line, etc. progressively from edges to the centre.
Demolition should be commenced by removing 40.2.2 Chutes, if provided at an angle of more than
partitions and external non-load bearing cladding. 45° from the horizontal, shall be entirely enclosed on
all the four sides, except for opening at or about the
39.6.1 Reinforced Concrete Beams floor level for receiving the materials.
A supporting rope should be attached to the beam. 40.2.3 To prevent the descending material attaining a
Then the concrete should be removed from both ends dangerous speed, chute shall not extend in an unbroken
by pneumatic drill and the reinforcement exposed. line for more than two storeys. A gate or stop shall be
The reinforcement should then be cut in such a way provided with suitable means for closing at the bottom
as to allow the beam to be lowered under control to of each chute to stop the flow of materials.
the floor.
40.2.4 Any opening into which workmen dump debris
39.6.2 Reinforced Concrete Columns at the top of chute shall be guarded by a substantial
The reinforcement should be exposed at the base after guard rail extending at least 1 m above the level of the
restraining wire guy ropes have been placed round the floor or other surface on which men stand to dump the
member at the top. The reinforcement should then be materials into the chute.
out in such a way as to allow it to be pulled down to 40.2.5 A toe board or bumper, not less than 50 mm
the floor under control. thick and 150 mm high shall be provided at each chute
39.6.3 Reinforced Concrete Walls openings, if the material is dumped from the wheel
barrows. Any space between the chute and the edge of
These should be cut into strips and demolished as for the opening in the floor ~ough which it passes shall
columns. be solidly planked over.
39.6.4 Suspended Floors and Roofs
40.3 Through Holes in the Floors
The slab should be cut into strips parallel to the main
40.3.1 Debris may also be dropped through holes in
reinforcement and demolished strip by strip. Where
the floor without the use of chutes, In such a case the
ribbed construction has been used, the principle of
total area of the hole cut in any intermediate floor, one
design and method of construction should be
which lies between floor that is being demolished and
determined before demolition is commenced. Care
the storage floor shall not exceed 25 percent of such
should be taken not to cut the ribs inadvertently.
floor area. It shall be ensured that the storage floor is
39.7 Precast Reinforced Concrete of adequate strength to withstand the impact of the
falling material.
Due precautions shall be taken to avoid toppling over
of prefabricated units or any other part of the structure 40.3.2 All intermediate floor openings for passage of
40.4 Removal of Materials 41.2 Warning devices shall be installed in the area to
warn the workers in case of any danger.
40.4.1 As demolition work proceeds, the released
serviceable materials of different types shall be 41.3 Safety devices like industrial safety helmets
conforming to the accepted standards [7(9)] and
ANNEX A
(Clause 2.1.2)
A-O.2.1 PERT and CPM enable us to achieve judicious An assessment is to be made to find out the time needed
employment and utilization of resources, such as for each activity and then to list out those activities,
labour, materials, and equipment by pre-determining which can be executed concurrently (or simultaneously)
the various stages, listing out the various activities and with each other. For example, while designing of the
drawing out ‘Arrow Network Diagram’. building is in hand, correspondence for land purchase
can also go on side by side; or while work in
A-O.3 Synchronization of Sub-Projects foundations is in progress, order for ‘joinery’ can be
placed.
A-O.3.1 Another extremely important advantage of
CPM is that various factors influencing completion of A-1.3 Critical Activity
a project can be scientifically planned to be coordinated
It should then be seen as to which of the activities are
such that the completion of various sub-projects and
critical, that is which items are such that a single day’s
services, such as furniture, sewage, electricity and delay will mean overall delay on the project. Contrary
water supply synchronises. to this, it will be seen from CPM Network that certain
activities can be delayed to a certain extent without
A-1 PREPARATION OF CPM CHART (LISTING
delaying the completion of the project. This is a very
OUT THE ACTIVITIES)
useful and valuable i~ormation for the ‘Project
A-1.l The most important step in preparation of CPM Manager’. That is where resources scheduling becomes
network is to list out the activities involved to the easier and economical and a time saver. It eliminates
minutest details. For example, a few activities in case chances of idle labour and higher expenses which are
of a building project are given below: results of haphazard planning.
ANNEX B
(Clause 4.1)
ANNEX B — Continued
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12)
12. Boards like Plywood,
Particle Boards, Fibre I/
Boards, Blackboards and
Gypsum Board
13. Plastic and Rubber Flooring
a) Sheets in rolls
b) Tiles
14. Glass Sheets
15. Glass Bricks/Blocks
16. CI, GI and AC Pipes and
Fittings
a) Pipes
b) CI and GI Fittings
ANNEX C
(Clause 26.3.2.2.2)
COMMON CAUSES FOR MAINTENANCE PROBLEMS
ANNEX D
(Clause 26.6.5)
Condition
Ground Floor
Finish
Skirting
Structure
Damp-proofing
Ceiling
Under floors, spaces, (Suspended floors)
Termites/insects
Upper Floors
Finish
Structure
Ceiling
Suspended ceiling
Stair cases
Structure
Treads
Finishes
Balustrade
Soffits
Finish
ROOFING
Flat/Pitched
Finish
Insulation
Structure
Roof lights/glazing
Parapets
Cutters
Rain Water Pipes
hhd Phuska
Roof interiors (Pitched)
Growth of vegetation
SANITARY INSTALLATIONS
Plumbing
Fittings/Pipings, WC’s
Taps
Sinks
Sewage Disposal
Soil pipes
Manholes
Sewerlines
Drainage
Gully chambers
Sewers
Surface drains
Inspection chambers
Structural movement
Failure of material
Design or construction defects
Overhead Tanks/Underground
Sumpsflerrace Tanks
Septic Tanks
Remarks
(Clause 26.7.3.2)
E-1 In case of electrical appliances, manufacturer’s be available with the maintenance unit. Following
instructions for the usage and maintenance of the records should be available.
equipment should be strictly followed. a) Manufacturer’s name
E-2 The detailed/working drawings of all the b) Nameplate of the equipment and its sailent
components of electrical installations should always features such as capacity, rating etc.
E-n If the equipment is ventilated then it should be E-21 Battery cells should be inspected for shedding
ensured that the airflow is smooth and not restricted. of active material, sedimentation and buckling of
If filters are provided, they should be cleaned or plates. Level of electrolyte should be regularly checked
replaced as necessary. and the level should be corrected with distilled water.
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are 1S No. Title
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ (Part 3): 1992 Foundations for rotary type
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The machines (medium and
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time high frequency) (second
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may revision)
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance
(Part 4): 1979 Foundations for rotary type
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the
machines of low frequency
Code,
(first revision)
IS No. Title
(Part 5): 1987 Foundations for impact
(1) a) Fowzdadom machines other than
1080:1985 Code of practice for design hammers forging and
and construction of shallow stamping press pig breakers
foundations on soils (other (drop crusher and jolter)
than raft, ring and shell) (first revision)
(second revision) 9456:1980 Code of practice for design
60 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
1S No. Title IS No. Title
1196:1978 Code of practice for laying 5318:1969 Code of practice for laying
bitumen mastic flooring of flexible PVC sheet and
(second revision) tile flooring
64 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
IS No. Title IS No. Title
(Part 13) :1994 White washing, colour 2527:1984 Code of practice for fixing
washing, distempering and rain-water gutters and
painting of building down pipes for roof
surfaces ($jlh revision) drainage (first revision)
(Part 14) :1984 Glazing (third revision) 3414:1968 Code of practice for design
(Part 15) :1987 Paining, polishing, and installation of joints in
varnishing, etc (fourth buildings
revision) 3548:1988 Code of practice for glazing
(Part 16) :1979 Laying of water and sewer in buildings @t revision)
lines including appurtenant 3558:1983 Code of practice for use of
items (third revision) immersion vibrators for
(Part 17) :1985 Roadwork including air consolidating concrete
field pavements (third (first revision)
revision) 3935:1966 Code of practice for
(Part 18) :1974 Demolition and dismantling composite construction
(third revision) 4326:1993 Code of practice for
(Part 3): 1979 Dimensions for screw 2587:1975 Specification for pipes
drivers for recessed head vices (open side type and
screws (second revision) fixed sides type) (first
revision)
1630:1984 Specification for mason’s
tools for plaster work and 2588:1975 Specification for
pointing work (first blacksmith’s vices (first
revision) revision)
(Part 1): 1978 General purposes (first 5891:1970 Specification for hand-
revision) operated concrete mixer
5995:1971 Specification for pipe grip
(Part 2) :1986 Heavy duty (first revision)
pliers
4017:1992 Specification for carpenters
6007:1971 Specification for pipe vices
squares (jirst revision)
(hinged type)
68 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
IS No. Title IS No. Title
6881:1973 Specification for link type (32) 15183 Maintenance management
pipe cutters (Part 3): 2002 for buildings — Guidelines:
6891:1973 Specification for carpenter’s Part 3 Labour
auger bits (33) 15183 Maintenance management
6892:1973 Specification for (Part 2): 2002 for buildings — Guidelines:
b~acksmith’s brick-iron Part 2 Finance
7041: 973 Specification for carpenter’s (34) 3935:1993 Guidelines for repair and
plain brace seismic strengthening of
7042: 973 Specification for carpenter’s buildings
ratchet brace (35) 3828:1993 Improving earthquake
7077: 973 Specification for bending resistance of low strength
bars masonry buildings —
7958:1976 Specification for hand vices Guidelines
8202:1994 Specification for carpenter’s (36) 13827: 199; Improving earthquake
wooden bodied planes @rst resistance of earthen
revision) buildings — Guidelines
FOREWORD ... 3
1 SCOPE ... 5
2 TERMINOLOGY ... 5
3 ORIENTATION OF BUILDING ... 8
4 LIGHTING ... 11
5 VENTILATION ... 35
FOREWORD
Illumination levels for different tasks are recommended to be achieved either by daylighting or artificial lighting
or a combination of both. This Section, read together with Part 8 ‘Building Services, Section 2 Electrical and
Allied Installations’, adequately covers the illumination levels required and methods of achieving the same.
Ventilation requirements to maintain air quality and control body odours in terms of air changes per hour and to
ensure thermal comfort and heat balance of body are laid for different occupancies and the methods of achieving
the same by natural means are covered in this Section. The provisions on mechanical ventilation are covered in
Part 8 ‘Building Services, Section 3 Air Conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation’.
Climatic factors which normally help in deciding the orientation of the buildings to get desirable benefits of
This Section was first published in 1970. The first revision of the Section was brought out in 1983. In this
revision, some provisions have been updated based on the information given in the SP 41 : 1987 ‘Handbook on
functional requirements of buildings (other than industrial buildings)’; other major changes in this revision are:
Energy efficiency is an important aspect being taken care of in this revision of the Code. Accordingly, the
relevant requirements for energy efficient system for lighting and ventilation have been duly included in the
concerned provisions under this Section.
The provisions of this Section are without prejudice to the various Acts, Rules and Regulations including the
Factories Act, 1948 and Rules and Regulations framed thereunder.
The information contained in this Section in largely based on the following Indian Stan@rds/Special publications:
Provisions given in National Lighting Code (under preparation) may also be referred.
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
2.1.1 Altitude (/3) — The angular distance of any point 2.1.7 Colour Rendering Index (CRI) — Measure of
of celestial sphere, measured from the horizon, on the the degree to which the psychophysical colour of an
great circle passing through the body and the zenith object illuminated by the test illuminant conforms to
significant objects or both due to an unsuitable 2.1.24 Orientation of Buildings — In the case of non-
distribution or range of luminance or due to extreme square buildings, orientation refers to the direction of
contrasts in space and time. the normal to the long axis. For example, if the length
of the building is east-west, its orientation is north-
2.1.15 Illuminance — At a point on a surface, the ratio
south.
of the luminous flux incident on an infinitesimal
element of the surface containing the point under 2.1.25 Peripheral Field — It is the rest of the visual
consideration to the area of the element. field which enables the observer to be aware of the
spatial framework surrounding the object seen.
NOTE — The unit of illuminance (the measurement of
illumination) is Iux which is 1 lumen per square metre. NOTE — A central part of the peripheral field, subtendkrg an
angle of about 30° on either side of the point of fixation, is
2.1.16 Internal Reflected Component (IRC) — The chiefly involved in the perception of glare.
ratio (or percentage) of that part of the daylight
illuminance at a point in a given plane which is received 2.1.26 Reflected Glare — The variety of ill effects on
by direct reflection or inter-reflection from the internal visual efficiency and comfort produced by unwanted
surfaces as compared to the simultaneous exterior reflections in and around the task area.
illuminance on a horizontal plane due to the entire 2.1.27 Reflection Factor (Reflectance) — The ratio
hemisphere of an unobstructed clear design sky. of the -luminous flux reflected by a body (with or
2.1.17 Light Output Ratio (LOR) or Eficiency (~) — without diffision) to the flux it receives. Some symbols
2.1.19 Luminance (At a point of a Su~ace in a Given 2.1.29 Room Index (k,) — An index relating to the shape
Direction) (Brightness) — The quotient of the of a rectangular interior, according to the formula:
luminous intensity in the given direction of an
infinitesimal element of the surface containing the k, = ‘“w
(L+W) Iim
point under consideration by the orthogonally
projected area of the element on a plane perpendicular where L and W are the length and width respectively
to the given direction. The unit is candela per square of the interior, and H~ is the mounting height, that is,
metre (cd/m*). height of the fittings above the working plane.
2.1.20 Luminous Flux (@)— The quantity characteristic NOTES
of radiant flux which expresses its capacity to produce 1 For rooms where the length exceeds 5 times the width, L
visual sensation evaluated according to the values shall Lwtaken aa L = 5W.
of relative luminous efficiency for the light adapted 2 If the reflection factor of the upper stretch of the wrdls is
less than half the reflection factor of the ceiling, for indirect or
eye:
for the greater part of indirect fighting, the vrdrreHmis measured
a) E“ective luminousflux ( ~,) — Total luminous between the ceiling and the working plane.
flux which reaches the working plane. 2.130 Sky Compommt(SC)-The ratio (or percentage)
b) Nominal luminousflux (@O)— Total luminous of that part of the daylight illuminance at a point on a
flux of the light sources in the interior. given plane which is recei4ed directly from the sky as
2.1.21 Maintenance Factor (d) — The ratio of the compared to the simultaneous exterior illuminance on
average illuminance on the working plane after a a horizontal plane from the entire hemisphere of art
certain period of use of a lighting installation to the unobstructed clear design sky.
average illuminance obtained under the same 2.1.31 Solar Load — The amount of heat received
conditions for a new installation. into a building due to solar radiation which is affected
2.1.22 Meridian — It is the great circle passing through by orientation, materials of construction and reflection
the zenith and nadir for a given point of observation. of external finishes and colour.
2.1.23 North and South Points — The point in the 2.1.32 Utilization Factor (Coe@cient of Utilizaiton)
respective directions where the meridian cuts the (A) — The ratio of the total luminous flux which
horizon. reaches the working plane (effective luminous
6 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INIXA
flux, @~)to the total luminous flux of the light sources be carried out by a competent authority having jurisdiction and
in the interior (nominal luminous flux, @O). if the outside air of the quality specified is not available, filtration
and other treatment devices shall be used to bring its quality to
or above the levels mentioned in Table 1. ,, ~
2.1.33 Visual Field -— The visual field in the binocular ;
which includes an area approximately 120° vertically 2 The list of contaminants given in Table,1 is not exhaustive
and 160° horizontally centering on the point to which and available special literature may be referred for data on
other contaminants.
the eyes are directed. The line joining the point of
/
fixation and the centre of the pupil of each eye is called Table 1 Maximum Allowable Contaminant
its primary line of sight. Concentrations for Ventilation Air Contaminants
2.1.34 Working Plane — A horizontal plane at a level Annual Average (Arithmetic Mean) i“ 1
at which work will normally be done (see 4.1.3.3 (Clause 2.2.9)
and 4.1.3.4).
Contaminants Annual Short-Term Averaging
2.2 Ventilation Average Level (Not Period
(Arithmetic to exceed
2.2.1 Air Change per Hour — The amount of air Mean) More than I
Once a ‘i
leakage into or out of a building or room in terms of t
Year) k ?
the number of building volume or room volume f
pg/m3 pg/m3 h
exchanged.
(4)
2.2.3 Centrijtigal Fan — A fan in which the air leaves Photochemical oxidant 100 500 1
the impeller in a direction substantially at right angles Hydrocarbons (not 1800 4000 3
including methanes)
to ils axis.
Nitrogen oxide 200 500 24
2.2.4 Contaminants — Dusts, fumes, gases, mists, Odouc Essentially
vapours and such other substances present in air as are unobjectionable
likely to be injurious or offensive to the occupants.
2.2.10 Ge~~ral ventilation — ventilation, either
2.2.5 Dilution Ventilation — Supply of outside air to *
natural or mechanical or both, so as to improve the
reduce the air-borne concentration of contaminants in
general environment of the building, as opposed to
the building.
local exhaust ventilation for contamination control.
2.2.6 Dry Bulb Temperature — The temperature of
2.2.11 Globe Temperature — The temperature
the air, read on a thermometer, taken in such a way as
measured by a thermometer whose bulb is enclosed in
to avoid errors due to radiation.
a matt black painted thin copper globe of 150 mm
2.2.7 E~ective Ternperatzwe (ET) — An arbitrary index diameter. It combines the influence of air temperature
which combines into a single value the effect of and thermal radiations received or emitted by the
temperature, humidity and air movement on the bounding surfaces.
sensation of w,armth or cold felt by the human body
2.2.12 Humidification — The process whereby the
and its numerical value is that of the temperature of
absolute humidity of the air in a building is maintained
still saturated air which would induce an identical
at a higher level than that of outside air or at a level
sensation.
higher than that which would prevail naturally.
2.2.8 Exhaust @’Air — Removal of air from a building
2.2.13 Humidity, Absolute — The mass of water
or a room and its disposal outside by means of a
vapour per unit volume.
mechanical device, such as a fan.
2.2.9 Fresh Air or Outside Air — Air of that quality, 2.2.14 Humidity, Relative — The ratio of the partial
pressure or density of the water vapour in the air to the
which meets the criteria of Table 1 and in addition
saturated pressure or density respectively of water
shall be such that the concentration of any contaminant
in the air is limited to within one-tenth the threshold vapour at the same temperature.
limit value (TLV) of that contaminant. 2.2.15 Local Exhaust Ventilation — Ventilation
N 0T13S effected by exhaust of air through an exhaust appliance,
1 Where it is reasonably believed that the air of quality is such as a hood with or without fan located as closely
unexpectable m; indicated above, sampling and analysis shall as possible to the point at which contaminants are
released, so as to capture effectively the contaminants in air at that point by causing the air to flow into the
and convey them through ducts to a safe point of exhaust hood.
discharge.
2.2.26 Ventilation — Supply of outside air into, or
2.2.16 Make-up Air — Outside air supplied into a the removrd of inside air from an enclosed space.
building to replace the indoor air.
2.2.27 Wet Bulb Temperature —The steady temperature
2.2.17 Mechanical Ventilation — Supply of outside air finally given by a thermometer having its bulb covered
either by positive ventilation or by infiltration by with gauze or muslin moistened with distilled water
reduction of pressure inside due to exhaust of air, or and placed in an air stream of not less than 4.5 m/s.
by a combination of positive ventilation and exhaust
of air. 3 ORIENTATION OF B~ING
2.2.18 Natural Ventilation — Supply of outside air 3.1 The chief aim of orientation of buildings is to
into a building through window or other openings due provide physically and psychologically comfortable
to wind outside and convection effects arising from living inside @c building by creating -ti&$ which
temperature or vapour pressure differences (or both) suitably and w~sfully. w@, off the undesirable
between inside and outside of the building. effects of severe weat@K @ a cops@erable extent by
judicious use of the recommendations and knowledge
2.2.19 Positive Ventilation — The supply of outside of climatic factors.
air by means of a mechanical device, such as a fan.
0.745 t,+0.308 tW–2.06 F+ 0.841 The climatic classification map of India is shown in
Fig. 2.
where
3.2.2 Each climatic zong does not have same climate
tz = Globe temperature, ‘C; for the whole yew, it has a particular season for more
tw = Wet bulb temperature, “C; and than six months and may experience other seasons for
v = Wind speed, m/s. the remaining period. A @imatic zone that does not
have any season for more than six months may be
2.2.24 Threshold Limit Value (TLV) — Refers to air- called as composite zone.
borne concentration of contaminants currently accepted
by the American Conference of Governmental 3.3 Climatic Factors
Industrial Hygienists and represents conditions under
From the point of view of lighting and ventilation, the
which it is believed that nearly all occupants may be
following climatic factors influence the optimum
repeatedly exposed, day after day, without adverse
orientation of the building:
effect.
a) solar radiation and temperature
2.2.25 Velocity, Capture — Air velocity at any point
b) relative humidity, and
in front of the exhaust hood necessary to overcome
opposing air currents and to capture the contaminants c) prevailing winds.
=J* . .. .. . . . .
“ 2!-.
\“~.*..:
t:” , ‘,- ,“ :. ,“: ,.:Y+;7:T?)
. J.’
. . . ””.”
\
.
. . ... .‘ . . ..
. . . ... . .. . . . . .
+
. . .
...” . .
. .
. .
.,,,
..”.
.
,:-.
. .
“. ‘.. . , . .
.:$...
.<.
f
. .. .
. .
.
. .
. ., ..:-.
.O
““
:J MAP OF INDIA
.- ..,:., . . . ..ax
SHOWING
.:.-
.-
CLIMATIC ZONES
) .#.
.“,. .” .
100km O
~h
..-.
L,
r f \
* 1
—
ENDS
IsN HOT-DRY
*
,1
1!
WARM - HUMID
1 I
●
UIIInl COMPOSITE
,,,,,
,,,
///
.
.
? ,,,,,,.,,,
,.,,
,,,,,
,.,
,,,//
//,.,,,
,,,,
n ,,,, TEMPERATE
“d
8 n“.”... :.. . :
.:: ;:...:.:: ::
‘.
.: .,: ;: y.
COLD
?f
I
?4”
1 h
d u“
I I
24 w’
! t)
Based upon Survey of India Outline Map printed in 1$93. @Government of India Copyright, 2005
The territorial waters of India extend into the seato a dwtance of twelve nautical miles measured from the appropriate baaa line.
The boundary of Meghalaya shown on this map is as interpreted fkom the North-Eastarn Areas (Reorganisation) Act, 1971, but has yet to be varitiad.
Responsibility for correctness of internal detds shown on the map resta with the publisher.
The state boundaries between Uttaranchal & Uttar Pradesh, Bihar& Jharkhand and Chhatisga~ & Madhya Pradesh have not been verified by Governments concerned.
3.4.1.1 Except in cold climatic zone, suitable sun- 3.5.1.2 It is generally found that variation up to 30°
with respect to the prevalent wind direction does not
Table 3 Total Solar Radiation (Direct plus Diffused) Incident on Various Surfaces of
Buildings in W/m2/day for Summer and Winter Seasons
(Clause 3.4.1)
Orientation Latitude
*- -
A / -
/ -1 9°N 13°N 17“N 21°N 25”N 29°N
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
..
a major problem for daylighting in buildings, except f) installation of emergency lighting systems,
that direct sunshine and glare should be avoided. where necessary.
However, due allowance should be given to the mutual
4.1.2 Planning the Brightness Pattern
shading effects of opposite facades.
The brightness pattern seen within an interior maybe
3.7 Planting of Trees
considered as composed of three main parts — the task
Planting of trees in streets and in open spaces should itself, immediate background of the task and the general
be done carefully to take advantage of both shades and surroundings of walls, ceiling, floor, equipment and
sunshine without handicapping the flow of natural furnishings.
winds. Their advantage in abating glare and in
providing cool andlor warm pockets in developed areas 4.1.2,1 In occupations where the visual demands are
should also be taken, Some trees shed leaves in winter small, the levels of illumination derived from a
while retaining thick foliage in summer. Such trees criterion of visual performance alone maybe too low
will be very advantageous, particularly where southern to satisfy the other requirements. For such situations,
and western exposures are concerned, by allowing therefore, ilh.uninance recommendations are based on
maximum sun during winter and effectively blocking standards of welfare, safety and amenity judged
it in summer. appropriate to the occupations; they are also sufficient
to give these tasks brightness which ensured that the
3.8 For detailed information regarding orientation of visual performance exceeds the specified minimum.
4.1.1 Aims of Good Lighting 4.1.2.2 Where work takes place over the whole
utilizable area of room, the illumination over that area
Good lighting is necessary for all buildings and has
should be reasonably uniform and it is recommended
three primary aims. The first aim is to promote work
that the uniformity ratio (minimum illuminance divided
and other activities carried out within the building; the
by average illuminance levels) should be not less than
second aim is to promote the safety of the people using
0.7 for the working area.
the building; and the third aim is to create, in
conjunction with the structure and decoration, a 4.1.2.3 When the task brightness appropriate to an
pleasing environment conducive to interest of the occupation has bepn determined, the brightness of the
occupants and a sense of their well-being. other parts of the room should be planned to give a
proper emphasis to visual comfort and interest.
4.1.1.1 Realization of these aims involves:
a) careful planning of the brightness and colour A general guide for the brightness relationship within
pattern within both the working areas and the the normal field of vision should be as follows:
surroundings so that attention is drawn a) For high task brightness Maximum
naturally to the important areas, detail is seen (above 100 cdhn2)
quickly and accurately and the room is free 1) Between the visual task 3tol
from any sense of gloom or monotony and the adjacent areas
(see 4.1.3); like table t@s
b) using directional lighting where appropriate 2) Between the visual task lo to 1
to assist perception of task detail and to give and the remote areas of
good modeling; the room
c) controlling direct and reflected glare from b) For low and medium task brightness (below
light sources to eliminate visual discomfort; 100 cd/m2): The task should be brighter than
d) in artificial lighting installations, minimizing both the background and the surroundings;
flicker from certain types of lamps and paying the lower the task brightness, the less critical
attention to the colour rendering properties is the relationship.
of the light;
4.1.3 Recommended Values of Illuminance
e) correlating lighting throughout the building to
prevent excessive differences between adjacent Table 4 gives recommended values of illuminance
areas so as to reduce the risk of accidents; and commensurate with the general standards of lighting
4.1.3.2.2 The lower value of the range may be used Most buildings are complexes of working areas and
when: other areas, such as passages, corridors, stairways,
lobbies and entrances. The lighting of all these areas
a) reflectance or contrast are unusually high; should be properly correlated to give safe movement
b) speed and accuracy is not important and within the building at all tides.
c) the task is executed only occasionally. 4.1.5.1 Corridors, passages and stairways
4.1.3.3 Where a visual task is required to be carried Accidents may result if people leave a well-lighted
out throughout an interior, general illumination level working area and pass immediately into corridors or
to the recommended value on the working plane is on to stairways where the lighting is inadequate, as
necessary; where the precise height and location of the time needed for adaptation to the lower level may
the task are not known or cannot be easily specified, be too long to permit obstacles or the treads of stairs
the recommended value is that on horizontal plane to be seen sufficiently quickly. For the same reason, it
850 mm above floor level. is desirable that the illumination level of rooms which
NOTE — For an industrial task, working plane for the purpose open off a working area should be fairly high even
of generat illumination levels is that on a work place which is though the rooms may be used ordy occasionally.
3 ELECTRICITY GENERATION,
TRANSMISSIONANDDISTRIBUTION
3.1 GeneralPlant
3.1.1 Turbinehouses(operatingfloor) 150-200-300 2
3.1.2 Boiler and turbine house basements 50-100-150 3
3.1.3 Boiler houses, platforms, areas around burners 50-100-150 3
3.1.4 Switch rooms, meter rooms, oil plant rooms, HV 100-150-200 2
substations (indoor)
3.1.5 Control rooms 200-300-500 1 Loealixed lighting of control
display and the control desks may
be appropriate
3.1.6 Relay and telecommunication rooms 200-300-500 2
3.L7 Diesel generator rooms, compressor rooms 100-150-200 3
3.1.8 Pump houses, water treatment plant houses 100-150-200 3
3.1.9 Battery rooms, chargers, rectifiers 50-100-150 3
3.1.10 Precipitator chambers, platforms, etc 50-100-150 3
3.1.11 Cable tunnels and basements, circulating water 30-50-100 3
culverts and screen chambers, storage tanks
(indoor), operating areas and filling points at
outdoor tanks
3.2 Coal Plant
3.2.1 Conveyors, gantries, junction towers, unloading 50-100-150 3
hoppers, ash handling plants, settling pits, dust
hoppers outlets
3.2.2 Other areas where operators may be in attendance 100-150-200 3
3.3 Nuclear Plants
Gas circulation bays, reaetor area, boiler platform, 100-150-200 2
reactor charges and discharge face
4 METAL MANUFACTURE
4.1 IronMaking
4.1.1 Sinterplartti
Plant floor 150-200-300 3
5 CERAMICS
5.1 Concrete products
Mixing, casting, cleaning 150-200-300 3
5.2 Potteries
5.2.1 Grinding, moulding, pressing, cleaning, 200-300-500 3
trimming, glazing, firing
5.2.2 Enameling, colouring 5OO-75O-1OOO 1
6 CHEMICALS
.,
Table 4 — Continued
7.6.4 Very fine work, for example, instrument 750-1000-1500 1 Local lighting and optical aids are
assembly desirable
7.6.5 Minute work, for example, watch making 1000-1500-2000 1 Local lighting and optical aids are
desirable
10 TEXTILES
10.1 Fibre Preparation
10.1.1 Bafe breaking, washing 200-300-500 3
10.1.2 Stock dyeing, tinting 200-300-500 3
10.2 Yam Manufacture
10.2.1 Spinning, roving, winding, etc 300-500-750 2
10.2.2 Heafding (drawing in) 75O-1OOO-75O 2
10.3 Fabric Production
10.3.1 Knitting 300-50(-750 2
10.3.2 Weaving
10.3.2.1 Jute and hemp 200-300-500 2
10.3.2.2 Heavy woolens 300-500-750 1
10.3.2.3 Medium worsteds, fine woolens, cottons 5OO-75O-1OOO 1
10.3.2.4 Fine worsteds, fine linens, synthetics 75O-1OOO-15OO 1
10.3.2.5 Mending 1000- 15OO-2O(M 1
10.3.2.6 Inspection 100(-1500-2000 1
10.4 Fabric Finishing
10.4.1 Dyeing 200-300-500 3’
10.4.2 Calendaring, chemicaf treatment, etc 300-500-750 2
10.4.3 Inspection
10.4.3.1 ‘Grey’cloth 75O-1OOO-15OO 1
10.4.3.2 Final 1000-1500-2000 1
11 LEATHER INDUSTRY
pounding, ironing
12.4.2 Cleaning, flanging, finishing 300-500-750 2
12.4.3 Sewing 500-750-1000 2
12.4.4 Inspection 1000-1500-2000 — Local lighting may be appropriate
13.1 Sawmills
13.1.1 General 150-200-300 3
13.1.2 Head saw 300-500-750 2 Localized lighting may be
appropriate
13.1.3 Grading 500-750-1000 2 Directional lighting may be useful
17 COMMERCE
17.1 Offices
17.1.1 General offices 300-500-750 1
17.1.2 Deep plan general offices 500-750-1000 1
17.1.3 Computer work stations 300-500-750 1
17.1.4 Conference rooms, executive offices 300-500-750 1
17.1.5 Computer and data preparation rooms 300-500-750 1
171.6 Filing rooms 200-300-500 1
18 SERVICES
18.1 Garages
18S.1 Interior parking areas 20-30-50 3
19 RETAILING
The service illuminance should be
19.1 Small Shops with Counters 300-500-750 provided on the horizontal pkme of
the counter. Where wall displays
19.2 Small Self-Service Shops with Island Displays 300-500-750
are used, a similar illuminance on
the walls is desirable
19.3 Supper Markets, Hyper-Markets
19.3.1 General 300-500-750 2
19.3.2 Checkout 300-500-750 2
19.3.3 Showroom for large objects, for example, cars, 300-500-750 1
furnitures
19.3.4 Shopping precincts and arcades 100-150-200 2
20.3 Churches
20.3.1 Body of church 100-150-200 2
20.3.2 Pulpit, lectern 200-300-500 2 Use local lighting
20.3.3 Choir stalls 200-300-500 2 Local lighting may be appropriate
20.3.4 Alter, communion table, chancel 100-150-200 2 Additional lighting to provide
emphasis is desirable
20.3.5 Vestries 100-150-200 2
20.3.6 Organ 200-300-500
20.4 Hospitals
20.4.1 .Anaesthatic rooms
Table 4 — Continued
20.4.17.2
Laboratories 300-500-750
20.4.18 Consulting rooms
20.4.18.1
General 200-300-500 —
20.4.18.2
Desk 300-500-750 —
20.4.18.3
Examination couch 300-500-750 .
20.4.18.4
Ophthalmic wall and near-vision charts 300-500-750 —
20.5 Hotels
20.5.1 Entrance halls 50-100-150
20.5.2 Reception, cashier’s and porters’ desks 200-300-500 Localized lighting may be
appropriate
20.5.3 Bars, coffee base, dining rooms, grill rooms, 50-’200 The lighting should be designed to
restaurants, lounges create an appropriate atmosphere
20.5.4 Cloak rooms, baggage rooms 50-100-150 3
20.5.5 Bed rooms 30-50-100 —- Supplementary local lighting at
the bed head, writing table should
be provided
20.5.6 Bathroom 50-100-150 Supplementary local lighting near
20.6 Libraries
20.6.1 Lending library
20.6.1.1General 200-300-500 1
20.6.1.2Counters 300-500-750 1 Localized lighting may be
appropriate
20.6.1.3Bookshelves 100-150-200 2 The service illuminance should be
provided on the vertical face at
the bottom of the bookstack
20.6.1.4Reading rooms 200-300-500 1
20.6.1.5Reading tables 200-300-500 1 Localized lighting may be
appropriate
20.6.2 Catalogues
?&
20.6.2.1Card 100-150-200 2
20.6.2.2Microfiche/Visual display units 100-150-200 2
20.6.3 Reference libraries
20.6.3.1General 200-300-500 1
20.6.3.2Counters 300-500-750 1 Localized lighting may be
appropriate
20.6.3.3Bookshelves 100-150-200 2 The service illurninance should
be provided on a vertical surface
at the foot of the bookshelves
20.6.3.4Study tables, carrels 300-500-750 1
20.6.3.5Map room 200-300-500 1
20.6.4 Display and exhibition areas
20.6.4.1Exhibits insensitive to light 200-300-500
20.6.4.2Exhibit sensitive to light, for example, pictures, 50 to 150
prints, rare books in archives
20.6.5 Library workrooms
20.6.5.1Book repair and binding 300-500-750 2
20.6.5.2Catalogue and sorting 300-500-750 2
20.6.5.3Remote book stores 100-150-200 3
21 EDUCATION
22 TRANSPORT
22.1 Airports
22,1.1 Ticket counters, checking desks, and information 300-500-750 2 Localized lighting may be
desks appropriate
22.1.2 Departure lounges, other waiting areas 150-200-300 2
22.1.3 Baggage reclaim 150-200-300 2
22.1.4 Baggage handling 50-100-150 2
22.1.5 Customs and immigration halls 300-500-750 2
22.1.6 Concourse 150-200-300 2
23.1 Entrance
23.1.1 Entrance haHs, lobbies, waiting rooms 150-200-300 2
23.1.2 Enquiry desks 300-500-750 2 Localized lighting may be
appropriate
23.1.3 Gatehouses 150-200-300 2
23.6 Communications
23.6.1 Switchboard rooms 200-300-500 2
23.6.2 Telephone apparatus rooms 100-150-200 2
23.6.3 Telex room, post room 300-500-750 2
23.6.4 Reprographic room 200-300-500 2
Latitude 1700 1600 1500 1400 1300 — 1700 1600 1500 1400 1300 — 17001600 1500 1400 1300 —
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (10 (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (118) (19)
10°N 18 31 45 58 70 77 15 30 44 59 72 80 9 23 35 46 53 57
13°N 19 32 46 60 72 80 15 29 44 58 70 77 8 21 33 43 51 54
16°N 20 33 47 61 74 83 14 29 43 56 68 74 7 19 31 41 48 51
19°N 21 34 48 62 75 86 14 28 42 55 66 71 5 18 29 48 45 48
22°N 22 35 49 62 75 89 14 28 41 53 64 68 4 16 27 36 42 45
25”N 23 36 49 63 76 88 13 27 40 52 61 65 3 14 25 34 39 42
*
28°N 23 36 49 63 76 86 13 26 39 50 59 62 1 13 23 31 37 39
31°N 24 37 50 62 75 82 13 25 37 48 56 56 — 11 21 28 34 36
34°N 25 37 49 62 73 79 12 25 36 46 53 56 — 9 18 26 31 33
4.2.4 Components of Daylight Factor by a factor equal to the ratio of the clear opening to the
overall opening.
Daylight factor is the sum of all the daylight reaching
on an indoor reference point from the following 4.2.5.3 Correction for glazing
sources:
Where windows are glazed, the sky components
a) The direct sky visible from the point, obtained from Annex A shall be reduced by 10 to 20
b) External surfaces reflecting light directly (see percent, provided the panes are of clear and clean glass.
Note 1) to the point, and Where glass is of the frosted (ground) type, the sky
c) Internal surfaces reflecting and inter- components read from Annex A may be reduced by
reflecting light to the point. 15 to 30 percent. In case of tinted or reflective glass
the reduction is about 50 percent. Higher indicated
NOTES correction corresponds to larger windows and/or near
1 External surface reflection may be computed
reference points. In the case of openings and glazings
approximately only for points at the centre of the room,
and for detailed analysis procedures are complicated which are not vertical, suitable correction shall be taken
and these may be ignored for actual calculations. into account.
2 Each of the three components, when expressed as a
ratio or percent of the simultaneous external ihuninance 4.2.5.4 Correction for external obstructions
on the horizontal plane, defines respectively the sky
There is no separate correction, except that the values
component (SC), the external reflected component
4.2.5.1 The values obtainable from the tables are for 4.2.6.1 For method of calculating ERC, reference may
rectangular, open unglazed windows, with no external be made to accepted standard (see Examples 10 and
obstructions. The values shall be corrected for the 11 given in Annex B of good practice [8-1(3)].
presence of window bars, glazing and external
4.2.7 Internal Reflected Component (IRC)
obstructions, if any. This assumes the maintenance of
a regular cleaning schedule. The component of daylight factor contributed by
reflection from the inside surfaces varies directly as
4.2.5.2 Corrections for window bars
the window area and inversely as the total area of
The corrections for window bars shall be made by internal surfaces, and depends on the reflection factor
multiplying the values read from tables in Annex A of the floor, wall and roof surfaces inside and of the
28 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
4.3 Artificial Lighting amount of calculations, especially if these
tables have to cover a wide range of
4.3.1 Artificial lighting may have to be provided
lighting practices. For every Iuminaire,
a) where the recommended illumination levels the exact light distribution has to be
have to be obtained by artificial lighting only, measured in the laboratory and their
b) to supplement daylighting when the level of efficiencies have to be calculated and
illumination falls below the recommended measured exactly. These measurements
value, and comprise:
c) where visual task may demand a higher level i) the luminous flux radiated by the
of illumination. lurninaires directly to the measuring
surface,
4.3.2 Artificial Lighting Design for Interiors
ii) the luminous flux reflected and re-
For general lighting purposes, the recommended reflected by the ceiling and the walls
practice is to design for a level of illumination on the to the measuring surface, and
working plane on the basis of the recommended levels iii) the inter-reflections between the
for visual tasks given in Table 4 by a method called ceiling and wall which result in
‘Lumen method’. In ot-der to make the necessary the measuring surface receiving
detailed calculations concerning the type and quantity additional luminous flux.
The selection of light sources and lurninaires depends For the walls, taking into account the
on the choice of lighting system, namely, general influence of the windows without curtains,
lighting, directional lighting and localized or local shelves, almirahs and doors with different
lighting. colours, etc, should be estimated.
4.3.2.3 Determination of the luminous flux c) Calculation for determining the luminous
jlux
a) The luminous flux ($) reaching the working
plane depends upon the following:
1) lumen output of the lamps,
2) type of lurninaire,
or, +$ for new condition
3) proportion of the room (room index) (k,),
4) reflectance of internal surfaces of the E~VA
room, and ~=— for working condition
pd
5) depreciation in the lumen output of the
where
lamps after burning their rated life, and
6) depreciation due to dirt collection on @ = Total luminous flux of the light sources
luminaires and room suface. installed in the room inlumens;
b) Coefficient of Utilization or Utilization Factor E~v = Average illumination level required on the
working plane inlux;
1) The compilation of tables for the
utilization factor requires a considerable A = Area of the working plane in mz;
30 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
OPENINGS,
REFLECTANCE
----- ---4
CEILING
07.
07.
WALLS
07.
05.
FLOOR
03.
03.
I 5
PERCENT
—- 0 05. 05. 03
●
00:10
/0 / “’0/00
“
I F
3 o i I T I I
I I I I 1
1 I 1 1
z 230
0 50 100 150 200
FLOOR AREA, m 2
FIG. 3 SUPPLEMENTARY
ARTIFICIALLIGHTINGFOR40W FLUORESCENT
TUBES
4.4.2 Daytime use of artificial lights maybe minimized a) An average interior finish with ceiling white,
by proper design of windows for adequate daylight walls off white and floor grey has been
indoors. Daylighting design should be according to 4.2. assumed.
b) Ceiling height of 3 m and room depths up to
4.4.3 Fenestration expressed as percentage of floor
10 m and floor area between 30 m2 and 50 m2
area required for satisfactory visual performance of a
have been assumed. For floor area beyond
few tasks for different separation to height (S/H) ratio
50 m2 and less than 30 m2, the values of
of external obstructions such as opposite buildings may
percent fenestration as well as wattage per m2
be obtained from the design nomograph (Fig. 4). The
should be multiplied by a factor of 0.85 and
obstructions at a distance of three times their height or
1.15 respectively.
more (S/H > 3) from a window faqade are not
c) It is assumed that windows are of metallic
significant and a window facing such an obstruction
sashes with louvers of width up to 600 mm
may be regarded as a case of unobstructed window.
or a CHHAJJA (balcony projection) at ceiling
4.4.3.1 The nomograph consists of horizontal lines level of width up to 2.0 m. For wooden sashes,
indicating fenestration percentage of floor area and the window area should be increased by a
vertical lines indicating the separation to height ratio factor of about 1.1.
of external obstructions such as opposite buildings. d) Luminaires emanating more light in the
Any vertical line for separation to height ratio other downward direction than upward direction
than already shown in the nomograph (1 .0,2.0 and 3 .0) (such as reflectors with or without diffusing
may be drawn by designer, if required. For cases where plastics) and mounted at a height of 1.5 m to
there is no obstruction, the ordinate corresponding to 2.0 m above the workplane have been
the value 3.0 may be used. The value of percentage considered.
fenestration and separation to height ratio are marked
4.4.3.3 Method of use
on left hand ordinate and abscissa respectively. The
illumination levels are marked on the right hand The following steps shall be followed for the use of
ordinate. The values given within brackets are the nomograph:
illumination levels on the work plane at centre and rear
a) Step 1 — Decide the desired illumination level
of the room. The wattage of fluorescent tubes required
depending upon the task illumination
per square metre of the floor area for different requirement in the proposed room and read
illumination levels is shown on each curve. the value of watts per square metre on
4.4.3.2 Following assumptions have been made in the the curve corresponding to the required
construction of the nomograph: illumination level.
28
26
r WATTS PER SQ. m FLOOR AREA
OF SUPPLEMENTAL FLUORESCENT
TUBE LIGHTS 4
$ 24
X
a
u
g 22
(360, 200)
200
(320, 175)
175
(280, 150)
150
(240, 125)
125
(200, 100)
100
(150, 75)
75
1.0 2.0 3.0 ‘-
b) Step 2 — Fix the vertical line corresponding lights should be increased proportionately
to the given separation to height ratio of to make up for the deficiency of natural
opposite buildings on the abscissa. From the illumination.
point of intersection of this vertical line and
the above curve move along horizontal, and 4.4.4 For good distribution of day light on the working
read the value of fenestration percent on the plane in a room, window height, window width and
left hand ordinate. height of sill should be chosen in accordance with the
following recommendations:
c) Step 3 — If the floor area is greater than
50 mz and less than 30 m2, the value of watts a) In office buildings windows of height 1.2 m
per square metre as well as fenestration or more in the center of a bay with sill level
percent may be easily determined for adequate at 1.0 to 1.2 m above floor and in residential
daylighting and supplemental artificial buildings windows of height 1.0 m to 1.1 m
lighting for design purposes. However, if the with sill height as 0.9 m to 0.7 m above floor
fenestration provided is less than the required are recommended for good distribution
value, the wattage of supplementary artificial of daylight indoors. Window width can
NOTES
1 The table includes lamps and wattages currently in use in buildings in India.
2 Luminous efficacy varies with the wattage of the lamp.
3 Average life values are from available Indian Standards. Where Indian Standard is not available, values given are only indicative.
4 CRI and CCT values are only indicative.
5 For exact values, it is advisable to contact manufacturers.
with white enamelled conical reflectors at an off lights even when sufficient daylight is available
inclination of about 45° from vertical. indoors. In offices and commercial buildings, ,*
occupants may switch on lights in the morning and
4.4.7 Cleaning Schedule for Window Panes and
keep them on throughout the day. When sufficient
Luminaires
daylight is available inside, suitable photo controls can
Adequate schedule for cleaning of window panes and be employed to switch off the artificial lights and thus
luminaries will result in significant advantage of prevent the wastage of energy.
enhanced daylight and lumen output from luminaries.
4.4.9 Solar Photovoltaic Systems (SPVJ
This will tend to reduce the duration over which
artificial lights
— will be used and minimize the wastage— Solar photovoltaic system enables direct conversion
of energy. Depending upon the location of the building of sunlight into electricity and is viable option for
a minimum of three to six months interval for periodic lighting purpose in remote nongrid areas. The common
cleaning of luminaries and window panes is SPV lighting systems are:
recommended for maximum utilization of daylight and a) Solar lantern,
artifj cial lights.
b) Fixed type solar home lighting system, and
4.4.8 Photocontrols for Artijlicial Lights c) Street lighting system.
There is a considerable wastage of electrical energy in 4.4.9.1 SPV lighting system should preferably be
lighting of buildings due to carelessness in switching provided with CFL for energy efficiency.
4.4.9.2 Invertors used in buildings for supplying every worker and for the purpose of that section no
electricity during the power cut period should be account shall be taken of any space in a work room
charged through NW system. which is more than 4.25 m above the floor level.
4.4.9.3 Regular maintenance of SPV system is NOTE — Vitiation of the atmosphere can also occur in factories
necessary for its satisfactory functioning. by odours given off due to contaminants of the product itself,
I
say for example, from tobacco processing in a ‘Bidi’ factory,
Here the ventilation will have to be augmented to keep odours
5 VENTILATION
within unobjectionable levels.
5.1 General
5.2.2.1 Recommended values for air changes
Ventilation of buildings is required to supply fresh air The standards of general ventilation are reeomrnended/
for respiration of occupants, to dilute inside air to prevent based on maintenance of required oxygen, carbon
vitiation by body odours and to remove any products of dioxide and other air quality levels and for the control
combustion or other contaminants in air and to provide of body odours when no products of combustion or
such thermal environments as will assist in the other contaminants are present in the ai~ the values of
maintenance of heat balance of the body in order to air changes should be as follows:
prevent discomfort and injury to health of the occupants.
S1 No. Application Air Change per Hour
5.2 Design Considerations
(1) (2) (3)
Table 12 Allowable Temperature Rise Values b) convection effects arising from temperature
of vapour pressure difference (or both)
(Clause 5.3.2.2)
between inside and outside the room and the
Height of Outlet Opening Temperature Rise difference of h~ight between the outlet and
(1) (2) inlet openings (stack effect).
6 3 to 4.5 5.4.1 Ventilation of Non-industrial Buildings
9 4,5 to 6.5
12 6.5 to 11 Ventilation in non-industrial buildings due to stack
NOTES effect, unless there is a significant internal load, could
1 The conditions are limited to light or medium heavy be neglected, except in cold regions, and wind action
manufacturing processes, freedom from radiant heat and inlet may be assumed to be predominant.
openings not more than 3 to 4.5 m above floor level.
2 At the working zone between floor level and 1.5 m above 5.4.1.1 In hot dry regions, the main problem in summer
floor level, the recommended maximum allowable temperature is to provide protection from sun’s heat so as to keep
rise for air is 2°C to 36C above the air temperature at the inlet the indoor temperature lower than those outside under
openings.
the sun. For this purpose windows and other openings
Q=KAV 4.
where
a) 1.25 times the rate of natural ventilation, 5.7.3 When actual ventilated zone does not cover the
b) Rate of positive ventilation, and entire room area, then optimum size of ceiling fan
should be chosen based on the actual usable area of
c) Rate of exhaust of air.
room, rather than the total floor area of the room. Thus
5.6.4 Air Movement smaller size of fan can be employed and energy saving
could be achieved.
The rate of air movement of turbulent type at the
working zone shall be measured either with a Kata 5.7.4 Power consumption by larger fans is obviously
thermometer (dry silvered type) or heated thermometer higher, but their power consumption per square metre
or properly calibrated thermocouple anemometer. of floor area is less and service value higher. Evidently,
Whereas anemometer gives the air velocity directly, improper use of fans irrespective of the rooms
the Kata thermometer and heated thermometer give dimensions is likely to result in higher power
cooling power of air and the rate of air movement is consumption. From the point of view of energy
found by reference to a suitable nomogram using the consumption, the number of fans and the optimum sizes
ambient temperature. for rooms of different dimensions are given in Table 13.
A-1 DESCRIPTION OF TABLES component at given point is explained with help of the
following example.
A-L1 The three sky component tables are as given
below: A-L6.2 Example
Table 14 Percentage sky components on the It is desired to calculate the sky component due to a
horizontal plane due to a vertical vertical window ABCD with width 1.8 m and height
rectangular opening for the clear 1.5 mat a point P on a horizontal plane 3.0 m from the
design sky window wall located as shown in Fig. 7. Foot of the
Table15 Percentage sky components on the perpendicular N is 0.6 m below the sill and 0.9 m to
vertical plane perpendicular to a ;he”left of AD.
vertical rectangular opening for the 1.8m
-
cleardesign sky
D D c
Table 16 Percentage sky components on the
U(j+ 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1,9 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 10.0 INF
Wd
+
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26)
0.1 0.036 0.071 0.104 0.133 0.158 0.179 0.198 0.213 0.225 0.235 0.243 0.250 0.256 0.261 0.264 0.268 0.270 0.272 0.274 0.276 0.284 0.286 0.287 0.288 0.288
E 4.0 1.600 3.168 4.676 6.100 7.426 8.646 9.759 10.768 11.678 12.498 13.235 13.897 14.493 15.030 15.514 15.%1 16.347 16.706 17.033 17.330 19.241 20.142 20.623 21.322 21.495
a 5.0 1.620 3.208 4.735 6.179 7.525 8.763 9.897 10.925 11.854 12.693 13.448 14.128 14.742 15.296 15.798 16.252 16.664 17.040 17.382 17.695 19.740 20.740 21.293 22.148 22.393
g 10.0 1.648 3.263 4.818 6.289 7.662 8.930 10.089 11.144 12.100 12965 13.747 14.454 15.094 15.674 16.201 16.681 17.118 17.518 17.885 18.222 20.491 21.681 22.390 23.676 24.238
m
g INF 1.657 3.282 4.846 6.327 7.710 8.986 10.155 11.220 12.186 13.060 13.851 14.567 15.217 15.806 16.342 16.831 17.278 17.688 18.054 18.41O 20.770 22.o46 22.838 24.463 26.111
%
s
.*P ._
I -“y
Table 15 Percentwe Sky Components on the Vertical Plane Perpendicular to a
Vertimi Rec-tindul& Opening for the C1ear Design Sky
(Clauses A-1.5 and A-1 .6.2)
Ud+ 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 10.0 m
d
Y
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26)
1/’+ 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 10.0 INF
h/d
+
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (lo) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26)
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ 7942:1976 Code of practice for daylighting
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The of educational buildings
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time (5) 1944 Code of practice for lighting of
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may (Parts 1 &2): public thoroughfares: Parts 1
be used by the Authority as a guide in conformance 1970 and 2 For main and secondary
with the requirements of the referred clauses in the roads (Group A and B) (first
Code. - revision)
IS No. Title 2672:1966 Code of practice for library
Recommendations for lighting
(1) 7662
(Part 1): 1974 orientation of buildings: Part 1 4347:1967 Code of practice for hospital
Non-industrial buildings lighting
(2) 3646 Code of practice for interior 6665:1972 Code of practice for industrial
(Part 1) :1992 illumination: Part 1 General lighting
requirements and 10894:1984 Code of practice for lighting of
CONTENTS
FOREWORD ... 3
1 SCOPE ... 5
2 TERMINOLOGY AND CONVENTIONAL SYMBOLS . .. 5
3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ... 9
4 PLANNING OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS ... 9
5 DISTRIBUTION OF SUPPLY AND CABLING ... 16
6 WIRING ... 28
7 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES ... 36
8 EARTHING .. 39
9 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF INSTALLATION ... 43
10 TELECOMMUNICATION AND OTHER MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES ... 48
11 LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS ... 49
FOREWORD
This Section covers essential requirements for electrical and allied installations in buildlngs,
This Section was first published in 1970 and was subsequently revised in 1983. In the first revision, general
guidance for electrical wiring installation in industrial location where voltage supply normally exceeds 650 V
was included. This Section was also updated based on the existing version of the Indian Standards. The importance
of pre-planning and exchange of information among all concerned agencies from the earlier stages of building
work was emphasized.
As a result of experience gained in implementation of 1983 version of the Code and feedback received as well as
revision of some of the relevant standards based on which this Section was prepared, a need to revise this part
was felt. This revision been prepared to take care of these developments. The title of this Section
has, therefore,
a) The risk assessment procedure for lightening has been thoroughly changed apart from some other changes
in the provision of lightning protection of building.
b) Some of the provisions of wiring have now been aligned with the latest practices.
c) Many existing definitions have been modified in line with current terminologies used at national and
international level. Some new definitions have been added.
d) Provisions on installation of distribution transformer inside the multi-storeyed building have been
incorporated.
e) Concept of energy conservation in lighting has been introduced.
f) Concept of various types of earthing in building installation has been incorporated
This Section has to be read together with Part 8 ‘Building Services, Section 1 Lighting and Ventilation’ for
making provision for the desired levels of illumination as well as ventilation for different locations in different
occupancies. Utmost importance should be given in the installation of electrical wiring to prevent short circuiting
and the hazards associated therewith.
Notwithstanding the provisions given in this Section and the National Electrical Code, the provisions of the
Indian Electricity Act, 2003 and the Rules and Regulations framed thereunder have to be necessarily complied
with.
The information contained in this Section is largely based on the following Indian Standards/Special Publication:
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
2.1.10 Cable, Weatherproof— A cable so constructed 2.1.17 Conductor, Aerial — Any conductor which is
,,,,... --..
*
supported by insulators above the ground and is 2.1.30 Dead — A portion of the circuit (normally
directly exposed to the weather. expected to carry a voltage) at or near about earth
potential or apparently disconnected from any live
NOTE — Four classes of aerial conductors are recognized:
system.
a) Bare aerial conductors,
b) Covered aerial conductors, 2.1.31 Direct Earthing System — A system of earthing
c) Insulated aerial conductors, and in which the parts of an installation are so earthed as
d) Weatherproof neutral-screened cable. specified but are not connected within the installation
2.1.18 Conductor, Bare — A conductor not covered to the neutral conductor of the supply system or to earth
with insulating material. through the trip coil of an earth leakage circuit-breaker.
2.1.19 Conductor, Earthed — A conductor with no 2.1.32 Distance Area or Resistance Area {for Earth
provision for its insulation from earth. Electrode only) — The area of ground (around an earth
electrode) within which a voltage gradient measurable
2.1.20 Conductor, Insulated — A conductor with ordinary commercial instruments exists when the
adequately covered with insulating material of such electrode is being tested.
quality and thickness as to prevent danger.
2.1.33 Discrimination (Over-Current Discrimination)
2.1.21 Conductor of a Cable or Core — The — Co-ordination of the operating characteristics of two
conducting portion consisting of a single wire or group
For definition of other terms reference may be made submain and feeder. Power factor and efficiency of
to accepted standards [8-2(1)]. loads shall also be considered. Diversity factor assumed
shall be based on one’s own experience. Allowance
2.2 Conventional Symbols should be made for about 15 percent to 20 percent for
The architectural symbols that are to be used in all extension in near future and the design circuit is
drawings, wiring plans, etc, for electrical installations calculated for each circuit and submain. The wiring
in buildings shall be as given in Annex A. system to be adopted should also be decided in
accordance with the environmental requirements. The
For other graphical symbols used in electrotechnology, sizes of wiring cables are decided not merely to carry
reference may be made to good practice [8-2(1)]. the load currents, but also to withstand thermal effects
of likely over currents and also ensure acceptance level
3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
of voltage drop.
3.1 Conformity with Electricity Act 2003 and Rules
3.4 Power Factor Improvement in Consumers’
Amended Up-to-date
Installation
The installation shall generally be carried out in
3.4.1 Conditions of supply of electricity boards or
conformity with the requirements of The Electrici~
licensees stipulate the lower-limit of power factor
Act, 2003 as amended up-to-date and the Indian
which is generally 0.85.
Electrici~ Rules, 1956 framed thereunder and also the
Load assessment and application of suitable diversity 4.1.1 The design and planning of an electrical wiring
factor to estimate the full load current shall be made installation shall take into consideration, some or all
as a first step. This should be done for every circuit, of the following:
Purpose of Final Circuit Individual Household Type of Premises Type of Premises Small
Fed from Conductors or Installations, including Small, Shops, Stores Hotels, Boarding
Switchgear to which Individual Dwelling Offices and Business Houses etc.
Diversity Applies of a Block Premises
(1] (2] (3) (4)
Lighting 66% of total demand 90% of total current 75% of total current
demand demand
Heating and power 80% of total current 809. full load of largest 80~o full load of largest
demand upto 10A appliance appliance
+4070 of any current +6070 of remaining +607. of second largest
demand in excess of appliances appliances
10A +4090 of remaining
appliances
Cooking appliances 10A 80% full load of largest 80% of largest appliance
+30% full load of appliance
Generally it would be necessary to provide an 5.3.1.2 The main switch shall be easily accessible and
automatic control for switching in capacitors matching situated as near as practicable to the termination of
the load power factor and the bus voltage. Such a service line.
scheme would be necessary as capacitors permanently 5.3.1.3 On the main switch, where the conductors
switched in the circuit may cause overvoltage at times include an earthed conductor of a two-wire system or
of light load. an earthed neutral conductor or a multi-wire system or
Where so specified, the switchboards shall be recessed Busbar chambers, which feed two or more circuits,
in the wall. Ample room shall be provided at the back must be conti-oiled by a main disconnector (’W & N),
for connection and at the front between the switchgear or Isolating ~nks or TPN MCB to ‘enable them to be
mountings. disconnected from the supply.
a) Where aboard is connected to voltage higher A distribution board comprises of one or more protective
than 250 V, all the apparatus mounted on it devices against over current and ensuring the distribution
shall be marked on the following colours to of electrical energy to the circuits. Distribution board
indicate the different poles or phases to which shall provide plenty of wiring space, to allow working
the apparatus or its different terminals may as well as to allow keeping the extra length of connecting
have been connected: cables, likely to be required for maintenance.
Alternating Current Direct Current 5.5.3.1 Main distribution board shall be provided with
Three-phases — red, Three-wire system a circuit breaker on each pole of each circuit, or a switch
yellow, blue — 2 outer wire, with a fuse on the phase or live conductor and a link
positive red and on the neutral or earthed conductor of each circuit. The
negative blue switches shall always be linked.
5.3.4.4 The circuits for lighting of common area shall c) These shall be of either metal-clad type, or
be separate. For large halls 3-wire control with individual air insulated type. But, if exposed to weather
control and master control installed near the entrance or damp situations, these shall be of the
shall be provided for effective conservation of energy. weatherproof type and, if installed where
exposed to explosive dust, vapour or gas,
5.3.4.5 Where daylight would be available, particularly these shall be of flameproof type in
in large halls, lighting in the area near the windows, accordance with accepted standards [8-2(10)].
likely to receive daylight shall have separate controls In corrosive atmospheres, these shall be
for lights, so that they can be switched off selectively treated with anti-comosive preservative or
when daylight is adequate, while keeping the lights in covered with suitable plastic compound.
the areas remote from the windows on. d) Where two and/or more distribution boards
5.3.4.6 Circuits for socket outlets may be kept separate feeding low voltage circuits are fed from a
circuits feeding fans and lights. Normally, fans and supply of medium voltage, the metal case shall
lights may be wired on a common circuit. In large be marked ‘Danger 415 V’ and identified with
spaces circuits for fans and lights may also be proper phase marking and danger marks.
segregated. Lights may have group control in large e) Each shall be provided with a circuit list
For the purposes of this Code cables above 1 mmzmust suitable location that requires no additional protection.
have stranded conductors. All cables when installed, The cables for wiring circuits in electrical installation
must be adequately protected against mechanical must have the appropriate wire size matching the
damage. This can be carried out by either having requirement of the loads and the following table gives
2+ Eisalsoknown astwinandearth
Switch or isolator controlling a water heater or geyser the entrance and provide an indication at the water
should not be located within 1 m from the location of heater. A socket or a connector block with suitable
a shower or bath tub, to avoid a person in wet condition protection against water spray should be provided to
reaching the switch or isolator. It is preferable to connect the water heater. The above considerations
provide the control switch outside the bathroom near apply to switches for outdoor lights and other
26 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
~ ._ . ....
5.8 In locations where the system voltage exceeds buildings, reference may be made to good practice
650 V, as in the case of industrial locations, for [8-2(16)].
details of design and construction of wiring
A typical distribution scheme in a residential building
installation, reference may be made to good practice
with separate circuits for lights and fans and for power
[8-2(15)].
appliances is given in Fig. 1.
5.9 Guideline for Electrical Layout in Residential
5.10 For detailed information regarding the installation
Buildings
of different electrical equipments, reference may be
For guidelines for electrical installation in residential made to good practice [8-2(17)].
5A SWITCH .
SOCKET OUTLET
G
FAN SWITCH
OUTLET
w
5A SWITCH
SOCKET OUTLET
.-
F Q’
FAN SWITCH
OUTLET
1 J
__L--- J, , 1
.-.
15A SWITCH
I SOCKET OUTLET
—.i, I II
.-—.———.— .— —.-..
—
—
-’
h I NEUTRAL BUS
.——.. ——.
3
I I
EARTH BUS 1
L MCB’S
NL
E
30 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
supports. Both tray and ladder racks can be soldered or welded or crimped lugs using suitable
provided with accessories to facilitate changes sleeve, lugs or ferrules unless the terminal is of such a
of route, and as PVC and similar insulating form that it is possible to securely clamp them without
materials are non-migratory (unlike the older the cutting away of cables stands. Cables in each circuit
types of impregnated cables) they provide no shall be bunched together.
difficulty in this respect on vertical runs.
6.8.3 All bare conductors shall be rigidly fixed in such
e) Insulated conductors while passing through
a manner that a clearance of at least 25 mm is
floors shall be protected from mechanical
maintained between conductors or opposite polarity
injury by means of rigid steel conduit, non- or phase and between the conductors and any material
metal conduit or mechanical protection to a other than insulation material.
height not less than 1.5 m above the floors
and flush with the ceiling below. This steel 6.8.4 If required, a pilot lamp shall be fixed and
conduit shall be earthed and securely bushed. connected through an independent single pole switch
Power outlets and wiring in the floor shall be and fuse to the bus-bars of the board.
generally avoided. If not avoidable, use false 6.8.5 In a hinged type board, the incoming and
floor or floor trunking. False floor shall be outgoing cables shall be fixed at one or more points
provided where density of equipment and according to the number of cables on the back of the
Floor oujlet boxes are generally provided for Wiring with Tough Rubber-Sheathed (TRS) cables had
the use of appliances, which require a signal, been the common system for low voltage installations.
or communication connection. The floor box Now TRS wiring is phased out as better and durable
and trunking system should cater to serve both insulating materials are available.
power distribution and the signal distribution,
Wiring with PVC-sheathed cables is suitable for
with appropriate safety and non-interference.
medium voltage” installation and may be installed
6.7.2 Where a wall tube passes outside a building so directly under exposed conditions of sun and rain or
as to be exposed to weather, the outer end shall be damp places.
bell-mouthed and turned downwards and properly
6.9.2 PVC ClampslPVC Channel
bushed on the open end.
Link clips had been the common system for wiring on
6.8 Wiring of Distribution Boards
wooden batten, which is now phased out. PVC clamps/
6.S.1 All connections between pieces of apparatus or PVC channel shall conform accepted standards. The
between apparatus and terminals on a board shall be clamps shall be used for temporary installations of 1-3
neatly arranged in a definite sequence, following the sheathed wires only. The clamps shall be fixed on wall
arrangements of the apparatus mounted thereon, at intervals of 100 mm in the case of horizontal runs
avoiding unnecessary crossings. and 150 mm in the case of vertical runs.
6.8.2 Cables shall be connected to a terminal only by PVC channel shall be used for temporary installations
Table 2 Maximum Permissible Number of Single-Core Cables that can be Drawn into
Cable Tunelling and Ducting System (Casing and Capping)
(Clauses 6.10.1 and 6.10.3.2)
preservative or covered with suitable plastic of not more than 1 m, but on either side of
compound. couplers or bends or similar fittings, saddles
f) Fixing of conduit — Conduit pipes shall be shall be fixed at a distance of 300 cm from
fixed by heavy gauge saddles, secured to the centre of such fittings.
suitable wood plugs or other plugs with g) Bends in conduit — All necessary bends in
screws in an approved manner at an interval the system including diversion shall be done
6.10.3.4 Fixing of conduits The conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of stapples
or by means of non-metallic saddles placed at not more
The provisions of 6.10.l(f) shall apply except that the than 80 cm apart or by any other approved means of
spacing between saddles or supports is recommended fixing. Fixing of standard bends or elbows shall be
to be 600 cm for rigid non-metallic conduits. avoided as far as practicable and all curves shall be
6.10.3.5 Bends in conduits maintained by sending the conduit pipe itself with a
long radius which will permit easy drawing in of
Wherever necessary, bends or diversions may be conductors. At either side of bends, saddles/stapples
achieved by bending the conduits (see 6.10.3.8) or by shall be fixed at a distance of 15 cm from the centre of
employing normal bends, inspection bends, inspection bends.
boxes, elbows or similar fittings.
6.10.4.3 Inspection boxes
6.10.3.6 Conduit fittings shall be avoided, as far as
possible, on outdoor systems. Suitable inspection boxes to the nearest minimum
requirements shall be provided to permit periodical
6.10.3.7 Outlets inspection and to facilitate replacement of wires, if
In order to minimize condensation or sweating inside necessary. The inspection/junction boxes shall be
the conduit, all outlets of conduit system shall be mounted flush with the wall or ceiling concrete. Where
properly drained and ventilated, but in such a manner necessary deeper boxes of suitable dimensions shall
as to prevent the entry of insects. be used. Suitable ventilating holes shall be provided
in the inspection box covers, where required.
6.10.3.8 Heat may be used to soften the conduit for
bending and forming joints in case of plain conduits. 6.10.4.4 The outlet boxes such as switch boxes,
As the material softens when heated, sitting of conduit regulator boxes and their phenolic laminated sheet
in close proximity to hot surfaces should be avoided. covers shall be as per requirements of 6.10.1 (h).
Caution should be exercised in the use of this conduit They shall be mounted flush with the wall.
in locations where the ambient temperature is 500C
or above. Use of such conduits in places where 6.10.4.5 Types of accessories to be used
ambient temperature is 60”C or above is prohibited. All outlets such as switches, wall sockets, etc, may
6.10.3.9 Non-metallic conduit systems shall be used be either flush mounting type or of surface mounting
only where it is ensured that they are: type.
7.2.4 In an earthed system of supply, a socket-outlet 7.3.3 No flammable shade shall forma part of lighting
with plug shall be of three-pin type with the third fittings unless such shade is well protected against all
terminal connected, to the earth. When such socket- risks of fire. Celluloid shade or lighting fittings shall
outlets with plugs are connected to any current not be used under any circumstances.
consuming device of metal or any non-insulating 7.3.4 General and safety requirements for electrical
material or both, conductors connecting such cttrrent- lighting fittings shall Be in accordance with good
consuming devices shall be of flexible cord with an practice [8-2(20)].
earthing core and the earthing core shall be secured by
connecting between the earth terminal of plug and the 7.3.5 The lighting fittings shall conform to accepted
body of current-consuming devices. standards [8-2(10)].
EXPOSED LOOP
SHALLBE PAINTED SHACKLE
m A
CT7iii3 31
‘4
● 6
* 70
..” T
/ CEILING
/’
i’ /’ RCC BEAM
L - EXPOSED Loop
SHALLBE PAINTED
For fixing of an exhaust fan, a circular hole shall be 7.9.1 In wiring other than conduit wiring, all ceiling
provided in the wall to suit the size of the frame which roses, brackets, pendants and accessories attached to
shall be fixed by means of rag-bolts embedded in the walls or ceilings shall be mounted on substantial teak
wall. The hole shall be neartly plastered with cement wood blocks twice varnished after all fixing holes are
and brought to the original finish of the wall. The made in them. Blocks shall not be less than 4 cm deep.
exhaust fan shall be connected to exhaust fan point Brass screws shall only be used for attaching fittings
and accessories to their base blocks.
which shall be wired as near to the hole as possible by
means of a flexible cord, care being taken that the 7.9.2 Where teak or hardwood boards are used for
blades rotate in the proper direction. mounting switches, regulators, etc, these boards shall
8.1 General
7.10 Interchangeability
Earthing shall generally be carried out in accordance
Similar part of all switches, larnpholders, distribution
with the requirements of Indian Electricity Rules, 1956
fuse-boards, ceiling roses, brackets, pendants, fans and
as amended time to time and the relevant regulations
all other fittings shall be so chosen that they are of the
of the Electricity Supply Authority concerned.
same type and interchangeable in each installation.
The main earthing system of an electrical installation
7.11 Equipment
must consist of
Electrical equipment which form integral part of wiring
a) An earth electrode;
intended for switching or control or protection of
b) A main earthing wire;
7.12.2 Fans normally cover an area of 9 m2 to 10 m2 NOTE— The requirementsof (c) and (d) above must
be carried out by the licensed electricianas part of the
and therefore in general purpose office buildings, for
switchboardinstallation.
every part of a bay to be served by the ceiling fans, it
is necessary that the bays shall be so designed that full The main earthing wire termination must be readily
number of fans could be suitably located for the bay, accessible at the earth electrode.
otherwise it will result in ill-ventilated pockets. In
The main earthing wire connection must:
general, fans in long halls may be spaced at 3 m in
both the directions. If building modules do not lend a) be mechanically and electrically sound;
themselves for proper positioning of the required b) be protected against damage, corrosion, and
number of ceiling fans, such as air circulators or bracket vibration;
fans would have to be employed for the areas c) not place any strain on the various parts of
uncovered by the ceiling fans. For this, suitable the connection;
electrical outlets shall be provided although result will
d) not damage the wire or fittings; and
be disproportionate to cost on account of fans.
e) be secured at the earth electrode
7.12.3 Proper air circulation could be achieved either
by larger number of smaller fans or smaller number of Use a permanent fitting (like a screwed-down plastic
larger fans. The economics of the system as a whole label or copper label, or one that can be threaded onto
should be a guiding factor in choosing the number and the cable) at the connection po@ that is clearly marked
type of fans and their locations. with the words: “EARTHING LEAD — DO NOT
DISCONNECT” or “EARTHING CONDUCTOR —
7.12.4 Exhaust fans are necessary for spaces, such as DO NOT DISCONNECT”.
community toilets, kitchens and canteens, and godowns
to provide the required number of air changes (see 8.1.1 All medium voltage equipment shall be earthed
Part 8 ‘Building Services, Section 1 Lighting and by two separate and distinct comections with earth.
Ventilation’). Since the exhaust fans are located The contact area of earth conductor/plate shall be
generally on the outer walls of a room appropriate determined using guidelines specified in IS 3043.
openings in such walls shall be provided for in the Medium voltage systems of 400/230 V, 4-wire,
planning stage. 3-phase, systems are normally operated with the neutral
NOTE— Exhaustfanrequirementis basedon therecommended solidly earthed at source. At medium voltage, Indian
air changes.Reference may also be made to Part 4 ‘Fire and Electricity Regulations require that the neutral be
8.1.6 No cut-out, link or switch other than a linked 8.4 Equipment and Portions of Installations which
switch arranged to operate simultaneously on the shall be Earthed
earthed or earthed neutral conductor and the live
8.4.1 Equipment to be Earthed
conductors, shall be inserted on any supply system.
This, however, does not include the case of a switch Except for equipment provided with double insulation,
for use in controlling a generator or a transformer or a all the non-current carrying metal parts of electrical
link for test purposes. installations are to be earthed properly. All metal
conduits, trunking, cable sheaths, switchgear,
8.1.7 All materials, fittings, etc, used in earthing shall
distribution fuseboards, lighting fittings and all other
conform to Indian Standard specifications, wherever
parts made of metal shall be bended together and
these exist.
connected by means of two separate and distinct
8.1.8 Earthing associated with current-carrying conductors to an efficient earth electrode.
conductor is normally essential for the security of the
8.4.2 Structural Metal Work
system and is generally known as system earthing,
while earthing of non-current carrying metal work and Earthing of the metallic parts shall not be effected
conductor is essential for the safety of human life, of through any structural metal work which houses the
-125- “ 400
4’ GL
; ‘$ ‘“..
. . \
w
065 PVC
CONDUIT
EMBEDDED
. < ““ “
‘4...4’; ~.. 1 I
●
. ,
. .
“’f. ””q : ..4’”.””.””.
P
.
.
. ;0
.
L- 250 ‘-
I‘ -d 250
Cl PIPE 100 ID
13 mm THICK
p150 i 150~
/-0 10 BOLTS
)0
J *.
AND NUTS
75 50~25
v
~* ~4
+’- 4.
.
..*,
● . .= ..$. ● -.
.“.. .q. . ‘ .0 . . .. .
/...
. ...&
.:
. .
, ●“
T ~50 x 3 :: . ...*
4, . . . .
GI STRIP .
DETAIL A
FIG. 3 TYPICALARRANGEMENT
OFPIPEEARTHING
If this neutral point of the supply system is connected 9.1.2 Periodic inspection and testing shall be carried
permanently to earth, then the above rule applies out in order to maintain the installation in a sound
44 NATIONAL,BUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
4) Suitable linked switch or circuit breaker or 2) The types and size of supports are suitable
lockable pushbutton is provided near the for the overhead lines/conductors used and
motors/apparatus for controlling supply to the are in accordance with approved drawing and
motor/apparatus in an easily accessible standards;
location; 3) Clearances from ground level to the lowest
5) Two separate and distinct earth connections conductor of overhead lines, sag conditions,
are provided for the motor/apparatus; etc, are in accordance with the relevant
6) Control switch-fuse is provided at an accessible standard;
height from ground for controlling supply to 4) Where overhead lines cross the roads or cross
overhead traveling crane, hoists, overhead each other or are in proximity with one
bus bar trunking; another, suitable guarding is provided at road
7) The metal rails on which the crane travels are crossings and also to protect against
electrically continuous and earthed and possibility of the lines coming in contact with
bonding of rails and earthing at both ends are one anotheu
done; 5) Every guard wire is properly earthed;
8) Four core cables are used for overhead 6) The type, size and suitability of the guarding
traveling crane and portable equipments, the arrangement provided is adequate;
fourth core being used for earthing, and
46 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
b) The insulation resistance between each and except in earthed concentric wiring, all
conductor and against earth shall be lamps in position or both poles of installation
measured. The insulation resistance varies otherwise electrically connected together, a
with the type of insulation used and with the dc voltage of not less than twice the working
length of cable. The following empirical rule voltage, provided that it does not exceed
gives reasonable guidance: 500 V for medium voltage circuits. Where the
supply is derived from three-wire (ac or dc)
Insulation resistance in megaohms
or a poly-phase system, the neutral pole of
10x Voltage in kV which is connected to earth either direct or
= through added resistance the working voltage
Length in km
shw be deemed to be that which is maintained
c) Physical examination of cables shall be between the outer or phase conductor and the
carried out. neutral.
d) Cable terminations shall be checked. b) The insulation resistance in megaohms of an
e) Continuity test shall be performed before installation measured as in (a) shall be not less
charging the cable with current. than 50 divided by the number of points on
the circui4 provided that the whole installation
9.3.2.4 Motors and other equipments
need not be required to have an insulation
10.1.3 Layout arrangements, methods for internal a) Adequate rating of protective devices such as
block wiring and other requirements regarding MCB, MCCB, fuses, ELCB, etc, shall be
provisions of space, etc, may be decided defending as provided at both incoming and outgoing sides.
the number of phone outlets and other details in b) Earthing shall be done properly.
consultation with Engineer/Architect and user. c) Adequate ventilation space shall be provided
10.2 Public Address System — See Part 4 ‘Fire and around the battery section of the inverter.
Life Safety’. d) Care in circuit design to keep the connected
load in such a manner that the demand at the
10.3 Common Antenna System for TV Receivers time of mains failure is within the capability
10.3.1 In multistoreyed apartments, houses and hotels of the inverter. (If the inverter fails to take
where many TV receivers are located, a common over the load at the time of the mains failure,
master antenna system may preferably be used to avoid the purpose of pwviding the inverter and
mushrooming of individual antennas. battery back up is defeated.)
e) Circuits which are fed by the UPS or Inverter
10.3.2 Master antenna is generally provided at the top systems should have suitable marking to
most convenient point in any building and a suitable ensure that a workman does not assume that
room on the top most floor or terrace for housing the the power is off, once he has switched off the
amplifier unit, etc, may also be provided in consultation mains from the DB for maintenance.
with the architect/engineer.
0 UPS systems and Inverter systems have a very
10.3.3 From the amplifier rooms, conduits are laid in limited fault fee@g capacity in comparison
recess to facilitate drawing co-axial cable to individual to the mains supply from the licensee’s
flats. Suitable ‘Tap Off’ boxes may be provided in network. The low fault current feed may cause
every room/flat as required. loss of discrimination in the operation of
11.1.1 Need, for Protection The table below which indicates the relationship between
thunderstorm days per year and lightning flashes per square
Structures with inherent explosive risks; for example, kilometre per year:
explosives factories, stores and dumps and fuel tanks;
Thrarderstonn Lightning Flashes per km2per Year
usually need the highest possible class of lightning
days/year ~
protective system.
For all other structures, the standard of protection 5 0.2 0.1 –0.5
10 0.5 0.15–1
recommended in th% remainder of the Code is 20 1.1 0.3-3
applicable and the only question remaining is whether 30 1.9 0.6-5
to protect or not. 40 2.8 0.8-8
50 3.7 1.2-10
In many cases, the need for protection may be self- 60 4.7 1.8-12
80 6.9 3-17
-evident, for example:
100 9.2 4–20
— where large numbers of people congregate;
— where essential public services are concerned; The effective collection area of a structure is the area
— on the plan of the structure extended in all directions
where the area is one in which lightning
to take account of its height. The edge of the effective
strokes are prevalent;
collection area is displaced from the edge of the
where there are very tall or isolated structures; structure by an amount equal to the height of the
i) NIalsonette, 3327 0.6 2 x 10-3 1.2 0.4 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.02 4 x 10-5 Protection
n3nforced required
concrete and
brick built,
non-metallic
roof
ii) Offke 4296 0.6 2.6 X 10-3 1.2 0.4 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.02 5.2 x 10-5Protection
building, required
reinforced
concrete
construction,
non-metallic
roof
iii) School, brick 1456 0.7 1 x 10-3 1.7 1.0 1.7 0.4 0.3 0.3 3 x 10q Protection
built required
iv) 3 bedroom 405 0.4 1.6 X 10q 0.3 1.0 0.3 0.4 0.3 0.01 1.6 X 10q No
detached protection
dwelling required
house, brick
built
v) Village 5027 0.6 3 x 10-3 1.3 1.0 1.7 2.0 0.3 1.3 3.9 x 10-3Protection
church required
NOTE — The risk of being struck, ‘P’ (CO15), is multiplied by the product of the weighting factors(CO16to 10) to yield an overall risk
factor (CO112). This should be compared with the acceptable risk (1 x 10-5)for guidance on whether or not to protect.
54 NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOFINDIA
.
INDIA
PLACES FOR AVERAGE NUMBER OF
~. ,8 THUNDERSTORM DAYS
-*3A ●&w
9 ~~
‘1
IN A YEAR J
;
““ 98.~99------
56* ;7, y, ‘“~ .Lt%..
-L-”” ””-”--”- 1
m “---”ma -“-”o--~ ‘-
\-NSWMOOFf \ I
P
.1 2 7 .-. ---
Ill
I *
m--- ----
m
*
129 ,132 ,35 109●
1\
,138 BAY OF
ARABIAN ● 133 ● 0150 BENGAL
,139
SEA 136 ●
●
● *4O ● 141 145 7
134
&*; 1$ @
137
1550 154
I 157’ f560 ● 148 ●
I b
158 ● 159 149 ● [
o~-
$, f$
4
. WC&
168
184
181 %
I INDIAN OCFAN I I k
Based upon Survey of India Outline Map printed in 1993. @ Government of India Copyright, 2005
The territorial waters of India extend into the seato a distance of twelve nautical miles measured tiom the appropriate base line.
The boundary of Meghalaya shown on this map is as interpreted from the North-Eastern Areas (Reorganisation) Act, 1971, but has yet to be verified.
Responsibility for correctness of internal details shown on the map rests with the publisher,
The state boundaries between Uttaranchal & Uttar Pradesh, Bihar& Jharkhand and Chhatisgarh & Madhya Pradesh have not been verified by Governments cawemed.
Switches
56 NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOFINDIA
A-4.4 Combined Switch and Socket- A-
~ A-5.15 Spot Light
(
xx
Outlet, 16A
A-12 EARTHING
A-10.2 Impulse Clock Outlet
A-12.1 Earth Point
ANNEX B
[Clauses 3.1,5.3.1.1,5.3.1.3, 5.3.2.3(b) ad 8.6]
EXTRACTS FROM INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES, 1956
B-1 The following are the extracts of some of the c) In all other cases, at a point corresponding
rules: to the point of commencement of supply
or at such other point as may be approved
Rule 32, Identification of Earthed and Earthed by an Inspector or any officer appointed
Neutral Conductors and Position of Switches and to assist the Inspector and hold authorized
Cut-Outs Therein under sub-rule (2) of Rule 4-A.
Where the conductors include an earthed conductor of 2) No cut-out, link or switch other than a linked
a two-wire system or an earthed neutral conductor of switch arranged to operate simultaneously on
a multi-wire system or a conductor which is to be the earthed or earthed neutral conductor and
connected thereto, the following conditions shall be live conductors shall be inserted or remain
complied with: inserted in any earthed or earthed neutral
conductor of a two-wire system or in any
1) An indication of permanent nature shall be
earthed or earthed neutral conductor of a
provided by the owner of the earthed or
multi-wire system or in any conductor
earthed neutral conductor, or the conductor
connected thereto with the following
which is to be connected thereto, to enable
exceptions:
such conductor to be distinguished from any
a) A link for testing purposes, or
live conductor. Such indication shall be
provided: b) A switch for use in controlling a generator
or transformer.
a) Where the earthed or earthed neutral
NOTE — For the purpose of this rule, the relevant
conductor is the property of the supplier,
Indian Standards relating to markingand arrangement
at or near the point of commencement of for switchgear,busbar,mainconnections,and auxiliary
supply ; wiringmay be referredto.
b) Where a conductor forming part of a
Rule 33 Earthed Terminal on Consumer’s Premises
consumer’s system is to be connected to
the supplier’s earthed or earthed neutral 1) The supplier shall provide and maintain on
conductor at the point where such the consumer’s premises for the consumer’s
connection is to be made; use a suitable earthed terminal in an accessible
62 NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOFINDIA
ANNEX C
[Clause 4.2.4(b)]
C-1 The requirement for area for transformer room and substation for different capacities of transformers is
given below for guidance:
S1 CapaciQ of Total Transformer Total Substation Area (In Coming, Suggested Minimum
No. Transformer(s) Room Area, H~ MV Panels, Transformer Roof but Face Width
kVA Minimum, m2 Without Generators), Minimum m
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) 1 X 160 14.0 90 9.0
ii) 2x 160 28.0 118 13.5
iii) 1 X 250 15.0 91 9.0
iv) 2 X 250 30.0 121 13.5
v) 1 x 400 16.5 9.0
vi) 2 x 400 33.0 1; 13.5
ANNEX D
[Clause 4.2.4(j)]
ADDITIONAL AREA REQUIRED FOR GENERATOR IN ELECTRIC SUBSTATION
D-1 The requirement of additional area for generator in electric substation for different capacities of generators
is given below for guidance:
S1 No. Capacity Area Clear Height below the Sojjit of the Beam
kW m2 m
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) 25 56 3.6
ii) 48 56 3.6
iii) 100 65 3.6
iv) 150 72 4.6
v) 248 100 4.6
vi) 350 100 4.6
vii) 480 100 4.6
viii) 600 110 4.6
ix) 800 120 4.6
x) 1000 120 4.6
xi) 1250 120 4.6
xii) 1600 150 4.6
NOTE— The area and height requiredfor generatingset room given in the above table are for generatguidanceonly and maybe
finallyf~ed accordingto actuatrequirements.
I/We certify that the installation detailed below has been installed by me/us and tested and that to the best of my/
our knowledge and belief, it complies with Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.
Electrical Installation at
Particulars of Works:
a) Internal Electrical Installation
1) Motors:
i)
ii)
iii)
2) Other plants:
c) If the work involves installations of
over head line and/or underground cable
1) i) Type and description of overheadline.
ii) Total length and number of spans.
iii) No. of street lights and its description.
2) i) Total length of underground cable and its size:
ii) No. of joints:
End joint:
Tee joint:
Straight through joint:
Earthing:
i) Description of earthing electrode
ii) No. of earth electrodes
iii) Size of main earth lead
Test Results:
a) Insulation Resistance
i) Insulation resistance of the whole system of conductors to earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Megaohms.
ii) Insulation resistance between the phase conductor and neutral
Between phase R and neutral ....................... Megaohms.
Between phase Y and neutral ....................... Megaohms.
Between phase B and neutral ....................... Megaohms.
iii) Insulation resistance between the phase conductors in case of polyphase supply.
Between phase R and phase Y ...................... Megaohms
Between phase Y and phase B ...................... Megaohms
Between phase B and phase R ...................... Megaohms
64 NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOFINDIA
b) Polarity test:
Polarity of non-linked single pole branch switches
c) Earth continuity test:
Maximum resistance between any point in the earth continuity conductor including metal
conduits and main earthing lead ......................... ohms.
d) Earth electrode resistance:
Resistance of each earth electrode.
i) ......................... Ohms.
ii) ......................... Ohms.
iii) ......................... Ohms.
iv) ......................... Ohms.
e) Lightning protective system.
Resistance of the whole of lightning protective system to earth before any bonding is effected
with earth electrode and metal itionthe s~cmre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Ohms.
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are 1S No. Title
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’ diagrams in the field of
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The electrotechnology:
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time (Part 6): 1987 Protection and conversion of
of the enforcement of the Code. The standards electrical energy
listed may be used by the Authority as a guide in (Part 7): 1987 Switchgear, controlgear and
conformance with the requirements of the referred protective devices
clauses in the Code. (2) 7752 Guide for improvement of
Title (Part 1): 1975 power factor in consumer
1s No.
installation: Part 1 Low and
(1) 8270 Guide for preparation of medium supply voltages
(Part 1): 1976 diagrams, charts and tables
(3) 5216 Recommendations on safety
for electrotechnology: Part 1
procedures and practices in
Definitions and classification
electrical work:
1885 Electrotechnical vocabulary:
(Part 1): 1982 General @rst revision)
(Part 16/Sec 3) Lighting, Section 3 Lamps
1967 and auxiliary apparatus (Part 2): 1982 Life saving techniques (first
revision)
(Part 17) :1979 Switchgear and controlgear
(4) 10118 Code of practice for selection,
(jirst revision)
(Part 2): 1982 installation and maintenance
(Part 32) :1993 Electrical cables (first of switchgear and controlgeac
revision) Part 2 Selection
(Part 78) :1993 Generation, transmission and (5) 1646:1997 Code of practice for fire
distribution of electricity — safety of buildings (general):
General Electrical installations
12032 Graphical symbols for (second revision)
10322 (Part 5/ Luminaires: Part 5 Particular (16) 4648:1968 Guide for electrical layout in
Sec 5) :1987 requirements, Section 5 Flood residential buildings
lights (17) 900:1992 Code of practice for
(11) 8828:1996 Electrical accessories — installation and maintenance
Circuit-breakers for over of $nduction motors (second
current protection for revision)
household and similar (18) 2412:1975 Link clips for electrical
installations (second revision) wiring (first revision)
13947 Speciilcation for low-voltage (19) 2667:1988 Fittings for rigid steel
switchgear and controlgear: conduits for electrical wiring
(Part 1): 1993 General rules @st revision)
(Part 2): 1993 Circuit-breakers 3419:1989 Fittings for rigid non-metallic
(Part 3): 1993 Switches, disconnectors, conduits (second revision)
switch disconnectors and fuse 9537 Conduits for electrical
combination units installations:
66 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
IS No. Title IS No. Title
(Part 1): 1980 General requirements (Part 4): 1977 Go and no-go gauges for G-5
(Part 2): 1981 Rigid steel conduits and G-13 lc-pin caps ($irst
revision)
(Part 3): 1983 Rigid plain conduits of
3323:1980 Bi-pin lampholders for
insulating materials
tubular fluorescent lamps
14772:2000 Specification for accessories @rst revision)
for household and similar
3324:1982 Holders for starters for
fixed electrical installations
tubular fluorescent lamps
(20) 1913 General and safety (first revision)
(Part 1): 1978 requirements for luminaires:
9900 Basic environmental testing
Part 1 Tubular fluorescent procedures for electronic
lamps (second revision)
and electrical items:
(21) 1258:1987 Bayonet lamp holders (third (Part 1): 1981 General
revision)
(Part 2): 1981 Cold test
(22) 418:1978 Tungsten filament general
(Part 3): 1981 Dry heat test
service electric lamps (third
Damp test (steady state)
1569:1976 Capacitors for use in tubular (25) 8623 Specification for low-voltage
fluorescent high pressure (Part 1): 1993 switchgear and controlgear
mercury and low pressure assemblies: Part 1
sodium vapour discharge Requirements for type-tested
and partially type-test$d
lamp circuit (first revision)
assemblies (jirst revision)
2215:1983 Specification for starters for
(26) 10028 Code of practice for selection,
fluorescent lamps (third
(Part 2): 1981 installation and maintenance
revision)
of transformers: Part 2
2418 Specification for tubular Installation
fluorescent lamps for general
11353:1985 Guide for uniform system of
lighting service:
marking and identification of
(Part 1): 1977 Requirements and tests @-st conductors and apparatus
revision) terminals
(Part 2): 1977 Standard lamp data sheets (27) 2309:1989 Code of practice for the
(jirst revision) protection of buildings and
(Part 3): 1977 Dimensions of G-5 and G-13 allied structures against
lc-pin caps tjirst revision) lightning (second revision)
CONTENTS
FOREWORD . .. 3
1 SCOPE ... 5
2 TERMINOLOGY ... 5
3 PLANNING DESIGN CRITERIA .,. 7
4 DESIGN OF AIR CONDITIONING ... 12
5 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL ... 26
6 MECHANICAL VENTILATION (FOR NON AIR CONDITIONED AREAS) ... 30
AND EVAPORATIVE COOLING
7 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONER . .. 35
8 SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER ... 36
9 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONER ... 37
10 HEATING . .. 38
NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOFINDIA
National Building Code Sectional Committee, CED 46
FOREWORD
This Section deals with various aspects of installation of air conditioning equipments and systems in buildings.
The aspects covered include design goals and criteria, design of systems, performance requirements, available
system options, pre-planning requirements, noise and vibration, .&ety aspects, energy conservation and
management, building management systems and inspection, installation, testing and commissioning requirements.
Though all aspects of the air conditioning, heating and mechanical ventilation plant have been touched upon in
this revision, care has been taken right through to look at them from the specific point of view of how they can
be fashioned to impact beneficially on the building as a whole. Thus, topics like pre-planning, safety requirements,
adequate provisions for maintenance, energy management, conservation strategies and noise pollution
considerations have qualified for special attention.
Weather data has now been included for as many as 58 stations based on data obtained from India Meteorological
Department, Government of India. Till such information is collected for other cities, it is recommended that
design work in these cities maybe carried out according to the present (local) practice.
The first version of this Part was prepared in 1970 which was subsequently revised in 1983. As a result of
experience gained in implementation of 1983 version of this Section and feedback received, a need to revise this
Part was felt.
This revision has therefore been prepared. The significant modifications made in this revision include the following:
a) Definitions of several new terms like ozone depletion potential, global warming potential, indoor air
quality, sick building syndrome, buildings related illnesses and thermal energy storage have been included.
b) A new clause on design criterion has been incorporated.
c) ‘Indoor air quality’ has been included as one of the factors that need to be controlled in the conditioned
space.
d) For large and multi-storeyed buildings, independent air handling unit rooms have been recommended
for each floor.
e) Inside design conditions for various applications have been included; they replace earlier Table 2 and
Table 3.
f) The text on minimum outside fresh air has been revised in the light of cumently accepted international
norms. Recommended values for outside air requirements for ventilation purposes have been furnished
for a wider variety and a larger number of applications.
g) New details have been added on temperature, humidity, and vibration and rioise.
h) Application considerations, covering a wide variety of commercial applications, offices, hotels,
restaurants, computer rooms, etc, have now been given in more details.
j) A new clause on statutory regulation/safety considerations has now been included.
k) Under the clause on design considerations, various system options available have been described.
m) The characteristics and application of options available in piping, water distribution systems and piping
layout have been given prominently.
n) The text on air filters has been revised; focus is now on the approach to filtration in preference to a
detailed description of ever increasingly available option of filter types.
p) The clause on energy conservation and energy management has been thoroughly revised. The concepts
like energy targets, demand targets and consumption targets; the factors to be considered in system
This revision aims to make a difference in the quality of environment and in building usage, in response to
growing concerns and expectations in with regard to indoor air quality, energy conservation, environmental
impact and building safety.
The provisions on natural ventilation are given in Part 8 ‘Building Services, Section 1 Lighting and Ventilation’.
The information contained in this Section is based largely on the following Indian Standards:
IS No. Tide
659:1964 Safety code for air conditioning (revised)
1391 Specification for room air conditioners:
(Part 1): 1992 Unitary air conditioners (second revision)
(Part 2) :1992 Split air conditioners (second revision)
2379:1990 Colour code for identification of pipelines (first revision)
3315:1994 Specification for evaporative air coolers (desert coolers) (second revision)
7896:2001 Data for outside design conditions for air conditioning for Indian cities @rst revision)
8148:2003 Specification for packaged air conditioners (jirst revision)
Assistance has also been derived from the following publications in preparation of this Section:
BS 5720:1979 Code of practice for mechanical ventilation and air conditioning in building
Guidelines, Standards and Handbooks of American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers
Handbooks of Indian Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate @e possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
.
4 NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOF INDIA
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES
Section 3 Air Conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation
2.12 Hydronic Systems — The water systems that 2.19 Psychometric Chart — A chart graphically
convey heat to or from a conditioned space or process representing the thermodynamic properties of moist
with hot or chilled water. The water flows through air.
piping that connects a chiller or the water heater to 2.20 Recirculated Air — The return air that has been
suitable terminal heat transfer units located at the space passed through the conditioning apparatus before being
or process. re-supplied to the space.
2.13 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) — Air quality that 2.21 Refrigerant — The fluid used for heat transfer
refers to the nature of conditioned air that circulates in a refrigerating system, which absorbs heat at a low
throughout the spacelarea where one works or lives, temperature and low pressure of the fluid Ad rejects
that is, the air one breathes when indoors. heat at a higher temperature and higher pressure of
It not only refers to comfort which is affected by the fluid, usually involving changes of, state of the
temperature, humidity, air movement and odours but fluid.
also to harmful biological contaminants and chemicals 2.22 Relative Humidity — Ratio of the partial
present in the conditioned space. Poor IAQ may be pressure of actual water vapour in the air as compared
serious health hazard. Carbon dioxide has been to the partial pressure of maximum amount of water
6 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
to overcome the system resistances such as resistances Temporary hardness is primarily responsible for scale
in ducts, elbows, filters, dampers, heating/cooling coils, formation, which results in poor heat transfer resulting
etc. in increased cost of energy for refrigeration and air
conditioning. Permanent hardness (non-carbonate) is
Static pressure is measured by a U tube manometer
not as serious a factor in water conditioning because it
relative to the atmospheric pressure, which is
has a volubility which is approximately 70 times greater
considered as zero pressure. In exhaust systems, fan
than the carbonate hardness. In many cases, water may
produces negative static pressure, which is again used
contain as much as 1 200 ppm of non-carbonate
to overcome the system resistances.
hardness and not deposit a calcium sulfate scale.
2.28 Supply Air — The air that has been passed
The treated water where hardness as ppm of CaC03 is
through the conditioning apparatus and taken through
reduced to 50 ppm or below, is recommenced for air
the duct system and distributed in the conditioned
conditioning applications.
space.
pH is a measure of acidity,pH is a negative logarithm
2.29 Supply and Return Air Grilles and Diffusers
base 10, of the concentration of hydrogen ion in grams
— Grilles and diffusers are the devices fixed in the air
per litre. Water having a pH of 7.0 is neutral, a pH
conditioned space for distribution of conditioned
value less than 7 is acidic and pH value greater than 7
supply air and return of air collected from the
8 NATIONALBUILDINGCODEOF INDIA
3.2.2.2 The floors of the equipment rooms should be system options shall be considered and approach
light coloured and finished smooth. For floor loading, ladders for manholes provided.
the air conditioning engineer should be consulted (see
Buried installation shall take into account loads due to
also Part 6 ‘Structural Design, Section 1 Loads, Forces
movement above, of vehicles, etc.
. and Effects’ ).
Provision for adequate expansion tank and its
3.2.2.3 Supporting of pipe within plant room spaces
connection to thermal storage tanks shall be made.
should be normally from the floor. However, outside
plant room areas, structural provisions shall be made 3.2.3 Planning Equipment Room for Air Handling
for supporting the water pipes from the floor/ceiling Units and Package Units
slabs. All floor and ceiling supports shall be isolated
3.2.3.1 This shall be located as centrally as possible
from the structure to prevent transmission of
to the conditioned area and contiguous to the corridors
vibrations.
or other spaces for carrying air ducts. For floor loading,
3.2.2.4 Equipment rooms, wherever necessary, shall air conditioning engineer shall be consulted (see also
have provision for mechanical ventilation. In hot Part 6 ‘Structural Design, Section 1 Loads, Forces and
climate, evaporative air-cooling may also be Effects’).
considered.
3.2.3.2 In the case of large and multistoried buildings,
3.2.2.5 Plant machinery in the plant room shall be independent air handling unit should be provided for
10 NATIONALBUILDINGCODE OF INDIA
windows, other buildings and effects of any formation, chemicals may be added to inhibit corrosion
water carried over by the air stream. and limit microbiological growth.
e) Noise levels, particularly during silent hours Provision shall be made to make-up for the loss of
and vibration control. circulating water.
f-) Material of construction for the tower.
3.2.6.10 Provision for make-up water tank to the
d Direction and flow of wind. cooling tower shall be made. Make-up water tank to
h) Quality of water used for make-up. the cooling tower shall be separate from the tank
j) Maintenance and service space. serving drinking water.
k) Ambient air quality.
3.2.6.11 Make-up water having contaminants or
3.2.6.5 The recommended floor mea requirement for hardness, which can adversely affect the refrigeration
various types of cooling tower is as given below: plant life, shall be treated.
a) Natural draft cooling 0.15 to 0.20 m2/t 3.2.6.12 Cooling tower should be so located as to
tower of refrigeration eliminate nuisance from drift to adjoining structures.
b) Induced draft cooling 0.10 to 0.13 m2/t 3.2.7 Glazing
tower of refrigeration
c) Fibre-reinforced 0.07 to 0.08 m2/t 3.2.7.1 Glazing contributes significantly to heat
3.2.8.2 The overall thermal transmittance from the Low velocity systems may be used. High velocity
exposed roof should be kept as minimum as possible systems although require smaller ducts, are high on
and under normal conditions, the desirable value fan energy, require careful acoustic treatment and
should not exceed 0.58 W/(m* ‘C). higher standards of duct construction.
3.2.8.3 The ceiling surface of floors which are not 4.2.1.1.1 Constant volume system
to be air conditioned may be suitably insulated to
Accurate temperature control is possible, according to
give an overall thermal transmittance not exceeding
the system adopted. Low velocity system variations
1.16 W/(m* “C)
include dehumidification with return air bypass, and
4 DESIGN OF AIR CONDITIONING multi-zone (hot declclcold deck mixing). High velocity
system may be single or dual duct type.
4.1 General
4.2.1.1.2 Variable volume system
A ventilation and air conditioning system installed in
a building should clean, freshen and condition the air Most Indian air conditioning systems operate at partial
within the space to be air conditioned. This can be load for most of the year and the variable air volume
achieved by providing the required amount of fresh (VAV) system is able to reduce energy consumption
air either to remove totally or to dilute odours, fumes, by reducing the supply air volume to the space under
etc (for example, from smoking). Local extract systems low load conditions. Thp VAV system can be applied
may be necessary to remove polluted air from kitchens, to interior or perimeter zones, with common or separate
toilets, etc. Special air filters may be required to remove fans, with common or separate air temperature control.
contaminants or smells when air is recirculated. The greatest energy saying associated with VAV
occurs at the perimeter ztmes, where variation in solar
It is desirable that access doors to air conditioned space
and outside temperature allow tbe supply air quantity
are provided with tight sealing gaskets and self closing
to be reduced. Good temperature control is possible
devices for air conditioning to be effective.
but care should be taken at partial load to ensure
Positions of air inlets and extracts to the system are adequate fresh air supply and satisfactory control of
most important and care should be taken in their air distribution and space humidity.
location. Consideration should be given to relatively
4.2.L2 Air and water system
nearby buildings and any contaminated discharges
from those buildings. Inlets should not be positioned Control of conditions within the space is achieved by
near any flue outlets, dry cleaning or washing machine initial control of the supply air from a central plant but
extraction outlets, kitchen, water-closets, etc. When with main and final control at a terminal unit within.
possible, air inlets should beat high level so as to induce the conditioned space. The supply air provides the
a) A good distribution of water to the various Friction factor in piping should not exceed 5 m of water
heat exchangers/cooling coils at all conditions for 100 m of pipe length. The power consumed in
of load. This will be influenced by the method circulating the water around the system is proportional
chosen to control the heat transfer capacity to the pressure loss (due to friction) and the flow. It is
of air handling units. Failure to achieve good therefore an advantage to design system with a water
hydraulic design may lead to difficulties with temperature rise say 50C-70C which results in
system balancing. Adequate provision should minimizing the flow rate.
be made for measuring flow rates and pressure
Air-conditioning system operate for a large part of the
differentials.
time at less than the design load, and this means that
b) An economic balance between pipe size and operating costs can be minimized if the water quantity
piping cost.
For central chilled water air conditioning systems, 4.3.3 Thermal Insulation
water is the usual heat transfer medium use to convey 4.3.3.1 Air conditionirig and water distribution
the heat from the air-handling units to the primary systems carry chilled or heated fluids. Thermal
refrigerant in the evaporator. In certain special cases, insulation is required to prevent undue heat gain or
when temperatures lower than 5°C are required, an loss and also to prevent internal and external
anti-freeze such as ethylene glycol may be added to condensation; a vapour seal is essential if there is a
depress the freezing point. possibility of condensation within the insulating
4.3.2.3 Piping design materials.
The arrangement of the water piping will depend upon 4.3.3.2 The selection of suitable thermal insulating
the cooling or heating systems chosen as being the most materials requires that consideration be given to
suitable for the building. physical characteristics as follows:
The water velocity normally used are dependent on a) Fire Properties — Certain insulating
pipe size but are usually in the range 1 rnls to 3 rids. materials are combustible or may, in a fire,
(Clause 4.4.4)
Station Cooling DB/MCWB Cooling WB/MCDB Heating DB/MCWB
~~~
0.4% 1.0% 2.0% 0.4% 1.0% 2.0% 99.6% 99.0%
~~ ~~ ~ f—’—, ,—’—, f—-—-,
DB MCWB DB MCWB DB MCWB WB MCDB WB MCDB WB MCDB DB MCWB DB MCWB
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)
42.3 24.1 41.2 23.5 40.0 24.3 28.7 34.3 28.2 33.6 27.8 33.1 11.5 9.0 12.9 9.8
Akola 43.4 24.0 42.2 23.3 41.0 23.6 27.6 37.8 26.7 34.4 26.1 33.5 12.7 10.3 13.9 10.6
Allahabad 43.7 23.4 42.2 23.5 40.8 22.7 28.8 33.0 28.4 32.8 28.0 32.6 7.9 7.0 9.1 8.3
Amritsar 41.6 23.2 40.3 24.6 38.9 24.4 29.3 34.8 28.8 34.8 28.4 33.4 2.7 2.3 4.0 3.5
Aurangabad 40.3 22.1 39.3 22.9 38.3 21.3 26.3 36.2 25.3 33.1 24.7 31.4 10.6 8.2 12.0 9.1
Bangalore 34.7 19.6 34.0 19.6 33.1 19.2 23.5 28.9 22.9 28.2 22.5 27.7 14.9 13.0 15.7 13.8
Banner 43.1 24.2 42.0 23.6 41.0 23.3 28.5 37.9 27.8 35.3 27.2 33.3 9.5 5.1 10.7 5.5
Belgaum 36.5 19.4 35.7 19.6 34.7 19.2 24.3 29.2 23.8 29.5 23.4 28.2 13.2 11.3 14.3 12.2
Bhagalpur 42.4 26.8 40.7 27.4 38.9 25.6 30.0 37.1 29.6 36.4 29.2 35.2 11.4 10.3 12.6 12.4
Bhopal 41.7 22.0 40.5 21.7 39.3 21.3 26.0 31.0 25.6 30.3 25.2 29.9 9.8 6.8 11.0 8.0
Bhubaneshwar 38.9 25.5 37.6 26.6 36.3 26.3 29.4 35.2 28.9 33.3 28.5 32.7 14.4 13.1 15.4 14.0
Bikaner 44.8 22.4 43.4 22.4 42.0 23.1 28.5 34.6 27.9 33.1 27.3 34.7 3.8 2.2 5.3 3.1
Chennai 38.4 26.2 37.3 26.7 36.3 26.4 29.1 33.8 28.6 33.2 28.1 31.9 19.5 20.2 18.7 19.3
Chitradurg 36.6 18.8 35.8 19.0 35.0 19.6 23.9 28.9 23.5 28.2 23.2 28.5 15.4 12.5 16.4 13.3
Dehradun 37.8 23.5 36.3 23.9 34.8 22.8 27.0 31.3 26.5 30.1 26.0 29.8 5.9 5.0 6.8 5.8
Dibrugarh 34.0 27.4 33.2 26.8 32.3 26.7 28.3 32.6 27.8 31.8 27.4 31.3 7.5 7.2 8.7 8.4
Gorakhpur 41.4 26.2 40.3 26.0 39.1 26.4 29.9 35.2 29.7 35.5 29.4 34.7 7.9 7.5 9.0 8.4
Guwahati 34.4 26.9 33.4 27.3 32.7 26.8 28.8 32.4 28.3 31.8 27.9 31.5 10.2 9.8 11.3 10.8
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)
Gwalior 43.9 23.0 42.5 22.9 41.3 23.5 27.9 32.9 27.6 32.4 27.3 32.7 4.9 3.8 6.4 5.3
Hissar 44.7 26.5 43.3 25.8 41.7 27.9 30.1 40.2 29.9 39.0 29.4 36.8 5.0 4.2 6.1 5.2
Hyderabad 40.4 22.5 39.2 22.5 38.2 22.4 25.6 33.7 25.2 32.4 24.8 32.0 14.4 12.4 15.5 12.9
Imphal 31.1 23.3 30.2 23.5 29.6 22.9 25.0 29.5 24.6 28.6 24.3 28.3 3.9 3.6 5.0 4.6
Indore 41.1 20.7 40.4 20.6 38.9 21.0 25.7 31.0 25.2 30.0 24.8 29.8 8.2 5.0 9.7 6.5
Vdbalpur 42.6 22.7 41.2 23.2 39.8 22.5 26.8 31.8 26.4 32.0 26.0 31.2 7.8 6.7 9.3 7.6
Jagdelpur 39.4 22.3 38.6 22.5 37.4 22.4 26.4 32.4 25.9 31.8 25.4 30.7 8.9 7.9 10.1 8.7
Jaipur 42.8 22.5 41.4 22.6 39.4 22.6 27.4 33.1 27.0 32.1 ‘26.6 31.7 6.4 4.5 8.0 5.8
Jaisalmer 43.7 23.7 42.5 23.1 41.4 23.5 27.7 34.8 27.3 34.5 26.9 34.4 5.0 2.5 6.5 3.7
Jamnagar 37.1 24.4 36.1 25.6 35.3 25.1 29.2 33.0 28.4, 32.5 27.9 32.0 10.0 8.6 11.7 10.5
Jodhpur 42.0 23.2 40.8 23.0 39.6 22.7 28.0 35.4 27.4 33.7” 26.9 33.8 7.5 4.3 8.7 5.4
Jorhat 34.4 28.2 33.6 27.7 32.9 27.3 28.7 32.7 28:3 32.1 28.0 31.8 9.6 9.0 10.6 10.1
Kolkata 37.2 25.4 36.2 26.1 35.2 26.5 29.5 34.3 29.0 33.4 28.6 32.7 12.0 10.9 13.1 12.9
Kota 43.5 23.0 42.4 22.6 41.2 22.6 27.3 35,2 26.8 33.0 26.5 31.8 9.9 6.7 10.8 7.6
DBT — Drybulbtemperature
WBT — Wet-bulbtemperature
MCDB — Mean coincidentaldry-bulbtemperature
MCWB — Mean coincidentalwet-bulbtemperature.
for heating loads. For critical applications values under loads and the practical cooling and heating range of
0.4 percent column could beused for cooling loads the air.
and 99.6 percent column for heating loads.
4.4.6 Air Movement
For critical jobs and high energy consumption
applications, hourly load analysis should be evaluated a) In air conditioned spaces — Air movement
using computer programmed. is desirable, as it contributes a feeling of
freshness, although excessive movement
For industrial and other specific applications, the design should be avoided as this leads to complaints
conditions shall be as per user’s requirement. ‘ of draughts. The speed of an air current
Adequate movement of air shall always be provided becomes more noticeable as the air temperature
in an air conditioned enclosure, but velocities in excess falls, owing to its increased cooling effect.
of 0.5 nds in the zone between floor level and 1.5 m The design of the air distribution system
level shall generally be avoided; in the case of comfort therefore has a controlling effect of the
air conditioning, recommended air velocity is 0.13 nds quantity and temperature of the air that may
to 0.23 m/s in this zone, except in the vicinity of a be introduced into a space. The quantity of
supply or return air grille. fresh air should not be increased solely to
create air movement; this should be effected
4.4.5 Minimum Outside Fresh Air by air re-circulation within the space or by
S1 Application F.atimated
Maximumz) Outdoor Air Remarks
No. Occupancy Requirement
< A %
Persons/100mz I/s/Person (l/s)/mz
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Commercial dry cleaner 30 15
ii) Food and Beverage Service
Dining rooms 70 10
Cafeteria, fast food 100 10
Bars, cocktail lounges 100 15 Supplementarysmokeremovalequipmentmaybe
mquimd.
Kitchen (cooking) 20 8 Make up air for food exhaust may require more
ventilating air. The sum of tbe outdoor air and
transfer air of acceptable quafi~ from .ad@cettt
spacea shall be sufficient to provide an exhaust
rate of not less than 27.5 m3/h.m2(7.5 Vs.mz).
1-
Spectator areas 150 8 When intemsd combustion e@rres ate cqwrated
Game rooms 70 13 2.50 for maintenance of playing surfaces, incmwxf
Ice arenas (playing areas) ventilation rates may be required.
Table 4 — Conck.fed
vii) Theatre
Ticketbooths 60 10
Lobbies 150 10 Specird ventilation will be needed to eliminate
Auditorium 150 8 speci~ stageeffects(for example,dry ice vaponrs,
mists,etc).
Stages,studios 70 8
viii) Transportation
Waitingrooms 100 8
Platforms Ventilation within vehicles may require special
100 8
consideration.
Vehicles 150 8
ix) Workrooms
Air borne dust and dirt may be generated within the 4.5.2.1 Design principles
building, from the interior finishes such as partitions,
The design of air conditioning system and mechanical
laminations, carpets, upholstery, etc, personnel and
ventilation shall take into accountdhe fire risk within
their movements as well as by machines such as,
the building, both as regards structural protection and
printers and fax machines.
means of escape in case of fire.
The degree of filtration necessary will depend on the
The extent and detail of statutory control and other
use of the building or the conditioned space. Certain
specialist interest may vary considerably according to
specialized equipment, normally associated with
the design, use, occupation and location of the building,
computers, will require higher than normal air filter
and the type of system of mechanical ventilation and
efficiencies for satisfactory operation. It is important
air conditioning proposed. It is therefore particularly
to ascertain the necessary standard of air cleanliness
important that the appropriate safeguards are fully
required for equipment of this type.
considered at the concept design stage of the building.
The choice of filtration systems will depend on the The degree of control and the requirements vary
degree of contamination of the air and on the cleanliness according to the application.
required. A combination of filter types may well give
Ionization type detectors are sensitive to high velocity Office building may include both external and internal
air streams and if used in ductwork the manufacturer zones.
should be consulted. Activation of smoke detector The external zone may be considered as extending from
should stop the air handling unit supply air fan, close approximately 4 m to 6 m inwards from the external
the fire damper in supply and return air duct and operate
For small shops and stores unitary split type air For (a) and (b) the air movement patterns should
conditioning systems offer many advantages, including minimize the spread of contaminants as for instance,
low initial cost, minimum space requirement and ease in operating departments where the airflow should be
of installation. such as to reduce the risk of periphery or floor-level
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING. HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 25
P
air returning to the patient owing to secondary air temperature variations owing to fluctuation in heat
currents whilst the general pressurization pattern load. Overhead air supply through ceiling plenums
should cause air to flow through the department from utilizing linear diffuser or ventilated ceilings is
sterile to less sterile rooms in progression. In operating eminently suited to computer room application,
theatres 100 percent fresh air system is normally permitting high air change rates to be achieved without
provided and air pressures in various rooms are set by undue discomfort to persormel.
use of pressure stabilizers. Many types of air
The air conditioning system should be reliable because
distribution pattern within operation theatres are in use
failure to maintain conditions for even a short duration
but generally they conform to high-level supply and
can cause substantial monetary loss and possibly more
low-level pressure relief or exhaust. There is also need
serious consequence. As such standby equipment is
for a separate scavenging system for exhaled and waste
recommended,
anesthetic gases with in theatre suites where general
anesthetic may be administered. 4.6.1.8 Residential buildings
When zoning air distribution systems to compensate for Very few residences are air conditioned. Some
building orientation and shape, consideration should be individual houses have unitary systems comprising of
given to ensure that the mixing of air from different windowlsplit air conditioners. Some large houses have
departments is reduced to a minimum. This can be VRV based splits and some luxury block of flats are
accomplished by the use of 100 percent conditioned provided with air-water systems. VAV also works well
5.2.3 Transmitted Noise ‘ f-) Ensure all leaks are sealed properly.
g) Avoid condenser facing any high noisy areas,
Noise transmitted through the building structure is such as roadlfactory to avoid any such noise
particularly acute in modern frame and reinforced predominantly entering into the room.
concrete buildings. Such noise can be controlled by
h) Do not provide any props at the back side
isolating the machines from the structures, and from
bottom of the air conditioner unless specified
pipe work connected to the building, by suitable
by the manufacturer.
mountings and pipe couplings.
j) Prepare the opening to suit the chassis with
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 27
without touching the members of the false for a more normal operating point and allowing fan
ceiling or partitions. noise to exceed the design criteria on the rare occasions
c) Ensure that ducts/duct supports do not touch when the fan operates at full output.
the evaporator. 5.5.5.3 To reduce fan noise, the following should be
5.5.4 From Plenum Chamber adopted:
a) Design the air distribution system for
The following measures should be adopted/considered:
minimum resistance, since the sound generated
a) If possible and if pressures allow, expand the by a fan, regardless of type, increase by the
air to a plenum chamber (of 2.5 m/s for square of the static pressure. Turbulence can
normal office), which is acoustically lined increase the flow noise generated by duct
inside. fittings and dampers in the air distribution
b) Stiffening of the plenum body is very critical systems especially at low frequencies.
since it could create a drumming noise. b) Examine the specific sound power levels of
c) Plenum chambers with sound absorbing the fan designs for any given job. Different
material are frequently used as silencers in fans generate different levels of sound and
air conditioning and ventilating systems and produce different octave band spectra. Select
in testing facilities to reduce flow velocity and a fan that will generate the lowest possible
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 3 ALR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 29
a) Plant rooms; various parameters that affect the type of ventilation
b) Occupied rooms adjacent to plant rooms; system selected for a particular application, and the
c) Outside plant rooms facing air intakes and sizing of the ventilation plant:
exhausts and condenser discharge, to assess a) The climatic zone in which the building is
possible nuisance to adjacent occupied areas; located is a major consideration. An important
d) In the space served by the first grille or distinction that must be made is between hot-
diffuser after a fan outlet; and dry and warm-moist conditions. Hot-dry work
e) In at least two of the spaces served by fan situations occur around furnaces, forges,
coil units or high velocity system te~inal metal-extruding and rolling mills, glass-
units (where applicable). forming machines, and so forth.
Typical warm-moist operations are found in
6 MECHANICAL VENTILATION (FOR NON AIR textile mills, laundries, dye houses, and deep
CONDITIONED AREAS) AND EVAPORATIVE mines where water is used extensively for dust
COOLING control.
6.1 Ventilation Warm-moist conditions are more hazardous
than the hot-dry conditions.
Ventilation is the process of changing air in an enclosed
b) Siting (and orientation) of the building is also
space. A proportion of the air in the space should be
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 31
.,
I!f’7’$”
.
c) Ventilation systems may need to be 6.5 Ventilation Rate and Design Coniderations for
supplemented by exhaust hoods and canopies Non Air Conditioned Areas
designed to capture the unwanted fumes or 6.5.1 General Ventilation
dust right at the source irrespective ofother
The rate of air circulation recommended for different
air currentsin the vicinity.
general areas is as given in Table 5.
Many industrial ventilation systems shall handle
Table 5 Recommended Rate of Air Circulation
simultaneous exposures to heat, toxic and hazardous
for Different Areas
substances. The number of contaminant sources, their
(Clause 6.5.1)
generation rate and effectiveness of exhaust hoods are
rarely known; there is no option but to depend on S1 Application Air Change
No. per Hour
common ventilatiordindustrial hygiene practice in such
(1) (2) (3)
situations.
1. Assembly rooms 4-8
Reference may also be made to good practice [8-3(4)]. 2. Bakeries 20-30
3. Banks/building societies 4-8
6.4 Types of Ventilation Systems 4. Bathrooms 6-10
5. Bedrooms 2-4
In the interest of efficient use of energy and comfort 6. Billiard rooms 6-8
7. Boiler rooms 15-30
to the occupants, it is imperative that all modes of
Suggested design standards for exhaust airflows from Sizing the ventilation plant is essentially arriving at the
different kitchen equipment based on their input power air flow rate required. Based on various considerations
are as given in Table 6. already reviewed the sizing of the plant will be
influenced by the following requirements:
Table 6 Design Exhaust Air Flow in I/s per kW
of the Kitchen Equipment a) Removal of sensible heat,
b) Removal of latent heat,
(Clau~e 6.5.2)
c) Make-up air — the flow rate required will
sl Kitchen Equipment Electricity Gas based
depend upon local exhaust, and
No. based Equipment
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 33
wet-bulb temperature of the air. When evaporative the dry air from the wet surface, Higher face. velocity
cooling is provided for comfort application, it maybe may provide insufficient air-water contact time.
supplemented by devices like ceiling fans and fan
6.6.7 Pad material should be such which provides
coolers to enhance air movement for circulation of air
maximum clean wet surface area with minimum
in internal areas in order to maximize evaporation of
airflow resistance. Materials, which have either good
moisture from the skin.
‘wick’ characteristics or surface that spread water
6.6.3 The geographic range for the evaporative cooling rapidly by capillary action, should be selected.
is based on cooler’s ability to create or approximate
6.6.8 In the ducted systems, all supply air diffusers,
human comfort and is limited by relative humidity in
grilles and registers should be preferably adjustable.
the atmosphere. It is more effective in dry climates
(hot-dry climate zone) where wet-bulb depression is 6.6.9 General room cooling should be supplemented
comparatively large. Factors to be considered — with spot cooling in the hot workplaces.
include those listed in 6.5.4; In addition the following
6.6.10 Reference may also be made to good practice
also apply:
[8-3(5)].
a) Saturation efficiency of the cooler — higher
the better; 6.7 Planning
b) Ambient weather design data; 6.7.1 Planning of Equipment Room for Ventilation
a) Minimize external heat loads by shading, use Proper location helps achieve satisfactory air
of heat reflective paints, roof insulation and distribution and also results in a less expensive
sealing of gaps. installation.
b) Minimize internal heat loads by shielding, use 6.7.1.2 Equipment room should preferably be located
of reflective paints, insulation and installation adjacent to external wall to facilitate equipment
of exhaust fans over the hot processes and movement and ventilation. It should also close to main
machines. electrical panel of the building, if possible, in order to
c) Make building tight. avoid large cable lengths.
d) Wherever possible, exhaust of used washed 6.7.1.3 Location and dimensions of shafts, for ducting,
air must b; directed towards roof to partly cables, pipes, etc (if envisaged), should be planned at
cool the surface and trusses thereby reducing the virtual stages itself if planning. They should be
heat radiation. located adjacent to the equipment or within the room
6.6.5 Two types of water distribution systems maybe itself.
provided: Evaporative cooling units (air washers) should be
a) Once through or pump-less type. located preferably orr summer-windward side. They
should be painted white or with reflective coating or
b) Recirculating or pump type.
thermally insulated, io as to minimize solar heat
,/
The first type is simpler and cheaper but consumes absorption.
more water, needs constant drainage and has lower
In locating the units, care should be taken to ensure
efficiency depending upon the temperature of water.
that their noise level will not be objectionable to the
The second type has higher cooling efficiency due to
neighbors. Appropriate acoustic treatment should be
recirculate water approaching wet-bulb temperature
considered, if the noise levels cannot be kept down to
conserves water and can operate with intermittent
permissible limits.
drainage. It is recommended to provide periodic bleed-
off or blow down to remove accumulated mineral Exhaust air devices, preferably to leeward and
additions. This helps in reducing scaling of pads also. overhead side may be provided for effective movement
of air.
6.6.6 The air velocity across wetting pad is
recommended between 1.0 and 1.5 m/s. The lower face In the case of large installations it is advisable to have
velocity reduces evaporation as damp air film isolates a separate isolated equipment room if possible.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 35
a) Means for heating during winter months. 7.6 Location
b) Reciprocating or rotary compressor.
Unitary air conditioners should be mounted preferably
c) Swing louvers for better distribution of air in at the window sill level on an external wall where hot
the room. air from air-cooled condenser may be discharged
d) In addition to normal, dust filters, indoor air without causing nuisance. There should not be any
quality filters, such as bactericidal enzyme obstruction to the inlet and discharge air of the
filters for killing bacteria, low temperature condenser. Also while deciding location of the window
catalyst filter for removal of unpleasant air conditioners, care should be taken to ensure that
odours, electrostatic filters to trap particles the condensate water dripping does not cause nuisance.
of smoke as well as suspended matters present The opening for the air conditioner is generally made
in the air. apart of windows or wall construction at the planning
e) Digital LCD remote control which also stage.
indicates room temperature.
7.7 Limitations
7.2 Capacity Room air conditioners are not generally recommended
Most of the manufacturers supply unitary air conditions in the following situations:
in capacities of 3500 W (1 TR), 5250 W (1.5 TR) and
a) The width of the area exceeds 6 m.
Split air conditioner indoor unit is mounted within the 9.1 Packaged air conditioner is a self-contained unit
air conditioned space or above the false ceiling from primarily for floor mounting, designed to provide
where the air distribution duct is taken to the conditioned air to the space to be conditioned. It
conditioned space to distribute the air. When the indoor includes prime Source of refrigeration for cooling fid
dehumidification and means for circulation and
unit is mounted in the false ceiling, inspection panel
cleaning of air, with or without external air distribution
must be kept in the false ceiling to attend to the indoor
ducting. It may also include means for heating,
unit including periodic cleaning of air filter. Outdoor
humidifying and ventilating air.
unit is mounted at the nearest open area where
unobstructed flow of outside air is available for air The unit comprises a compressor, condenser and
cooled condenser. evaporator, which are interconnected with copper
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 37
refrigerant piping and refrigerant controls. It also taken to the conditioned space. While deciding location
includes fan for circulation of air and falter. The unit is for the packaged unit, provision must be kept for proper
provided with compressor and fan motor starter and servicing of the unit.
factory-wired safety controls.
9.5 Installation
Compressor is a device, which compresses low-
The packaged units are normally mounted on a resilient
pressure low temperature refrigerant gas to high-
pad which prevents vibration of the unit from being
-pressure high temperature super heated refrigerant gas.
transmitted to the building.
Compressors may be reciprocating type or scroll type
for packaging unit applications. 9.6 Limitations
Condenser condenses high pressure high temperature Packaged air conditioner are not generally recommended
refrigerant gas to liquid refrigerant at approximate y for:
the same temperature and pressure by removal of
a) Large multi-storey buildings where multiplicity
sensible heat of refrigerant by external means of water
of the compressors may entail subsequent
cooling or air cooling.
maintenance problems.
The packaged units are also available with b) Where the length of air distribution ducting
microprocessor-based controller installed in the unit may exceed approx 20 m.
The water cooled condenser packaged unit gives higher 9.7 For detailed information regarding constructional
capacity at lower power consumption as compared to and performance requirements and methods for
an air cooled condenser packaged unit which gets establishing ratings of packaged air conditioners,
considerably de-rated in capacity and also consumes reference may be made to accepted standard [8-3(8)].
more power in peak summer months in most of the
10 HEATING
cities of our country due to high ambient temperature.
10.1 The installations for air conditioning system may
Packaged units are generally available with vertical
be used advantageously for,the central heating system
air discharge or horizontal air discharge.
with additions such as hot water or boiler and hot water
9.2 Suitability coils or strip heater banks.
Packaged units are suitable for wide range of 10.2 The heating equipments as described in 10.2.1
applications including offices, clubs and restaurants, and 10.2.2 are generrdly used:
showrooms and departmental stores, and computer 10.2.1 Hot Water Heated Coils
rooms, etc.
Central heating systems” using hot water usually
9.3 Capacity required not more than one or two rows of tubes in the
Normally the packaged air conditioners are manufactured direction of air flow, in order to produce the desired
in sizes of 17500 W (5 TR), 26250 W (7.5 TR), heating capacity. To achieve high efficiency without
35000 W (10 TR) and 52500 W (15 TR). Packaged excessive water pressure drop through the coil, various
units with scroll compressors are also available in circuit arrangements are used.
capacity up to 58100 W (16.6 TR). Generally, the resistance to the hot water flow through
the heater should not exceed 4 IcPa in low pressure hot
9.4 Location
water heating installations. In high pressure hot water
The packaged unit can be mounted within the air installations, the resistance to the water flow will
conditioned space with discharge air plenum or in a probably be determined by other factors, for example,
separate room from where the air distribution duct is the need to balance circuits.
The heaters should be served from hot water flow and ventilation and refrigeration system shall be in
return mains with sufficient connections to each row accordance with good practice [8-3(9)].
or bank of tubes or sections to give uniform distribution
11.2 Colour code for identification for various items
of the heating medium.
in air conditioning installations for easy interpretation
The flow connections to the heater should generally and identification is advisable. This shall promote
be arranged at the lowest point of the heater, and the greater safety and shall lessen chances of error,
return connections at the highest, to aid venting. The confusion or inaction in times of emergency< Colour
expansion of the tubes when the heater is in operation shade shall be generally in accordance with good
should be considered and the necessary arrangements practice [8-3(10)].
made to accommodate expansion and contraction.
11.3 Colour bands shall be 150 mm wide,
Thermometer wells should be fitted in the pipes near superimposed on ground colour to distinguish type
the inlets and outlets of all air-heating coils so that the and condition of fluid. The spacing of band shall not
temperature drop through the heater can be readily exceed 4.0 m.
observed.
11.4 Further identification may also be carried out
10.2.2 Electric Air Heater using lettering and marking direction of flow.
With all electric air heaters, care should be taken to Services Colour
preclude the risk of fire under abnormal conditions of Conditioned Air Red and Blue
operation, by the use of a suitably positioned Ward Air Yellow
temperature sensitive trip of the manual reset type to Green
Fresh Air
cut off the electric supply. Grey
Exhaust/Extract/Recalculated Air
11 SYMBOLS, UNITS, COLOUR CODE AND Foul Air Brown
IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES Dual Duct System Hot Supply Air Red
Cold Supply Air Blue
11.1 Units and symbols to be used in air conditioning,
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 39
2
,
% ,
*
. .
*.*
Table 7 Scheme of Colour Code of Pipe Work Services for Air Conditioning Installation
(Clause 11.5.1.1)
11.5.3 Valve Labels and Charts determined by the manner in which the building and
its services are used and is measured in units of energy
Each valve shall be provided with a label indicating
(Wh/m2). Targets may be established according to
the service being controlled, together with a reference
number corresponding with that shown on the Valve varyj ng climatic conditions and varying pattern of
12.1 In the context of this Code, energy conservation a) The nature of the application;
signifies the optimum use of energy to operate the air b) The type of construction of building;
conditioning, heating and ventilation system of a building. c) External and internal load patterns;
d) The desired space conditions;
12.2 It is axiomatic that general standards of comfort
or specific environmental requirements within the e) Permissible control limits;
building should not be compromised in an endeavour f) Control methods for minimizing use of
to achieve lower consumption of energy. Similarly primary energy;
nothing in this Code overrides regulations related to Opportunities for heat recovery;
g)
health and safety.
h) Economic factors (including probable future
12.3 Considerations for Energy Conservation and cost and availability of fuel).
Management j) Opportunity for optimizing electrical installation
and energy conservation by using thermal
12.3.1 Energy Targets
energy storage.
For the purpose of assessing energy conservation
12.3.6 The operation of the system for the following
efficiency of one system design against another, or in
conditions has to be considered when assessing the
an existing building comparing one period of energy
use against another, target consumption may be complete design:
established. a) in summer;
12.3.2 Demand Targets b) in winter;
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 41
wire or a thin metallic element whose ventilating systems, for example a ‘paddle-
resistance increases with temperature and blade’ type of air flow switch may be
varies in a known manner. RTDs are interlocked with an electric heater battery
characterised by their high degree of linearity, to prevent battery from operating and
good sensitivity and excellent stability. RTDs overheating in the event of an air flow failure.
are used with electronic controllers. b) Other elements employed from time-to-time
f) Thermocouple element comprises a junction are measuring smoke density, carbon monoxide
between two dissimilar metals that generates (for example in road traffic tunnels or
a small voltage related to the temperature. underground car parks) and carbon dioxide,
and for flame detection.
12.5.2.2 Humidity devices
12.5.2.5 Controllers
a) These devices have a hydroscopic organic
polymer deposited on a water permeable Controlling elements normally regulate the application
substrate. The polymer film absorbs moisture of either electrical or pneumatic energy. Controllers
until it is in balance with the ambient air. This are mainly of three types: thermostat, humidistats and
causes a change in resistance or capacitance. pressure controllers.
b) Resistance elements, as employed in electronic
12.5.2.6 Thermostats
systems, consist usually of two interleaved
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 43
that an increase in air pressure acts on Remote data collection panels or remote enclosure?
the diaphragm or bellows to move the which act as termination points for the remote ends of
valve stem compress the spring. When the transmission links and for connections to the remote
the air pressure is removed the spring will input and output devices.
return the operator to its normal position.
12.5.2.9.5 Transmission links
12.5.2.9.2 Automatic control dampers
The transmission links provides the means for
Control dampers are designed to control the flow of communication between the central equipment and the
air in a ductwork system in much the same as an remote data collection panel and may be classified
automatic valve operates in a fluid circuit, that is by according to a number of variables, which includes:
varying the resistance to flow. Following are the details
a) Medium (wires or cables, telephone lines,
of various damper valves and damper operators:
micro wave);
a) Damper valves b) Transmission mode (one direction only, one
1) The single blade damper is generally direction at a time, etc);
restricted to small sizes since it does not c) Data sequence (series, for 2-wire, parallel for
provide accurate control. When fitted in multi-conductor etc);
circular ductwork it may be referred to
d) Wire or cable types;
as a butterfly damper.
f) Required accessories or fittings. High pressure air duct system should also be tested in
NOTE — These common factors, should only be used accordance with the procedures.
!
as a general guide, and control manufacturers should
be consulted in establishing exact requirements.
13.2.1 Inspection and Testing at Works
12.5.4 Sensing/Measuring Elements The air conditioning system will consist of various
items of equipment produced by various manufacturers.
Sensing and measuring elements frequently form an Each manufacturer should give facilities for the
integral part of a controller and the selection factors to inspection of his equipment during manufacturing and
be considered for this arrangement may be as given on completion, as specified.
in 12.5.3.1. However, a sensor may be designed and
arranged for operation with a remote controller and 13.2.2 Inspection and Testing on Site
other components, in that case some of the more Prior to commissioning, testing, adjusting and
important selection factors for temperature elements, balancing, preliminary checks and charging of the
for example, may be as follows:
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 3 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION 47
simplified line flow and balance diagrams for e) Schedules of mechanical equipment;
the complete installation; f) Test results and test certificates as called for
b) As-built installation drawings; under the contract including any insurance or
c) Operation and maintenance instructions statutory inspection authority certificate;
for equipment, manufacturer’s service g) Copies of guarantee certificates for plant and
maintenance manuals, manufacturer’s spare equipment; and
parts list and spares ordering instructions; h) List of keys, tools and spare parts that are
d) Schedules of electrical equipment; handed over.
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as ‘good practice’ and ‘accepted standards’
(4) 3103:1975 Code of practice for industrial
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The
ventilation (/irst revision)
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may (5) 3315:1994 Specification for evaporative
FOREWORD ... 3
1 SCOPE . .. 5
2 TERMINOLOGY ... 5
3 PLANNING AND DESIGN AGAINST OUTDOOR NOISE ... 8
4 PLANNING AND DESIGN AGAINST INDOOR NOISE ... 11
5 RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS ... 11
6 EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS ... 13
7 HOSPITAL BUILDINGS ... 16
8 OFFICE BUILDINGS ... 18
9 HOTELS AND HOSTELS ... 20
10 INDUSTRL4L BUILDINGS ... 21
11 LABORATORIES AND TEST HOUSES ... 25
FOREWORD
This Section covers the acoustical, sound insulation and noise control requirements in buildings. Emphasis is
laid on planning of buildings vis-a-vis its surroundings to reduce noise and in addition sound insulation aspects
of different occupancies are covered for achieving acceptable noise levels.
This Section was f~st published in 1970 and was subsequently revised in 1983. In the last revision mainly the
following changes were made:
a) The approximate measured noise levels due to various types of traffic (air, rail and road) were given;
and planning and design features of buildings against outdoor noise were elaborated,
b) Impact sound insulation in residential buildings was modified to grade system of impact sound insulation;
a) Large number of important definitions have been added in line with the present international practice of
usage of terms in the field of acoustics, sound insulation and noise control.
b) Under Planning and Design against Outdoor Noise, a new clause on Highway Noise Barrier has been
included.
c) The clause on public address system has been deleted.
d) A new clause on cinema has been added.
e) Existing Appendix A ‘Constructional Measures for Sound Insulation of Buildings’ and Appendix B
‘Sound Insulation Values for Various Types of Materials and Construction’ have been deleted and the
following new informative annexes have been added:
1) Annex A Noise Calculations
2) Annex B Specification of Sound Insulation
3) Annex C Noise Rating
4) Annex D Outdoor Noise Regulations in India
5) Annex E Special Problems Requiring Expert Advice
6) Annex F Airborne and Impact Sound Insulation
7) Annex G Basic Design Techniques for Noise Control in Air Conditioning, Heating and Mechanical
Ventilation System
8) Annex H Suggested Equipment Noise Data Sheet
There are two types of noises, that is, air-borne and structure-borne noise. To reduce the intensity of air-borne
noise, sound absorbent materials may be used.
An absorbent material is one which reduces the intensity of sound reflected from its surface. It may be applied to
walls, floors, ceilings or used as furnishings to reduce the sound level by absorption. However, the materials
selected for sound absorption shall be consistent with fire safety requirements of the buildings.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS. SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 3
r
To reduce the transmission of air-borne noise, sound insulating materials maybe used. Sound insulating materials
block the passage of noise through them by virtue of their mass and physical properties. The extent of noise
reduction provided by a single homogeneous panel is proportional to the logarithm of mass per unit area. For
high values of sound insulation, normally heavy panels are required. Thin sheets of materials do not have adequate
mass for providing any appreciable sound transmission loss by themselves. However, when thin sheet materials
are used in a double panel construction with an intervening air cavity, this special construction can give extremely
high sound transmission loss values considering the mass of the partition, if designed properly. Porous materials
lack the mass required to provide any appreciable sound transmission loss, and readily allow sound at most
frequencies to be transmitted through them.
To reduce the transmission of structure-borne noise (such as, noise generated by impacts) special construction
methods and elastic discontinuity in the structure may be used. Structure-borne noise reduction is effected by
corner joints, changes in cross-section, changes in materials, etc, in construction. The reduction by these
construction methods is, however, not appreciable specially when a large amount of noise reduction is required
over a short distance. In such cases, introduction of an elastic discontinuity in the structure can result in a very
large amount of noise reduction. The noise transmission is affected only above a certain lower frequency which
depends on the material thickness and the elastic properties of the material. Bonded fibrous materials, rubber
elastomers, cork, etc, are suitable for curtailing structure-borne noise transmission.
In this revision, opportunity has been taken to update all references to relevant Indian Standards referred to in the
text.
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
where
where
PA = is theA-weighted sound pressure in pascals
(Pa); and PA(O = is the instantaneous A-weighted sound
pressure in pascals (Pa); and
P,, = is the reference sound pressure (2o p pa).
P. = is the reference sound pressure (20p Pa).
NOTE — Measurements of A-weighted sound pressure level
can bc made with a meter and correlate roughly with NOTE — Equivalent continuous A-weighted sound pressure
subjective assessments of loudness, and are usually made to level is mainly used for the assessment of environmental noise
assist in judging the effects of noise on people. The and occupational noise ex@sure.
size of A-weighting in 1/3 octave bands, is shown in
Annex A (see A-5). An increase or decrease in level of 2.13 Equivalent Sound Absorption Area of a Room,
10 dBA corresponds roughly to a doubling or halving of
A — Hypothetical area of a totally absorbing surface
loudness.
without diffraction effects, expressed in square metres
2.5 Background Noise — The sound pressure levels (m2) which, if it were the only absorbing element in
in a given environment from all sources excluding a the room, would give the same reverberation time as
specific sound source being investigated or measured. the room under consideration.
2.6 Break-in — Unwanted sound transmission into a 2.14 Facade Level — Sound pressure level measured
duct from outside. 1 m to 2 m in front of the fagade.
2.7 Break-out — Unwanted sound transmission from NOTE— Facadelevelmeasurementsof LPAare usually 2 dB to
inside a duct to the outside. 3 dB higher than corresponding free-field measurements.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 5
2.15 Free-Field Level — Sound pressure level NOTE — Normalized impact sound pressure level is usually
measured outside, far away from reflecting surfaces. used to characterize the insulation of a floor in a laboratory
against impact sound in a stated frequency band (see Annex B).
NOTE — Measurements made 1.2 m to 1.5 m above the ground
and at least 3,5 m away from other reflecting surfaces are usually 2.25 Octave hand — Band of frequencies in which
regarded m being free-field measurements. To minimize the the upper limit of the band is twice the frequency of
effect of reflections the measuring position should be at least the lower limit.
3.5 m to the side of the reflecting surface (that is, not 3.5 m
from [he reflecting surface in the direction of the source). 2.26 Percentile Level, Lm ~ — A-weighted sound
Estimates of noise from aircraft overhead usually include a pressure level obtained usi’ng time-weighting ‘F’,
correction of 2 dB to allow for reflections from the ground.
which is exceeded for N percent of a specified time
2.16 Frequency — The number of cyclical variations interval.
per unit time. Frequency is generally expressed in
Example:
cycles per second (cps) and is also denoted as Hertz
(Hz). L ~go.l~is the A-weighted level exceeded for 90
percent of 1 h. Percentile levels determined over
2.17 Impact Sound Pressure Level, Z,i — Average
a certain time interval cannot accurately be
sound pressure level in a specific frequency band in a
extrapolated to other time intervals. Time-
room below a floor, when it is excited by a standard
weighting ‘F’ or ‘S’ can be selected on most
tapping machine.
modern measuring instruments and used to
2.19 Insertion Loss (Lm) 2.27 Pink Noise — Sound with an uninterrupted
frequency spectrum and a power which is steady
Insertion loss is generally defined as the difference, in
within frequency band and proportional to centre
decibels, between two sound pressure levels (or power
frequency. An example is constant power level per
levels or intensity levels) which are measured at the
octave band.
same point in space before and after a muffler or any
other noise control device is inserted between the 2.28 Pure Tone — A sound emitted at a single
measurement point and the noise source. frequency.
2.20 Noise — Unwanted sound which may be 2.29 Rating Level, L~r,Tr — Equivalent continuous
hazardous to health, interferes with communications A-weighted sound pressure level of the noise, plus any
or is disturbing. adjustment for the characteristic features of the noise.
2.21 Noise Exposure Forecast (NEF) — The noise NOTE — This definition is used for rating industrial noise,
where the noise is the specific noise from the source under
exposure forecast at any location is the summation of
investigation.
the noise levels in EPN dB from all aircraft types, on
all runways, suitably weighted for the number of 2.30 Reverberation Time, T — Time that would be
operations during day time and night time. required for the sound pressure level to decrease by
60 dB after the sound source has stopped.
2.22 Noise Rating (NR) — Graphical method for
rating a noise by comparing the noise spectrum with a NOTE — Reverberation time is usually measured in octave or
third octave bands. It is not necessary to measure the decay over
family of noise rating curves. the full 60 dB range. The decay measured over the range 5 dB
NOTE — Noise rating is described in Annex C. to 35 dB below the initial level is denoted by TgO,and over the
range 5 dB to 25 dB below the initial level by T20.
2.23 Noise Reduction Co-efilcient (NRC)
2.31 Sound — A vibrational disturbance, exciting
A single figure descriptor of the sound absorption hearing mechanisms, transmitted in a predictable
property of a material. It is the arithmetic mean of the manner determined by the medium through which it
sound absorption co-efficients at 250, 500, 1000 propagates. To be audible the disturbance shall have
and 2000 Hz rounded off to the nearest multiple to fall within the frequency range of 20 Hz to
of 0.05. 20000 Hz.
2.24 Normalized Impact Sound Pressure Level, Ln 2.32 Sound Exposure Level, Lm — Level of a sound,
— Impact sound pressure level normalized for a of 1 s duration, that has the same sound energy as the
standard absorption area in the receiving room. actual noise event considered.
where
Lw =lOlog
{1
—
~o-12
2.43 Standardized Level Difference, Dn~ —
Difference in sound level between a pair of rooms, in
a stated frequency band, normalized to a reverberation
W = Acoustic power in watts. time of 0.5 s.
NOTE — Standardizedlevel difference tafcesaccount of all
By definition, 1 W therefore corresponds to 120 dB soundtransmissionpaths betweenthe rooms (see Annex B).
for Lw.
2.44 Structure Borne Noise — Generation and
2.35 Sound Pressure,p — Root-mean-square value propagation of time dependent motions and forces in
of the variation in air pressure measured in pascals (Pa), solid materials which result in unwanted radiated sound.
above and below atmospheric pressure, caused by the
sound. 2.45 Transient Sound — Sound which is audible for
a limited period of time, for example sound from over
2.36 Sound Pressure Level, Lp — Quantity of sound flight of an airplane.
pressure, in decibels (dB), given by the formula:
2.46 Third Octave Band — Band of frequencies in
LP= 10 log10 (p/pO)* which the upper limit of the band is 2 1’3times the
where frequency of the lower limit.
P = is the root mean square sound pressure in 2.47 Threshold of Hearing — The lowest continuous
pascals (Pa); and sound pressure level which will create an auditory
P<, = is the reference sound pressure (20p Pa). sensation for the average human ear. Any sound below
NOTE — The range of sound pressures for ordinary sounds these levels will be inaudible and any sound above the
is very wide. The use of decibels gives a smaller, more threshold will vary in loudness dependent on intensity.
convenient range of numbers. For example, sound pressure
levels ranging from 40 dB to 94 dB correspond to sound 2.48 Vibration Isolation — Reduction of force or
pressures ranging from 0.002 Pa to 1 Pa. A doubling of sound displacement transmitted by a vibratory source, often
energy corresponds to an increase in level of 3 dB. attained by use of a resilient mount.
2.37 Sound Receiver — One or more observation 2.49 Wavelength — The length in space of one
points at which sound is evaluated or measured. The complete cycle of a sound wave.
effect of sound on an individual receiver is usually
evaluated by measurements near the ear or close to ~= (Speed of sound) _@
the body. (fi-equency) - (f)
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL
2.50 Weighted Level Difference, DW — Single- survey should examine all the possible causes of noise
number quantity that characterizes airborne sound and consider the various factors causing actual nuisance.
insulation between rooms but which is not adjusted to
3.1.2 Noise by night, causing disturbance of sleep, is
reference conditions.
more of nuisance than noise by day. For this reason,
NOTE — Weighted level difference is used to characterize the housing colonies that adjoin areas with heavy traffic
insulation between rooms in a building as they are; values cannot
movement during the night are liable to cause serious
normally be compared with measurements made under other
conditions {see good practice [8-4(1)]]. complaints. Also, the factories that work by night are
liable to cause serious complaints if housing estates
2.51 Weighted Sound Reduction Index, Rw _ Single adjoin them. While planning, care should be taken that
number quantity which characterizes the airborne housing colonies are adequately setback from busy
sound insulating properties of a material or building airports, state and national highways, factories, main
element over a range of frequencies. railway lines and marshaling yards.
NOTE — The weighted sound reduction index is used to
characterize the insulation of a material or product that has been
3.1.3 There are two aspects of defence by planning. The
measured in a laboratory (see Annex B). first is to plan so as to keep the noise at a distance. Under
this aspect comes the separation of housing from traffic
2.52 Weighted Standardized Impact Sound Pressure
noise by interposing buffer zones, and the protection of
Level, L’n~ ~ _ Single number quantity used to
schools and hospitals by green belts, public gardens,
characterize the impact sound insulation of floors over
3.1 General Noise levels of some typi’cal railway traffic are given
in Table 2.
Planning against noise should be an integral part of
town and country planning proposals, ranging from Table 2 Typical Noise LeveIs of Railway Trains
regional proposals to detailed zoning, and three- (Clause 3.2.2)
dimensional layouts and road design within built-up
areas. Noise nuisance should be fully recognized in S1 Type of Train NoiseLevel at 30 ~ Measured
No. on the Side or in the Direction
zoning regulations. of Trs@ dkt(k)
3.1.1 Noise is either generated by traffic (road, rail and (1) (2) (3)
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 9
3.4.2.1 Wherever possible, no residential or public lights, near bus stops, on steep slopes and in parking
building zone should abut onto railway lines, especially spaces and enclosed yards.
on the marshaling yards which is particularly
3.4.3.3 For zoning and planning new buildings in
objectionable because of the shrill, clanging and
urban areas it is recommended that external LAIOis
intermittent noise they generate, often at night. The
limited to a maximum of 70 dB(A) when the dwellings
appropriate zones along side railway lines are industrial
are proposed to have sealed windows and 60 dB(A)
and commercial buildings other than office buildings.
when the dwellings are proposed to have open
Where these precautions are not practicable and
windows. Indeed it is desirable to confine major new
housing has to abut on to railway lines, every attempt
residential development to locations subject to L~10
may be made to house as few people as possible in the
levels substantially lower than those given above.
vicinity of the railway lines.
It is recognized, however, that within the large urban
3.4.2.2 Underground transportation system can be a
areas, the use of sites where the external LAIOis greater
major cause of disturbance for the neighboring
than 60-70 dB(A) can not always be avoided. In that
community. Very high noise levels are propagated to
case it is suggested to utilize such design solutions as
long distances by the underground high speed railway,
barrier blocks in order to reduce external L~10 noise
as a result of wheel rail interaction. Both air-borne noise
levels to at least 60-70 dB(A) at any point 1.0 m from
and ground or structure-borne vibration are potential
any inward looking faqade. When the orientation of
sources of complaints. Noise control measures,
site and the density of development are such that this
thick belts of planting (greater than 30 m) are of real (1) (2) (3)
value. Strong leafy trees may be planted to act as noise i) Auditoria andconcert halls 20-25
baffles. Shrubs or creepers may also be planted for ii) kdiO and ~ StUdiOS 20-25
iii) Cinemas 25-30
additional protection between tree trunks; artificial iv) Music rooms 25-30
mounds and banks should be formed where practicable. v) Hoapi,,s audcinema theatres 35-40
As little hard paving and as much grass as possible vi) Apartments,hotels and hotncs 35-40
vii) conference rooms, small offices and 35-40
may be used. The creation of green belt is particularly
likxaries
advisable on the perimeter of aerodromes, along viii) Courtmoms and classrooms 40-45
railway lines and arterial roads, through or past built- ix) Large public offices, banksand stores 45-50
up areas and adjoining noisy industrial zones. x) Restauranta 50-55
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 11
blaring loud-speakers and various types of moving 5.2.2 Internal Planning
machinery in the neighborhood ‘and buildin~
The orientation of buildings in a locality should be
operations.
planned in such a way as to reduce the noise
5.1.2 Indoor Noise disturbance from neighborhood areas. The non-
critical areas, such as corridors, kitchens, bathrooms,
5.1.2.1 As far as indoor noises are concerned,
elevators and service spaces may be located on the
conversation of the occupants, footsteps, banging of
noisy side and the critical areas, such as bedrooms and
doors, shifting of the furniture, operation of the cistern
living space, on the quiet side.
and water closet, playing of radio, television, music
system, cooling and ventilation machinery, etc, 5.2.2.1 Windows and doors
contribute most of the noise emanating from an
Windows and doors should be kept away from the
adjacent room or an adjacent building. Noise
noisy side of the building as given below, wherever
conditions vary from time-to-time and noise which may
possible:
not be objectionable during the day may assume
annoying proportions in the silence of the night when a) When windows of a building, particularly
quiet conditions are essential. those of bedrooms in apartments or flats, face
roads carrying heavy traffic or other noises
5.1.2.2 In the case of flats the main sources of noise
where the external noise is of the order of 80
are frotn other flats and from stairs, lifts and access
PART S BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 13
which produce continuous or intermittent e) Open planning and circulation areas —
sound of considerable loudness; Where open planning is used to permit
f) Practical work carried out in general teaching spaces, such as assembly halls, dining rooms
areas; or entrance halls to be used in association
with each other or for circulation, the degree
!9 Gymnasia and swimming pools;
of disturbance caused by interfering noise
h) School kitchens and dining spaces where food
to teaching areas needs careful consideration;
preparation and the handling of crockery and
traffic through such areas should be strictly
utensils persist for the greater part of the
controlled; full use should be made of
school day;
sound absorbent treatments to reduce the
j) Corridors and other circulation spaces; and spread of noise from one space to another
k) Plumbing and mechanical services. (see 6.2.3).
6.2 Recommendations If rooms have large glazed panels or ventilation
openings facing directly on the circulation
6.2.1 Site Planning areas, human traffic passing by the rooms
Where outdoor noise nuisance exists from local should be controlled. Preferably baffled
industry, busy roads, railway, a.irfklds, sport grounds ventilation system or double windows should
or other sources beyond the control of the school be used. (Fan-lights over doors should be
6.2.1.2 Noises arising from the activities of a school 6.2.3 Noise Reduction within Rooms :
?-
and from the use of the buildings after school hours Sound absorbent materials play a useful part in
may constitute a nuisance to occupants of surrounding reducing the built-up or air-borne noise at source. In
property; therefore, it is desirable to place playgrounds, rooms, such as, classrooms, assembly halh and music
workshops, swimming pools, music rooms, assembly rooms, a fairly short reverberation time underoccupied
halls and gymnasia as far away as possible from conditions is one of the requirements of the acoustic
buildings which require a quiet environment. design. The maximum reverberation times permissible
6.2.2 Internal Planning for this purpose are usually short enough to give
adequate noise control but in addition, the reverberation
The following principles should be observed in the time should not be excessive under empty conditions,
detailed planning of educational buildings: because noise may occur in these rooms with very few
a) Grouping — Noisy rooms should be separated occupants. Table 6 gives the reverberation times often
from quiet ones, if possible. In general, it is arranged in occupied rooms for acoustic reasons and
desirable that rooms should be grouped the maximum times recommended in the empty rooms
together in accordance with the classification for noise reduction; the times given are for a frequency
given in 6.2.4.1. of 500 Hz, but they should not be greatly exceeded at
b) Windows and ventilators — Windows of noisy any frequency. When moms axe used for a variety of
and quiet rooms should not open on to the purposes, the reverberation period appropriate to the
same courtyard or be near to one another. major use should be adopted.
Roof lights and ventilators over noisy rooms 6.2.3.1 Special attenti6% should be given to noise
should be avoided, if they are likely to be a reduction in schools for the deaf and schools for the
source of nuisance to adjacent upper floors. blind. Deaf children are taught by means of hearing
c) Doors — Swing doors into rooms should aids which cannot be used satisfactorily in high noise
only be used where no problem of sound levels or in reverberant conditions. Blind children
transmission exists. Reduction of insulation depend on good hearing for understanding speech and
between rooms and corridors due to doors for detecting changes in environment. In both these
must be borne in mind. The type and method types of schools, noise levels should be kept low and
of fitting of doors is important and necessary reverberation times short. As an example, the
care shall be paid in this respect. reverberation times in empty class-rooms should
d) Sliding partitions should only be used where not exceed one second in schools for the blind or
essential. 0.5 second in schools for the deaf.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 15
immediately above the teaching rooms shall provide 2) Sterilizing eqnipment;
an impact sound pressure level, L’., ~Wnot greater than 3) Sluice room equipment including bedpan
70 dB. For example, a covering of 6 mm linoleum or washers;
cork tiles on concrete floor (hollow or solid) weighing 4) Ward kitchen equipment
not less than 220 kg/m2 will usually meet the above
5) Footsteps;
requirement.
6) Doors banging;
7 HOSPITAL BUILDINGS 7) The handling of metal or glass equipmen~
7-3.2.2 The kitchen is a constant source of both air- a) It is recommended that walls or partitions
borne and structure-borne noise and should preferably between rooms should normally have a RWof
be in a separate building away from or screened from at least 40 dB. Higher values of RWof at least
the sensitive areas. If this is not possible and the main 45 dB are necessary where a noisy room is
kitchens must form part of a multi-storey building, adjacent to one requiring quiet conditions.
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES — SECTION 4 ACOUSTICS. SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL 17
with a perforated sheet metal facing can be used in the problems cannot be resolved by planning, the
most areas requiring a washable acoustical treatment. provision of double windows maybe necessary.
In noisy areas, such as corridors and waiting rooms,
8.3.2 Detailed Planning
however, a wider choice of absorbents is available.
8.3.2.1 Noise reduction within rooms
In the ward, bed curtains, window curtain etc, add
to the absorbent properties of the room and help The reverberation time should not exceed 1.0s in all
reduce reverberation in otherwise hard surfaced general offices of the types listed in 8.3.2.2 to 8.3.2.6.
surroundings. In small private offices, the reverberation time should
not exceed 0.75 second, in very large offices the
7.3.5 Sensitive areas such as operation theatres, reverberation time may be increased to 1,25 s. For
Doctors’ consultation rooms, intensive care units (ICU) canteens, the recommended maximum reverberation
require special consideration against noise control, time is 1.25 s.
Apart from outdoor noise, a common problem is the
transmission of sound between the consulting room 8.3.2.2 Lurge general ofices
and the waiting room. To ensure silence, a sound The grouping of departments and machines together
isolation DWof 45 dB (A), between the rooms shall be in one room should be avoided wherever possible.
provided. If the doors are directly connected by a single Where supervision is necessary the provision of glazed
communicating door it will not be possible to achieve screens carried up to the ceiling should be considered.
Modern office buildings are often noisier than older NOTE — A quiet area should be planned for prolonged
buildings due to the use of thinner and more rigid forms telephonic conversation.
of construction, harder finishes, more austere 8.3.2.3 Light weight construction
furnishings and use of business machines.
Modem construction methods and economy dictate the
8.2 Sources of Noise Nuisance use of light weight construction for many office
buildings. While the light weight materials lead to fast
8.2.1 Indoor Noise fabrication and erection and also effect considerable
Main sources of indoor noise include the following: economy in the building structure, they may lead to
tremendous sound insulation problems between
a) Office machines, such as typewriters, and adjacent offices and areas. Light weight construction
printers; is also frequently employed for the sub-division of
b) Telephonic conversation; large space into executive cabins and secretarial areas.
c) Noise from the public admitted to the building; Where sucti construction is considered desirable,
d) Footsteps, voices and slamming of doors in efforts should be made to provide a double-skin panel.
circulation spaces, lift doors and gates; The panels should be isolated from each other as far
e) Sound reproduction in staff training rooms, as possible either by the use of separate framing or by
conference rooms and recreation rooms, etc; the use of elastic discontinuities in the construction,
and a sound absorbing m~erial may be introduced in
f) Handling of crockery and utensils in canteeps
the air cavity between the’panel. The partitions should
and kitchens; and
be full height up to the bottom of the roof above and
g) HVAC and lift machine~. any openings required for air movement should be
provided with sound attenuators compatible with the
8.3 Recommendations
rest of the partition.
8.3.1 Site Planning
When light weight floors are provided in multi-use
Rooms demanding quiet conditions should be placed on buildings, adequate attention shall be paid to the
the quiet side of the site. Even on quiet thoroughfares, question of air-borne and structure-borne noise
these rooms should also not be planned at street level. transmission from the upper floors to the floors below.
They should also not be planned on enclosed yards used For effective reduction of air-borne noise, a double
for the parking of cars, scooters, etc. Where, however, panel hollow floor construction may be employed with